PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Self Service

PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Self Service
PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Self Service
May 2017
PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Self Service
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions
on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted
in your license agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast,
modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any
means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of this software, unless required by law for
interoperability, is prohibited.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free.
If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing.
If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it
on behalf of the U.S. Government, then the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS: Oracle programs, including any operating system, integrated
software, any programs installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, delivered to U.S. Government
end users are "commercial computer software" pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation
and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, use, duplication, disclosure, modification,
and adaptation of the programs, including any operating system, integrated software, any programs
installed on the hardware, and/or documentation, shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions
applicable to the programs. No other rights are granted to the U.S. Government.
This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management
applications. It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including
applications that may create a risk of personal injury. If you use this software or hardware in dangerous
applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe, backup, redundancy, and
other measures to ensure its safe use. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any
damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications.
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks
of their respective owners.
Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. All SPARC trademarks
are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc.
AMD, Opteron, the AMD logo, and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Advanced Micro Devices. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information about content,
products, and services from third parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and
expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third-party content, products, and services
unless otherwise set forth in an applicable agreement between you and Oracle. Oracle Corporation and its
affiliates will not be responsible for any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of
third-party content, products, or services, except as set forth in an applicable agreement between you and
Oracle.
Documentation Accessibility
For information about Oracle's commitment to accessibility, visit the Oracle Accessibility Program
website at http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=docacc.
Access to Oracle Support
Oracle customers that have purchased support have access to electronic support through My Oracle
Support. For information, visit http://www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=info or visit http://
www.oracle.com/pls/topic/lookup?ctx=acc&id=trs if you are hearing impaired.
Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................xvii
Understanding the PeopleSoft Online Help and PeopleBooks.......................................................... xvii
PeopleSoft Hosted Online Help...................................................................................................xvii
Locally Installed Help..................................................................................................................xvii
Downloadable PeopleBook PDF Files.........................................................................................xvii
Common Help Documentation................................................................................................... xviii
Field and Control Definitions..................................................................................................... xviii
Typographical Conventions.........................................................................................................xviii
ISO Country and Currency Codes................................................................................................ xix
Region and Industry Identifiers.................................................................................................... xix
Translations and Embedded Help.................................................................................................. xx
Using and Managing the PeopleSoft Online Help............................................................................... xx
PeopleSoft CS Related Links............................................................................................................... xx
Contact Us.............................................................................................................................................xx
Follow Us.............................................................................................................................................xxi
Chapter 1: Getting Started with PeopleSoft Campus Self Service.......................................................23
Campus Self Service Overview............................................................................................................23
Campus Self Service Business Processes.............................................................................................23
Campus Self Service Implementation.................................................................................................. 26
Additional Information for Getting Started with Self Service............................................................. 26
Chapter 2: Setting Up Self-Service Navigation...................................................................................... 29
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation..................................................................................................... 29
Page Used to Define Tabs for Self-Service Applications..............................................................29
Defining Tabs for Self-Service Applications................................................................................. 30
Setting up the Enrollment Tab for Student Records Self Service..................................................33
Chapter 3: Setting Up Type Control....................................................................................................... 37
Setting Up Type Control.......................................................................................................................37
Page Used to Set Up Type Control............................................................................................... 37
Setting Type Controls.....................................................................................................................37
Chapter 4: Setting Up Student Records Self-Service.............................................................................39
Understanding Self-Service Enrollment Error Messaging Setup......................................................... 39
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Student Records........................................................................ 39
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Features for Student Records................................................ 40
Defining Student Records Setup.................................................................................................... 42
Defining Other Student Record Self-Service Options................................................................... 45
Setting Up Weekly Schedule Time Periods................................................................................... 47
Setting Up Self-Service Graduation Application and Tracking.....................................................48
Defining a Name Type Display..................................................................................................... 51
Configuring Name Display Rules.................................................................................................. 52
Setting Up Self-Service Graduation Options................................................................................. 54
Setting Up Other Graduation Options........................................................................................... 55
Displaying Class Schedules in Fluid User Interface......................................................................56
Displaying Meeting Schedules in Fluid User Interface................................................................. 56
Displaying Instructor Contact Information in Fluid User Interface...............................................57
Setting Up a Self-Service Student Center............................................................................................ 58
Understanding Defining Student Center Setup Options................................................................ 58
Page Used to Set Up a Self-Service Center.................................................................................. 58
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
v
Contents
Defining Self-Service Student Center Setup Options.................................................................... 59
Chapter 5: Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface........................................... 65
Understanding Class Search for Fluid User Interface..........................................................................65
Deploying and Configuring Elasticsearch............................................................................................ 65
Configuring PeopleSoft Search Framework for Class Search in Fluid................................................66
Configuring Facets......................................................................................................................... 66
Deploying Search Definitions........................................................................................................ 67
Configuring Class Search Options for Fluid........................................................................................ 68
Pages Used to Configure Class Search Options for Fluid.............................................................69
Setting Up Class Search and Enrollment for Fluid User Interface................................................70
Setting Up Class Filter Options in Fluid User Interface............................................................... 73
Checking Time Conflicts in Class Options for Fluid User Interface.............................................76
Building Indexes for Class Search....................................................................................................... 76
Pages Used to Build the Index for Class Search........................................................................... 77
Determining When to Run Build Processes for Maintenance....................................................... 78
Running Class Search Index Pre-Processing................................................................................. 79
Running a Full Build for Class Search Index................................................................................81
Running an Incremental Build for Class Search Index................................................................. 82
Scheduling an Incremental Build...................................................................................................82
Removing Favorites and Recently Viewed Classes from Class Search.........................................84
Chapter 6: Setting Up Student Financials Self Service......................................................................... 85
Prerequisites for Setting Up Student Financials Self Service.............................................................. 85
Setting Up Payment Merchants............................................................................................................ 85
Setting Up SF Merchants..................................................................................................................... 86
Setting Up Institution Sets....................................................................................................................86
Understanding Institution Sets....................................................................................................... 86
Pages Used to Set Up Institution Sets........................................................................................... 87
Defining Basic Institution Set Parameters..................................................................................... 88
Defining Self-Service ePayments for Institution Sets................................................................... 97
Defining Self-Service Business Units for Institution Sets...........................................................113
Setting Up Self-Service Options.........................................................................................................118
Page Used to Set Up Self-Service Options................................................................................. 118
Defining Business Unit Labels.................................................................................................... 119
Setting Up Miscellaneous Fees...........................................................................................................119
Pages Used to Set Up Miscellaneous Fees.................................................................................. 120
Setting Up a Purchase Category.................................................................................................. 120
Setting Up Purchase Items........................................................................................................... 121
Enabling Self-Service Miscellaneous Purchases..........................................................................123
Chapter 7: Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service................................................................................125
Understanding Campus Self Service for Financial Aid..................................................................... 125
Setting Up Self-Service Inquiry Options............................................................................................125
Page Used to Set Up Self-Service Inquiry Options.....................................................................125
Defining Self-Service Options..................................................................................................... 126
Setting Up Self-Service Awarding Options........................................................................................130
Page Used to Set Up Self-Service Awarding Options................................................................. 130
Defining Self-Service Awarding Options.....................................................................................131
Enabling Student Access to Reporting of External Awards........................................................ 134
Setting Up FE FAN View and Print Options..................................................................................... 134
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 135
Pages Used to Set Up FE FAN View and Print Options............................................................. 135
Setting Up Loan Options.................................................................................................................... 135
vi
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Contents
Pages Used to Set Up Loan Options........................................................................................... 136
Displaying Lender Selection........................................................................................................ 137
Defining Self-Service Lenders..................................................................................................... 138
Controlling the Display of Loan Counseling Links.....................................................................139
Defining General Loan Information.............................................................................................140
Setting up Options for eMPN Processes......................................................................................140
Setting Up Satisfactory Academic Progress Self-Service Options.....................................................141
Page Used to Set Up Satisfactory Academic Progress Options...................................................141
SAP Options for Self-Service...................................................................................................... 141
Setting Up Disbursement Options...................................................................................................... 142
Page Used to Set Up Disbursement Options............................................................................... 142
Disbursement Options.................................................................................................................. 142
Setting Up Self-Service Actions and Access in Packaging................................................................144
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Actions and Access in Packaging........................................144
Defining Self-Service Actions in Packaging............................................................................... 145
Defining Self-Service Access in Packaging.................................................................................146
Changing Award and Inquiry Access.......................................................................................... 147
Modifying Self-Service Loan Status Descriptions............................................................................. 148
Page Used to Modify Self-Service Loan Status Descriptions..................................................... 148
Modifying Loan Status Descriptions........................................................................................... 148
Creating User-Defined Text................................................................................................................149
Defining Custom Text for Fluid Interfaces..................................................................................149
Chapter 8: Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service.........................................................151
Setting Up Application Status and Checklist Options....................................................................... 151
Pages Used to Set Up Application Status and Checklist Options............................................... 151
Setting Applicant Status and Checklist Options.......................................................................... 152
Defining Attributes for the Applicant Fluid Self Service Page................................................... 154
Defining Display Options for the Applicant Fluid Self Service Page......................................... 156
Defining Additional Options for the Applicant Fluid Self Service Page.....................................159
Understanding Self-Service Request Information.............................................................................. 160
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 160
Setting Up Self-Service Request Information.................................................................................... 161
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Request Information............................................................161
Enabling Segments and Prospect Career Fields.......................................................................... 162
Setting Up Institution and Career Parameters..............................................................................164
Chapter 9: Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service................................................................. 167
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement............................................................ 167
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement.................................... 167
Defining Academic Advisement Setup........................................................................................ 168
Defining Note Categories.............................................................................................................170
Defining Note Subcategories........................................................................................................170
Defining Self-Service Installation Settings........................................................................................ 170
Page Used to Define Self-Service Installation Settings...............................................................171
Installing Self-Service Academic Advisement............................................................................ 171
Chapter 10: Setting Up Campus Mobile............................................................................................... 175
Campus Mobile Licensing.................................................................................................................. 175
Understanding Campus Mobile Technology...................................................................................... 175
Getting Started With Campus Mobile................................................................................................ 175
Setting Up Campus Mobile Within Campus Solutions......................................................................177
Understanding Campus Mobile Setup......................................................................................... 177
Page Used to Set Up Campus Mobile Within Campus Solutions............................................... 178
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
vii
Contents
Setting Up Integration Broker for Campus Mobile..................................................................... 178
Activating Campus Mobile Service Operations, Handlers, and Routings................................... 178
Manually Generating Routings for Service Operations...............................................................180
Setting Up Logging for Troubleshooting.....................................................................................181
Setting Up Campus Mobile Security........................................................................................... 182
Securing List of Values (LOV) Services..................................................................................... 183
Adding Security Access to the Campus Mobile Service Operations...........................................184
Setting Up Instructor Contact Info...............................................................................................185
Setting Up Finances..................................................................................................................... 186
Setting Up Contributions..............................................................................................................186
Setting Up Applications............................................................................................................... 186
Customizing and Branding Campus Mobile................................................................................187
Deploying Campus Mobile.......................................................................................................... 187
Defining and Setting Up Event Notifications for Campus Mobile.................................................... 187
Understanding Notifications and Events......................................................................................187
Understanding Batch Notifications Setup.................................................................................... 188
Pages Used to Define and Set Up Event Notifications for Campus Mobile................................189
Performing General Event Setup................................................................................................. 189
Performing General Notification Setup....................................................................................... 190
Setting Up Checklist Events with Notifications.......................................................................... 193
Setting Up SI Add Events with Notifications..............................................................................194
Setting Up SI Removed Events with Notifications..................................................................... 196
Setting Up Enrollment Appointment Events with Notifications..................................................197
Creating a Job Definition............................................................................................................. 199
Scheduling Jobs............................................................................................................................ 199
Setting Up an Events Archive......................................................................................................200
Setting Up Push Notifications......................................................................................................201
Chapter 11: Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information..........................................................203
Understanding PeopleSoft Campus Self-Service Personal Information.............................................203
Displaying and Accessing Self-Service Personal Data...................................................................... 203
Pages Used to Display and Access Self-Service Personal Data.................................................. 204
Setting Data to Display on the Personal Data Summary Page.................................................... 204
Accessing Personal Data.............................................................................................................. 204
Configuring Profile Information for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface............................................... 205
Pages Used to Configure Profile Information for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.....................205
Defining Personal Details.............................................................................................................205
Configuring Names, Contact Details, and Addresses.................................................................. 206
Configuring Ethnicity................................................................................................................... 206
Configuring Privacy Restrictions................................................................................................. 207
Defining Text Catalogs.................................................................................................................207
Using Self-Service User Preferences..................................................................................................208
Page Used for Self-Service User Preferences..............................................................................208
Using My Preferences in PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface................................................................ 208
Pages Used to Set Up My Preferences........................................................................................ 208
Using Campus Preferences...........................................................................................................209
Using Self-Service Addresses, Names, Phones, and Demographic Data...........................................209
Pages Used for Self-Service Addresses, Names, Phones, and Demographic Data...................... 210
Using Self-Service Personal Attributes Data..................................................................................... 213
Pages Used for Self-Service Personal Attributes.........................................................................213
Entering Ethnicity Data................................................................................................................214
Using Self-Service Identification Data...............................................................................................215
viii
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Contents
Page Used for Self-Service Identification Data........................................................................... 216
Using Self-Service Participation Data................................................................................................ 216
Pages Used for Self-Service Participation Data.......................................................................... 216
Entering Other Self-Service Biographical Data................................................................................. 218
Pages Used to Enter Other Self-Service Biographical Data........................................................ 219
Using Self-Service Service Indicators Data....................................................................................... 219
Pages Used for Self-Service Service Indicators Data..................................................................220
Using Self-Service Checklists Data....................................................................................................220
Pages Used for Self-Service Checklists Data.............................................................................. 221
(AUS) Accessing USI Information.....................................................................................................221
Page Used to Access USI Information........................................................................................ 222
Verifying a Unique Student Identifier..........................................................................................222
Chapter 12: Using Self-Service Student Recruiting............................................................................. 223
Using Self-Service Student Recruiting for Recruiting and Admissions.............................................223
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 223
Pages Used for Self-Service Student Recruiting for Recruiting and Admissions........................223
Chapter 13: Using Self-Service Student Admissions............................................................................225
Requesting Information.......................................................................................................................225
Understanding Self-Service Request Information........................................................................225
Pages Used to Request Information.............................................................................................226
Accepting or Declining Admission.................................................................................................... 226
Pages Used to Accept or Decline Admission.............................................................................. 227
Viewing Application Status................................................................................................................ 228
Page Used View Application Status............................................................................................ 228
Viewing Application Status..........................................................................................................228
Accessing Applicant Self Service Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface........................................ 229
Pages Used to Access Applicant Self Service Using the PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.......... 229
Chapter 14: Using Student Center.........................................................................................................231
Understanding Self-Service Student Center....................................................................................... 231
Using Self-Service Student Center..................................................................................................... 232
Page Used to Use Self-Service Student Center........................................................................... 232
Chapter 15: Using Faculty Center......................................................................................................... 233
Understanding the Self-Service Faculty Center................................................................................. 233
Using the Self-Service Faculty Center............................................................................................... 233
Pages Used for the Self-Service Faculty Center..........................................................................234
Entering Grades Through Self-Service...............................................................................................237
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 237
Pages Used to Enter Grades Through Self Service..................................................................... 237
Entering Grades Through Self Service........................................................................................ 238
Viewing Self-Service Class Rosters................................................................................................... 239
Pages Used to View Self-Service Class Rosters..........................................................................239
Using LMS Authentication.................................................................................................................240
Pages Used for Instructor Self-Service Pages and LMS Authentication..................................... 240
Using the LMS Icon to Access the LMS Website.......................................................................240
Using the Provider Link to Access the LMS Site....................................................................... 241
Chapter 16: Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule........................................................... 243
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule............................................................................. 243
Searching for Classes Using Classic Self-Service Pages................................................................... 243
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 243
Pages Used to Search for Classes Using Self-Service Pages...................................................... 244
Selecting Search Criteria and Searching for Classes................................................................... 245
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
ix
Contents
Reviewing Class Search Results.................................................................................................. 248
Viewing Class Search Details...................................................................................................... 248
Browsing the Course Catalog...................................................................................................... 248
Selecting a Course Offering.........................................................................................................249
Reviewing Course Catalog Details.............................................................................................. 249
Chapter 17: Using Self-Service Academic Planning............................................................................ 251
Prerequisites for Using Self-Service Academic Planning.................................................................. 251
Planning Courses.................................................................................................................................251
Understanding My Planner...........................................................................................................251
Page Used to Plan Courses.......................................................................................................... 252
Maintaining the Enrollment Shopping Cart....................................................................................... 253
Understanding the Shopping Cart................................................................................................ 253
Page Used to Maintain the Course Shopping Cart...................................................................... 253
Viewing Course History......................................................................................................................254
Page Used to View Academic History........................................................................................ 254
Chapter 18: Using Self-Service Academic Services..............................................................................255
Understanding My Academics............................................................................................................255
Using Self-Service My Academics Functionality.............................................................................. 255
Pages Used to Use Self-Service My Academics Functionality................................................... 255
Chapter 19: Using Self-Service Enrollment.......................................................................................... 259
Understanding Self-Service Enrollment............................................................................................. 259
Viewing a Class Schedule.................................................................................................................. 260
Pages Used to View a Class Schedule.........................................................................................260
Adding Classes....................................................................................................................................261
Pages Used to Add Classes..........................................................................................................261
Dropping Classes................................................................................................................................ 261
Pages Used to Drop Classes........................................................................................................ 262
Swapping Classes................................................................................................................................262
Pages Used to Swap Classes........................................................................................................262
Editing Classes.................................................................................................................................... 262
Pages Used to Edit Classes..........................................................................................................263
Viewing Term Information................................................................................................................. 263
Understanding Term Information................................................................................................. 263
Pages Used to View Term Information........................................................................................264
Using LMS Authentication.......................................................................................................... 264
Using the LMS Button to Access the LMS Website................................................................... 265
Managing Classes Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface................................................................ 265
Pages Used to Manage Classes....................................................................................................265
Viewing Classes............................................................................................................................266
Using the Shopping Cart..............................................................................................................267
Searching for Classes................................................................................................................... 267
Dropping Classes..........................................................................................................................267
Updating Classes.......................................................................................................................... 268
Swapping Classes......................................................................................................................... 268
Chapter 20: Using Self-Service Program Enrollment..........................................................................269
Configuring Navigation for Self-Service Program Enrollment..........................................................269
Deploying Homepage Pagelets for Self-Service Program Enrollment...............................................269
Using Program Enrollment Self-Service Features..............................................................................269
Pages Used for Self-Service Program Enrollment.......................................................................270
Chapter 21: Using Self-Service Activity Management.........................................................................271
Managing the Activity Management WorkCenter..............................................................................271
x
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Contents
Understanding the Activity Management WorkCenter................................................................ 271
Pages Used to Manage the Activity Management WorkCenter...................................................271
Managing Student Activities.............................................................................................................. 272
Understanding Self-Service Student Activities............................................................................273
Pages Used to Manage Student Activities................................................................................... 274
Chapter 22: Using Research Tracking Self Service............................................................................. 283
Using Research Tracking Self Service............................................................................................... 283
Understanding the Candidate Center........................................................................................... 283
Understanding Service Requests and Research Service Items.................................................... 285
Initiating a Research Service Item............................................................................................... 285
Creating and Updating Service Requests (Candidates)......................................................................285
Pages Used to Create and Update Service Requests (Candidates).............................................. 286
Administering Service Requests (Administrators)............................................................................. 287
Using Service Request Dashboard............................................................................................... 288
Searching for Research Topics........................................................................................................... 289
Page Used to Search for Research Topics................................................................................... 289
Searching for Research Topics.....................................................................................................290
Chapter 23: Using Delegated Access Self Service................................................................................ 291
Creating a Proxy and Delegating Access........................................................................................... 291
Pages Used to Create a Proxy and Delegate Access................................................................... 291
Using the Share My Information - Summary Page..................................................................... 293
Accepting the Terms and Conditions...........................................................................................294
Providing Proxy Details and Delegating Transactions................................................................ 295
Accessing Delegated Transactions......................................................................................................296
Pages Used to Access Delegated Transactions............................................................................ 296
Accepting or Declining Terms and Conditions............................................................................296
Accessing Delegated Transactions............................................................................................... 297
Chapter 24: Using Self-Service Degree Progress/Graduation............................................................. 299
Viewing the Advisement Transcripts Using Self-Service Pages........................................................ 299
Pages Used to View the Advisement Transcripts Using Self-Service Pages............................... 299
Applying for Graduation Using Self-Service Pages...........................................................................300
Understanding the Self-Service Application Process.................................................................. 300
Prerequisite....................................................................................................................................300
Pages Used to Apply for Graduation Using Self-Service Pages................................................. 300
Chapter 25: Using Student Financials Self Service..............................................................................303
Understanding Student Financials Self Service..................................................................................303
Viewing Outstanding Charges, Payments, Financial Aid, and Refunds.............................................304
Pages Used to View Outstanding Charges, Payments, Financial Aid, and Refunds.................... 305
Viewing an Account Summary.................................................................................................... 306
Viewing Account Activity............................................................................................................306
Viewing Charges Due Details...................................................................................................... 307
Viewing Payment History............................................................................................................ 307
Viewing the Charges Paid by a Payment.....................................................................................307
Viewing Pending Financial Aid................................................................................................... 307
Creating Payment Profiles.................................................................................................................. 308
Understanding Self-Service Payment Profiles............................................................................. 308
Pages Used to Create Self-Service Payment Profiles.................................................................. 309
Adding and Deleting Payment Profiles....................................................................................... 309
Viewing and Editing Payment Profile Details............................................................................. 310
Making Self-Service Payments...........................................................................................................310
Understanding Self-Service Payments......................................................................................... 310
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
xi
Contents
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 312
Pages Used to Make Self-Service Payments............................................................................... 312
Specifying Payment Amounts...................................................................................................... 313
Selecting Payment Methods......................................................................................................... 314
Redirecting to Hosted Payment Site............................................................................................ 314
Specifying Payment Details (Hosted Payment)........................................................................... 314
Specifying Payment Details (Non-Hosted Payment)................................................................... 315
Confirming Payments (Hosted and Non-Hosted Payments)........................................................317
Viewing Successful Payment Results (Hosted and Non-Hosted Payments)................................317
Viewing Declined Payment Results (Hosted and Non-Hosted Payments).................................. 318
Purchasing Miscellaneous Items.........................................................................................................318
Pages Used to Purchase Miscellaneous Items............................................................................. 319
Selecting Items............................................................................................................................. 320
Confirming an Order.................................................................................................................... 320
Making a Payment........................................................................................................................320
Using Account Services......................................................................................................................321
Pages Used for Account Services................................................................................................ 321
Setting Up and Managing Bank Accounts...................................................................................324
Enrolling in Direct Deposit.......................................................................................................... 329
Enrolling in a Payment Plan........................................................................................................ 332
Viewing the 1098-T Form............................................................................................................332
Receiving the 1098-T Form Online............................................................................................. 333
Completing the 1098-T Consent Agreement............................................................................... 334
Receiving the 1098-T Consent Confirmation.............................................................................. 334
Viewing Student Permissions.......................................................................................................334
Selecting the Permission Form.................................................................................................... 334
Granting Permission Using the Form Agreement........................................................................334
Confirming Student Permission................................................................................................... 335
Viewing Student Permission Agreement..................................................................................... 335
Managing Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface..............................................335
Common Elements Used to Manage Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface........................................................................................................................................ 335
Pages Used to Manage Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface................... 336
Viewing Account Summary......................................................................................................... 336
Making Electronic Payments........................................................................................................337
Viewing Charges...........................................................................................................................337
Managing Direct Deposits............................................................................................................338
Viewing Payment History............................................................................................................ 339
Chapter 26: Using Financial Aid Self Service...................................................................................... 341
Understanding Financial Aid Self-Service......................................................................................... 341
Accepting, Declining, and Reducing Awards.....................................................................................341
Pages Used to Accept, Decline, and Reduce Awards..................................................................342
Selecting an Aid Year.................................................................................................................. 342
Accepting, Declining, and Reducing Awards Using Self-Service............................................... 343
Managing Awards Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface................................................................ 346
Common Elements Used to Manage Awards in Fluid Interface..................................................347
Pages Used to Manage Awards using the PeopleSoft Fluid Interface......................................... 347
Selecting an Aid Year.................................................................................................................. 348
Managing Offers and Accepted Awards Using a Smartphone.................................................... 349
Managing Offers and Accepted Awards Using a Tablet or Desktop........................................... 350
Reporting External Awards.................................................................................................................351
xii
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Contents
Understanding Reporting External Awards..................................................................................352
Pages Used to Report External Awards....................................................................................... 352
Printing the FE FAN Letter................................................................................................................ 353
Selecting a Lender.............................................................................................................................. 353
Understanding Lender Selection.................................................................................................. 353
Pages Used to Select and View a Lender.................................................................................... 353
Viewing a Student's Lender Selection Record.............................................................................354
Completing a Loan Counseling Requirement.................................................................................... 354
Understanding a Loan Counseling Requirement......................................................................... 354
Page Used to Complete a Loan Counseling Requirement...........................................................354
Using Entry Points into the Perkins eMPN Process.......................................................................... 355
Understanding Perkins eMPN Functionality................................................................................355
Pages Used as Entry Points into the Perkins eMPN Process.......................................................356
Viewing Perkins Loan Award Details..........................................................................................356
Viewing Perkins Loan Award Summary......................................................................................356
Signing an Electronic Perkins eMPN.................................................................................................357
Pages Used to Sign an Electronic Perkins MPN......................................................................... 357
Reviewing Perkins eMPN Introductory Information...................................................................359
Entering an ID Authentication and Providing Consent............................................................... 359
Verifying Personal Information.................................................................................................... 359
Providing Loan References.......................................................................................................... 359
Reviewing Loan Indebtedness......................................................................................................360
Accepting Borrower Rights and Responsibilities........................................................................ 360
Requesting and Signing a Paper Perkins MPN..................................................................................360
Understanding Paper Perkins MPN Requests..............................................................................360
Pages Used to Request and Sign a Paper Perkins MPN..............................................................361
Viewing a Perkins MPN..................................................................................................................... 361
Pages Used to View a Perkins Promissory Note......................................................................... 361
Using Administrative Requests...........................................................................................................361
Understanding Administrative Requests...................................................................................... 361
Page Used for Administrative Requests...................................................................................... 362
Viewing Student Self-Service Pages by Aid Year..............................................................................362
Understanding Viewing Self-Service Inquiry Pages by Aid Year............................................... 362
Pages Used to View Student Self-Service Pages by Aid Year.................................................... 363
Viewing Student Self-Service Pages by Award Period...................................................................... 364
Pages Used to View Student Self-Service Pages by Award Period............................................. 364
Chapter 27: Using Self-Service Transfer Credit...................................................................................367
Viewing Transfer Credit Reports Through Self-Service Pages..........................................................367
Page Used to View Transfer Credit Reports Through Self-Service Pages.................................. 367
Evaluating Transfer Credit Through Self-Service Pages....................................................................367
Understanding the Self-Service Modeling Transfer Credit Feature.............................................367
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 368
Pages Used to Evaluate Transfer Credit Through Self-Service Pages.........................................368
Chapter 28: Using Academic Advisement Self Service........................................................................373
Prerequisites for Using Academic Advisement Self Service............................................................. 373
Viewing an Advisement Report..........................................................................................................374
Understanding My Academic Requirements............................................................................... 374
Pages Used to View an Advisement Report................................................................................ 375
Searching for Classes by Academic Requirements............................................................................ 376
Understanding Search by My Requirements............................................................................... 376
Pages Used to Search by My Requirements................................................................................377
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
xiii
Contents
Viewing Advisee Information Through Self-Service Pages...............................................................377
Pages Used to View Advisee Information Through Self-Service................................................378
Viewing Self-Service Advisement Transcripts................................................................................... 383
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 383
Pages Used to View Self-Service Advisement Transcripts..........................................................383
Monitoring Academic Progress Using the PeopleSoft Fluid Interface.............................................. 384
Pages Used to Monitor Academic Progress Using the PeopleSoft Fluid Interface......................385
Chapter 29: Using Self-Service Outreach............................................................................................. 387
Understanding PeopleSoft Outreach for Fundraising.........................................................................387
PeopleSoft Outreach Business Processes.....................................................................................387
Creating and Maintaining the My Prospects Workset........................................................................388
Page Used to Create and Maintain the My Prospects Workset................................................... 388
Running the My Prospects Process..............................................................................................388
Assigning Resources to the My Prospects Workset.....................................................................389
Managing an Action Plan................................................................................................................... 390
Pages Used to Manage an Action Plan........................................................................................391
Reviewing Reminders...................................................................................................................391
Viewing Assigned Actions........................................................................................................... 391
Managing Prospect Strategies.............................................................................................................392
Pages Used to Manage Prospect Strategies................................................................................. 392
Selecting a Prospect Name...........................................................................................................392
Editing or Adding a Prospect Strategy........................................................................................ 394
Editing or Adding Prospect Strategy Details...............................................................................394
Linking a Prospect Strategy to Initiatives....................................................................................395
Linking a Prospect Strategy to Actions....................................................................................... 395
Viewing a Prospect Strategy Summary........................................................................................396
Managing Prospect Actions................................................................................................................ 396
Pages Used to Manage Prospect Actions.................................................................................... 397
Selecting a Prospect Name Prior to Managing Prospect Actions................................................ 398
Editing or Adding a Prospect Action...........................................................................................398
Editing or Adding Prospect Action Details................................................................................. 399
(Optional) Editing or Adding Ask Information........................................................................... 399
(Optional) Editing or Adding Prospect Action Descriptions....................................................... 399
Assigning Resources to Prospect Actions....................................................................................400
Linking Prospect Actions to Initiatives........................................................................................400
Viewing a Prospect Action Summary.......................................................................................... 400
Selecting a Prospect Name Prior to Completing an Action.........................................................401
Selecting an Action to Complete................................................................................................. 402
Completing a Prospect Action..................................................................................................... 402
Selecting a Prospect Name Prior to Completing a Contact Report............................................. 402
Entering Contact Report Details.................................................................................................. 403
Viewing a Contact Report Summary........................................................................................... 404
Sending a Contact Report............................................................................................................ 404
Sending Updated Biographical Information................................................................................ 404
Analyzing Prospect Information......................................................................................................... 405
Managing Prospects Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface............................................................. 408
Pages Used to Manage Prospects Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface...................................408
Common Elements Used in Donor Prospects..............................................................................408
Viewing Prospect Information......................................................................................................409
Managing Actions.........................................................................................................................409
Managing Strategies..................................................................................................................... 409
xiv
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Contents
Chapter 30: Using Community Directory Search................................................................................ 411
Understanding Self-Service Community Directory Search................................................................411
Generating Community Directories.................................................................................................... 411
Page Used to Generate Community Directories.......................................................................... 411
Generating Online Directories......................................................................................................411
Searching Community Directories......................................................................................................412
Pages Used to Search the Directories.......................................................................................... 413
Specifying the Directory to Search..............................................................................................413
Searching a Community Directory.............................................................................................. 413
Chapter 31: Using Campus Mobile........................................................................................................415
Accessing Campus Mobile Functionality...........................................................................................415
Pages Used to Access Campus Mobile Functionality................................................................. 415
Logging In...........................................................................................................................................417
Using Springboard.............................................................................................................................. 418
About.............................................................................................................................................419
Holds............................................................................................................................................. 420
Landing Page................................................................................................................................ 420
Using Class Schedule..........................................................................................................................421
Viewing Class Attributes..............................................................................................................422
Mapping to Building Locations of Classes..................................................................................423
Viewing Instructor Contact Information...................................................................................... 423
Dropping Classes..........................................................................................................................424
Viewing Grades and GPA...................................................................................................................424
Searching for Classes in Campus Mobile.......................................................................................... 424
Filtering the Class Search............................................................................................................ 424
Enrolling in a Class......................................................................................................................425
Adding a Class to Cart.................................................................................................................425
Viewing and Managing the Enrollment Cart......................................................................................425
Viewing To Do Items..........................................................................................................................426
Viewing Finances................................................................................................................................ 426
Viewing Financial Aid Awards...........................................................................................................426
Managing a Student Profile................................................................................................................ 426
Understanding Student Profile..................................................................................................... 427
Viewing Applications................................................................................................................... 427
Making Contributions...................................................................................................................427
Understanding Notifications.........................................................................................................427
Chapter 32: Using Self-Service Student Activity Guides.................................................................... 429
Understanding Student Activity Guides............................................................................................. 429
Using Student Task WorkCenter........................................................................................................ 429
Chapter 33: Using Self-Service Notifications........................................................................................431
Managing Notification Preferences in Self Service........................................................................... 431
Page Used to Manage Notification Preferences in Self Service..................................................431
Setting and Updating Self-Service Notification Preferences....................................................... 431
Using the Self-Service Notifications Center...................................................................................... 431
Page Used to View Notifications................................................................................................. 432
Viewing Notifications in the Notifications Center.......................................................................432
Chapter 34: (GBR) Using DLHE Self-Service Survey.........................................................................435
Understanding DLHE Self-Service Survey........................................................................................ 435
Prerequisites.................................................................................................................................. 436
Entering and Submitting the DLHE Survey.......................................................................................436
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
xv
Contents
xvi
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Preface
Understanding the PeopleSoft Online Help and PeopleBooks
The PeopleSoft Online Help is a website that enables you to view all help content for PeopleSoft
Applications and PeopleTools. The help provides standard navigation and full-text searching, as well as
context-sensitive online help for PeopleSoft users.
PeopleSoft Hosted Online Help
You access the PeopleSoft Online Help on Oracle’s PeopleSoft Hosted Online Help website, which
enables you to access the full help website and context-sensitive help directly from an Oracle hosted
server. The hosted online help is updated on a regular schedule, ensuring that you have access to the
most current documentation. This reduces the need to view separate documentation posts for application
maintenance on My Oracle Support, because that documentation is now incorporated into the hosted
website content. The Hosted Online Help website is available in English only.
Note: Only the most current release of hosted online help is updated regularly. After a new release is
posted, previous releases remain available but are no longer updated.
Locally Installed Help
If your organization has firewall restrictions that prevent you from using the Hosted Online Help
website, you can install the PeopleSoft Online Help locally. If you install the help locally, you have more
control over which documents users can access and you can include links to your organization’s custom
documentation on help pages.
In addition, if you locally install the PeopleSoft Online Help, you can use any search engine for fulltext searching. Your installation documentation includes instructions about how to set up Oracle Secure
Enterprise Search for full-text searching. See PeopleTools Installation for your database platform,
“Installing PeopleSoft Online Help.” If you do not use Secure Enterprise Search, see the documentation
for your chosen search engine.
Note: Beginning with PeopleSoft PeopleTools 8.55.11, you can use Elasticsearch as the search engine for
locally installed PeopleSoft Online Help.
See Oracle Support Document 2189508.1 (PeopleTools 8.55.11 Elasticsearch Documentation Home
Page) for more information on using Elasticsearch with PeopleSoft.
Note: Before users can access the search engine on a locally installed help website, you must enable the
Search field. For instructions, select About This Help, Managing Locally Installed PeopleSoft Online
Help, Enabling the Search Button and Field in the Contents sidebar of the online help site.
Downloadable PeopleBook PDF Files
You can access downloadable PDF versions of the help content in the traditional PeopleBook format.
The content in the PeopleBook PDFs is the same as the content in the PeopleSoft Online Help, but it has
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
xvii
Preface
a different structure and it does not include the interactive navigation features that are available in the
online help.
Common Help Documentation
Common help documentation contains information that applies to multiple applications. The two main
types of common help are:
•
Application Fundamentals
•
Using PeopleSoft Applications
Most product families provide a set of application fundamentals help topics that discuss essential
information about the setup and design of your system. This information applies to many or all
applications in the PeopleSoft product family. Whether you are implementing a single application, some
combination of applications within the product family, or the entire product family, you should be familiar
with the contents of the appropriate application fundamentals help. They provide the starting points for
fundamental implementation tasks.
In addition, the PeopleTools: Applications User's Guide introduces you to the various elements of the
PeopleSoft Pure Internet Architecture. It also explains how to use the navigational hierarchy, components,
and pages to perform basic functions as you navigate through the system. While your application or
implementation may differ, the topics in this user’s guide provide general information about using
PeopleSoft Applications.
Field and Control Definitions
PeopleSoft documentation includes definitions for most fields and controls that appear on application
pages. These definitions describe how to use a field or control, where populated values come from, the
effects of selecting certain values, and so on. If a field or control is not defined, then it either requires
no additional explanation or is documented in a common elements section earlier in the documentation.
For example, the Date field rarely requires additional explanation and may not be defined in the
documentation for some pages.
Typographical Conventions
The following table describes the typographical conventions that are used in the online help.
xviii
Typographical Convention
Description
Key+Key
Indicates a key combination action. For example, a plus sign (
+) between keys means that you must hold down the first key
while you press the second key. For Alt+W, hold down the Alt
key while you press the W key.
. . . (ellipses)
Indicate that the preceding item or series can be repeated any
number of times in PeopleCode syntax.
{ } (curly braces)
Indicate a choice between two options in PeopleCode syntax.
Options are separated by a pipe ( | ).
[ ] (square brackets)
Indicate optional items in PeopleCode syntax.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Preface
Typographical Convention
Description
& (ampersand)
When placed before a parameter in PeopleCode syntax,
an ampersand indicates that the parameter is an already
instantiated object.
Ampersands also precede all PeopleCode variables.
⇒
This continuation character has been inserted at the end of a
line of code that has been wrapped at the page margin. The
code should be viewed or entered as a single, continuous line
of code without the continuation character.
ISO Country and Currency Codes
PeopleSoft Online Help topics use International Organization for Standardization (ISO) country and
currency codes to identify country-specific information and monetary amounts.
ISO country codes may appear as country identifiers, and ISO currency codes may appear as currency
identifiers in your PeopleSoft documentation. Reference to an ISO country code in your documentation
does not imply that your application includes every ISO country code. The following example is a
country-specific heading: "(FRA) Hiring an Employee."
The PeopleSoft Currency Code table (CURRENCY_CD_TBL) contains sample currency code data. The
Currency Code table is based on ISO Standard 4217, "Codes for the representation of currencies," and
also relies on ISO country codes in the Country table (COUNTRY_TBL). The navigation to the pages
where you maintain currency code and country information depends on which PeopleSoft applications
you are using. To access the pages for maintaining the Currency Code and Country tables, consult the
online help for your applications for more information.
Region and Industry Identifiers
Information that applies only to a specific region or industry is preceded by a standard identifier in
parentheses. This identifier typically appears at the beginning of a section heading, but it may also appear
at the beginning of a note or other text.
Example of a region-specific heading: "(Latin America) Setting Up Depreciation"
Region Identifiers
Regions are identified by the region name. The following region identifiers may appear in the PeopleSoft
Online Help:
•
Asia Pacific
•
Europe
•
Latin America
•
North America
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
xix
Preface
Industry Identifiers
Industries are identified by the industry name or by an abbreviation for that industry. The following
industry identifiers may appear in the PeopleSoft Online Help:
•
USF (U.S. Federal)
•
E&G (Education and Government)
Translations and Embedded Help
PeopleSoft 9.2 software applications include translated embedded help. With the 9.2 release, PeopleSoft
aligns with the other Oracle applications by focusing our translation efforts on embedded help. We
are not planning to translate our traditional online help and PeopleBooks documentation. Instead we
offer very direct translated help at crucial spots within our application through our embedded help
widgets. Additionally, we have a one-to-one mapping of application and help translations, meaning that
the software and embedded help translation footprint is identical—something we were never able to
accomplish in the past.
Using and Managing the PeopleSoft Online Help
Click the Help link in the universal navigation header of any page in the PeopleSoft Online Help to see
information on the following topics:
•
What’s new in the PeopleSoft Online Help.
•
PeopleSoft Online Help accessibility.
•
Accessing, navigating, and searching the PeopleSoft Online Help.
•
Managing a locally installed PeopleSoft Online Help website.
PeopleSoft CS Related Links
Hosted Online Help Home
PeopleSoft Information Portal
My Oracle Support
Contact Us
Send your suggestions to PSOFT-INFODEV_US@ORACLE.COM. Please include release numbers for
the PeopleTools and applications that you are using.
xx
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Preface
Follow Us
Facebook.
YouTube
Twitter@PeopleSoft_Info.
PeopleSoft Blogs
LinkedIn
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
xxi
Chapter 1
Getting Started with PeopleSoft Campus
Self Service
Campus Self Service Overview
Campus Self Service offers role-based and function-based self-service functionality that enable you to
provide users with self-service access to information and transactions over the internet. You can present
the self-service functionality as delivered or modify it to present specific features that your institution
wants to make available, offering access to the online transactions that your institution's users need and
perform most.
Allowing users to complete transactions by self-service significantly reduces the time that your staff must
spend entering and maintaining administrative data.
Self-service functionality is available through classic or PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
Campus Self Service Business Processes
Campus Self Service business processes are extensions of information and functionality of PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions applications.
Note: For full implementation planning, read all of the setup topics in this documentation, Campus
Solutions Application Fundamentals, and Campus Community Fundamentals. Take advantage of all
PeopleSoft sources of information, including documentation for the individual PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions applications, installation guides, table-loading sequences, data models, and business process
maps.
Campus Self Service enables you to provide self-service functionality from the following familiar
PeopleSoft Campus Solutions applications:
•
Campus Community
Campus Community offers self-service Campus Personal Information and Community Directory
Search.
The Community Directory Search self-service functionality enables you to provide searchable
directories of members of your campus community online over the internet.
Campus Personal Information self-service provides configurable internet access to the following:
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
23
Getting Started with PeopleSoft Campus Self Service
•
•
Names, Addresses, Phone Numbers.
•
Emergency Contacts.
•
Extracurricular Activities.
•
FERPA Privacy Control.
•
Languages.
•
Work Experience.
•
Licenses and Certificate.
•
Publications.
•
Memberships.
•
Honors and Awards.
•
Service Indicators as Holds Lists.
•
Checklists as To Do Lists.
Chapter 1
Recruiting and Admissions:
Recruiting and Admissions provides your users the ability to perform several transactions directly
over the internet.
Recruiting and Admissions self-service provides configurable internet access to the following:
•
•
Visitors can request information from your institution and a particular academic career and
program. When visitors request information over the internet, they enter information about
themselves that the system converts to prospect data.
•
Applicants can accept or decline admission.
•
Applicants can view their application status.
•
Administrators can view prospect and applicant information by category, region, and organization.
Student Records:
Student Records provides students and faculty the ability to perform several transactions directly over
the internet.
Student Records self-service provides students or faculty access to the following:
•
Student Center
A self-service page that provides students a single entry point from which to begin navigation
to student related transactions. The Student Center also presents to students, in one location, the
information that is important to them, such as their class schedule, important dates, to do list, and
account information.
24
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1
Getting Started with PeopleSoft Campus Self Service
•
Student Planner
A self-service page that provides students with a tool to plan their courses for an individual term,
multiple terms, or their entire stay at the institution.
•
Enrollment Shopping Cart
A staging area where students can plan and build their schedules for an upcoming term.
•
Enrollment
Students can add, drop, swap, and edit classes with the help of a step by step wizard feature exists
that guides students through the processes. Students can also view assignments, class and exam
schedules, and enrollment dates, and search for classes and browse the course catalog.
•
Academic Records
Students can view grades, request official transcripts, view unofficial transcripts, view advisor
information, and request enrollment verification.
•
Degree Progress/Graduation
Student can view their degree progress report and apply for graduation.
•
Transfer Credit
Students can model transfer credit and run a transfer credit report.
•
Faculty Center
On the Faculty Center self-service page, instructors can view their class and exam schedules;
search for faculty and classes; browse the course catalog; and access class rosters, grade rosters,
learning management system web sites, and advisee information.
•
Financial Aid:
Financial Aid provides students the ability to perform several transactions directly over the internet.
Financial Aid provides students access to the following:
•
Accept/Decline Awards
Students can accept, decline, or reduce award amounts. They can request a change to their
financial aid, cancel their aid, or request a meeting with a financial aid administrator.
•
View Financial Aid
Students can view their cost of attendance, expected family contribution, total aid, type of award,
loan application status, loan amount, loan fee, and scheduled disbursement data.
•
Student Financials:
Student Financials provides students and faculty the ability to perform several transactions directly
over the internet.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
25
Getting Started with PeopleSoft Campus Self Service
Chapter 1
Student Financials self-service provides students or faculty access to the following:
•
Account Inquiry
Students can view details about their financial account.
•
Payment Profile
Students can create and maintain payment profiles for credit card or eCheck account details.
•
Make a Payment
Students can use the payment wizard to make credit card or eCheck payments to their account.
•
Contributor Relations:
Contributor Relations provides fundraisers with bundled prospect information in Outreach. For
development officers who have responsibility for cultivating prospects and raising funds, Outreach
enables them to access prospect information and giving strategy through a single location.
Outreach self-service functionality provides access to the following:
•
Strategy information—to add, update, and view prospect strategies and link actions to those
strategies. Then users can view strategy summaries and associated actions.
•
Action Plans and Results—to add and update actions, and report results. Users can also view
action and contact report summaries and clearances.
•
To Do Lists—to create individual staff to do lists displaying information about prospects. Then
users can view, sort, and update the lists.
•
Analysis—access to a wide variety of online reports.
Campus Self Service Implementation
If you have licensed and implemented all of PeopleSoft Campus Solutions, then most of the setup
required to implement Campus Self Service is already completed. The additional setup specific to self
service is discussed in this PeopleBook.
Campus Self Service has no PeopleSoft Setup Manager component interfaces.
Additional Information for Getting Started with Self Service
Additional, essential information describing the setup and design of your system appears in two
companion volumes of documentation: Campus Solutions Application Fundamentals documentation and
Campus Community Fundamentals documentation.
See Campus Solutions Application Fundamentals.
26
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 1
Getting Started with PeopleSoft Campus Self Service
See Campus Community Fundamentals.
For information about deferred processing, see "Additional Information for Getting Started with Campus
Solutions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
27
Chapter 2
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Use the Navigation Tabs Setup (SSS_NAV_SETUP) component to define the two-level folder tabs for
self-service applications.
You can change the name and order of the navigational tabs that appear in student Self Service for each of
the functional areas — Campus Community, Faculty Center, Financials and Student Records.
This section discusses how to:
•
Define tabs for self-service applications.
•
Set up the Enrollment tab for Student Records Self Service.
Page Used to Define Tabs for Self-Service Applications
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Navigation Tabs Setup
SSS_NAV_SETUP
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Navigation Tabs, Navigation
Tabs Setup
Define tabs for self-service
applications.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
29
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Chapter 2
Defining Tabs for Self-Service Applications
Access the Navigation Tabs Setup page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Navigation
Tabs, Navigation Tabs Setup).
Image: Navigation Tabs Setup page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Navigation Tabs Setup page (1 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
30
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Image: Navigation Tabs Setup page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Navigation Tabs Setup page (2 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
You can use the Navigation Tabs Setup page to:
•
Change the name of a tab in Self Service (which also changes the Student Center links).
•
Change sequence numbers and set secondary tab defaults to change the order of the tabs and the
secondary tabs.
•
Add additional tabs.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
31
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Chapter 2
The Show sub-navigation check box is selected by default. You might want to clear this check box if you
use only one of the subtabs or pages in a particular area.
Only users with security access to the Navigation Tabs Setup component can configure the tabs.
In Self Service, students can access only the tabs for which they have access to the relevant component.
For example, if course history is a secondary tab under the Plan main tab and a student does not have
access to the SSS_MY_CRSEHIST component, the student cannot see the course history tab.
Here is an example of the self-service Search for Classes page:
Image: Example of the Search for Classes page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Search for Classes page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
You can see how the text in the Message Text fields on the setup page correspond to the tab names in Self
Service.
The Search tab has the lowest sequence number in the Main Tabs group box on the setup page and
therefore appears first in Self Service. Similarly, the search for classes tab appears before the browse
course catalog tab because of the sequencing of the secondary tabs on the setup page.
When students access the Search tab, the search for classes tab appears by default because the Set as
Default check box is selected for that tab on the setup page.
32
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
To change the name of a tab, modify the delivered text in the Message Text field on the Message Catalog
page (PeopleTools, Utilities, Administration, Message Catalog) or add a new message to the message
catalog and associate that message with the tab.
See PeopleTools: System and Server Administration
Note: If you map a component to more than one navigation path, you receive a warning message
indicating that duplicate navigation entries exist for the component. You can save the settings, but the
first navigation path to which a component is mapped in the setup is always used regardless of how many
paths are mapped.
Setting up the Enrollment Tab for Student Records Self Service
You can use one of the two delivered variations of the shopping cart component under both the Plan,
shopping cart tab and the Enroll, add tabs.
You can set up the add tab so that when students access that tab, they are taken to the version of the
component that is used on the shopping cart tab—that is, the version with the Select check box for each
class.
Here are the setup steps:
1. On the Navigation Tabs Setup page (for Student Records), select ENROLLMENT in the Main Tab
field in the Main Tabs group box.
2. In the Secondary Tabs group box, select ADD in the Secondary Tab field.
3. In the Link Destination group box, select SA_LEARNER_SERVICES_2 in the Menu Name field.
Note: Two rows exist in this group box. Ensure that you select SA_LEARNER_SERVICES_2 in both
rows.
4. Click Save.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
33
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Chapter 2
Here is an example of the setup for the add tab using SA_LEARNER_SERVICES_2:
Image: Example of setup for the add tab using SA_LEARNER_SERVICES_2
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Navigation Tabs Setup page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
34
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 2
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
The add tab in Self Service uses the version of the component with the Select check box:
Image: Example of the add tab in Student Center
This example illustrates the fields and controls under the add tab in Student Center. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
If you select SA_LEARNER_SERVICES in the Link Destination group box, the Select check box does
not appear on the add tab in Self Service. The check box appears only on the shopping cart tab.
You can use the Message Catalog (PeopleTools, Utilities, Administration, Message Catalog) to change the
title text that appears on the add and shopping cart tabs. The existing text appears on the previous example
page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
35
Chapter 3
Setting Up Type Control
Setting Up Type Control
This section discusses how to set type controls.
Page Used to Set Up Type Control
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Type Control
TYPE_CNTL_SETUP
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Type Control
Set type controls to identify
the types of names, addresses,
phones, and email addresses
for self-service users to view,
edit, or delete.
Setting Type Controls
Access the Type Control page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Type Control).
Image: Type Control page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Type Control page. You can find definitions for the
fields and controls later on this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
37
Setting Up Type Control
Type Control
Chapter 3
Select the level of control that you want to apply to the data type
when you provide it to self service users. For example, if you
want to make phone numbers available to self-service users and
permit them to edit or delete the phone numbers, but you do not
want them to be able to delete the Home phone type, select the
control type of Edit - No Delete for that phone type.
Warning! If no type control is selected, the system uses Full
Edit.
Values for this field are delivered with your system as
translate values. Do not modify these values in any way.
Any modifications to these values could require substantial
programming effort. The options are:
Display Only: Exposes this information to self-service users.
Does not permit them to enter or edit the specified type or its
associated data.
Do Not Display: Does not expose this information (neither the
type nor its associated data) to self-service users.
Edit - No Delete: Exposes this information to self-service users.
Permits them to edit the data, but does not permit them to delete
the type.
Full Edit: Exposes this information to self-service users. Permits
them to edit and delete the specified type and its associated data.
(This is the least restrictive and the default value.)
Important! You cannot change the Name Type (Primary) or the Address Types (Home and Mailing)
values. These are set on the Campus Community Installation Names/Addresses page.
Campus Solutions delivers Name Type and Address Types with Edit - No Delete type control level. You
cannot apply the lesser restrictive control of Full Edit to these types. However you can apply the more
restrictive controls of Display Only or Do Not Display.
Self-services users can change data for these address types, but they cannot delete the types. This is why
the Delete (Home) address(es) and Delete (Mailing) address(es) links are never available on the Current
Addresses page. If you modify these mapping types on the Installation Table, you must also modify the
type control settings on the Type Control page.
38
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Understanding Self-Service Enrollment Error Messaging Setup
The system generates enrollment request error messages during the process of adding and dropping
classes. This feature is available not only for administrative but also for student self-service enrollment
pages. However, for self-service users you must first:
1. Select the Enrollment Information check box in the Enrollment Preferences group box on the
Enrollment setup page.
2. Select the Enroll Rqmt: Requisite check box on the Class Detail Options page. See "Setting Up Class
Search Profiles" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records).
These two check boxes control whether requisite descriptions appear on the Enrollment Preferences page
when students add a class or click a class link in which they are enrolled. They also determine whether:
•
Requirement group descriptions appear on the View Results page in self-service enrollment.
•
Descriptions appear when a student validates a shopping cart entry.
Related Links
"Processing Enrollment Transactions Through the Quick Enrollment Component" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Student Records
To set up self-service Student Records, use the Student Records component (SSR_SS_ENRL_OPT) and
the Weekly Schedule Time Period component (SETUP_TIME_PERIODS).
This section discusses how to:
•
Define Student Records setup.
•
Defining other Student Record self-service options.
•
Set up weekly schedule time periods.
•
Set up self-service graduation application and tracking.
•
Defining a name type display.
•
Configure name display rules.
•
Set up self-service graduation options.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
39
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
•
Set up other graduation options.
•
Displaying class schedules in Fluid user interface.
•
Displaying meeting schedules in Fluid user interface.
•
Displaying instructor contact information in Fluid user interface.
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Features for Student Records
40
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Enrollment
SSR_SS_ENRL_OPT
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Records, Enrollment
Enable self-service features
and define parameters and
rules for self-service Student
Records functionality.
Other
SSR_SS_OTHR_OPT
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Records, Other
Controls the display of phone
details for advisors and
committee members on the
My Advisors page, controls
whether advisors have access
to non-advisee data from the
View My Advisees page, and
provides options for how to
search for a Faculty member.
Weekly Schedule Time
Periods
SETUP_TIME_PERIODS
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Enrollment, Weekly Schedule
Time Periods
Define the times that define
the ranges of time that the
system displays on the
Weekly Schedule page for
both instructors and students.
Campus Solutions delivers a
set of time periods for every
hour in a 24-hour period.
You can modify or add to
these values to meet your
business requirements; for
example, you can add halfhour intervals.
Academic Institution 8
SSR_INST_TBL_GRAD
Set Up SACR, Foundation
Tables, Academic Structure,
Academic Institution Table,
Academic Institution 8
Set up self-service graduation
at the institution level;
however, these settings can
be overridden at the career or
program level.
Name Display Type
SCC_NMD_TYP_TBL
Click the Add Name Display
Type link on the Academic
Institution 8 page.
Define how names appear for
graduation.
Name Display Type
Parameters
SCC_NMD_TYP_PRM
Click the Edit Parameters
button on the Name Display
Type page.
Further define how names
appear.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Self Service Options
SSR_ACDCAR_SELFSRV
Set Up SACR, Foundation
Tables, Academic Structure,
Academic Career Table, Self
Service Options
Set up for career-specific
usage of the graduation
tracking process.
Graduation
SSR_PROG_TBL_GRAD
Set Up SACR, Foundation
Tables, Academic Structure,
Academic Program Table,
Graduation
Set up for program-specific
usage of the graduation
tracking process.
Student Records Installation
SSR_INSTALLATION
Set Up SACR, Install, Student Select the Fluid Self Service
Records Installation
check box (New Features
region) to indicate that fluid
features for Student Records
self service has been adopted.
By default, this check box is
deselected.
This check box is for
informational purposes only.
View My Classes Options
SSR_VWCLSCHDOPT_FL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
View My Classes Options
Select how the initial page
displays class schedules.
Meeting Schedule Option
SSR_MTGSCHDOPT_FL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Meeting Schedule Options
Determine the number of
meeting patterns that appear
for each class in Fluid user
interface.
Instructor Contact Options
SSR_INSTRDSP_FL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Instructor Contact Options
Set up the options for
displaying instructor
information on the Class
Information modal page
for View My Classes, Drop
Classes, Shopping Cart, and
Class Search in Fluid user
interface.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
41
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Defining Student Records Setup
Access the Enrollment page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student Records,
Enrollment).
Image: Enrollment page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Enrollment page. You can find definitions for the
fields and controls later on this page.
Note
Enter descriptive information about the setup. This field is for
informational purposes only.
Enrollment Shopping Cart
Note: These features are also used to set up Class Search and Enrollment for PeopleSoft Fluid.
Allow Validation
42
Select to enable the Validation feature. This feature enables
self-service users to validate their Shopping Cart entries against
a subset of edits from the Enrollment Engine. You can select
which edits the Enrollment Engine runs. The options are time
conflicts, repeats, requisites, and unit limits. If you select this
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
check box, you must select at least one of these options. If you
clear this check box, all references to validation in the system
are hidden.
Time Conflict
Select this check box if you want the Enrollment Engine to
check time conflicts while validating Shopping Cart entries.
Repeats
Select this check box if you want the Enrollment Engine to
check repeats while validating Shopping Cart entries.
Allow During Enrollment Appt
Select to enable users to validate their Shopping Cart entries
(allow during enrollment appointment) during their enrollment appointment. If you select this check
box, the Validate button appears in the Shopping Cart during the
student's enrollment appointment. If you clear this check box,
the Validate button is not available in the Shopping Cart during
the student's enrollment appointment. This option prevents you
from having to set up validation appointments that parallel your
enrollment appointments.
Requisites
Select this check box if you want the Enrollment Engine to
check requisites while it validates Shopping Cart entries.
Unit Limits
Select this check box if you want the Enrollment Engine to
check unit limits while it validates Shopping Cart entries.
Enrollment Features
Use Wait Listing
Select to enable wait listing. If you clear this check box, the
system hides all references to wait listings in self-service. If
you clear this check box, the system selects the Swap option
by default and makes the Enroll with Drop if Enroll and Swap
fields unavailable for edit.
Note: This field is used to set up Class Search and Enrollment
for PeopleSoft Fluid.
Swap Enrollment Action
This field controls the processing of enrollment requests
submitted from the Swap component in student self-service.
Select one of these options:
Enroll with Drop if Enroll: Select this check box to enable Drop
if Enroll processing for self-service swaps. If you select this
check box, when a student swaps from one class to another
or to a different enrollment component of the same class, the
enrollment engine drops the student from the class that the
student wants to swap only after the student is enrolled in the
preferred class. The enrollment engine does not drop a student
who is on the wait list for the preferred class. The enrollment
engine processes the preferred class with an enrollment action of
Enroll.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
43
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Swap: If you select this check box, when a student swaps from
one class to another (or a different enrollment section of the
same class), the enrollment engine drops the student from the
unwanted class if they are successfully enrolled or when they
are placed on the wait list in the preferred class.
Note: If the swap is for non-enroll components only, the request
is processed with a Swap action regardless of the option that is
selected on this setup page.
When a student tries to swap only the non-enroll component(
s) on the Swap component (no change to the enrollment
component), the transaction is submitted to the enrollment
engine with an enrollment action of Swap (instead of Enroll
with Drop if Enroll). This ensures that the student is enrolled (
or wait listed) in the right combination of enrollment and nonenroll components. For example, if a student is enrolled in
CHEM 102 lecture section 1 plus related lab 1A and tries to
swap to a closed lab, 1B, electing to wait list, the transaction is
submitted as non-enroll swap (for example, swap section 1 to
section 1 with related section 1B) where the student's status will
be changed from enrolled to wait listed for the lecture section,
wait listed in the non-enroll lab section (1B), and dropped from
their original lab section (1A).
Enrollment Preferences
Select the information that you want to appear in student self service.
Enrollment Information
Select to display enrollment requisite information about the
self-service Enrollment Preferences page during the enrollment
process.
Class Notes
Select to display class notes information on the self-service
Enrollment Preferences page during the enrollment process.
Class Meeting Information
Select to display class meeting information on the self-service
Enrollment Preferences page during the enrollment process.
Variable Unit Increments
Enter a value to control how unit increments appear to students
when students select a unit value for a variable unit course. For
example, if students are allowed to enroll in half units, enter 0.
50 in this field. A student who enrolls in a class with a variable
unit range of 1 to 3 units is then presented with the following
options: 1.00, 1.50, 2.00, 2.50, 3.00.
Additional Self Service Setup
Display Typically Offered Data
44
Select to display when a course is usually offered at the
institution. If this check box is selected, the data appears on a
variety of self-service pages, including Browse Course Catalog,
Course Detail, My Planner, and My Academic Requirements.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
If you clear the check box, the system does not display typically
offered data within self-service, but it continues to display it on
administrative pages.
Typically offered values are institutionally defined within a
typically offered setup page. They are then assigned to courses
on the Course Catalog - Offerings page.
Show Student Photos on Rosters
Select this check box if you want student photos to appear on
the class and advisee rosters in the Faculty Center.
Defining Other Student Record Self-Service Options
Access the Other page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student Records, Other).
Image: Other page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Other page. You can find definitions for the fields
and controls later on this page.
My Advisor Pages
Use the My Advisor Pages group box to control the display of phone details of advisors, committee
members, or both on the My Advisors page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
45
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Note: You should select the same advisor phone number value on this page and on the Student Center
Options page in the Student Center component (SSS_STUDENT_CENTER).
Advisor Self Service
Allow access to non-advisees
If this check box is selected, the VIEW DATA FOR OTHER
STUDENTS button becomes available on the View My
Advisees – Advisee Roster page in Faculty Center. The check
box is selected by default.
Advisors can access student data for non-advisees by clicking
the VIEW DATA FOR OTHER STUDENTS button, which
takes them to a search page.
If the Allow access to non-advisees check box is cleared,
advisors cannot access student data for non-advisees. The VIEW
DATA FOR OTHER STUDENTS button is hidden. If, when
viewing an advisee's data, an advisor clicks the Return to Search
button, the advisor is taken to a search page on which only their
advisees are available.
Faculty Search
Use this group box to control the data that you want to search against when you use the Locate a Faculty
Member page in Faculty Center.
You can search against the entire population in the database or against data in the Instructor/Advisor Table
component (INSTR_ADVSR_PERS).
Personal Data
Select this option to search against the entire population in the
database when you use the Locate a Faculty Member page in
Faculty Center.
Instructor/Advisor Table
Select this option to search against data in the Instructor/Advisor
Table component when you use the Locate a Faculty Member
page in Faculty Center.
Warning! You must be careful when setting up Self Service Faculty Search. You do not have to use
the Instructor/Advisor Table component to assign instructors to classes. You should therefore select the
option to edit the search for faculty members against data in the Instructor/Advisor Table component
only if the Instructor/Advisor option is selected in the Edit Instructor Against group box on the Academic
Organization Table page.
Student Textbook Information
Display Textbook Summary link
46
If you select the Student Self Service and Instructor Self Service
check boxes, the View Textbook Summary link appears on the
Student Self Service, My Class Schedule page and the Faculty
Center, My Schedule page. Students and faculty staff can use
the link to access a summary of the textbook assignments for
each of their classes for the term.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Clear the check boxes if you do not use the textbook feature or
if you want to disable access to the Textbook Summary page.
Related Links
Using the Self-Service Faculty Center
"Designating Approved Instructors and Advisors" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Setting Up Weekly Schedule Time Periods
Access the Weekly Schedule Time Periods page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records,
Enrollment, Weekly Schedule Time Periods).
Time
Enter a range of values to define the periods of time that you
want to appear on the self-service weekly schedule. Campus
Solutions delivers a set of time periods for every hour in a 24hour period. You can modify these values.
This field also controls the self-service exam schedule weekly
view, in both the Student Center and Faculty Center. Hours can
be subdivided into 30- and 15-minute intervals.
Note: To print the weekly schedule in full color, Internet Explorer users must change their settings:go to
Tools, Internet Options, Advanced, Printing, then select Print background colors and images." Without
this setting, the schedule is printed without background color.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
47
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Setting Up Self-Service Graduation Application and Tracking
Access the Academic Institution 8 page (Set Up SACR, Foundation Tables, Academic Structure,
Academic Institution Table, Academic Institution 8).
Image: Academic Institution 8 page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Academic Institution 8 page (1 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
48
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Image: Academic Institution 8 page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Academic Institution 8 page (2 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Graduation Tracking
Graduation Tracking
Select this check box to set up graduation values at the
institution level. If you select this check box, then all careers
and programs use graduation tracking. If you do not, then
a selection made at either the career or the program level
determines whether graduation tracking is used. In addition,
if you select this check box, the system creates a graduation
tracking row during the self-service graduation application.
Graduation Review Status
Select a value to be used during the self-service graduation
application process.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
49
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Note: The remaining check boxes determine whether these grids appear on the Graduation Tracking page.
This is determined at the institution level.
Graduation Self-Service
The Name Display framework provides a configurable solution that allows institutions to define
how a display name appears for graduation. Note that this functionality only appears on the View
Graduation Status page in self service. The function called GetDegreeName is located in the
FUNCLIB_SR.NAME_DISPLAY_TYPE.FieldFormula. This function returns the degree name that
is derived using the Name Display Type settings on the Academic Institution Table component. The
function requires an institution value and an EmplID value as parameters, and returns a string value of the
degree name. Use this function to retrieve the derived Degree Name when needed for reporting or other
processing.
50
Self Service Eligible to Apply
When this check box is selected, the self-service Apply for
Graduation process looks for a degree checkout status of
Eligible to Graduate on the student's academic program.
The institution can set the degree checkout status using the
Graduation Processing process to limit the students who can
apply to graduate.
Program Action Reason
Enter the program action reason used in the self-service Apply
for Graduation process.
Show Name
Select this check box to allow the student's name to appear on
the View Graduation Status page.
Name Link Label
Enter a text label. This label appears as a link when the Show
Name check box is selected. When students click this link, they
are directed to the Self Service Campus Community page where
they can enter the name they want to use for graduation. The
name type identified in the setup is the name type that is edited
or created.
Name Display Type
Click the Add Name Display Type link or manually enter a
Name Display Type, then click the Edit Name Display link.
Name Type
This is the name type that is added or edited through the
Graduation self-service page. The system formats this name
type based on the name display type entered above.
Show Address
Select this check box to allow the student's address to appear on
the View Graduation Status page.
Address Usage
Identify value to use for the display of the address on the View
Graduation Status page.
Address Link Label
Enter a text label. This label appears as a link when the Show
Address check box is selected. When students click this link,
they are directed to the Self Service Campus Community page
where they can change their addresses.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Graduation Name Addr Message
Enter text to direct the student how to make name and address
changes. These directions appear on the View Graduation Status
page.
Grad Status Alternate Label
The fields in this group box allow the institution to display a different message for the various degree
checkout values.
Defining a Name Type Display
Access the Name Display Type page (click the Add Name Display Type link on the Academic Institution
8 page).
Image: Name Display Type page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Name Display Type page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
The Name Display framework provides a configurable solution that allows institutions to define how a
display name appears for graduation. This functionality is available only on the View Graduation Status
page in self service.
There are four delivered Style choices; these are currently not enabled for the View Graduation Status
page.
Click the Edit Parameters button to access the Name Display Type Parameters page where you can further
define how names appear.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
51
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Configuring Name Display Rules
Access the Name Display Type Parameters page (click the Edit Parameters button on the Name Display
Type page).
Image: Name Display Type Parameters page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Name Display Type Parameters page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Name Types
Name Type
Select a name type, which is defined on the Name Type Table
page. You can assign multiple name types (such as Primary,
Preferred, and Legal) to each Name Display Type.
Order
Rank the Name Type in the Name Type hierarchy for the Name
Display Type.
Default Name Field
Select from three delivered options: Use Formal Name, Use
Name, or Use Name Display.
Country Rules
You can define multiple sets of country rules for each Name Type. For example, your institution might
define English country rules for the primary name type and Belgian country rules for the preferred name
type. If you specify country rules, then you must select an option in the Name Field group box.
52
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Format Using
The system only displays PeopleSoft-supported countries in this
list.
Test EmplID
Add person IDs to this grid, which allows you to select test IDs
to see how a name will actually appear on a page based on the
rules entered. You can only add IDs whose names include parts
associated with the country. The test EmplID must have the
name type you are formatting to see anything in the displays as
area.
Name Field
Use the fields in this group box to override the Default Name Field option in the Name Types group box
and customize names for a specific country format. You can define how the name appears part by part as
you go; the appearance of each ID added to the Name Display Test group box refreshes each time you
change any field. There are four options in this group box: Use Name Display, Use Formal Name, Use
Name, and Use Name Parts. If you select the Use Name Parts option, the Name Parts grid appears. The
grid displays name fields specific to the country selected.
Part Type
Available options are: Name Field, Space, or User Defined.
Name Field: contains values that are dependent on the selected
country format such as First Name, Middle Name, Last Name.
Space: allows you to add a single space between other part
types. Spaces can only be specified from Part 2 onward.
User Defined.: allows you to define other characters (such as
commas or periods), or a character string up to 35 characters
long.
Name Field
The values that appear in this column are country-specific,
based on your selection in the Format Using field.
Dependency
Enter a number to specify a dependent part, so that parts are
only be displayed when their dependent parts contain a value.
For example, if a prefix is listed but a person has no prefix
associated with their name record, the system ignores the entire
prefix (name part, punctuation, and spaces) and moves to the
next part in the list.
Ignore Criteria
This group box is hidden by default; select the Ignore Rules check box to make it appear. Use the fields
here to ignore any Name Field parts of a name. For example, you can make selections here to remove any
special characters (such as * or !) used as placeholders for people with single names in your database.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
53
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Setting Up Self-Service Graduation Options
Access the Self Service Options page (Set Up SACR, Foundation Tables, Academic Structure,
Academic Career Table, Self Service Options).
Image: Self Service Options page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Self Service Options page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
54
Override Institution Setup
If you select this check box, the Graduation Tracking and
Graduation Self-Service group boxes appear.
Use Graduation Tracking
Select this check box to add a row to the graduation tracking
process during self-service apply for graduation. Then select the
appropriate Graduation Review Status.
Program Action Reason
Select the appropriate program action reason.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Setting Up Other Graduation Options
Access the Graduation page (Set Up SACR, Foundation Tables, Academic Structure, Academic
Program Table, Graduation).
Image: Graduation page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Graduation page. You can find definitions for the
fields and controls later on this page.
Override Inst & Career Setup
If you select this check box, the Graduation Tracking and
(Override Institution and Career Setup) Graduation Self-Service group boxes appear.
Use Graduation Tracking
Select this check box to add a row to the graduation tracking
process during self-service apply for graduation. Then select the
appropriate Graduation Review Status.
Program Action Reason
Select the appropriate program action reason.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
55
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Displaying Class Schedules in Fluid User Interface
Access the View My Classes Options page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid Self
Service Setup, View My Classes Options).
Image: View My Classes Options page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the View My Classes Options page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to select whether the initial page displays the class schedules By Class or By Date.
Displaying Meeting Schedules in Fluid User Interface
Access the Meeting Schedule Option page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid Self
Service Setup, Meeting Schedule Options).
Image: Meeting Schedule Option page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Meeting Schedule Option page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to set the number of meeting patterns that appear for each class in Fluid user interface.
56
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Form Factor Type
Maximum Rows to Display
Set the form factor on which the schedules appear.
•
Non-small Form Factor: tablets, laptops, desktops.
•
Small Form Factor: smartphones.
Define the maximum number of schedules that appear on the
View My Classes – By Class, Shopping Cart, Drop Classes,
Class Search, Update Classes, or Swap Classes pages.
The maximum number of schedules that appear on the page is
10. If you do not configure the Meeting Schedule Option, by
default the maximum number of schedules is displayed.
Message to display when maximum
has been reached
Set the message that appears to students when there are more
schedules than the maximum number of rows you have set to
appear on the View My Classes – By Class, Shopping Cart,
Drop Classes, Class Search, Update Classes, or Swap Classes
pages.
Displaying Instructor Contact Information in Fluid User Interface
Access the Instructor Contact Details Display page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup, Instructor Contact Options).
Image: Instructor Contact Details Display page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Instructor Contact Details Display page. You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to control whether instruction information appears on the Class Information modal page for
View My Classes, Drop Classes and Shopping Cart.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
57
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Setting Up a Self-Service Student Center
To set up a student center, use the Student Center component (SSS_STDNCTR_OPT).
This section provides an overview of defining student center setup options and discusses how to define
self-service Student Center setup options.
Understanding Defining Student Center Setup Options
The Student Center page is a self-service page that provides students a single entry point from which
to navigate to student-related transactions. It also provides a single location where students can see
information that is important to them, such as their class schedule, enrollment dates, and account
information.
Using the Student Center Options page in conjunction with security setup, you can configure the Student
Center page to control the user's experience. On the Student Center Options page, you can decide which
major sections appear on the Student Center page. You can also use the Student Center Options page
to configure some of the individual items that appear on the Student Center page. Using security setup,
you can limit student access to self-service transactions. You must use the Student Center Options
page in conjunction with security setup to create a self-service experience for students. For example, if
your institution uses the enrollment functionality in PeopleSoft Student Records but does not use swap
functionality, you can show the Academics section by selecting the Show Academic Section option on the
Student Center Options page but not grant students access to the Swaps page using security. In this case,
the Academic section would appear on the Student Center, but the swap functionality would not. Also, not
displaying a feature on the Student Center does not remove it from the navigation. To remove a feature
from the navigation, you must use security.
Page Used to Set Up a Self-Service Center
58
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Student Center Options
SSS_STDNCTR_OPT
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Center
Define the sections that
you want to appear to your
students in the self-service
Student Center.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Defining Self-Service Student Center Setup Options
Access the Student Center Options page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student
Center).
Image: Student Center Options page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Student Center Options page (1 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
59
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Image: Student Center Options page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Student Center Options page (2 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Note
Enter a note. This field is for informational purposes only.
Major Sections to Be Displayed on the Student Center
60
Show Academic Section
Select to show the Academic Section on the self-service Student
Center page. This section contains links to My Class Schedule,
Wish List, enrollment, and other Student Records functionality.
Show Finances Section
Select to show the Finances Section on the self-service Student
Center page. This section contains links to PeopleSoft Student
Financials and PeopleSoft Financial Aid functionality, such as
Account Summary and View My Financial Aid.
Show Personal Info Section (show
personal information section)
Select to show the Personal Info Section on the self-service
Student Center page. This section contains links to biographical
information features, such as addresses, phone numbers, email
address, emergency contacts, and user preferences. If you select
this check box, the fields in the Personal Information Section
group box become available for edit.
Show Admissions Section
Select to show the Admissions Section on the self-service
Student Center page. This section contains links to PeopleSoft
Recruiting and Admissions functionality, such as applying
to another academic program, requesting admissions
information from your institution, or checking on the status of
an application. If you select this check box, the fields in the
Admissions Section group box become available for edit.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Show Holds Section
Select to show the Holds Section on the self-service Student
Center page. If you select this check box, the fields in the Holds
Section group box become available for edit.
Show To Do List Section
Select to show the To Do List Section on the self-service
Student Center page. If you select this check box, the field in the
To Do List Section group box becomes available for edit.
Show Milestone List Section
Select to show the Milestones section on the self-service Student
Center page. In the Milestones section, students click the details
link to access the Student Milestones self-service page. Advisors
can also access milestone information from the Advisor Center.
The Milestone Table setup controls which milestones are
available in the list on the Student Center page.
See "Setting Up Milestones" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Student Records)
Show Enrollment Dates Section
Select to show the Enrollment Dates Section on the selfservice Student Center page. This section contains enrollment
appointments, validation appointments, and open enrollment
dates.
Show Advisor Section
Select to show the Advisor Section on the self-service Student
Center page. This section displays academic advisors and
committees assigned to the student. Within the Advisor Section,
students click the Details link to go to the View My Advisors
page.
Show Links Section
Select to show the Links Section on the self-service Student
Center page. If you select this check box, the fields in the Links
Section group box become available for edit.
Personal Information Section
Address Box 1 (left) and Address Box Enter the address types to display in the Personal Information
2 (right)
Section of the Student Center page. Only address types that
are set up on the Type Control page as Display Only, Edit - No
Delete, or Full Edit are available.
Address Box 1 Link Label and
Address Box 2 Link Label
Enter the label to be displayed for the address links on the
Student Center page.
Display Phone
Select to display the student's phone number on the Student
Center page.
Type
Enter a phone type to display. Only phone types that are set up
on the Type Control page as Display Only, Edit - No Delete, or
Full Edit are available.
Phone Link Label
Enter the label to be displayed for the phone link on the Student
Center page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
61
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
Chapter 4
Display E-mail
Select to display the student's email address on the Student
Center page.
Type
Enter email types to display. Only email types that are set up on
the Type Control page as Display Only, Edit - No Delete, or Full
Edit are available.
Email Link Label
Enter the label to be displayed for the email link on the Student
Center page.
Privacy settings link
If you do not use Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (
FERPA), enter a URL to your institution's privacy site. When
you enter a URL in this field (starting with http://) a Privacy
Settings link appears on the self-service Student Center page. It
directs users to the website you defined.
If your institution uses FERPA, leave this field blank and
give your self-service users access to the FERPA self-service
page. In this case, users can access FERPA from the Personal
Information prompt by selecting the Privacy Settings option.
Admissions Section
Display Action Column
Select to display the Action column in the Admissions section
on the Student Center page. The Action column—which
displays the View Status and Accept/Decline links—appears
only when there is an allowable action for the applicant to take.
If Display view status link is selected here on the setup page and
a checklist is associated with the application and the checklist is
incomplete, the View Status link appears on the Student Center
page. If Display Accept or Decline link is selected here on the
setup page and the applicant is admitted, the Accept or Decline
link appears on the Student Center page.
Display view status link
Select to display the View Status link, which accesses the to-do
list(s) associated with the application.
Display Accept or Decline link
Select to display the Accept or Decline link, which accesses the
Accept Admissions page.
Holds Section
62
Show <> holds at a time
Select the number of holds that you want to display at one time.
You can display all holds or from 1 to 10 holds. The system
sorts holds by date—most current to oldest—on the Student
Center page.
Display monetary value
Select to display the monetary value of the holds on the Student
Center page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 4
Setting Up Student Records Self-Service
To Do List Section
Show <> checklist items at a time
Select the number of checklist items that you want to display
at one time. You can display all checklist items or from 1 to 10
checklist items or you can choose to not display checklist items
at all. The system sorts checklist items by earliest due date on
the Student Center page.
Show <> tasks at a time
Select the number of tasks (activity guide instances) that you
want to display at one time. You can display all tasks or from
1 to 10 tasks or you can choose to not display tasks at all. The
system sorts tasks by earliest due date on the Student Center
page.
Note: If you have selected the Show To Do List Section check box, then at least one checklist item or one
task must be enabled to be displayed. That is, if the Show To Do List Section check box is selected, then
you should not select None for both Show <> checklist items at a time and Show <> tasks at a time.
Also, note that if you have selected the Show To Do List Section check box and there are no open
checklist items or tasks for the student, then the To Do List section of the Student Center page indicates
that there are no to do's for the student.
Advisor Section
Show advisor phone number
Select to indicate whether to use an advisor's preferred phone
number or a particular phone type when displaying the advisor's
phone number in the Advisor section of the Student Center. This
setup controls the phone number on the Student Center page
only.
Note: You should select the same Advisor phone number value
on this page and on the Other page in the Student Records
component.
Milestone List Section
Select the number of milestones that you want to display at one time. The system sorts milestone items
based on the order in which the milestones were added to the student's record.
Links Section
Use this group box to define link sections that are available on the Student Center page. By defining
sections and URLs, you can provide links to institution websites such as University Library, Campus
Directory, University Home Page, Free Application for Federal Student Aid (FAFSA), and others. You
can define three sections with a maximum of three URLs per section.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
63
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft
Fluid User Interface
Understanding Class Search for Fluid User Interface
To perform class search in Fluid, Campus Solutions uses PeopleSoft Search Framework. This framework
uses facets and keyword search to provide a flexible way to search courses and classes, and is paired
with Elasticsearch as its search engine. Campus Solutions uses PeopleSoft Search Framework with
Elasticsearch for a scalable search solution with near-real time searches.
If you want to use Fluid user interface for class search, you must use PeopleTools 8.5.12 (or later) and
Elasticsearch.
To implement class search in Fluid user interface, you must:
1. Deploy and Configure Elasticsearch.
2. Configure PeopleSoft Framework for class search in Fluid.
3. Configuring class search for Fluid.
4. Run administrative processes.
Deploying and Configuring Elasticsearch
Elasticsearch is an open-source search engine used for the PeopleSoft Search Framework for PeopleSoft
9.2 applications. It is based on Apache Lucene™, a Java-based information retrieval library. Elasticsearch
is provided as a deployment package (DPK) that delivers the required Elasticsearch software version, as
well as Java-based plug-ins needed for integration with PeopleSoft environments.
In Campus Solutions, Elasticsearch is used in class search using fluid user interface, which provides better
performance in indexing and results retrieval. When you create the database, make sure you select ES
(Elasticsearch).
For information on how to deploy and configure Elasticsearch to support class search in Fluid, see
PeopleTools 8.55.11 or Higher Elasticsearch Home Page on My Oracle Support (Doc ID 2205540.2).
Note: To use class search in Fluid user interface, make sure you use PeopleTools 8.55.12 or later.
Class Search Results are organized independently of Elasticsearch.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
65
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Configuring PeopleSoft Search Framework for Class Search in
Fluid
This section discusses how to do the following to configure PeopleSoft Search Framework for Campus
Solutions class search in Fluid:
•
Configuring Facets
•
Deploying Search Definitions
For information on search definition deployment, mapping search attributes, and facets, see PeopleTools:
Search Technology:
Configuring Facets
A facet is an attribute that may be part of one or more search definitions. It provides an alternate
representation of the list of values for a given attribute. Facets are attributes used to filter and narrow
down a set of search results.
Campus Solutions provides a number of facets to allow you to filter class search results. These facets are
similar to the search parameters that are used during class search in the classic interface. This means you
can have a varying number of facets for small form factor (smartphones) and large form factor devices
(tablets, laptops, desktops). You may wish to deploy a smaller number of facets for smartphones because
of the smaller screen size, and a larger number of facets for laptops because of the bigger screen size.
The following facets have been delivered and deployed for small and large form factor devices (unless
otherwise noted), and derive actual data values except for the ones marked with an asterisk (*). Facets
marked with an asterisk require you to specify the values you want displayed.
Note: Oracle does not recommend you add additional facets outside of the delivered ones because class
search has been deployed to work with the provided system facets.
66
•
Class Status
•
Course Career
•
Subject
•
*Number of Units
•
Location
•
Campus
•
Academic Session
•
Shift
•
*Class Meeting Days
•
*Class Start Times
•
*Class End Times
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
•
Class Component
•
Instruction Mode
•
Requirement Designation
•
Class Attribute
•
*CAF Option 1
•
*CAF Option 2
•
*CAF Option 3
•
*CAF Option 4. This has been deployed for tablets or laptops. If necessary, you can deploy it for
smartphones.
•
*CAF Option 5. This has been deployed for tablets or laptops. If necessary, you can deploy it for
smartphones.
Oracle recommends that you deploy around 7–10 facets for optimum performance and to avoid excessive
scrolling, especially for smartphones.
If you do not want to use a facet, you can deselect it from the search definition or Search Category.
Deploying Search Definitions
Access the Deploy Search Definition page (PeopleTools, Search Framework, Administration, Deploy/
Delete Object).
Use the Deploy Search Definition page to deploy or undeploy a search definition.
Campus Solutions provides the following search definitions:
•
SSR_CLASS_SEARCH_LFF for large form factor devices (tablets, laptops)
•
SSR_CLASS_SEARCH_SFF for small form factor devices (smartphones)
Depending on the type of device you want to use to access class search in Fluid, you can choose to deploy
either one of these search definitions. If you want to use both types of device, you must deploy both
search definitions.
Note: You should use only the delivered facets. Do not add additional facets to the search definitions that
have not been provided by Campus Solutions.
If you do not want to use a facet, you can remove it from the search definition. If you remove a facet from
a search definition, you must run a full build index. This removes the facet from the index.
To remove a facet from a search definition:
1. Access the Deploy Search Definition page, select the search definition, then click Undeploy.
2. Go to the Search Attribute Mapping page (Peopletools, Search Framework, Designer, Search
Definition, Map Search Attributes).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
67
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
3. To add or remove a do not want to use as a facet, then deselect the corresponding Is Faceted check
box. You can also deselect the corresponding Field to Index check box.
Note: Do not remove Class Status from the search definition. This means its Is Faceted and Field to
Index check box must remain selected.
4. Save the record.
5. Go to the Facets page (Peopletools, Search Framework, Designer, Search Category, Facets).
6. From the Facets page, select Auto detect facets, then save.
From the Facets page, you can use the Sequence column to change the order in which facets are
displayed in class search in Fluid.
7. Go to the Deploy Search Definition page, select the search definition you modified, then click
Deploy.
If the Crawl Status indicates Not Crawled, it means that the full build index process must be run.
Alternatively, you can remove facets that are included in a search definition by deleting them from the
search category. To do this:
1. Access the Search Category page (Peopletools, Search Framework, Designer, Search Category).
2. Look for the search definition whose facets you want to remove, and then select it.
3. Click Facets.
4. If Auto detect facets is selected, deselect it.
5. Click the corresponding minus sign (–) of the facet you want to remove.
6. If you want to re-order the facets, use the Sequence column.
7. Click Save.
8. To check that the facets have been removed, log in and out of the system. The facets no longer appear
in search results.
When you remove facets using the Search Category page, you do not have to run a full build. This means
the facet index still remains and could add time when performing class search queries. You can also use
this page to add delivered facets.
Configuring Class Search Options for Fluid
This section discusses how to configure various display options for class search in Fluid user interface.
Related Links
Displaying Class Schedules in Fluid User Interface
Displaying Meeting Schedules in Fluid User Interface
Displaying Instructor Contact Information in Fluid User Interface
68
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Pages Used to Configure Class Search Options for Fluid
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Class Search
SSR_CLSRCH_OPT_FL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Class Search Setup
Set up the various controls
and display for Class Search
and Enrollment within
PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface.
•
Class Search Filters –
Units
•
SSR_FACETS_UNITS
•
•
Class Search Filters –
Meeting Times
•
SSR_FACETS_TIME
•
SSR_FACETS_DAYS
Set Up SACR, Product
Configure filters when you
Related, Student Records, use facets in class search
Fluid Self Service Setup, definition.
Class Search Filters,
Units
•
Class Search Filters –
Meeting Days
•
SSR_FACET_CAF_
ATTR
•
•
Class Search Filters –
Common Attributes (
CAF)
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Class Search Filters,
Meeting Times
•
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Class Search Filters,
Meeting Days
•
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Class Search Filters,
Common Attributes (
CAF)
Class Option Setup
SSR_CLSOPTN_OPT
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Student Records,
Fluid Self Service Setup,
Class Option Setup
Define whether time conflicts
are checked and displayed in
Fluid user interface.
69
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search and Enrollment for Fluid User Interface
Access the Class Search Setup page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid Self Service
Setup, Class Search Setup).
Image: Class Search Setup page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Setup page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use the Class Search Setup page to configure the display settings for Class Search and Enrollment in
Fluid user interface.
70
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Add Class Options
In this region, you can select:
•
Enrollment Only to allow students to directly enroll in classes without having to add classes to the
shopping cart. When you select this option, the Shopping Cart is disabled and students must enroll
directly in the classes selected.
•
Add to Cart Only so that students always have to add classes to their Shopping Cart before being
permitted to enroll.
•
Enrollment or Add to Cart to allow students to either enroll directly into classes or add classes to their
shopping cart. This option is available as part of the Class Search Enrollment Process.
Class Search Limit
Use this region to control the maximum number of courses that appear in search results. By default,
Maximum Courses to Display is set to 50. You can change this value.
Although only the maximum numbers of courses appear, it is likely that there are more than 50 courses
in the search results. Filtering the results queries the whole search results data, not just the courses that
appear on the page. It is recommended that the search limit is kept to a reasonable number to allow the
search results to be easily read. The search results can be refined using facets.
Campus Solutions provides a message that is displayed when the class search limit is exceeded. You can
change the message in the message catalog to meet your requirements.
Filter Options
Default to Open Classes
If you select this check box, the open class facet is applied to
the search results before the search results are displayed. This
ensures that only open classes are retrieved.
Otherwise, all courses or classes are returned regardless of their
status. Using filter options makes it possible to select open,
waitlisted, or closed courses and classes.
Incl Topic on Keyword Search
(Include Topic on Keyword Search)
Select this check box to enable users to search for classes using
a course topic. If you do not select this check box, searches
using course topics are not possible because the system cannot
retrieve results.
Include Course Attribute Value
If you select this check box, attribute names (example: General
Education) as well as attribute values (example: General
Education: Writing Skills) are displayed as a facet in class
search. Otherwise, only the attribute name is displayed as a
facet.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
71
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Note: When you modify this check box (select or deselect), run
a Class Search Index Full Build in order to apply the changes.
Running a full build index temporarily prevents search results
from appearing as all indexes are rebuilt.
If you want to allow class search to remain in service, then
you can apply the changes by running the pre-process and
incremental builds. See Building Indexes for Class Search.
Favorites Limits
Use this region to set the maximum number of favorite courses favorites that can be saved and displayed
on small and non-small form factor devices. Once the maximum number is reached, a message is
displayed in self-service to indicate that no further favorites can be saved.
Recently Viewed Limits
Use this region to set the maximum number of recently viewed courses that appear on small and nonsmall form factor devices. Once the maximum number is reached, the oldest recently viewed course
(timewise) is overridden by the next recently viewed course.
Class Data Tracking
Track Admin Changes to Classes
Select this check box to make sure administrative changes are
automatically tracked. Oracle recommends you select this check
box to capture changes to classes.
However, you may wish to deselect this check box for a period
of time if, for example, you are creating the class schedule for
the next or future term and do not want indexes to be created (at
this time) for these terms.
Return to Class Preferences
There are circumstances where the enrollment process completes but the student is unable to enroll in
classes and may receive an error message from the Enrollment Engine. There are also circumstances
where students can return to the enrollment process (for example, when adding a waitlist or permission
number) to add the required data to complete the enrollment process successfully.
Use this region to set up a message that, when returned by the Enrollment Engine, adds a link to the
confirmation page in Fluid self-service. This link allows the student to return to class preferences during
the enrollment process. Campus Solutions pre-populated this region with a few system messages to allow
a student to return to the enrollment process. You can remove these messages or add your own system
messages to allow students to return to the enrollment process (where it makes sense to do so) to add data
and successfully complete the transaction.
Related Links
Configuring Facets
72
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Setting Up Class Filter Options in Fluid User Interface
Access the following pages:
•
Class Search Filters – Units page Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid Self
Service Setup, Class Search Filters, Units)
•
Class Search Filters – Meeting Times page Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid
Self Service Setup, Class Search Filters, Meeting Times
•
Class Search Filters – Meeting Days page Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid
Self Service Setup, Class Search Filters, Meeting Days
•
Class Search Filters – Common Attributes (CAF) page Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student
Records, Fluid Self Service Setup, Class Search Filters, Common Attributes (CAF)
Note: The values that are delivered in the following pages are only examples. If they are not relevant to
your institution, you can change or remove them. These pages should be configured only if you use facets
in class search definition.
Image: Class Search Filters - Units page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Filters - Units page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Sort Order
Use this column to set the order in which values appear in Fluid
class search results.
Description
Specify the value to which a unit is converted and appears as a
facet value.
Minimum Units, Maximum Units
Set the minimum and maximum number of units that are used to
validate against if selected in Fluid class search.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
73
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Each row on the Units page is converted to a facet value that is used to narrow down the search results in
Fluid class search. The value users select is matched against the class unit value.
Image: Class Search Filters - Meeting Times page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Filters - Meeting Times page. You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
74
Description
Specify the value to which the times are converted and appears
as a facet value.
Meeting Start Time, Meeting End
Time
Meeting Start and End times are converted into two separate
facets that are used to narrow down the search results in Fluid
class search. The value users select is matched against the class
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
meeting pattern start and end times. All classes within a class
option must meet the facet value to be retrieved.
Image: Class Search Filters - Meeting Days page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Filters - Meeting Days page. You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Each row on the Meeting Days page is converted to a facet value that is used to narrow down the search
results in Fluid class search. The value users select is matched against class meeting pattern days. All
classes within the class option must meet the facet value to be retrieved.
Image: Class Search Filters - Common Attributes (CAF) page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Filters - Common Attributes (CAF)
page. You can find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Campus Solutions delivers this as an empty page. You can use a maximum of five Common Attribute
Framework (CAF) records.
Currently, only three CAF records were deployed for small form factor devices, but you can deploy up to
five CAF records. Make sure the CAF records you want to use for small form factor devices are added as
the top three rows. If your institution requires it, you can use up to five CAF records (or none at all) on
the search definition. As CAF records are converted to facets, using text-related CAF is not supported.
See Configuring PeopleSoft Search Framework for Class Search in Fluid.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
75
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Checking Time Conflicts in Class Options for Fluid User Interface
Access the Class Option Setup page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Student Records, Fluid Self Service
Setup, Class Option Setup).
Image: Class Option Setup page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Option Setup page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to control whether time conflicts in class option are checked and displayed on the Course
Information or Class Selection page.
Time Conflict in Class Option
Select:
•
Check and Display to check if any time conflicts exist and to
display the time conflicts in the class options for the Course
Information or Class Selection page in Fluid.
Students are not able to select class options with time
conflicts, but are able to see the information.
•
Check and Hide to check if any time conflicts exist but these
conflicts are not displayed in class options.
•
Do not Check to tell the system not to check for time
conflicts.
Building Indexes for Class Search
This section discusses how to run full and incremental builds to build the class search index, including
determining when to run builds for maintenance. It also discusses removing favorites and recently viewed
classes from class search.
76
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
After you install and implement PeopleSoft Search Framework and Elasticsearch as well as set up
configure class search options for Fluid, you must run the Class Search Index Pre-Process and Class
Search Index Full Build to build the class search index
Image: Overview of Class Search and Elasticsearch Administrative Process
This diagram is an overview of the administrative processes required to build class search indexes
Pages Used to Build the Index for Class Search
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Class Search Index PreProcessing
SSR_CS_IDX_GEN_FL
Curriculum Management,
Fluid Class Search, Class
Search Index Pre-Process
Determine which schedule of
classes are available in class
search.
Class Search Index Full Build
SSR_CS_IDX_FULL_FL
Curriculum Management,
Fluid Class Search, Class
Search Index Full Build
Run a full index build for
small and non-small form
factor devices.
Class Search Index Manager
SSR_CS_IDX_TERM_FL
Curriculum Management,
Fluid Class Search, Class
Search Index Manager
Run an incremental build.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
77
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Purge Class Search Favorites
and Recently Viewed
SSR_CS_RVF_PURG_FL
Records and Enrollment,
Fluid Class Search, Purge
Favs, Recently Viewed
Remove favorites and recently
viewed classes from class
search.
Determining When to Run Build Processes for Maintenance
The following table indicates the administrative changes that require an index build, and identifies which
processes to run. Extreme care should be taken when running a full build index—this should be run only
during downtime—because search results are not displayed. The pre-process and incremental build can
be used in combination during most situations (and does not require class search downtime), except when
there are changes to search definitions.
Source of Administrative
Changes
Source Detail
Run Class Search Index
Full Build?
Run Class Search Index
Manager (Incremental
Build)?
Class Search Filters
Units, Meeting Days, Start
Times, End Times, CAF
Yes, if you do not use PreProcess
Yes, if you use Pre-Process
to identify classes affected by
any changes
Class Search Setup
Include Course Attribute
Value
Yes, if you do not use PreProcess
Yes, if you use Pre-Process
to identify classes affected by
any changes
Curriculum Management
Course Catalog, Schedule of
Classes
Yes, if you do not use PreProcess
Yes, if you use Pre-Process
to identify classes affected by
any changes
No, if you use Track Admin
Changes to Classes in the
Class Search Setup page.
Yes, if you use Track Admin
Changes to Classes in the
Class Search Setup page.
Pre-Process
Any Action
No
Yes
Student Records Self-Service
Setup
Use Waitlisting
Yes, if you do not use PreProcess
Yes, if you use Pre-Process
to identify classes affected by
any changes
Related Links
Configuring Class Search Options for Fluid
78
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Running Class Search Index Pre-Processing
Access the Class Search Index Pre-Processing page (Curriculum Management, Fluid Class Search, Class
Search Index Pre-Process).
Image: Class Search Index Pre-Processing page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Index Pre-Processing page. You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to determine which schedule of classes are available in class search. Initially, this process
should be run to add classes for terms that you want to be available in class search. You can also use this
page for ongoing maintenance.
Add
Select to add new classes to the index.
Example: Adding classes for new term
Delete
Select to remove classes from the index.
Example: Removing classes from an older term
Change
Select to update classes already indexed.
Example: Adding class search filters, changes to class meeting
patterns, units, and so on.
Sync
Select to correct classes that are not in the class table but exist in
the index, and vice-versa. You can run Sync only when using the
query SSR_CS_INDX_BY_TERM_SYNC.
Population Selection
The Population Selection group box is a standard group box that appears on run control pages when the
Population Selection process is available or required for the transaction. Selection tools are available
based on the selection tools that your institution selected in the setup of the Population Selection process
for the application process and on your user security. Fields in the group box appear based on the
selection tool that you select. The fields behave the same way from within the group box on all run
control pages and application processes. If your institution uses a specific delivered selection tool to
identify IDs for a specific transaction, you must use it.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
79
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Select the Population Selection check box to use the Population Selection process to select the schedule of
classes that you want to be available in class search. When you select this check box, the Selection Tool
and Query Name fields become available. Oracle recommends you use the delivered queries.
80
Selection Tool
Select PS Query.
Query Name
The following queries are provided:
•
SSR_CS_INDX_BY_TERM_SESSION: Class Index by
Term and Session
•
SSR_CS_INDX_BY_TERM_SUBJECT: Class Index by
Term and Subject
•
SSR_CS_INDX_BY_TERM_SYNC: Class Index by Term
Sync
•
SSR_CS_INDX_TERM_RANGE: Class Index By Term
Range
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Running a Full Build for Class Search Index
Access the Class Search Index Full Build page (Curriculum Management, Fluid Class Search, Class
Search Index Full Build).
Image: Class Search Index Full Build page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Index Full Build page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
The full build process should be run after the initial implementation of Elasticsearch, PeopleSoft Search
Framework search definitions, and setting up class search for Fluid. The process runs for both small and
non-small form factor devices. It indicates the terms and number of classes that have had indexes built.
Warning! Running the full index build process prevents self-service class search from displaying search
results as all the indexes are rebuilt. Exercise extreme care when running this process. Make sure you run
this process only during system downtime or when students do not have access to Class Search.
Oracle recommends that a select few users should have access to this process.
You must run a full build if you make any changes (like adding or removing facets) to PeopleSoft Search
Framework. The Class Search Index Full Build page allows you to submit a full build for small and large
form factor devices. Alternatively, you can also submit a full build using the Schedule Search Index
(PeopleTools, Search Framework, Administration, Schedule Search Index).
If you do not want to run a full build, add or remove delivered facets using the Search Category page. See
Configuring PeopleSoft Search Framework for Class Search in Fluid.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
81
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Running an Incremental Build for Class Search Index
Access the Class Search Index Manager page (Curriculum Management, Fluid Class Search, Class Search
Index Manager).
Image: Class Search Index Manager
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Class Search Index Manager. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use the Class Search Index Manager page to manually trigger an incremental build. The process indicates
which class changes are to be made. This page displays pending classes that require an incremental
build, and allows the submission of an incremental build process. The incremental build process does not
prevent class search results from being displayed as not every index is rebuilt.
Scheduling an Incremental Build
To schedule an incremental build that runs automatically in the background:
1. Go to PeopleTools, Process Scheduler, Recurrences, then click Add New Value.
a. In Recurrence Name, enter a name for your schedule, then click Add.
The value you assign to Recurrence Name appears in process and job definitions, so it should be
readily identifiable.
The Recurrence Definition page appears.
b. From the Recurrence Definition page, add the frequency in which to schedule the incremental
build. For information on the fields and controls on the Recurrence Definition page, see
PeopleTools: Process Scheduler, Defining PeopleSoft Process Scheduler Support Information,
Defining Recurrence Definitions.
If you change class data frequently and you create new classes during the enrollment period, you
may wish to schedule an incremental build to run more frequently. If you create classes on the fly
82
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 5
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
during enrollment (for example, you create classes multiple times during the day), you can also
use the Class Search Index Manager as this allows you to immediately run the incremental build
process.
c. Click Save.
2. Go to PeopleTools, Process Scheduler, Jobs, then click Add New Value.
a. In Process Job Name, enter a value, then click Add.
The Job Definition page appears.
b. In the Process List region, provide the following values:
Process Type = Application Engine
Process Name = PTSF_GENFEED (Index Search Documents)
c. Click Save.
3. Go to PeopleTools, Process Scheduler, Schedule JobSet Definitions, then click Add New Value.
a. In Schedule Name, enter a value,
b. In Job Name, enter a value, then click Add.
The Schedule JobSet Definition page appears.
c. From the Schedule JobSet Definition page, set up a jobset definition for small and large form
factor devices (if you use both and want to create a schedule for both).
d. In Run Control ID, use: SSR_CLASS_SEARCH_SFF_INCR or
SSR_CLASS_SEARCH_LFF_INCR
e. Click Save.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
83
Setting Up Class Search for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Chapter 5
Removing Favorites and Recently Viewed Classes from Class Search
Access the Purge Class Search Favorites and Recently Viewed page (Records and Enrollment, Fluid Class
Search, Purge Favs, Recently Viewed .
Image: Purge Class Search Favorites and Recently Viewed
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Purge Class Search Favorites and Recently Viewed.
You can find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to remove either favorites or recently viewed classes—or both—from class search. Because
favorites and recently viewed classes are term-specific, you normally run this process at the end of the
term.
Date Prior To
Select to define the date when data should be removed.
Campus Solutions provides the following queries:
Population Selection
The Population Selection group box is a standard group box that appears on run control pages when the
Population Selection process is available or required for the transaction. Selection tools are available
based on the selection tools that your institution selected in the setup of the Population Selection process
for the application process and on your user security. Fields in the group box appear based on the
selection tool that you select. The fields behave the same way from within the group box on all run
control pages and application processes. If your institution uses a specific delivered selection tool to
identify IDs for a specific transaction, you must use it.
Select the Population Selection check box to use the Population Selection process to select the favorites
and recently viewed classes that you want to purge. When you select this check box, the Selection Tool
and Query Name fields become available.
84
Selection Tool
Select PS Query.
Query Name
The following queries are provided:
•
SSR_CS_RVF_BY_STUDENT_ID: Purge Student CS by
Student ID
•
SSR_CS_RVF_BY_TERM_RANGE: Purge Student CS by
Term
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Prerequisites for Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Before students can make payments through Student Financials self service in the classic user interface,
you must:
•
Set up SF business units.
•
Establish charge priorities.
•
Establish payment overall priorities.
•
Define Item Types for Deposit, eCheck, and credit card payments.
•
Establish an SF term default.
•
For each SF institution set established, you must create a corresponding setID and define the
corresponding tableset control value, particularly for SF11_WEB (Internet Pymnts — INSTITUTION
SET).
•
Establish at least one Payment Merchant per third party merchant ID.
•
Establish at least one SF merchant ID per payment type (credit card, eCheck, or both) that is to be
supported by your institution.
•
Select the Accept Self-Service Payments check box on all appropriate SF institution set parameters.
•
Assign an SF institution set to students.
See:
•
"Setting Up Business Units" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
•
"Setting Up SF Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
Setting Up Payment Merchants
Setting up Payment merchants enables you to set up electronic payment merchants and support the
ePayment API framework.
See "Setting Up Payment Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
See Electronic Payment Integration Developer's Reference Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1982664.1).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
85
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Setting Up SF Merchants
Setting up SF merchants enables you to set up unique credit card and eCheck processing rules for
different departments in your institution.
See "Setting Up SF Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Setting Up Institution Sets
Institution sets are used in self service for classic and Fluid user interfaces as well as Student Financials
on Campus Mobile.
This section provides an overview of institution sets and discusses how to:
•
Define basic institution set parameters.
•
Define self-service electronic payments (ePayments) for institution sets.
•
Define self-service business units for institution sets.
Important! PeopleSoft Business Interlinks is a deprecated product. The Business Interlinks class
currently exists for backward compatibility only. For new integrations, use Integration Broker instead.
Understanding Institution Sets
An institution set enables you to define parameters for the PeopleSoft Student Financials self-service
pages on classic and Fluid user interfaces, and for self-service ePayment usage for one or more business
units in an institution.
Institution sets hide the complexity of multiple business units from the student, and enable students to
access information and pay charges toward multiple business units. Institutions with only one business
unit can preserve their single-unit character by attaching only one business unit to their institution set.
You must set up an institution set and attach it to each student for any self-service features to function.
You attach the institution set to students through the User Profile process in PeopleSoft Campus
Community or individually through Student Financials Security.
Related Links
"Setting Up Business Units" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
"Preparing for User Profiles Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
86
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Pages Used to Set Up Institution Sets
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
General Options
INSTITUTION_SET_01
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Financials, SF
Institution Set, General
Options
Define basic institution set
parameters.
Electronic Payments
SSF_INST_SET_03
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Financials, SF
Institution Set, Electronic
Payments
Define parameters of
electronic payments.
Institution Set Privacy Policy
SSF_INST_SET_04
Click the Privacy Policy link
on the Electronic Payments
page.
Define a privacy policy for
your institution.
Business Units
INSTITUTION_SET_02
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Financials, SF
Institution Set, Business
Units
Define business unit
parameters.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
87
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Defining Basic Institution Set Parameters
Access the General Options page ((Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student
Financials, SF Institution Set, General Options).
Image: General Options page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the General Options page (1 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
88
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Image: General Options page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the General Options page (2 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Base Currency
Select the type of currency that you want to use for your credit
card transactions. The default value for this field is the base
currency from SF Business Unit setup.
Self Service Options
Accept Self Service Payments
Select to accept self-service payments over the internet. This
selection is specific to this institution set, not to the SF business
units that are attached on the Business Units page. Selecting this
option requires that you attach at least one SF business unit that
is defined to accept self-service payments.
Accept Miscellaneous Purchases
Select to allow students to select and purchase items or services.
This flag controls whether the Accept Miscellaneous Purchases
option appears in the Other Financial drop-down list in Student
Center and whether the link appears at the bottom of the
Account Inquiry page.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Allow Payment Plan Enrollment
Select to allow students to enroll in payment plans. This flag
controls whether the Payment Plan option appears in the Other
Financial drop-down list in Student Center and whether the link
appears at the bottom of the Account Inquiry page.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Display 1098–T Self Service
Select to display and to allow access to the 1098-T Self
Service option for students in this institution set. This check
box controls whether the 1098-T option appears in the other
financial drop-down list box in Student Center and whether the
link appears at the bottom of the Account Inquiry page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
89
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Display Student Permissions
U.S. Department of Education regulations require that federal
financial-aid awards be used to pay only allowable charges for
the period of enrollment covered by the aid year in which those
funds were awarded. Regulations require schools to collect
individual authorization from a student to allow funds to pay for
nonallowable charges such as library fines and parking fees or
for charges for the prior year immediately preceding the current
aid year.
Select to allow access to the Grant Student Permissions option
for students in this institution set.
The student cannot revoke permission using Self Service; only
the administrator can do this.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Grant Student Permissions
Select to display and to allow access to the Grant Permissions
option for students in this institution set.
This check box appears only if the Display Student Permissions
check box is selected.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Tuition Calc Required (tuition
calculation required)
Select if you want the system to automatically calculate tuition
whenever a student accesses the Account Inquiry component or
the Make a Payment component. The system calculates tuition
in self service only if the following four conditions are met:
•
The self service Tuition Calc Required check box in the SF
Institution Set component is selected.
•
The Calc Required column value is equal to Y in the STDNT
_CAR_TERM table.
•
The student is activated in the term.
•
The Auto Calculate Self Service check box on the Tuition
Calculation Control page is selected for the term.
See "Specifying Tuition Calculation Parameters"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
90
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Note: The system does not automatically calculate tuition
when a student accesses the Student Center. In addition, tuition
calculation is never invoked from the Student Services Center or
Student Services Center (Student). Therefore, consider selecting
the Display Tuition Calc Message check box so that the student
knows that the balance that appears on the Student Center might
not reflect recent changes and the student has to access the
Account Inquiry page for the updated balance.
Consider your use of the Tuition Calc Required check box
carefully. Requiring tuition calculation uses a great deal of
system processing resources, but account balances might not
otherwise reflect recent changes.
Days in future for 'due now'
Based on the number of days you enter here, the system controls
the due now and future due dollar amounts displayed on
the Student Center page as well as on the Account Inquiry Account Summary page. The formula used to calculate the due
now amount is any charges incurred through the current date
plus the number of days specified in this field. The formula used
to calculate the future due amount is any charges incurred after
the current date plus the number of days specified in this field.
Any charges incurred through the current date plus the number
of future days entered in this field controls both the amount
due now and the future due amount. Enter the number of future
days.
For further information, refer to the Example of How the Days
in Future Field Is Calculated documentation.
Display Tuition Calc Message
Manage My Bank Accounts
Select to display the following tuition calculation messages for
students:
•
If you select the Tuition Calc Required check box and
the Auto Calculate Self Service check box, and the Calc
Required column value is equal to Y in the STDNT_CAR
_TERM table for a student, this message appears on the
Student Center page: This may not reflect recent changes
to your tuition and fees. For an updated balance, click on
Account Inquiry.
•
If you do not select the Tuition Calc Required check box,
then regardless of the Calc Required column value and
whether you select the Auto Calculate Self Service check
box, this message appears on the Student Center, Account
Summary, and Charge Details pages: This may not reflect
recent changes to your tuition and fees.
Select to enable the Manage My Bank Accounts component in
classic Self Service. Students use the component to set up and
maintain their bank account details in the classic user interface.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
91
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Allow Change in Country
Chapter 6
Select to allow students to set the country and currency of their
bank account in the Manage My Bank Accounts Self Service
page. Otherwise, the country is derived from the Installation
Table: Settings and Defaults page, and the currency is derived
from the SF Institution Set setup.
This check box is available only when you select the Manage
My Bank Accounts check box. By default, Allow Change in
Country is deselected.
See:
•
Using Account Services
•
"Selecting General Installation Options" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Allow Use in Service
When you select this check box, SSF_FINANCIALS web
service extracts student account information. However, if you
use SSF_FINANCIALS web service and this check box is
deselected and the institution set is attached to a student, the
web service throws an error and cannot extract student account
information.
You also select this check box to enable the Maximum
Payments in Service field.
When you select this check box and define a value in Maximum
Payments in Service, you limit the number of payments
retrieved for payment history in Fluid user interface.
See :
Maximum Payments in Service
•
Managing Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface
•
"Using the SSF_FINANCIALS Web Service" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
Set the number of payment rows that SSF_FINANCIALS web
service should return.
SSF_FINANCIALS web service extracts and then sends the
number of payment rows that you define in this field.
See "Using the SSF_EPAYMENT_TRANS Web Service"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
Direct Deposit Enrollment
92
If you select this check box, the Enroll in Direct Deposit
component is available in Self Service. Students use the
component to enroll in direct deposit and specify how refunds
are distributed between their bank accounts.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
See Understanding Student Financials Self Service.
Example of How the Days in Future Field Is Calculated
This table is an example of how charges and payments are displayed, based on what you define in the
Days in future for 'due now' field:
Charge
Date Incurred
Amount
Tuition
July 1, 2006
1,000.00 USD
Fee
September 5, 2006
50.00 USD
Room
November 1, 2006
500.00 USD
If the current date is September 1, 2006, and you enter 35 in the Days in future for 'due now' field, then
the due now charges will equal 1,050.00 USD and the future due will equal 500.00 USD.
If the current date is October 1, 2006, and you enter 35 in the Days in future for 'due now' field, then the
charges due now will equal 1,550.00 USD, and the future charges will equal zero.
Fluid Options
Use this grid to enable and set up Direct Deposit Enrollment in Fluid user interface.
Direct Deposit Enrollment
Select to allow students to enroll in direct deposit for Fluid user
interface.
If you select this check box, make sure the following fields are
deselected, and fields with values should be blank:
•
In the Self Service Options grid: Manage My Bank
Accounts, Allow Change in Country, Direct Deposit
Enrollment
•
Manage Bank Options grid and corresponding fields
•
Direct Deposit Options grid and corresponding fields
•
Manage Banks Service Impact on the Business Units page.
See Defining Self-Service Business Units for Institution
Sets.
Allow Change in Country
Select to allow students to set the country and currency of their
bank account for Fluid user interface. Otherwise, the country is
derived from the Installation Table: Settings and Defaults page,
and the currency is derived from the SF Institution Set setup.
Allow Revocation
Select to allow students to delete a bank account that has been
set up for direct deposit in Fluid user interface. When you select
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
93
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
this, a Revoke Direct Deposit button appears on the Direct
Deposit page.
See Managing Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
Account Inquiry
The selections made in this group box determine what students see in the Account Inquiry self-service
component (SSF_SS_ACCT_SUMM) on classic and Fluid user interfaces. For instance, if you clear the
Display Account Activity check box, students do not see the activity page. Check boxes that are indented
below a check box refer to more specific options related to the display feature on that page.
Display Account Activity
Select to display the Account Activity page, including charges,
payments, financial aid, and refunds for the student. The activity
is controlled by filter options on the activity page—the system
displays six months of activity by default.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Display Charges Due
Select to display the Charges Due page. Four grids are displayed
on this page, three of which are optional: Display Due Date
Detail, Display Charge Detail, and Display Invoice Due.
The Display Charges Due grid rolls up all charges by unique
due date to be presented as a summary to the student.
The Display Due Date Detail grid displays the details of all
charges rolled up by unique due date.
The Display Charge Detail grid displays the details of each
charge. On this grid, the student has the opportunity to look
deeper into charges containing multiple due dates.
The Display Invoice Due grid display details of charges by
billing invoice ID date.
Note: Display Charge Detail and Display Invoice Due are not
used in Fluid functionality.
Display Payment History
Select to display the Payments page. You can also choose
to allow payment drilldown. For any successfully posted
payments, the student can see which charges were reduced by
those payments if the Allow payment drilldown check box is
selected.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Display Pending Payments
Select to display the student's pending payments on the
following pages:
Account Inquiry - Account Summary tab: What I Owe grid.
Account Inquiry - Payments tab: Pending Payments grid.
94
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
If this check box is cleared, then the student's pending payments
do not appear anywhere in self service.
Note: This is not used for hosted payment.
Include Pending Payments
If this check box is selected, then the student's balance is
reduced by the pending payment amount. This check box must
be used in conjunction with the Display Pending Payments
check box for the remaining balance amount to be reduced by
any pending payments made.
If this check box is selected, the total due amount is reduced by
the pending payment amount on the Account Inquiry - Account
Summary tab: What I Owe grid.
If this check box is cleared, then the total due amount is not
reduced by the pending payment amount on the Account Inquiry
- Account Summary tab: What I Owe grid. The remaining
balance amount is not reduced by the pending payment amount.
Note: This is not used for hosted payment.
Display Pending Financial Aid
Select to display anticipated aid as a line item on the Account
Inquiry - Account Summary tab: What I Owe grid and the
Account Inquiry - Pending Financial Aid page.
If this check box is selected, anticipated aid appears on the
pages as a line item only and does not reduce the remaining
balance amount. Students are informed of any anticipated aid,
but their total charges are not reduced by the anticipated aid.
If this check box is cleared, then the student's anticipated aid
does not appear anywhere in the Account Inquiry self-service
component (SSF_SS_ACCT_SUMM).
Include Pending Financial Aid
If this check box is selected, the student's balance is reduced
by the anticipated aid amount. This check box must be used
in conjunction with the Display Pending Financial Aid check
box for the remaining balance amount to be reduced by any
anticipated aid.
If this check box is selected, the total due amount is reduced by
the anticipated (or pending financial) aid amount on the Account
Inquiry - Account Summary tab: What I Owe grid.
If it is cleared, then the total due amount is not reduced by
the anticipated aid amount on the Account Inquiry - Account
Summary tab: What I Owe grid. The remaining balance amount
is not reduced by the pending financial aid amount.
Include Fin Aid in Payments (include Select to include financial aid disbursements with all
financial aid in payments)
other payments. If this check box is cleared, financial aid
disbursements appear in a separate financial aid activity line on
the Payment History page. If your institution does not disburse
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
95
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
financial aid, select this option to eliminate financial aid activity
lines.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Manage Bank Options
This group box provides additional configuration for bank account setup and maintenance.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Additional Details URL
The values available in this field are based on the PeopleTools
URL identifier.
If you select a value here, the Additional Details link appears
on the Manage My Bank Accounts - Agreement page. When
students click the link, they access the URL that you have set up
here.
Help URL
The values available in this field are based on the PeopleTools
URL identifier.
If you select a value here, the Help link appears on the Manage
My Bank Accounts - Add Bank Account Details page and the
Manage My Bank Accounts - Edit Bank Account Details. When
students click the link, they access the URL that you have set up
here.
Display Agreement
If you select this check box, the Manage My Bank Accounts Agreement page appears when students create their initial bank
account and the Agreement table (Bank Account) is updated.
The agreement does not appear when students add subsequent
bank information.
Direct Deposit Options
This group box provides additional configuration for direct deposit setup and maintenance.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Additional Details URL
The values available in this field are based on the PeopleTools
URL identifier.
If you select a value here, the Additional Details link appears on
the Enroll in Direct Deposit - Agreement page. When students
click the link, they access the URL that you have set up here.
Help URL
96
The values available in this field are based on the PeopleTools
URL identifier.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
If you select a value here, the Help link appears on the Enroll
in Direct Deposit - Add Direct Deposit page and the Enroll in
Direct Deposit - Edit Direct Deposit page. When students click
the link, they access the URL that you have set up here.
Maximum Distributions
Use this field to control the maximum number of direct deposit
distributions that a student can set up in Self Service.
A value of 1 appears by default.
You can only enter whole numbers—for example, 4.5 is not
allowed.
Enter a value of 1 if you want refunds to always be disbursed to
only one account.
Display Subsequent Agreement
If you select this check box, then, after the student has signed
an initial agreement (using the Direct Deposit Agreement page
- DD Enroll), an Agreement page appears every time that the
student edits the direct deposit instructions. The Agreement
table (DD Change) is also updated. (The Direct Deposit
Agreement page does not require any setup here—it appears
automatically when a student enrolls in direct deposit).
See:
•
Using Account Services
•
"Understanding Student Financials General Setup" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
•
"Understanding Refunding Setup" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
•
"Understanding Refunds" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
•
AP Direct Deposit Setups UPK
Defining Self-Service ePayments for Institution Sets
Important! PeopleSoft Business Interlinks is a deprecated product. The Business Interlinks class
currently exists for backward compatibility only. For new integrations, use Integration Broker instead.
A flexible interface supports the processing of credit card and eCheck transactions
A flexible interface supports the processing of credit card and eCheck transactions. The interface uses
a flexible adapter-based model to support the transmission of electronic payment transactions. You can
use either the Integration Broker-based interface or the Business Interlinks interface to send electronic
payment transactions to third party payment processors.
If you use Integration Broker, it supports the capture of the Security Code. Capturing this code lowers
your transaction costs and increases fraud deterrence on card not present transactions.
See:
•
"Understanding ePayment Processing" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
97
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
98
Chapter 6
•
"Understanding ePayment Transactions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
•
Electronic Payment Integration Developer's Reference Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1982664.1).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Access the Electronic Payments page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student
Financials, SF Institution Set, Electronic Payments).
Image: Electronic Payments page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Electronic Payments page (1 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
99
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Image: Electronic Payments page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Electronic Payments page (2 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
100
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Note: Most of the fields on the Electronic Payments page are specific to each business unit in the
institution set, not to the institution set as a whole. If you have multiple business units associated with the
institution set, be sure to insert a row and enter the information on the Electronic Payments page for each
business unit. Also, if you have more than one business unit associated with your institution set, you must
enter a priority ranking for each (see following). The exceptions to this are the service impact and service
indicator codes, which are institution set-specific, not business unit-specific.
To control what charges the student can pay towards in self service, you must ensure that the item type
contains the correct charge priority list. The charge priority list that you assign to the eCheck item type
can differ from the credit card item type. In this way, you can control whether particular charges can be
paid by one payment method versus another. Be sure to specify the correct tender category (eCheck or
credit card) on the item type so that it is available to select here.
Accept Self Service Payments
This is a display-only field that shows whether Accept Self
Service Payments has been selected in the General Options
setup. This means that web credit card payments are authorized
for this business unit.
Accept Miscellaneous Purchases
This is a display-only field that shows whether Accept
Miscellaneous Purchases has been selected in the General
Options setup.
Electronic Payments
Default Address
Select to make the address fields on the Make a Payment Specify Payment Details page available for input.
Default Telephone
Select to make the telephone field on the Make a Payment Specify Payment Details page available for input.
Default Email Address
Select to make the email field on the Make a Payment - Specify
Payment Details page available for input.
Display Browser Message
Select this check box:
•
To display a browser message on the Make a Payment Confirm Payment page when hosted payment is used.
•
To display the Browser Requirements link on the Make a
Payment - Confirm Payment page when hosted payment is
used.
You define the browser requirements message and detail on the
Payment Merchant page.
See "Defining Electronic Payment Merchants" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Enforce Daily Limit and Daily Limit Select the Enforce Daily Limit check box to limit the number of
self-service payments a student can make per day to the value
that you enter in the Daily Limit field. For example, if you set
up and institution set with both a credit card merchant ID and an
electronic check merchant ID, and enter a daily limit of 4, then
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
101
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
a student can make any combination of eCheck and credit card
transactions up to a maximum of four total transactions per day.
If a student exceeds the limit, the system prevents the student
from making additional self-service payments until the
following day.
Display Privacy Policy
Select to display the Privacy Policy link on the Make a Payment
- Confirm Payment page if a school uses the hosted payment
feature and on the Make a Payment - Specify Payment Details
page if the school does not use the hosted payment feature.
The privacy policy is optional and user defined.
Privacy Policy
Click to access the Institution Set Privacy Policy page and
define a privacy policy for your institution.
Make a Payment
Important! PeopleSoft Business Interlinks is a deprecated product. The Business Interlinks class
currently exists for backward compatibility only. For new integrations, use Integration Broker instead.
Your selections here determine what students see in the Make a Payment self-service component. For
instance, if you clear the Display Pending Financial Aid check box, then the student's anticipated aid is
not displayed anywhere in the Make a Payment self-service component.
SF Credit Card Merchant ID and SF Select a credit card SF merchant ID, an eCheck SF merchant ID,
eCheck Merchant ID
or both for an institution set. This determines which payment
type is supported for this institution set: credit card only, eCheck
only, or both.
If you select a value in both the SF Credit Card Merchant ID
and the SF eCheck Merchant ID fields, the Select Payment
Method page prompts students to select one of two payment
types from the drop-down list box—Pay by Credit Card or Pay
by Electronic Check,—before they are permitted to enter selfservice payment information. If you select a value in only one of
these fields, then the system takes students directly to the Make
a Payment - Specify Payment Details page because only one
valid tender option is available for self-service payment.
The Make a Payment page using Fluid user interface always
begins with Step 1, Select Payment Method. See Making
Electronic Payments.
Note: Depending on the charge priority rules assigned to the
ePayment item type, the student may not be presented with all
charges to pay—the student is presented only those charges that
are a part of the charge priority list that is associated with the
ePayment credit card or eCheck item type.
102
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Payment Merchant
The check boxes are selected or cleared by default depending
on the setup on the SF Merchants page and are not available for
edit on this page.
Note: If both credit card and eCheck are available as payment
methods for an institution set, both payment methods must
be either hosted or non-hosted. For example, if you define
an institution set that allows credit card payment with hosted
payment and eCheck with non-hosted payment, you receive
an error message advising that SF merchants have conflicting
payment merchant values.
You can, however, use Business Interlink for one payment
method and Integration Broker for another.
Also, across features, you can use both hosted and non-hosted
payment—for example, you can use hosted payment for Make a
Payment setup and non-hosted for Miscellaneous Fees setup.
See "Understanding ePayment Processing" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Allocation Level
Use the allocation level to define how charges and payments are
displayed on a self-service page.
Allocation Level By Business Unit
This page displays all charges that the student incurred by business unit on the Make a Payment selfservice component. Displaying charges in this manner forces the student to pay all or a portion of the
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
103
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
charges by business unit. The Student Financials posting process invokes the appropriate charge priority
and payment overall priority rules to the self-service payments.
Image: Allocation Level By Business Unit page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Allocation Level By Business Unit page (1 of 2).
You can find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Image: Allocation Level By Business Unit page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Allocation Level By Business Unit page (2 of 2).
You can find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Allocation Level by Charge
This page displays each charge that the student incurred individually by business unit on the Make a
Payment self-service component. Displaying charges in this manner permits the student to pay all or a
104
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
portion of each charge. The Student Financials posting process bypasses the established charge priority
and payment overall priority rules and uses the amounts that the student indicates during the self-service
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
105
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
transaction. The resulting effect is that the student can choose which charges to pay, thus creating a
scenario in which older, more pressing charges can be ignored while newer charges can be reduced.
Image: Allocation Level by Charge page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Allocation Level by Charge page (1 of 2). You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
106
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Image: Allocation Level by Charge page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Allocation Level by Charge page (2 of 2). You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Allocation Level by Term
This page displays all charges that the student incurred by term within each business unit on the Make
a Payment self-service component. Displaying charges in this manner permits the student to pay all
or a portion of a term's charges—these charges are aggregated by business unit whereby the student
cannot pay each individual charge. The Student Financials posting process invokes the appropriate charge
priority and payment overall priority rules to the self-service payments.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
107
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Note: For the Allocation Level by Term feature to work, you must set Term, Payment Term First for Sort
1 of the Charge Sort for Payment Overall Priority attribute for applicable ePayment item types.
Image: Allocation Level by Term page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Allocation Level by Term page (1 of 2). You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
108
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Image: Allocation Level by Term page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Allocation Level by Term page (2 of 2). You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Allow Excess Payment
Select to allow students to make ePayments in excess of their
balance due.
Accept Admissions Deposit
Select to accept payment for admissions deposits by credit
card over the internet. The application center does not accept
payment by eCheck.
Set the parameters for the real-time posting of credit card transactions.
Post Offline Authorization
Select to post transactions in real time, even though you
authorize the transactions through a batch process. This field is
available only if you do not select the Credit Card Authorization
option on the SF Merchants page.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Post Unprocessed Authorization
Select to post credit card transactions that fail while performing
real-time authorization due to a connection problem. If you
cleared this check box, the system posts only transactions with
fully processed authorizations.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
109
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Note: Consider the implications if transactions posted in real
time fail authorization when processed at a later point in time (
such as payment reversals and discharge of service indicators).
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Reverse Declined Authorization
Select to automatically reverse a posted transaction when a
credit card transaction is declined. This option should always
be selected if you choose to post transactions with payments
authorized offline (see above).
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Your next selections determine what students see in the Make a Payment self-service component. For
instance, if you clear the Display Pending Financial Aid check box, then the student's anticipated aid is
not displayed anywhere in the Make a Payment self-service component.
Display Pending Financial Aid
Select to display anticipated aid as a line item on the Make a
Payment - Specify Payment Amount page in the What I Owe
grid. With this check box selected, anticipated aid appears on
the page as a line item only and does not reduce the remaining
balance amount. Students are informed of any anticipated aid,
but their total charges are not reduced by the anticipated aid.
If this check box is cleared, then the student's anticipated aid
does not appear anywhere in the Make a Payment self-service
component.
Include Pending Aid – Payments
Select to use pending financial aid to reduce the remaining
balance amounts on the Make a Payment - Specify Payment
Amount page. This check box must be used in conjunction with
the Display Pending Financial Aid check box for the remaining
balance amount to be reduced by anticipated aid.
If this check box is selected, the student's total charges are
reduced and the student is informed of any anticipated aid.
If Display Pending Financial Aid and this check box are both
cleared, then the student's anticipated aid does not appear
anywhere in the Make a Payment self-service component.
Display Pending Payments
Select to display the student's pending payments on the Make
a Payment - Payments page and the Make a Payment - Specify
Payment Amount page.
If this check box is cleared, then the student's pending payments
do not appear anywhere in the Make a Payment self-service
component.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Include Pending Payments
110
If this check box is selected, then the student's balance is
reduced by the payment amount. This check box must be used
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
in conjunction with the Display Pending Payments check
box for the remaining balance amount to be reduced by any
payments made.
If Display Pending Payments and this check box are both
cleared, then the student's pending payments do not appear
anywhere in the Make a Payment self-service component.
Note: This is not used in Fluid functionality.
Miscellaneous Fees
Important! PeopleSoft Business Interlinks is a deprecated product. The Business Interlinks class
currently exists for backward compatibility only. For new integrations, use Integration Broker instead.
Note: This group box is not used in Fluid functionality.
Use these fields if your institution wants to set up separate merchant IDs for miscellaneous purchases as
opposed to regular tuition payments.
SF Credit Card Merchant ID and SF Select a credit card SF merchant ID, an eCheck SF merchant ID,
eCheck Merchant ID
or both for miscellaneous fees. This determines which payment
type is supported for this institution set: credit card only, eCheck
only, or both. If you select a value in both the SF Credit Card
Merchant ID and SF eCheck Merchant ID fields, the Select
Payment Method page prompts students to select one of two
payment types from the drop-down list box—Pay by Credit
Card or Pay by Electronic Check—before they are permitted to
enter self-service payment information. If you select a value in
only one field, the system takes students directly to the Make a
Payment - Specify Payment Details page because only one valid
tender option is available for self-service payment.
For miscellaneous purchases, the setup on the Purchase Items
setup component (SSF_PUR_ITEM_TABLE) determines the
items that are presented for purchase. Because these are optional
purchases, they do not exist until the student (or user) elects
to purchase these items. Because these are paid for at the time
of selection, charge priority rules do not affect miscellaneous
purchases.
Payment Merchant
The check boxes are selected or cleared by default depending
on the setup on the SF Merchants page and are not available for
edit on this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
111
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Note: If both credit card and echeck are available as payment
methods for an institution set, both payment methods must
be either hosted or non-hosted. For example, if you define
an institution set that allows credit card payment with hosted
payment and eCheck with non-hosted payment, you receive
an error message advising that SF merchants have conflicting
payment merchant values.
You can, however, use Business Interlink for one payment
method and Integration Broker for another. (For credit cards,
Security Code is supported only by Integration Broker).
Also, across features, you can use both hosted and non-hosted
payment—for example, you can use hosted payment for Make a
Payment setup and non-hosted for Miscellaneous Fees setup.
See "Understanding ePayment Processing" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Student Financials) .
112
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Defining Self-Service Business Units for Institution Sets
Access the Business Units page ((Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student Financials,
SF Institution Set, Business Units).
Image: Business Units page (1 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Business Units page (1 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
113
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Image: Business Units page (2 of 2)
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Business Units page (2 of 2). You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
This page is used for both classic and fluid self service.
Note: Most of the fields on the SF Institution Set - Business Units page are specific to each business unit
in the institution set, not to the institution set as a whole. If you have multiple business units associated
with the institution set, be sure to insert a row and enter the information on the SF Institution Set Business Units page for each business unit. Also, if you have more than one business unit associated with
your institution set, you must enter a priority ranking for each (see below). The exceptions to this are the
service impact and service indicator codes, which are institution-set-specific, not business-unit-specific.
To control what charges the student can pay towards in self service, you must ensure that the item type
contains the correct charge priority list. The charge priority list that you assign to the eCheck item type
can differ from the credit card item type. In this way, you can control whether particular charges can be
paid by one payment method versus another. Be sure to specify the correct tender category (eCheck or
credit card) on the item type so that it is available to select here.
Business Unit
114
Enter the business unit that you want to include in this
institution set.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Contact Information
Note: This group box is not used in Fluid functionality.
Location Code
Select a location code to display a remittance address on the
Account Summary and Total Due Charges pages.
Contact
Select the ID of the individual assigned to be the contact person
in the event of web credit card transaction problems.
Email ID
Enter the email address of the contact person.
Telephone
Enter the telephone number of the contact person.
Ext (extension)
Enter the telephone extension of the contact person (if
applicable).
Manage Banks Service Impact
Note: This group box is not used in Fluid functionality. If Direct Deposit Enrollment is enabled for fluid
self service, then this grid is disabled.
Use the Disable Manage My Banks service impact to remove student access to the Manage My Bank
Accounts pages in Self Service. If a student has this service impact, the student cannot set up new bank
accounts or edit existing bank account details. This service impact does not prevent direct deposit refunds
from being distributed to existing bank accounts.
After you verify that the student cannot access the Manage My Bank Accounts component in Self
Service, revoke the bank agreement if one exists.
Manage Direct Deposit Service Impact
Use Disable Direct Deposit service impact to prevent a student from accessing the Direct Deposit page in
Fluid self service. This could be a temporary action because of fraud or a similar event.
See Managing Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
Payment Service Impact
Disable Internet Payment
Select the negative service impact code that the system uses to
disable a customer's ability to pay on the internet using a credit
card. If students have this impact on their account, they cannot
access the Make a Payment page.
Override Daily Limit
Select the positive service impact code that the system uses
to enable customers to bypass the daily limit for credit card
payments. If students have this impact on their account, they can
make credit card payments in excess of the daily limit.
Accept Self-Service Payments
This is a display-only field that shows whether Accept Self
Service Payments has been selected in the General Options
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
115
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
setup. This means that web credit-card payments are authorized
for this business unit.
Make a Payment
Credit Card Item Type
Enter the item type that the system uses for self-service credit
card transactions entered for this institution set.
Note: The payment item type that you select must specify credit
card as a tender type.
eCheck Item Type
Enter the item type that the system uses for self-service eCheck
transactions entered for this institution set.
Note: The payment item type that you select must specify
electronic check as a tender type.
See "Setting Up Item Types and Item Type Groups" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Deposit Item Type
If you accept web credit card payments for admission deposits,
select the item type that is defined for admission deposits.
Primary Business Unit
Select to designate the business unit as the one to which the
system assigns ePayment transaction surcharges.
Note: You can designate only one business unit per institution
set as the primary business unit.
Convenience Fee Account Type
If you charge a convenience fee on credit card transactions,
select the account to which the system posts charges resulting
from a credit card transaction convenience fee.
Note: If you charge a convenience fee, the payment item type
used for credit card transactions must include the account type
of your convenience fee item type on the account type page.
See "Setting Up Item Types and Item Type Groups" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Convenience Fee Item Type
If you charge a convenience fee on credit card transactions,
select the item type that the system uses when posting charges
resulting from a credit card transaction convenience fee.
Note: If you are charging a convenience fee, the item type
specified here must be included in one of the Allowable Charges
tree nodes in the charge priority list used by the credit-card
payment item type. This charge priority list is specified on the
item type miscellaneous page.
116
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
See "Setting Up Item Types and Item Type Groups" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Excess Payment Account
Select the account to which the system posts credit card
payments in excess of customer balances. If it is different , this
selection overrides the excess payment account that you select
in the Posting Setup 1 page of the SF Business Unit component
(BUSINESS_UNIT_SF).
Excess Payment Description
Enter the label that you want to display for excess payments.
This description overrides the description of the item type for
credit-card payment and appears on the Allocate Payment page
in the Future Charges section.
Payment Reversal
Service Indicator CD
Select the negative service indicator code that the system
attaches to student records when transaction authorizations fail
and payments are reversed.
Miscellaneous Fees
This setup allows different payment item types and convenience fee item types to be used as opposed to
the regular Make a Payment item types.
Note: This group box is not used in Fluid functionality.
Credit Card Item Type
Enter the item type that the system uses for self-service credit
card transactions entered for this institution set for paying for
miscellaneous purchases.
Note: The payment item type that you select must specify credit
card as a tender type.
eCheck Item Type
Enter the item type that the system uses for self-service
eCheck transactions entered for this institution set to pay for
miscellaneous purchases.
Note: The payment item type that you select must specify
electronic check as a tender type.
See "Setting Up Item Types and Item Type Groups" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Convenience Fee Account Type
If you are charging a convenience fee on credit card transactions
for miscellaneous purchases, select the account to which the
system posts charges resulting from a credit-card transaction
convenience fee.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
117
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Note: If you are charging a convenience fee, the payment item
type used for credit card transactions must include the account
type of your convenience fee item type on the account type
page.
See "Setting Up Item Types and Item Type Groups" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Convenience Fee Item Type
If you are charging a convenience fee on credit card
transactions, select the item type that the system uses when
posting charges resulting from a credit card transaction
convenience fee.
Note: If you are charging a convenience fee, the item type
specified here must be included in one of the Allowable Charges
tree nodes in the charge priority list used by the credit card
payment item type. This charge priority list is specified on the
item type miscellaneous page.
See "Setting Up Item Types and Item Type Groups" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Setting Up Self-Service Options
This section discusses how to define business unit labels that are used in classic and fluid user interfaces.
Page Used to Set Up Self-Service Options
118
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
SF Self Service Options
SS_SF_OPTIONS
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Financials, SF Self
Service Options
Define business unit labels.
The values that you enter here
are used in the View By dropdown list boxes and in grids
on self-service pages.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Defining Business Unit Labels
Access the SF Self Service Options page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student
Financials, SF Self Service Options).
Image: SF Self Service Options page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the SF Self Service Options page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Business Unit Label
Enter the label that appears on all self-service pages that
reference the business unit: table headings, filters, column
headings, and so on.
Short Business Unit Label
SSF_FINANCIALS web service uses the value in this field.
The value is captured through the BUSINESS_UNIT_
LOVDescrShort element of the XML.
See "Using the SSF_EPAYMENT_TRANS Web Service"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
Setting Up Miscellaneous Fees
Miscellaneous fees are charges that are separate from tuition that can be selected and paid for in one
transaction. In the self service classic interface, students can select and purchase items or services, for
example, parking or a health plan. The user does not need to be a student (especially for nonterm-based
fees).
This section discusses how to:
•
Set up a purchase category.
•
Set up purchase items.
•
Enable self-service miscellaneous purchases.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
119
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
Pages Used to Set Up Miscellaneous Fees
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Purchase Category
SSF_PUR_CATEGORY
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Financials, Purchase
Category
Set up a purchase category.
Purchase Items
SSF_PUR_ITEM_TBL
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Student Financials, Purchase
Items
Set up fee structure for
purchase of miscellaneous
items.
Setting Up a Purchase Category
Access the Purchase Category page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student
Financials, Purchase Category).
Image: Purchase Category page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Purchase Category page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
120
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Setting Up Purchase Items
Access the Purchase Items page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student Financials,
Purchase Items).
Image: Purchase Items page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Purchase Items page. You can find definitions for
the fields and controls later on this page.
Description
Enter a description of the purchase item. This appears in the
self-service component for available items.
Long Description
Enter a more detailed description of the purchase item. In the
Purchase Miscellaneous Items self-service component (SSF_SS
_MISC_PUR), the long description appears when you click the
link of the available item.
Setup for
Select from the following list of values to determine what
population can view miscellaneous items for purchase on self
service.
•
All Term Activated Students: The term is available.
•
All Users: The fee is set up for all users, regardless of
student status. student attributes and student groups are not
available.
•
Student Groups: Any ID placed in a group sees this charge
on self service.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
121
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 6
The item is set up only for members of a student group, for
example, honors students, veterans, and so on.
Items that are set up with this attribute appear only as
available items for purchase for student IDs that have been
added to the student group.
•
Students Who Match Attributes: The student must have a
record in STDNT_CAR_TERM. The Term field in level one
is available. The Student Groups field is not available for
entry. Fees that are set up with this attribute appear only to
students matching the attributes in the Student Attributes
area.
Fee Setup
Effective Date
The start date. Prior to this date, the item is not eligible for
selection in self service.
Status
Active or Inactive.
Expiration Date
The end date. The item is not available for selection using self
service after this date.
Term
Appears only for Students Who Match Attributes and All Term
Activated Student selections.
This limits the item to a specific term and is used in conjunction
with the effective date and expiration date that do not fall
into the start and end dates of the term. For fees that have
overlapping effective and expiration date ranges, for example,
supplemental health insurance, you can add multiple terms to
cover the item for purchase.
Purchase Category
Select a purchase category.
Account Type
Use to classify the charge item type.
Item Type
Define an item type for the charge.
Amount
Enter the amount to be charged for the item.
Student Attributes
The Student Attributes group box does not appear if the institution selects All Term Activated Students or
All Users in the Setup for field on this page.
If Student Group is selected in the Setup for field on this page, the Student Group field appears. Select a
student group.
If Students Who Match Attributes is selected in the Setup for field on this page, select a value for each of
the following fields:
122
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 6
Setting Up Student Financials Self Service
•
Academic Career
•
Primary Prog (primary program)
•
Campus
•
Academic Load
•
Tuition Group
Enabling Self-Service Miscellaneous Purchases
To enable self-service miscellaneous purchases, select the Accept Miscellaneous Purchases check box
on the Institution Set page. This check box controls whether the Accept Miscellaneous Purchases option
appears in the other financial drop-down list box in Student Center and whether the link appears at the
bottom of the Account Inquiry page.
See Setting Up Institution Sets.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
123
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Understanding Campus Self Service for Financial Aid
Important! Financial Aid Notification (FAN) letter is a deprecated product. Support will be maintained
for this product, but no new development will be produced for FAN. It is strongly recommended that you
use Communication Generation (Comm Gen) instead. For more information on Comm Gen, see "Using
the Communication Generation Process" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Financial Aid Self Service enables students to view financial aid information and take necessary action.
Students can report awards they earned from sources external to the financial aid office. They can
accept, decline, and reduce award amounts and then print the Financial Award Notification (FAN).
After accepting an award, a student can select a lender to secure the loan and then fulfill loan counseling
requirements. Students can also request a change to their financial aid, cancel their aid, or request a
meeting through the Request Counselor Action feature.
Students can view a summary of and detailed information about their financial aid for a specific aid year,
which includes:
•
estimated financial aid budget, expected family contribution, estimated need, total aid, and remaining
need
•
type of award and the offered and accepted amount for each term within the aid year
•
loan application status, loan amount, loan fee, net amount, scheduled disbursement data, and lender
information
Financial Aid Self Service is accessible using classic or PeopleSoft Fluid User interface.
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
Setting Up Self-Service Inquiry Options
Page Used to Set Up Self-Service Inquiry Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Inquiry
SS_FA_INSTALL
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Inquiry
Define self-service options.
Set up information that you
want available for students to
view.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
125
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Defining Self-Service Options
Access the Inquiry page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Inquiry).
Image: Inquiry page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Inquiry page. You can find definitions for the fields
and controls later on this page.
Use this page to define financial aid elements on classic and fluid interfaces that students can view online.
Display Data
Allow Access
Select to allow students to view and make decisions about their
awards for your institution and aid year in self service classic
and fluid interfaces. If you clear the check box, students cannot
access the self-service inquiry and award package pages for the
corresponding year. For example, if the awards are in transition
or not ready for viewing, you can clear the check box to prevent
all students from viewing their awards.
Note: Use the Inquiry Access check box and the Award Access
field on the Packaging Status Summary page to set access at the
individual student level. If you clear the Inquiry Access check
box, the student cannot access the inquiry pages. However, if
you select the Inquiry Access check box and also select the
Allow Access check box on the Self Service Inquiry page, the
student can access the inquiry pages. Similarly, if you set the
Award Access field to Allowed and select the Allow Access
check box on the Self Service Inquiry page, the student can
access the self-service award pages. The administrative user can
set these fields in batch.
Award Detail
126
Select to display the Financial Aid Award Summary page for
classic and fluid interfaces. If you clear the check box, in the
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Financial Aid Self Service classic page the student sees the
Financial Aid - Self Service Links page.
Remaining Need
Select to display the student's remaining need on the Financial
Aid - Financial Aid Eligibility page.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
Canceled Awards
Select to display canceled awards. If the student has canceled
awards, the system activates the Canceled Awards link on the
Award Summary page.
Declined Awards
Select to display declined awards. If the student has declined
awards, the system activates the Declined Awards link on the
Award Summary page.
Award Notification
Select to display the FE Award Notification PDF link on the
student's Financial Aid -Award Summary page and Financial
Aid -Award Package page.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
SAP (Satisfactory Academic Progress) Select to display a Satisfactory Academic Progress link on the
Financial Aid – Award Summary pages.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
View Data By
Select from:
Aid Year: Displays the entire aid year across award periods.
Award Period: Displays aid year information by the award
period for academic and nonstandard periods.
Summary Link
Provides access to view estimated financial aid budget, expected
family contribution, estimated need, total aid, remaining need,
or user-defined text.
Select from:
COA Detail Only: Displays estimated financial aid budget
detail.
Do Not Show Link: Does not display link.
Summary Page: Displays the Financial Aid - Financial Aid
Eligibility page. Students can view estimated financial aid
budget, expected family contribution, estimated need, total aid,
remaining need, and user-defined text.
User-defined Page: Displays user-defined text.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
127
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Need Methodology
Chapter 7
Select from:
Federal: Displays estimated financial aid budget and expected
family contribution (EFC) values based on federal methodology.
Institutional: Displays estimated financial aid budget and EFC
values based on institutional methodology.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
Alternate Text
Summary Link Label
Enter a name for this link. The text that you enter here is the
name of the link that appears on the Financial Aid - Award
Summary page and the title of the Financial Aid - Aid Year
Summary page.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
Academic Year Award Period
Enter text such as Academic Year 2005. The system displays this
text when referring to this specific award period on self-service
pages.
Non-Standard Award Period
Enter text such as Summer. The system displays this text when
referring to this specific award period on self-service pages.
View Award Notification
Enter a name for the link on the Financial Aid - Award
Summary and Financial Aid - Award Package pages. This
link enables students to view and print their award letter and
notification.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
SAP Link Label (Satisfactory
Academic Progress)
Enter text for the Satisfactory Academic Progress link on the
Financial Aid – Student Awards pages. If no text is entered here,
the text that is displayed is Satisfactory Academic Progress.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
Sort Order
Award Period
Note: The system displays this field only if you set the View
Data By field to Award Period.
Select from:
Academic Year First: Displays academic year data first and
then nonstandard period data.
Earliest Period First: Displays the award period into which the
student's earliest term falls. For example, if a student has awards
128
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
for both Summer 2004 (nonstandard) and Fall 2004 (academic
year), and these terms are part of the same aid year, then the
nonstandard period is displayed first.
Latest Period First: Displays the award period into which the
student's most recent term falls. For example, if a student has
awards for both Summer 2004 (nonstandard period) and Fall
2004 (academic year), and these terms are part of the same aid
year, then the academic year period is displayed first.
Non-standard Period First: Displays the nonstandard period
first.
Note: If the student has awards in only one award period, the
system displays whichever award period contains awards. If the
student has awards in both periods, the system uses the Award
Period sorting option to determine which period to display first.
Term
Select from:
Ascending: Sorts from lowest term ID to highest and therefore
displays the most recent term last.
Descending: Sorts from highest term ID to lowest and therefore
displays the most recent term first.
Award
The system sorts awards by item type. Select from the following
financial aid item type sequence:
Ascending: 9..100 first, 9..322 last.
Descending: 9..322 first, 9..100 last.
For the fluid interface, awards are displayed in the same
package sequence order as they appear on administrator
Awarding pages.
Note: This is not used in fluid functionality.
Copy Self Service Options
Click to copy financial aid self-service options from this
institution and aid year to another.
Related Links
Managing Awards Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
129
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Setting Up Self-Service Awarding Options
Important! Financial Aid Notification (FAN) letter is a deprecated product. Support will be maintained
for this product, but no new development will be produced for FAN. It is strongly recommended that you
use Communication Generation (Comm Gen) instead. For more information on Comm Gen, see "Using
the Communication Generation Process" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
To set up self-service awarding options, use the Self Service Options component (SS_FA_INSTALL).
Page Used to Set Up Self-Service Awarding Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Awarding
SS_FA_INSTALL2
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Awarding
•
Define filter options for
self-service awarding
access criteria.
•
Set up processing options
and Consumer and
Entrance Interview
URLs.
•
Define the authentication
method and number of
required references for
the Perkins eMPN.
•
Enable student access
from the Award Inquiry
or Accept/Decline pages.
•
Add instructional text for
reporting or viewing.
Packaging Status Summary
130
STDNT_AID_PACKAGE
Financial Aid, View
Packaging Status Summary,
Packaging Status Summary
Set access to External Award
reporting on student selfservice pages.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Defining Self-Service Awarding Options
Access the Awarding page ((Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self
Service Options, Awarding).
Image: Awarding page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Awarding page. You can find definitions for the
fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to define access criteria, processing options, and custom URLs for self-service awarding.
From this page, you can also define options to allow access to external awards.
Note: Use these criteria options in conjunction with the Use Filter award access option on the Packaging
Status Summary page.
Self Service Award Processing
Use filters to determine when a student can access the self-service awarding page. Make sure you select
the corresponding check box next to the filter to include it in the criteria.
When setting a value for an access criteria, select an operator of either equal to or not equal.
FA Application Status (Financial Aid Select to allow a student access to self-service awarding
application status)
depending on the application status you specify: Active,
Canceled, or Restricted.
Processing Status
Select to allow self-service awarding access based on the
student's processing status: Applied, Competed, No App Rcd,
Package, or Review.
FED Verification Process (federal
verification process)
Select to allow self-service awarding access based on the
student's federal verification status: Complete, Nor Reqd,
Pending, or Required.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
131
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
INST Verification Process
Select to allow self-service awarding access based on the
student's institutional verification status: Complete or
Incomplete.
Satisfactory Academic Progress
Select to allow self-service awarding access if the student meets
your institution's criteria for satisfactory academic progress:
Meets SAP, Not Meet, Probation, or Undetrmine.
Award Notification Complete
Select to allow self-service awarding access based on whether a
financial-aid award notification letter has been generated for the
student.
Category
Select an option:
Appeal: FA Appeals
Award: Financial Aid Award Notification
SAT: Satisfactory Academic Progress Letters
SCHLRS: Scholarship Communications
VERF: Verification Processing
Context
Select a type of communication. The system uses the same
criteria when generating the FAN letter.
Letter
Select a type of communication. The system uses the same
criteria when generating the FAN letter.
Consumer Information URL*
Enter your institution's student information site. If you complete
this field, the system displays a link in self-service awarding.
If you leave this field blank, the system does not display a link.
This site may reflect awarding rights and responsibilities such
as statement of educational purpose, truth-in-lending content, or
other financial aid information.
Note: This field is not used in fluid functionality.
Entrance Interview URL*
Enter your institution's entrance and exit interview site to
display a link in self-service awarding. If you leave this blank,
the system does not display a link. If you use Self Service Loan
Counseling and enter entrance and exit interview URLs on the
Loan Counseling page, leave this field blank, or both URLs
appear.
Note: This field is not used in fluid functionality.
Processing Option
This section controls whether students' decisions regarding their awards are processed in real time or by
batch.
132
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Note: Unlike administrative packaging for which the packaging routine performs extensive edits to
ensure the validity of an award, in self-service the system processes awards in passive mode and does
not perform any federal edits or evaluate the student for eligibility or need criteria. The system performs
a subset of edits on any award that is being reduced. Also, the system adjusts an award that has been
reduced below minimum amounts established for the system.
Batch
Select to let the system load the current award package
from the real tables to a staging table. It saves the student's
activity to the staging table when the student submits an award
acknowledgment. The system sets the student's transaction to
Pending Update and records the current date and time. When
you run the batch process, the system selects all transactions
with a Pending Update status for processing. For each student
selected, as long as the financial aid package has not been
revised since the student submitted the award acknowledgment,
the system checks each award in the student's package for
any changes. It evaluates changed awards to ensure that award
amounts and disbursement balances are correct and reductions
do not fall below minimum amounts. The system processes all
other awards in passive mode. After the batch validation process
has finished and if no errors were found, the system posts the
data to the student's real award tables in the database.
By default, this option is selected.
Real time
Select to let the system load the current award package from
the real award tables to a staging table. It saves the student's
activity to the staging table when the student submits an
award acknowledgment. The system evaluates the award
activity and the resulting changes as it does in batch mode. The
process verifies the Accept or Decline amount, and for award
reductions, recalculates the scheduled disbursements. When all
of the awards in the student's package are processed and if no
errors were found, the system posts the data to the student's real
award tables in the database.
External Award Reporting
Note: These fields are not used in fluid functionality.
Access from Award Inquiry
Select to display a link on the students' Award Inquiry Self
Service pages.
Access from Accept/Decline
Select to display a link on the students' Accept Award and
Decline Award Self Service pages.
Alternate Text for Reporting
Enter instructions to the student that varies from the default text.
Alternate Text for List View
Enter instructions to the student that varies from the default text.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
133
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Enabling Student Access to Reporting of External Awards
Access the Packaging Status Summary page (Financial Aid, View Packaging Status Summary,
Packaging Status Summary).
Image: Packaging Status Summary page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Packaging Status Summary page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
To set access to external award reporting for each student:
Self Service
Award Access
Select: Allowed, Denied, or Use Filter.
Inquiry Access
Select to enable student access to award information.
External Award Access
Select to enable student access to the External Award reporting
component.
Setting Up FE FAN View and Print Options
Important! Financial Aid Notification (FAN) letter is a deprecated product. Support will be maintained
for this product, but no new development will be produced for FAN. It is strongly recommended that you
use Communication Generation (Comm Gen) instead. For more information on Comm Gen, see "Using
the Communication Generation Process" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
134
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Students can view and print their Forms Engine (FE) financial aid notification letter (FANLTR) in selfservice if you display the links on their Award Summary and Award Package pages.
Prerequisites
Before a student can print an FE FAN letter from Self Service, either GhostView or Adobe Distiller must
be installed to format the PDF.
Pages Used to Set Up FE FAN View and Print Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
FE Award Notification
Defaults
FANLTR_DEFAULTS
Financial Aid, Awards,
Notification Letter, Award
Notification Defaults
Ensure that the Display NID
check box is not selected to
avoid printing U.S. students'
Social Security Numbers
on their FAN letters. Select
the Print Cancels and Print
Declines check boxes to show
links to canceled or declined
awards.
Inquiry Options
SS_FA_INSTALL
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Inquiry Options
Select the Award Notification
check box in the Display
Data group box to display
the FE Award Notification
PDF link on the students'
Award Summary and Award
Detail pages. Enter a name
for the link to the FE Award
Notification PDF process in
the View Award Notification
field in the Alternate Text
group box.
FA Item Type 3
ITEM_TYPE_FA_3
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Financial Aid,
Awards, Financial Aid Item
Types, FA Item Type 3
Select Print from the Print
Letter Option drop-down list
box.
Setting Up Loan Options
Note: These settings are not used to set up fluid functionality.
This section discusses how to:
•
Display lender selection
•
Define self-service lenders
•
Control the display of loan counselling links
•
Define general loan information
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
135
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
•
Chapter 7
Set up options for eMPN processes
Related Links
"Setting Up Loan Origination for CRC" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
"Setting Up Loan Participants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
Pages Used to Set Up Loan Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Loan
SS_FA_INSTALL3
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Loan
Use this page to:
Identify Self Service Lenders
136
SFA_LNDR_SELECT_SU
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Financial Aid,
Loans, Identify Self Service
Lenders
•
Set lender selection to
appear on the student
self-service page.
•
Control the display of
entrance interview links
and exit interview links
on the students' selfservice pages.
•
Specify a URL to direct
students to a page with
detailed information
about loans.
•
Set up options to support
your eMPN processes
Select the preferred lender for
each loan type.
Create CRC Loan Participants SFA_CRC_DEST_ID
Set Up SACR, Product
Identify the lenders for
Related, Financial Aid,
Common Line loans.
Loans, CR Common Line,
Create CRC Loan Participants
Maintain Lender Codes
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Financial Aid,
Loans, Common Line 4,
Maintain Lender Codes
LENDER_LOAD_MAINT
Identify the lenders for CL4
loans.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Displaying Lender Selection
Access the Loan page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Loan).
Image: Loan page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Loan page. You can find definitions for the fields
and controls later on this page.
Use this page to set up lender selection for the student and ensure that the preferred lenders are set up.
You might have set up lenders while processing FFELP loans.
FFELP Lender Section Setup
Display Lender Selection
Select x to display the lender selection on the students' selfservice pages.
Lender Sort Option
If you selected the Display Lender Selection check box, select
Random or Sequence Number to control how the lender list is
displayed in self-service:
Random (default) results in the lenders being displayed in
a different random order each time the student accesses the
Lender Selection page.
Sequence Number results in lenders being displayed based on
the sequence number that was assigned to each lender on the
Identify Self-Service Lenders page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
137
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Defining Self-Service Lenders
Access the Identify Self Service Lenders page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Financial Aid, Loans,
Identify Self Service Lenders).
Image: Identify Self Service Lenders page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Identify Self Service Lenders page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to set up self-service lender lists and associated guarantors for each loan type. This
information appears for the student in Self Service only if the Display Lender Selection option is selected
on the Loan Options page and the student has been awarded a loan associated with any loan type set up on
this page.
The Guarantor values defined on this page are used in combination with the lender selected by the student
to derive the correct loan destination during the Loan Origination process.
You can set up a default guarantor in the Loan Type area, define specific guarantors for each lender in the
Loan Information area, or both on this page. When the student selects a lender in Self Service, the system
first attempts to use the guarantor value associated with the specific lender in the Loan Information area,
and if no value exists, it looks for a guarantor value at the Loan Type level. If a guarantor value is not
found, a guarantor is not attached to the student's lender selection record, which can result in no loan
destination being found during the Loan Origination process.
To ensure that the Loan Origination program determines the correct CommonLine version and loan
destination for each loan, you must set up CommonLine version 4 (CL4) loan destinations, Common
Record CommonLine (CRC) loan destinations, or both that match the lender and guarantor combinations
on this page.
Note: The Lender OPEID value is the only one seen by the student in Self Service. The Lender Branch
ID, Guarantor OPEID, and Guarantor Branch ID values are transparent to the student when selecting a
lender.
Loan Type
Loan Type
138
Select from the drop-down list box to identify each loan type
for which you allow a student to select a lender through Self
Service.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Guarantor OPEID (gurantor office of Enter a guarantor OPEID as a default value for a specific loan
postsecondary education identifier)
type. The default guarantor value entered here is attached to the
student's lender selection record only if the Guarantor OPEID
field within the Loan Information area is left blank for the
lender selected.
The values in the lookup list are from the CRC participant setup.
Branch ID
Required if the Guarantor OPEID field is populated. Enter a
branch ID that is associated with the guarantor.
Loan Information
Lender OPEID (lender office of
postsecondary education identifier)
Enter the lender OPEID available to the student for this loan
type. The values in the lookup list are from the CRC participant
setup.
Branch ID
Required if the Lender OPEID field is populated. Enter the
branch ID that is associated with the lender.
Guarantor OPEID (gurantor office of (Optional) Enter a guarantor at this level to indicate a specific
postsecondary education identifier)
guarantor for the lender. If the student selects the associated
lender, the guarantor entered here is attached to the student's
lender selection record. The values in the lookup list are from
the CRC participant setup.
If you do not enter a guarantor here, the system checks for a
default guarantor in the Loan Type area.
Branch ID
Required if the Guarantor OPEID field is populated. Enter a
branch ID that is associated with the guarantor.
Sequence
If Sequence Number is selected in the Lender Sort Option field
on the Loan Options page, use this field to display the lenders to
the student. to the student.
If no sequence numbers are identified, the system orders the list
by lender OPEID.
Controlling the Display of Loan Counseling Links
Access the Loan page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Loan).
Loan counseling can be handled by the administrator or in Self Service by the student. When the student
completes loan counseling for an award that requires an entrance interview, the loan is disbursed.
Entrance Exit Counseling Setup
These check boxes control the display of the Entrance and Exit fields on the Award Details > Loans page.
If you do not want to display a link at certain times of the year, clear the check box.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
139
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Display Entrance Interview URL
To activate an entrance interview link for loan counseling, select
this check box. The URL is defined on the Loan Counseling
page.
Display Exit Interview URL
To activate an exit interview link for loan counseling, select this
check box. The URL is defined on the Loan Counseling page.
For more information regarding Loan Counseling Setup, see:
•
"Understanding Loan Counseling" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
•
"Understanding Disbursement Rules" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
Related Links
"Managing Loan Counseling Data" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
Defining General Loan Information
Access the Loan page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Loan).
General Loan Information
Enter a URL to enable students to access more detailed loan information. This URL can link students
to an already existing intranet loan page or to an external loan service provider for which you have
established a relationship. This link is available only if the loan has been originated in the system. The
URL appears on the Financial Aid - Loan Application Information page.
Setting up Options for eMPN Processes
Access the Loan page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Loan).
Perkins Master Promissory Note
Use these options to support your eMPN processes and dynamically adjust the Self-Service page
components within the eMPN process.
Authentication Method
Indicate the verification method for authenticating a student
for eMPN. If you select Birthdate, Personal Identification
Number, or National ID Number, students must enter the
required information to authenticate and continue with the
eMPN process. If you select No Authentication, the system does
not prompt for authentication information.
You define a student's birth date, national ID number, and PIN
in Campus Community. The system always uses the student's
primary national ID number for authentication purposes.
Additional References
140
Indicate the number of required references (0, 1, 2, or 3) in
addition to the required two references collected to complete the
eMPN.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Setting Up Satisfactory Academic Progress Self-Service Options
This section discusses identifying an informational URL for Satisfactory Academic Progress and defining
custom text for various Satisfactory Academic Progress statuses in Financial Aid Self-Service.
Note: These settings are not used to set up fluid functionality.
Page Used to Set Up Satisfactory Academic Progress Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
SAP
SS_FA_INSTALL4
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, SAP
Control the display of the
SAP informational link and
SAP status text.
SAP Options for Self-Service
Access the SAP page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, SAP).
Image: SAP (Satisfactory Academic Progress) page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the SAP (Satisfactory Academic Progress) page. You
can find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
SAP Information URL
Enter the URL to display on the SAP Detail page. If populated,
this URL is accessible to students when selecting the SAP link
from the Self-Service Student Awards page. If left blank, a link
does not appear.
Satisfactory Academic Progress Status Messages
In the SAP Status Message group box, set up text to be displayed for each of the system SAP statuses
used in the Packaging Status Summary.
SAP Status
Select one of the SAP statuses used in the Packaging Status
Summary.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
141
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Default Status Text
Displays the SAP Status translate value long name. This
displays as the SAP Status on the student's SAP Detail page if
there is no Alternate Status Text defined.
Alternate Status Text
Optionally enter alternate SAP status text to display on the
Student SAP Detail page instead of the Default Status Text
Status Message
Optionally enter additional text explaining the SAP status.
Setting Up Disbursement Options
This section discusses how to display award disbursement information in PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
Page Used to Set Up Disbursement Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Disbursement
SS_FA_INSTALL5
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self Service
Options, Disbursement
Define how disbursement
information is displayed.
Disbursement Options
Access the Disbursement page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial Aid, Self
Service Options, Disbursement).
Image: Disbursement page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Disbursement page. You can find definitions for the
fields and controls later on this page.
To access this page, you must select the Fluid Self Service check box on the Financial Aid Defaults page.
See "Establishing Defaults" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
Use this page to define how disbursement information appears in PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
142
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Disbursement Options
Show Amounts
Select to display award disbursement amounts, then select any
one of these options:
•
Authorized: Select to treat any authorized amount as
disbursed. The amount is displayed in the Disbursed fields.
•
Disbursed: (default) Select to show the amount only
when the award amount has been disbursed and not just
authorized.
If you select this check box, Show Status and Date is enabled.
Disbursement Status and Date
Show Status and Date
Show Status and Date works in conjunction with Show
Amounts.
Select to display award disbursement statuses and dates, then
select any one of these options:
•
Scheduled: Select to display disbursement status that starts
with ‘Scheduled’. The scheduled date is retrieved from the
Disbursement ID setup record.
If you select this option, Progression (default), Ignore
Authorized, and Suppress Date if Passed are enabled.
•
Authorized: Select to display the disbursement status
and date that start with 'Authorized'. The Authorized
date is followed by the Disbursed date as the award for a
Disbursement ID progresses from authorized to disbursed
state.
•
Disbursed: (default) Select this option to display the
disbursement status and date only when the award amount
has been 'Disbursed'.
Progression
Select to display the Scheduled date followed by the Authorized
date followed by the Disbursed date as the award for a
Disbursement ID progresses through various disbursement
states.
Ignore Authorized
Select to display the Scheduled date followed by the Disbursed
date as the award for a Disbursement ID progresses from a
Scheduled to a Disbursed state.
When you select this option, once the award amount is
Authorized, the system continues to treat the award amount as
Scheduled.
If you select Show Amounts = Authorized and Show Status
and Date = Ignore Authorized, you receive a warning that
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
143
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
prevents you from selecting this combination. The system then
automatically sets Show Amounts = Disbursed.
Suppress Date if Passed
Select if you do not want to display the Scheduled Disbursement
Date if it has passed (that is, Scheduled Disbursement Date
occurs earlier than the current date).
Setting Up Self-Service Actions and Access in Packaging
To set up self-service actions and access in packaging, use the Financial Aid Item Types component
(FINANCIAL_AID_ITEM). Use the component interface (FINANCIAL_AID_ITEM_CI) to load the
data into the tables for these component interfaces.
This section discusses how to:
•
Define self-service actions in packaging.
•
Define self-service access in packaging.
•
Change award and inquiry access.
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Actions and Access in Packaging
144
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
FA Item Type 3
ITEM_TYPE_FA_3
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Financial Aid,
Awards, Financial Aid Item
Types, FA Item Type 3
Set up disbursement
information and self-service
action options.
Packaging Status Summary
STDNT_AID_PACKAGE
Financial Aid, View
Packaging Status Summary,
Packaging Status Summary
Review the student's need,
budget, and award or change
the student's packaging status.
Set the student's self-service
inquiry and award access.
Self-service Security
SFA_RUNCTL_SS_SEC
Financial Aid, Awards, Self
Service Awarding, Assign
Self Service Access, Self
Service Security
Set the award and inquiry
access value.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Defining Self-Service Actions in Packaging
Access the FA Item Type 3 page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Financial Aid, Awards, Financial Aid
Item Types, FA Item Type 3).
Image: FA Item Type 3 page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the FA Item Type 3 page. You can find definitions for
the fields and controls later on this page.
The system provides flexibility for controlling whether a student can accept and reduce or decline an
award.
The Accept, Decline, and Reduce, options are available only if the Print Letter Option field is set to Print.
Self Service Actions
Accept
Select to enable the student to accept a particular award. When
you select Accept, the Reduce and Decline options become
available.
Reduce
You must select the Accept option and then the Reduce option to
enable the student to reduce a particular award. Clear this option
to prevent students from reducing their awards.
You cannot select the Reduce option if the Federal ID value is
ACG or SMART on the FA Item Type 1 page
Decline
Select to enable the student to decline a particular award. When
a student declines an award, the system sets the Offered and
Accept amount fields to 0.00, and the student cannot update the
amounts.
Note: If you set the Print Letter Option field to Never or blank, the system displays the award on the
Financial Aid - Award Summary page (View My Financial Aid), but not on the Award Package page
(Accept/Decline Financial Aid).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
145
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Related Links
"Defining Item Type Disbursement Rules" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
"Defining Disbursement and Anticipated Aid" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
Defining Self-Service Access in Packaging
Access the Packaging Status Summary page (Financial Aid, View Packaging Status Summary,
Packaging Status Summary).
Image: Packaging Status Summary page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Packaging Status Summary page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Self-Service
You can set these values in a background process by running the Assign Self Service Access process.
Award Access
Select Allowed to allow the student access to award
acknowledgement for the given year regardless of filtering
option criteria established in self-service awarding options
setup.
Select Denied to deny the student access to award
acknowledgment for the given year regardless of filtering option
criteria established in self-service awarding options setup.
146
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Select Use Filter to require the student to meet the self-service
awarding options access criteria to gain access to an award
acknowledgment in self-service awarding.
Inquiry Access
Select to allow a student to view assigned financial aid awards.
External Award Access
Select to allow a student access to view reported external
awards.
Note: You must also select the Allow Access check box on the Inquiry Options page in setup to enable
self-service access.
Changing Award and Inquiry Access
Access the Self-service Security page (Financial Aid, Awards, Self Service Awarding, Assign Self
Service Access, Self-service Security).
Image: Self-service Security page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Self-service Security page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to change the value in the Award Access and Inquiry Access fields on the Packaging Status
Summary page. This controls whether a student can access either area of self-service.
Award Access
Select Allowed, Denied, or Use Filter.
Inquiry Access
Select Yes or No.
EA Access
Select Yes or No.
Institution
Select your institution.
Aid Year
Select the aid year for which to run this process.
All IDs
Select to update or change all IDs.
ID Range
Select to update or change a range of IDs.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
147
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Modifying Self-Service Loan Status Descriptions
To set up self-service loan status descriptions, use the Self Service Loan Status component
(SS_FA_LOAN_STAT).
This section discusses how to modify loan status descriptions.
Page Used to Modify Self-Service Loan Status Descriptions
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Self-Service Loan Status
SS_FA_LOAN_STAT
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Financial Aid, Self-Service
Loan Status
Modify loan status
descriptions and comments
text that you want a student
to see online. This page
provides students with their
loan application status. These
values are delivered by
Oracle.
Modifying Loan Status Descriptions
Access the Self-Service Loan Status page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Financial
Aid, Self-Service Loan Status).
Image: Self-Service Loan Status page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Self-Service Loan Status page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
148
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 7
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
You can view or modify the status and comments text that you want a student to view online.
Proc Status (processing status)
Indicates where the loan application is in the origination process
between your institution and the loan servicer.
Trans Status (transaction status)
Indicates the current status of the loan application.
Creating User-Defined Text
Each self-service classic or fluid page has an area for additional explanatory text. The text resides in the
message catalog. The system displays the message number to help you determine the text to include on
a page. If you do not want a message on a particular page, you can delete the text in the message catalog
or delete the message entirely. However, Oracle suggests that you delete only the text, not the reference
number, so that you can add text as needed in the future.
You might add user-defined text to:
•
Explain why disbursed awards cannot be updated.
•
Explain why custom split awards cannot be updated.
•
Explain why subsidized and unsubsidized loans have automatic treatment.
•
Explain why loans in transit cannot be updated.
•
Provide general rules of navigation.
•
Provide specific information, such as instructing students not to increase awards.
Message numbers 500 and greater for Message Set 14409 are designated as user-definable. Oracle
delivers some message numbers with defined message text and explanation as examples.
Defining Custom Text for Fluid Interfaces
To define custom text for fluid interfaces, use the following message numbers in Message Set 14409.
Use Message Number
To Define Custom Text For
1401
Outstanding Offers Page
1404
Manage Accepted Awards Page
1405
Award Summary Page
1406
Award Details, General Page: Award Status (if the status is
offered)
1407
Award Details, Amounts Page
1408
Award Details, Loan page: Entrance Interview (if the status is
incomplete)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
149
Setting Up Financial Aid Self-Service
Chapter 7
Use Message Number
To Define Custom Text For
1409
Award Details, Loan page: Exit Interview (if the status is
incomplete)
1410
Award Details, Loan page: Promissory Note Status (if the note
status is unsigned)
1411
Award Details, Loan page
1412
Award Summary, Declined Awards page
1413
Award Summary, Canceled Awards page
1414
Accept/Decline Page
1415
Disbursement Status is Scheduled
1416
Disbursement Status is Authorized
1417
Disbursement Status is Disbursed
Related Links
Managing Awards Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
150
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions SelfService
Setting Up Application Status and Checklist Options
This topic discusses how you can control the display of the application status, checklist due date, and
checklist contact using the classic and fluid user interfaces.
The Application Status self-service page, the Admissions section of the Student Center and Student
Services Center pages, and the Campus Mobile admission application pages can display the application
status using the classic user interface. The Application Status page and the Campus Mobile admission
application pages can display the checklist due date and checklist contact.
You can customize the Fluid Applicant Self Service display around specific applicant groups for each of
these elements—Institution, Academic Career, and Admit Term information.
Pages Used to Set Up Application Status and Checklist Options
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Applicant Status Options
SAD_APPL_STATUS
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Recruiting and
Admissions, Applicants,
Applicant Status Options
On a classic interface, control
the display of the application
status, checklist item due date,
and checklist item contact
for an application based on
the academic institution and
academic career.
Define Attributes
SAD_FLSS_DEF_ATT
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Recruiting and
Admissions, Applicants, Fluid
Applicant SS Setup. Select the
Define Attributes tab.
Define attributes for an
applicant group on a Fluid
interface. An applicant’s
complying with the attribute
criteria at the sequence level
depends on the other options
defined in Self Service.
Display Options
SAD_FLSS_DISPLAY
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Recruiting and
Admissions, Applicants, Fluid
Applicant SS Setup. Select the
Display Options tab.
On a Fluid interface, define
various display options for an
applicant group which meets
the attribute criteria on the
Define Attributes tab.
Additional Options
SAD_FLSS_ACCDECC
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Recruiting and
Admissions, Applicants, Fluid
Applicant SS Setup. Select the
Additional Options tab.
On a Fluid interface, define
additional options for display
on the Application Status page
if the applicant meets criteria
on the Define Attributes page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
151
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
Setting Applicant Status and Checklist Options
Access the Applicant Status Options page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Recruiting and Admissions,
Applicants, Applicant Status Options).
Image: Applicant Status Options page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Applicant Status Options page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Show Application Status
Select to display the application status on the Application
Status, Student Center and Student Services Center pages and
the mobile admission application pages. The application statuses
are complete, incomplete and admitted.
Note: The status of the application is based on the Complete
check box of the Application Data page (Student Admissions,
Application Maintenance, Maintain Applications, Application
Data). If the Show Application Status check box is selected
and if you select the Complete check box for an application,
then the system displays the application status as completed.
If the Show Application Status check box is selected and the
Complete check box for an application is deselected, then the
system displays the application status as incomplete.
The Complete check box (ADM_APPL_DATA.ADM_APPL_
COMPLETE) setting can be updated manually or by using the
delivered Population Update process for ADM_APPL_DATA.
See "Running the Population Update Process" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
152
Show Checklist Item Due Date
Select to display the due date on the mobile admission
application pages and the Outstanding Items for this Application
section of the Application Status page.
Show Checklist Item Contact
Select to display the checklist contact on the mobile admission
application pages and the Outstanding Items for this Application
section of the Application Status page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Examples
Suppose you have selected all the check boxes for PSUNV (PeopleSoft University) and Graduate on the
Applicant Status Options page and the Complete check box has not been selected for a PSUNV- Fine
Arts Graduate application. In such a case, the Admissions section in the Student Center displays the
incomplete status for the application:
Image: Admissions section displaying application status
This is an example of Admissions section displaying the application status.
The applicant clicks the View Status link for Fine Arts Graduate application to navigate to the Application
Status page. The system displays the Show outstanding items for this application button on the
Application Status page. When the applicant clicks this button, she or he can view the outstanding
checklist items with the due dates and contact names:
Image: Example of Applicant Status page displaying Due Date and Contact columns
This is an example of Applicant Status page displaying the Due Date and Contact columns.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
153
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
If you did not select the Show Application Status check box and the Complete check box has not been
selected for the PSUNV- Fine Arts Graduate application, the Admissions section in the Student Center
page does not display the incomplete status for the application.
Image: Example of Admissions section not displaying application status
This is an example of Admissions section not displaying the application status.
If you did not select the Show Checklist Item Due Date and Show Checklist Item Contact check boxes,
the Outstanding Items for this Application section does not display the Due Date and Contact columns.
Image: Example of Applicant Status page not displaying Due Date and Contact columns
This is an example of Applicant Status page not displaying the Due Date and Contact columns.
Defining Attributes for the Applicant Fluid Self Service Page
Define a set of attributes for an applicant cohort. The Display and Additional options defined are
accordingly applicable to the applicants meeting these attributes.
You can define one sequence to apply to all applicants or you can define multiple sequences under
Institution, Academic Career and Admit Term to handle various applicant groups where you want to vary
the display and timing of display to those groups.
154
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Access the Define Attributes page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Recruiting and Admissions,
Applicants, Fluid Applicant SS Setup, Define Attributes).
Image: Define Attributes page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Define Attributes page. You can find definitions for
the fields and controls later on this page.
Copy Setup
Copy this setup to another Term under the same Institution and
Career.
Applicant Self Service Display
Status
Select the status for each row— active or inactive.
Valid Notification Plans
Select the type of notification plan. Click the Insert Prompt
Values button to insert all valid Notification Plans.
Valid Admit Types
Select Admit Types which are valid under the Institution or
Career.
Valid Application Centres
Select an Application Center that is valid under a Career. Other
non-Career specific Application Centres may be added as well.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
155
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
Valid Program and Plans
Select an Academic Program that is valid under a Career. and
an Academic Plan that is valid under the associated Career or
Program.
Define Application Model
Define Application Model allows you to restrict setup only to
the Program level, or to allow for a more granular setup to the
Plan and sub-Plan level.
Related Links
"Using the Applicant Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Defining Display Options for the Applicant Fluid Self Service Page
Access the Display Options page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Recruiting and Admissions,
Applicants, Fluid Applicant SS Setup, Display Options).
Image: Display Options page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Display Options page. You can find definitions for
the fields and controls later on this page.
156
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Note: Self Service setup uses the Text Catalog to provide content to the applicants. Campus Solutions
delivers a Text Catalog Owner ID of SAD, and a Sub ID of SSFL. In order to return values in the setup
component, be sure to create your text IDs under this hierarchy.
Time Period for Application Display
Use this group box to define the time period that the application remains active and viewable in Self
Service. Start and end dates are calculated from the Term Start and End dates in the Term session table
valid for the respective Institution and Career.
If no value is given for the Begin date, applicants meeting the set of attributes defined do not have their
application available to them in Self Service. If no End date value is given, the application availability
never expires in Self Service.
Display Decisions
Use this group box to define when decisions become available to applicants in Self Service for the cohort
defined for this sequence.
Manual Activation
Select this check box to indicate that a user manually activates
the display of decisions in Self Service. When Manual
Activation is selected, the Begin Date is disabled and any value
previously populated is ignored. Decisions are the Program
Action values of ADMT, COND, WAIT, WAOF, DENY.
Activate
This field is enabled only if you select Manual Activation. If
Activate is selected, the decisions are immediately available to
applicants in Self Service.
Begin Date
Specify the date when you would like the decisions to be made
available in Self Service.
Begin Time
This field becomes available when you populate Begin
Date. Specify an exact time on the Begin Date to display the
decisions.
End Date
Set the date when the decisions stop displaying.
Delay Days
Use this option if you want decisions to display for a set number
of days from the decision row effective date. For example,
if a program action of ADMT is dated 04/01/2016, and you
specify 7 delay days, then the decision becomes available in Self
Service on 04/08/2016.
This field is enabled only if Begin Date is blank.
Display for Program Action
Use this group box to define which Program Actions and Action reason combinations appear in Applicant
Self Service. The system obtains the Program Action and its corresponding reason from the current
effective-dated row for the applicant or application. That Program Action and Action Reason combination
is evaluated against the setup to determine whether that program action is set up for display. If the
combination does not match the defined program action values, the system selects the next most current
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
157
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
effective row from the application stack and applies the same evaluation logic to determine the Self
Service display.
You can specify what appears for each Program Action/Action Reason row defined.
158
Program Action
Select values populated from the Admission Action Table.
Action Reason
Select values that are valid for the selected Program Action.
Action Description
Set a user-defined alternative text to use instead of the program
action description. This appears for all program action values
excluding APPL, Application. The text you define here appears
to the applicant as the Status.
Information Text ID
Select a Text Catalog message to display as the content on the
Status Information page which renders from the information
icon.
Complete Action Description
User-defined alternative text to use instead of the program
action description. Content specified here is displayed to
the applicant as the Status. This field is available when the
Program Action is APPL. This description will display when the
application is marked complete.
Complete Text ID
Select a Text Catalog message to display as the content on the
Status Information page which renders from the information
icon in Self Service.
Incomplete Action Description
User-defined alternative text to use instead of the program
action description. Content specified here is displayed to
the applicant as the Status. This field is available when the
Program Action is APPL. This description is displayed when the
application has not been marked as complete.
Incomplete Text ID
Select a Text Catalog message to display as the content on the
Status Information page which renders from the information
icon in Self Service.
Do Not Display
Select this check box to prohibit the display of that program
action in Self Service without needing to delete the row from the
setup.
View Message
Select to open a new window that displays the Maintain Text
Catalog component.
Display Letter Link
This is available when the program action is in ADMT, COND,
DENY, WAIT, WAOF. When selected, the View Decision Letter
link is displayed to the applicant in Self Service.
Letter Code
This is available when the program action is in ADMT, COND,
DENY, WAIT, WAOF. Select the Letter Code that is typically
assigned to the applicant cohort defined for the associated
program action.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Related Links
"Using the Applicant Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Defining Additional Options for the Applicant Fluid Self Service Page
Access the Additional Options page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Recruiting and Admissions,
Applicants, Fluid Applicant SS Setup, Additional Options).
Image: Additional Options page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Additional Options page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
Contact Details
Select a Text ID from the Text Catalog to provide Content to the Contact Information page which renders
from the Contact Us link in Self Service.
Accept Decline Options
Display Accept Decline to
While the applicant does not act on an Offer of Admission, use
this field to specify the date by which the Accept and Decline
buttons continue to appear on the Application Status page.
If the date you set is greater than the current date, the Accept
and Decline buttons are displayed until the date you specified
is reached. Once the date you set is reached, the buttons do not
appear on the Application Status page. If you do not set a value
for this field, the buttons are always displayed.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
159
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
Accept Offer / Decline Offer
Use this group box to define whether a Modal Confirm or Activity Guide is used when an applicant
clicks the Accept button on the Application Status page. Depending on what you select, either the Modal
Confirm or Activity Guide label and fields are displayed.
If you use an Activity Guide, you can select which Activity Guide to launch. PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions delivers activity guides for Accept (SAD_ACCPOC) and Decline (SAD_DECPOC)
options. These are intended as proofs of concept to demonstrate how each activity can be configured.
Oracle recommends that you clone and configure guides for your own content and business process
requirements.
In the delivered example, the Accept Offer activity guide leads the applicant through the acceptance steps
of understanding the terms of the offer of admission and confirmation. Upon exiting the activity guide,
the applicant is returned to the Application Status page. At this point, a Pay Admissions Deposit button
may display if a deposit is due. Selecting the button launches the Student Financials Make A Payment
activity guide. The applicant is returned to the Applicant Home page after completing the payment
process.
Note: An applicant is able to view and use the Pay Admissions Deposit button while using the modal
confirm method.
If declining an offer, the activity guide leads the applicant through a confirmation and a survey, similar to
existing Self-Service functionality. Responses are populated on the Application Student Response page
in Application Maintenance. On submitting the survey, the applicant is returned to the Application Status
page.
For more information, see:
•
Managing Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
•
Setting Up Institution Sets
•
"Understanding Student Activity Guides" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Related Links
"Using the Applicant Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Understanding Self-Service Request Information
This section lists prerequisites and discusses self-service request information.
Prerequisites
Before you can set up your parameters for the Request Information transaction, you must set up a
communications infrastructure in PeopleSoft Campus Community. The required steps for setting up
communications for the Request Information transaction include defining communication keys and
event IDs. All communications for the Request Information transaction must be defined using the
administrative function PSSV. You define communication keys on the Communication Speed Key Table
page.
160
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Note: To access the Communication Speed Key Table page, you must enter an administrative function.
Enter PSSV (prospect self-service).
After you define communication speed keys, you must define event IDs. You define event IDs on the
Event Definition page. Event IDs contain the communication keys that you set up previously. You select
event IDs on the Web Prospect Setup 2 page. Event IDs contain the specific communications that the
prospect can choose from or automatically receive depending on your setup.
Note: To access the Event Definition page, you must enter an administrative function. Enter PSSV.
The Web Prospect Setup 2 page also enables you to control whether visitors can choose from a
selection of communications, depending upon the career of interest, or whether they are sent a default
communication. If you decide to let prospects select from a list of communications, you can define the
available choices.
Related Links
"Defining Communication Speed Keys" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Defining 3C Engine Events" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Requesting Information
Setting Up Self-Service Request Information
To set up self-service request information, use the Web Prospect Create component
(ADM_WEB_PRS_SETUP).
Use the Web Prospect Create Table component to determine which information segments you want to
enable in the Request Information self-service transaction and to set up academic institution and career
parameters (such as which careers you want available to the visitor, and which recruiting center you want
assigned to that career).
This section discusses how to:
•
Enable segments and prospect career fields.
•
Set up institution and career parameters.
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Request Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Web Prospect Setup
ADM_WEB_PRS_TBL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Recruiting and
Admissions, Prospects, Web
Prospect Create Table
Enable or disable Request
Information self-service
transaction segments and
prospect career fields.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
161
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Web Prospect Setup 2
ADM_WEB_PRS2_TBL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Recruiting and
Admissions, Prospects, Web
Prospect Create Table, Web
Prospect Setup 2
Define institution and career
setup parameters for the
Request Information selfservice transaction. The
academic institutions and
careers that you select on this
page appear as choices on the
Request Information detail
page.
Enabling Segments and Prospect Career Fields
Access the Web Prospect Setup page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Recruiting and Admissions,
Prospects, Web Prospect Create Table).
Image: Web Prospect Setup page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Web Prospect Setup page. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
By selecting the check boxes on this page, you enable a segment or field to appear on the self-service
Request Information transaction. This enables you to choose what kind of information you collect
from prospects who request admissions information. The selections that you make here apply to every
academic institution in your system. Therefore, in a multi-institution system, each institution should agree
on how to complete this page.
162
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Enable Segments
If you select the Academic Interests or the Test Results check boxes, the respective pages appear in the
Request Information self-service transaction. Visitors requesting admissions information have the option
of entering academic interest and test result information, which the system then stores in the Academic
Interest (ADM_INTEREST_ADMP) and Test Scores (ACAD_TST_RSLT_ADMP) components.
If you select the Academic Program, Academic Plan, and Academic Sub-Plan check boxes, corresponding
fields appear on the Request Information detail page. Visitors can use these fields to enter the program,
plan, and subplan that interests them. The system stores this information on the Create/Update Prospects Prospect Program Data page.
Enable Prospect Career Fields
Each check box in this group box corresponds to a field on the Request Information detail page.
Select the check boxes of the information that you want to collect from visitors who are requesting
admissions information. Each item in this group box corresponds to an item in the Create/Update
Prospects component (ADM_PROSPECT_PROG). Thus, by selecting these check boxes, you can
populate additional fields in the Create/Update Prospects component (assuming that the visitor enters the
information).
Note: Clearing a check box in this group box hides its corresponding field on the Request Information
detail page. For example, if you clear the Academic Level check box, visitors to your website do not see
the Academic Level field on the Request Information detail page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
163
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
Chapter 8
Setting Up Institution and Career Parameters
Access the Web Prospect Setup 2 page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Recruiting and Admissions,
Prospects, Web Prospect Create Table, Web Prospect Setup 2).
Image: Web Prospect Setup 2 page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Web Prospect Setup 2 page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Acad Int/Test Results Defaults
Data Source
Web is the default. You can change this value. The data source
posts to the Academic Interests and Test Results pages.
Institution Setup Parameters
164
Academic Institution
Select the academic institution that you want available to the
visitor. If you enter more than one academic institution, visitors
can select the academic institution that they are interested in
on the Request Information detail page. The system uses the
academic institution that the visitor selects to create the prospect
record. If you select only one academic institution, the system
hides the Academic Institution field on the Request Information
page. In this case, the system uses the one academic institution
that you entered here to create the prospect record. You must
enter at least one academic institution.
Recruiting Status
Select the recruiting status that you want the system to assign
to the new prospect record. You can select a different recruiting
status for each academic institution. The system assigns the
selected recruiting status to new prospect records, based on
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 8
Setting Up Recruiting and Admissions Self-Service
information collected through the Request Information selfservice transaction.
Referral Source
Select the referral source for information collected through the
Request Information self-service transaction. You can select
a different referral source for each academic institution. The
referral source that you enter here posts to the Prospect Career
Data page.
Career Setup Parameters
Academic Career
Select the academic careers that you want available for the
visitor to select. On the Request Information detail page, visitors
can select the academic careers that interest them. The system
uses the selected academic career to create the prospect record.
You must enter at least one academic career.
Recruiting Center
Select the recruiting center that you want the system to assign
to the new prospect record. You can select a different recruiting
center for each academic career. The system assigns the
selected recruiting center to new prospect records, based on
information collected through the Request Information selfservice transaction.
Allow Prospect to Select
Comm (allow prospect to select
communication)
Select to enable visitors to select from a list of available
communications. If you select this check box, a group box that
lists the communication items contained in the event ID that you
select appears on the Request Information detail page. Visitors
can select which items to receive. For example, the UGRD
Web Prospect event ID at PSUNV includes communications
containing information on financial aid, campus housing, and
undergraduate applications. Visitors can choose one or more
communications from this list. However, only those events
that have the User Selection check box selected on the Event
Definition Setup page appear as choices in the Event ID field,
next to the Allow Prospect to Select Comm field.
Send Default Communication
Select to send a default communication to all visitors who
request admissions information for this particular academic
institution and career.
Event ID
Select the event IDs that contain the communications that you
want mailed to visitors (for each academic career). Enter an
event ID in at least one of the Event ID fields. If both fields are
blank, then a visitor could submit a Request Information request
and receive a confirmation that the request went through,
without receiving any communication. The event ID tells the
system which communications to send to the visitor. Define
event IDs on the Event page.
See "Creating an Event" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Campus Community).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
165
Chapter 9
Setting Up Academic Advisement SelfService
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement
To set up self-service Academic Advisement features, use the Academic Advising setup
(SAA_SS_RPT_OPT) component.
This section discusses how to define Academic Advisement setup and Advising Notes Categories and
Subcategories.
Pages Used to Set Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Academic Advising Setup
SAA_SS_RPT_OPT
Set up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Academic Advising
Enable self-service features
and define behavior for selfservice Academic Advisement
functionality.
Note Category Table
SAA_NOTE_TYPE_TBL
Set up SACR, Product
Related, Academic
Advisement, Note Category
Table
Update and maintain Advising
Notes categories.
Note Subcategory Table
SAA_NOTE_STYPE_TBL
Set up SACR, Product
Related, Academic
Advisement, Note
Subcategory Table
Update and maintain Advising
Notes subcategories.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
167
Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service
Chapter 9
Defining Academic Advisement Setup
Access the Academic Advising Setup page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Academic
Advising).
Image: Academic Advising Setup page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Academic Advising Setup page . You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Enable real-time processing
Select to instruct the system to automatically generate an
advisement report when students access the My Academic
Requirements page.
Use the two radio buttons to indicate that your institution wants
to use real-time processing with or without synchronization
options (also referred to as triggers).
If you enable real-time processing and select Always refresh,
then the system regenerates a report when the student accesses
My Academic Requirements, Search by My Requirements, or
Plan by My Requirements. That is, the report is regenerated
regardless of whether anything changed on the student's record.
168
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 9
Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service
Note: On the administrative side, the system also regenerates
the report if the user accesses a previously run report and, from
the Report Request page, clicks the View Report link.
Advisor access obeys security
Select to use the Advisement Report Security component to
manage advisors' ability to view the advisement reports of their
advisees in self service. By default, this check box is cleared,
and advisors may view all advisement reports that have been
generated for their advisees, regardless of their institution.
Remember that the advisement reports that advisors access
from My Advisees are those defined in the Student Academic
Requirement Report field on the Academic Institution 7 page.
Enable the course what-if option
Select to enable students to run a course what-if scenario in selfservice using the What-If Report – Create What-if Scenario (
SAA_SS_WHATIF) page. Clear the check box to disable this
ability.
Student What-If Career Requirement This field is for use with the What-If Report – Create What-if
Term
Scenario page, which a student can use to define a what-if career
scenario and generate a what-if advisement report based on his
or her what-if career, program, plan, or subplan.
The field values here affect what requirement term value or
values the student sees in the Catalog Year field on the What-If
Report – Create What-if Scenario page.
Use Career Requirement Term Only is the default value. By
default, the term value that the Catalog Year field displays
on the Create What-if Scenario page is the student’s career
requirement term. If a student has no career requirement term,
the field displays the student’s primary program requirement
term. With this selection, the Catalog Year field is not editable
by the student.
If you want to enable students to change the Catalog Year field
value (that is, the career requirement term value to be used in
the what-if audit), select the Use Term Table Setup field value.
You can then define valid begin and end dates on the Term Table
page. With this option, you control (using begin and end dates)
the (requirement) terms available to the students when they
define their what-if career scenario.
Advising Notes
Enable Advisor Action Items
If enabled, the Action Items region is displayed and the column
is included in Advising Notes lists. This is an initial setup
value because turning off this feature would make existing data
inaccessible.
Enable Advisor Notifications
If enabled, the notify advisee button is displayed.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
169
Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service
Enable Advisee Note Updates
Chapter 9
If enabled, the update note button is displayed. Disabling
Advisee Note Updates disables all the following advisee
features:
•
Enable Advisee Add Note Items—the advisee can add note
items such as comments.
•
Enable Advisee Add Attachment—the advisee can add or
delete attachments to the note but cannot delete the advisor’s
attachments.
•
Enable Advisee Notifications—the advisor is automatically
notified when the advisee submits an update.
Defining Note Categories
Use this page to view and define Advising Note categories for your institution. You can create long and
short descriptions for each category and change its active status.
Access the Note Category Table page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Academic Advisement).
Defining Note Subcategories
Use this page to view and define Advising Note subcategories for your institution. Subcategories are child
values of Note categories. You can create long and short descriptions for each subcategory and change its
active status.
Access the Note Subcategory Table page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Academic Advisement).
Related Links
"Identifying Self-Service Report Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
"Defining Terms, Sessions, and Session Time Periods" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application
Fundamentals)
"Understanding Academic Requirement Groups" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Academic
Advisement)
Viewing Advisee Information Through Self-Service Pages
"Creating and Managing Advising Notes" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Academic Advisement)
Defining Self-Service Installation Settings
To define conditions under which an advisement report is generated for self service, use the Academic
Advisement installation component (SAA_INSTALL_AA).
This section discusses how to define installation settings for Academic Advisement.
170
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 9
Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service
Page Used to Define Self-Service Installation Settings
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Installation Academic
Advisement
SAA_INSTALL_AA
Set Up SACR, Install,
Academic Advising
Installation, Installation
Academic Advisement
Disable on-demand report
processing and enable the
system to track which students
need to have new reports
generated, based on changes
made to their academic
history.
Installing Self-Service Academic Advisement
Access the Installation Academic Advisement page (Set Up SACR, Install, Academic Advising
Installation).
Image: Installation Academic Advisement page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Installation Academic Advisement page. You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
The check boxes on this page determine under which conditions a student's academic history causes the
system to generate an advisement report for a student. If the institution has enabled real-time processing
(on the Academic Advising Setup page) and selected check boxes on this page, a new advisement report
is generated when a student accesses the My Academic Requirements page. If the institution has not
enabled real-time processing, the institution can use the conditions to "trigger" a batch process to run
and generate advisement reports at predefined intervals. To run the advisement reports in batch based on
these synchronization options, use the Generate Report Requests (SAA_RC_RPTRQST) and Generate
Advisement Reports (SAA_RC_RPTGEN) components.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
171
Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service
Chapter 9
Selecting a check box causes the system to set a synchronization (sync) flag for that change. In turn, the
flag cues the institution to rerun the advisement report. Here are the actions for each check box that set a
sync flag:
Enrollment Records
Adding, deleting, or modifying any enrollment records through
Enrollment, Enrollment Requests, Quick Enrollment, or
Grading.
Transfer Credit Records
Posting or unposting any transfer credit.
Internal Degree Records
Awarding, revoking, or modifying any degree record through
the Student Program/Plan, Degree Maintenance, or Batch
Graduation Processing pages.
External Degree Records
Adding, modifying, or removing any externally awarded
degrees through the External Education pages.
Student Planner Records
Adding, modifying, or removing any records from the student's
planner.
Academic Structure Records
Adding, modifying, or removing any values from the student's
Records Program stack. This also includes admissions
matriculation.
Student Group Record
Adding, modifying, or removing any advisement student group
values for a student.
Academic Level Records
Making any changes to a student's academic level, either by
automated processes from grading and enrollment or through
manual override in term processing.
Milestone Records
Adding, modifying, or removing any milestone values for a
student.
Shopping Cart Records
Adding, modifying, or removing any records in the student's
Shopping Cart.
Student Exception Records
Reprocessing when a student override is made.
Specifically, the flag is set when any of the following types
of student-based exceptions are created: course directive,
requirement change, waiver, or override. The flag is also set
when there is any change made to such an exception, whether it
is a change to the description or to the override detail itself.
Course Substitution Records
Reprocessing when a course substitution is made using the
Create Course Substitution component (STDNT_CRS_SUBS).
The flag is also set when there is any change made to the
component, whether it is a change to the long description or to
the substitution detail itself.
172
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 9
Setting Up Academic Advisement Self-Service
Example
An institution selects the Enrollment Records check box. A student has an advisement report dated May
10, 2006. The current date is July 18, 2006 and the student has just enrolled in a summer school class. The
change to the student's enrollment record sets a synchronization flag. The institution nightly runs a batch
process to generate new advisement reports for students for whom the synchronization flag is set to "Y."
On the following day, the student looks at his My Academic Requirements page. The advisement report
that appears there will be up to date (with a date and time stamp as of the previous night's batch process).
Alternatively, if the institution has selected the Enable real-time processing check box on the Academic
Advising Setup page, then when student enrolls in a class then the system automatically generates the
report to automatically (in real time) when the student next accesses the My Academic Requirements
page. The student will immediately see the course he's just enrolled in.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
173
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Campus Mobile Licensing
Campus Self Service Mobile is comprised of elements delivered in the PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
maintenance stream as well as the PeopleSoft Campus Self Service Mobile app itself. The PeopleSoft
Campus Self Service Mobile program may be accessed via the Oracle Software Delivery Cloud (http://
edelivery.oracle.com). You must comply with all of Oracle's licensing terms and conditions.
Note: You may be required to acquire a license for Oracle Mobile Application Framework depending on
the specific deployment desires and requirements of your institution. Also, the map display functionality
requires a separate license to Oracle Maps Service for PeopleSoft. For detailed license information,
see Licensing Information User Manual for Campus Solutions (LIUM) on the Campus Solutions
Documentation Home page in My Oracle Support.
See Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1).
Understanding Campus Mobile Technology
The Campus Mobile application is built with Oracle’s Mobile Application Framework (Oracle MAF)
which enables deployment to both iOS and Android native application types. Oracle MAF allows a
campus to easily extend the Campus Mobile application to include mobile websites and other content.
To learn more about Oracle Mobile Application Framework, refer to the Oracle Mobile Application
Framework Documentation in Oracle’s website.
Getting Started With Campus Mobile
This section provides high-level views of Campus Mobile functionality.
Campus Mobile Overview
Campus Mobile is a new self-service interface designed for smartphone form factor devices. It is
delivered as part of Campus Solutions Self Service and is deployed as an iOS or Android application.
The application features high-value transactions to which students desire to have constant, alwaysavailable access. Features of Campus Mobile include the ability to: view class schedule, view grades,
view schedule of classes, enroll in classes, manage the enrollment shopping cart, and view finances,
“to do's” and holds. Further, Campus Mobile takes advantage of the new Campus Solutions notification
framework to provide proactive communication to students. Delivered with Campus Mobile are a number
of notifications (for example, the system notifies a student when a grade is posted). Each event that
triggers a notification can be configured to use one or more communication channels (such as, email,
SMS, and push notifications). In addition, the Campus Solutions notification framework also provides
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
175
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
the ability for a student to manage how they receive notifications. The Campus Mobile smartphone
application is a secure, simplified, and personalized platform for students to conduct key Self Service
processes. Your institution can brand, customize, and extend the Campus mobile application to suit your
campus requirements.
Campus Mobile Integrations
Campus Mobile utilizes delivered Campus Solutions web services such as the Enrollment Web Service
(EWS). For Campus Mobile, a RESTful version of the delivered web services are deployed. To optimize
the web service performance, Campus Mobile takes advantage of the Entity Profiling features new to
Campus Solutions.
By taking advantage of functionality first delivered in Peopletools 8.52, we are able to deliver RESTful
versions of the delivered web services. RESTful web services require lower overhead than SOAP-based
services, thus lowering the bandwidth requirement for delivering data to a mobile device. Entity Profile
gives us the ability to create and use a mobile profile that limits the amount of data delivered in the web
service payload to the subset of data that Campus Mobile needs, thus again lowering the bandwidth
requirement for delivering data to a mobile device.
Campus Mobile uses Campus Solutions Authentication and Authorization web services. These are
RESTful web services that make it possible for users to log into Campus Mobile with the same credentials
as they use in Campus Solutions Self Service. The security role, CS Mobile Student, is used to provide
access to Campus Mobile. Campus Mobile also uses Campus Solutions User Preferences web services to
retrieve the data displayed in the Campus Mobile Profile feature.
For more information on the implementation of security in Campus Mobile as well as implementation of
web services, see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1).
Important! Because of the REST implementation requirement, Campus Mobile requires at least
PeopleTools 8.52.
See:
•
"Understanding Financial Aid Web Services" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Financial Aid)
•
"Using the SSF_EPAYMENT_TRANS Web Service" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
•
"Using Entity Registry Based Constituent Web Service Operations" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
9.2: Campus Community)
•
EWS documentation in My Oracle Support (ID 1371391.1).
Campus Mobile Implementation
Campus Mobile implementation involves configuring Campus Solutions, configuring and branding the
Campus Mobile application itself and delivering the Campus Mobile application to students through
channels such as the Apple App Store and Google Play. The following sections of this document discuss
configuring Campus Solutions; see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID
1548793.1) for configuring and branding information.
Licensing Oracle Mobile Application Framework
176
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Starting with version 5, Campus Mobile is built on the Oracle Mobile Application Framework. Formerly
known as ADF Mobile, Oracle Mobile Application Framework (MAF) has been split from ADF and is
now a separately licensed product. MAF includes the MAF Foundation License which allows customers
to configure, brand, compile and deploy mobile application archive files like Campus Mobile without the
need for a full MAF license.
Also, the map display functionality requires a separate license to Oracle Maps Service for PeopleSoft.
Before customizing Campus Mobile, refer to the detailed license information in Licensing Information
User Manual for Campus Solutions (LIUM) on the Campus Solutions Documentation Home Page in My
Oracle Support.
Setting Up Campus Mobile Within Campus Solutions
This section provides an overview of Campus Mobile setup and discusses how to:
•
Set up Integration Broker for Campus Mobile.
•
Activate Campus Mobile service operations, handlers, and routings.
•
Manually generate routings for service operations.
•
Set up logging for troubleshooting.
•
Set up Campus Mobile security.
•
Secure List of Values services.
•
Add security access to Campus Mobile service operations
•
Set up instructor contact information.
•
Set up finances.
•
Set up contributions.
•
Set up applications.
•
Customize and brand Campus Mobile.
•
Deploy Campus Mobile.
Note: Make sure you read through all the topics before starting any procedure.
Understanding Campus Mobile Setup
Campus Mobile is a smartphone app that uses Campus Solutions web services to provide data directly
to the user's phone. The data is rendered by the Campus Mobile screens. To enable the web services that
Campus Mobile requires, you must configure Integration Broker as well as the appropriate security for
your web services. To enable building mapping (a feature accessed in Campus Mobile through the Class
Section Details), you must also populate the latitude and longitude for each building.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
177
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
Page Used to Set Up Campus Mobile Within Campus Solutions
Page Name
Definition Name
Instructor Contact Information SCC_INSTR_CT
Navigation
Usage
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Campus Mobile,
Instructor Contact Setup
Define which address, phone
and email types are used to
display instructor contact
information to students.
Setting Up Integration Broker for Campus Mobile
We assume that you have performed and validated all the basic Integration Broker setup. Refer to the
Integration Broker for information on Integration Broker gateway setup and service configuration.
Note: Because Campus Mobile uses the RESTful versions of the delivered web services, it is important to
ensure that even if you have previously set up Integration Broker, you have entered the appropriate URL
in the Target Location field of the REST Services Target Locations.
See PeopleTools: Integration Broker Administration, “Configuring PeopleSoft Integration Broker for
Handling Services”.
Activating Campus Mobile Service Operations, Handlers, and Routings
Service operations for the Campus Mobile are delivered with a status of Inactive to prevent the accidental
transmission of data. In order to make use of these key elements of the Campus Mobile at the time of
implementation, you need to set each of them to a status of Active.
To activate service operations:
1. Log into the PeopleSoft application in a browser.
2. Select PeopleTools, Integration Broker, Integration Setup, Service Operations.
3. Select each of the service operations from the Campus Mobile Service Operations tables.
4. On the General page, select the Active check box in the Default Service Operation Version group.
5. Select the Handlers page and select the Active option from the drop-down list for the Status column.
6. Save the page.
7. Select the Routings tab, select the check box against the routing name, and click the Activate Selected
Routings button.
Campus Mobile Service Operations Table
The following web service operations, handlers, and routings must be activated for Campus Mobile:
178
Service Operation
Handler
Routing
SCC_GET_LOV_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_GET_LOV_R_POST
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Service Operation
Handler
Routing
SCC_GET_USERPREF_R_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_GET_USERPREF_R_GET
SCC_SC_ADDITEM_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_ADDITEM_R_POST
SCC_SC_CHECKOUT_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_CHECKOUT_R_POST
SCC_SC_CLEARCART_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_CLEARCART_R_POST
SCC_SC_GETCART_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_GETCART_R_POST
SCC_SC_GETITEM_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_GETITEM_R_POST
SCC_SC_REMOVEITEM_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_REMOVEITEM_R_POST
SCC_SC_SAVECART_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_SAVECART_R_POST
SCC_SC_VALIDATE_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SC_VALIDATE_R_POST
SCC_SUBMIT_USERPREF_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_SUBMIT_USERPREF_R_POST
SCC_USERREG_AUTHORIZE_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_USERREG_AUTHORIZE_POST
SCC_USERREG_AUTH_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_USERREG_AUTH_GET
SSR_ADD_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_ADD_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
SSR_DROP_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_DROP_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
SSR_EDIT_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_EDIT_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
SSR_ENR_VALIDATE_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_ENR_VALIDATE_R_POST
SSR_GET_CLASSES_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_GET_CLASSES_R_POST
SSR_GET_CLASS_SECTION_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_GET_CLASS_SECTION_R_POST
SSR_GET_COURSES_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_GET_COURSES_R_POST
SSR_GET_COURSE_OFFERING_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_GET_COURSE_OFFERING_R_
POST
SSR_GET_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_GET_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
SSR_STDNT_ENRL_OPTIONS_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_STDNT_ENRL_OPTIONS_R_
POST
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
179
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
Service Operation
Handler
Routing
SSR_STUDYLIST_DEADLINES_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_STUDYLIST_DEADLINES_R_
POST
SSR_SWAP_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSR_SWAP_ENROLLMENT_R_POST
SSR_ENROLLMENT_SYNC
ONNOTIFY
--
SCC_USERREG_AUTHENTICATE*
REQUESTHDLR
--
SCC_GET_CHECKLIST_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
--
SCC_GET_SERVICE_INDICATORS_
R_G
REQUESTHDLR
--
SFA_GET_STUDENT_AWARDS_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
--
SSF_GET_STUDENT_ACCOUNT_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
--
SCC_LOOKUP_DIRECTORY_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_LOOKUP_DIRECTORY_R_POST
SCC_GETPHOTO_R_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_GETPHOTO_R_GET
SAV_CREATE_INV_R_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SAV_CREATE_INV_R_GET
SAV_SAVE_INV_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SAV_SAVE_INV_R_POST
SSF_INIT_EPAY_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSF_INIT_EPAY_R_POST
SSF_CMPLT_EPAY_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SSF_CMPLT_EPAY_R_POST
SAD_GET_APPL_STS_R_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SAD_GET_APPL_STS_R_GET
SAD_GET_APPL_TODO_R_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SAD_GET_APPL_TODO_R_GET
SCC_GETCONST_R_GET
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_GETCONST_R_GET
* SCC_USERREG_AUTHENTICATE is used only in Campus Mobile 4.0 and earlier.
Manually Generating Routings for Service Operations
Some service operations do not have routings generated by default so you must generate routings for them
separately.
To generate routings for the User Registration Service:
1. Log into the PeopleSoft application in a browser.
180
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
2. Select PeopleTools, Integration Broker, Integration Setup, Service Operations.
3. Search for SCC_USERREG_AUTHENTICATE Service Operation.
4. On the General page, select the Generate Any-to-Local check box.
5. Save the page.
To generate routings for the Enrollment Sync Service:
1. Log into the PeopleSoft application in a browser.
2. Select PeopleTools, Integration Broker, Integration Setup, Service Operations.
3. Search for SSR_ENROLLMENT_SYNC Service Operation.
4. On the General page, select the Generate Local-to-Local check box.
5. Save the page.
Follow the same steps to Generate Any-to-Local routings for the following service operations:
•
SCC_GET_CHECKLIST_R_POST
•
SCC_GET_SERVICE_INDICATORS_R_G
•
SFA_GET_STUDENT_AWARDS_R_POST
•
SSF_GET_STUDENT_ACCOUNT_R_POST
Setting Up Logging for Troubleshooting
By default, only error messages appear on the Integration Broker Synchronous Service Monitor screen.
During testing, it may be helpful to increase the logging detail of the web service messages in order
to detect all messaging activity through the Integration Broker Synchronous Service Monitor screen.
Increasing the log detail to “Header and Detail” enables synchronous message header information and
XML message content to appear in the Service Operations Monitor.
To enable logging web service messages in greater detail for Campus Mobile:
1. Navigate to PeopleTools, Integration Broker, Integration Setup, Service Operations.
2. Enter each of the service operation names from the list of service operations used in Campus Mobile,
such as SSR_ADD_ENROLLMENT_R_POST.
3. Click Search.
4. Select the Routings tab.
5. On the Routing Definitions page, change Log Detail from No Logging to Header and Detail.
For more information, access the Configuring Routing Definitions page (PeopleTools, PeopleSoft
Integration Broker, Managing Service Operation Routing Definitions, Configuring Routing Definitions).
Note: It is not recommended that you turn on logging in production environments; however it can be
useful in QA and development environments.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
181
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile Security
Users log into Campus Mobile using the same credentials that they use for Campus Self Service access
through PIA. These credentials pass to PeopleTools using the Authentication and Authorization web
services (Service operations SCC_USERREG_AUTH_GET and SCC_USERREG_AUTHORIZE_POST
in the Campus Mobile Service Operations chart above).
The delivered authorization model is different for V3.1 (and earlier versions) and V4 and later versions, as
outlined below.
Campus Mobile V3.1 and earlier:
For Campus Mobile V3.1 and earlier, the permission list HCCPCSSA3000 determines whether a user is
authorized to access the Campus Mobile features. The security role, CS Mobile Student, is delivered by
default with the HCCPCSSA3000 permission list added to it. You have the flexibility to deploy security
for Campus Mobile in the way that fits your institution’s requirements. Your options include:
•
Assign the delivered CS Mobile Student role to students who need access to Campus Mobile.
•
Assign the delivered HCCPCSSA3000 PL to a role that is (already) assigned to students who need
access to Campus Mobile.
•
Customize the Campus Mobile application to use a different permission list as described in the
Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1).
Campus Mobile V4 and later:
Beginning with V4 of Campus Mobile, a more granular security model is delivered. Each Campus Mobile
feature is assigned its own permission list that is checked to determine whether a user is authorized for
access to that feature. With this security model, access to features can be readily controlled with security
configuration. For example, with the delivered security roles, students that do not participate in Financial
Aid can simply not have the CS Mobile Financial Aid role added to their user profile. Then they will not
see the Financial Aid feature on their springboard.
The following table contains the delivered roles and permission lists. You may use these as delivered or
deploy security in the way that meets your institution’s requirements. The Campus Mobile application can
be configured to use different permission lists if needed, see the Campus Mobile Implementation Guide
in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1) , section 3.3.2.3.
182
Role
Permission List Description
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Schedule
HCCPCSSA3010
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Class Search
HCCPCSSA3020
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Grades
HCCPCSSA3030
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Profile
HCCPCSSA3040
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Cart
HCCPCSSA3050
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Todo
HCCPCSSA3070
CS Mobile Student
CS Mobile – Holds
HCCPCSSA3080
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Role
Permission List Description
CS Mobile Applicant
CS Mobile – Applications
HCCPCSSA3100
CS Mobile Contributor
CS Mobile – Contributions
HCCPCSSA3090
CS Mobile Finances
CS Mobile – Finances
HCCPCSSA3060
CS Mobile Financial Aid
CS Mobile – Financial Aid
HCCPCSSA3110
Securing List of Values (LOV) Services
Campus Mobile makes extensive use of the LOV web services throughout the features of Campus
Mobile. In order to limit the data that can be queried using the LOV service operations, there
are delivered LOV configurations to enable web service access to the specific LOV data used in
Campus Mobile. In the LOV setup all of the following use the ‘DEFAULT’ context except for the
‘SSC_SUBJECT_CLS’ noted with the (*) which uses the ‘CM’ context. This configuration is delivered as
is provided here for informational purposes.
See "Setting Up List of Values" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Record
Field
Usage
ACAD_PLAN_TBL
ACAD_CAREER
Class Search Term Selection - Career,
Profile - Career
AID_YEAR_SRCH
AID_YEAR
Profile - Aid year
AV_INV_LOV_WRK
AV_SEQNO_LOV1
Contributions – Source
AV_INV_LOV_WRK
INTV_CD
Contributions – Campaigns
AV_INV_LOV_WRK
AV_MTVTN_LOV1
Contributions – Fund
AV_INV_LOV_WRK
INSTITUTION
Contributions – Institution
SSR_CLSSRCH_REQ
STRM
Class Search Term Selection, Profile
SSR_CLSSRCH_REQ
INSTRUCTION_MODE
Class Search filter - Instruction mode
SSR_CLSSRCH_REQ
INSTITUTION
Class Search Term Selection Institution, Profile - Institution
SSR_CLSSRCH_REQ
CAMPUS
Class Search filter – Campus
SSR_LOV_WRK
ACAD_ORG1
Enrollment Options - To get the acad org
to retrieve the instructors in edit class
from cart use case
SSR_LOV_WRK
ACAD_PROG1
Enrollment Options - Acad Program
Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV10
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
183
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
Record
Field
Usage
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV9
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV8
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV7
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV6
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV5
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV4
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV3
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV2
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_INSTR_LOV1
Enrollment Options - Instructor Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_GRD_BASE_LOV3
Enrollment Options - Grading base
Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_GRD_BASE_LOV2
Enrollment Options - Grading base
Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SSR_GRD_BASE_LOV1
Enrollment Options - Grading base
Selection
SSR_LOV_WRK
SCC_SUBJECT_CLS
Class Search Subjects (If acad career
exists)
SSR_LOV_WRK
SCC_SUBJECT_CLS
Class Search Subjects (If acad career
does not exist)*
SSR_CLSSRCH_REQ
SUBJECT
Class Search Subjects - V3 & V2 back
port support
SSR_LOV_WRK
STRM
Class Search Course selection- V2 back
port support
Adding Security Access to the Campus Mobile Service Operations
In addition to feature-level access in Campus Mobile, users must be granted access to the web service
operations that provide the data and business logic between Campus Mobile and Campus Solutions itself.
A permission list must be defined that includes all of the necessary service operations to be deployed to
users. That permission list must then be attached to a role assigned to Campus Mobile student users.
PeopleTools provides granular-level control to allow you to define relationships between permission lists
and roles that best fit your institutional policies. You may want to encapsulate both feature-level access
(see above) and web service-level access within a single permission list (such as HCCPCSSA3000),
or you may want to define feature and web service access independently and pull them together within
a single role. As long as users have access to both the Campus Mobile features and required service
operations, Campus Mobile transactions are available to them.
184
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
To add the permission list to each service operation listed in the Campus Mobile Service Operations table
above:
1. Navigate to PeopleTools, Integration Broker, Integration Setup, Service Operations Page.
2. Search each Service Operation Name listed in the Campus Mobile Service Operations tables.
3. On the General Tab, click the Service Operation Security link.
4. The Web Service Access page opens in a new window. On this page, select the appropriate permission
list that you want to attach to this service operation.
5. Select Full Access from the Access drop-down list.
6. Click Save.
Note: The service operations are configured to require basic authentication with the exception of:
SCC_GET_LOV_R_POST, SSR_GET_CLASSES_R_POST, SSR_GET_CLASS_SECTION_R_POST,
and SSR_GET_COURSE_OFFERING_R_POST. These service operations are set to require no
authentication. This design is intended to support a future "public" unauthenticated role for class search. If
these four services are set to require basic authentication, errors occur in the Campus Mobile application.
To check the status of a service operation's required authentication, navigate to the Service Operations
Page, General tab.
However, should your institution want to require basic authentication on these services, security can be
enabled. First, follow the same steps above to enable security for these service operations; then follow the
instructions in Campus Mobile Implementation Guide , “Securing Class Search Feature” in My Oracle
Support (ID 1548793.1).
Setting Up Instructor Contact Info
Access the Instructor Contact Information page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Campus Mobile,
Instructor Contact Setup).
Campus Mobile includes the ability for a student to view information on instructors assigned to a class
either in their Class Schedule or through Class Search. Details can include the contact information
(address, phone number, email address, and photo) for instructors, if institutions have chosen to share
those details.
Enable Instructor Contact Info
Display
Click the check box to enable or disable the display of instructor
contact info. Disabling instructor contractor information
prevents the web service from publishing any information.
The Campus Mobile application simply displays the instructor
name without any ability to drill down for additional contact
information.
Address Type, Phone Type, and
Email Type
Select the desired contact information source for each.
You are not required to map all three attributes to enable the
instructor contact information. If no value is selected for a
particular attribute (a <blank> option is provided), then no value
passes to Campus Mobile for that attribute.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
185
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
Note: To ensure that data for individuals covered under FERPA regulations (such as student instructors)
is not released contrary to elected FERPA restrictions, the system queries the FERPA flag before sending
information. If the FERPA flag is set to Yes/True, the system does not display data for that instructor,
regardless of whether or not the data defined on this page corresponds to FERPA elections.
Note: The service operation must be secured such that only Campus Mobile can retrieve contact
information values from the directory service. For more information on securing the service, see
PeopleTools: Security Administration.
Setting Up Finances
The service operations that deliver the financial information are dependent on settings on the General
Options page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Student Financials, SF Institution Set).
For your Institution Set, ensure that the Allow Use in Service check box is selected and you have entered
a value in the Maximum Payments in Service field.
Related Links
Setting Up Institution Sets
Setting Up Contributions
There are several areas of configuration needed to enable contributions along with the service operations
described here. In the Campus Mobile Contributions feature, each institution that is configured for
Involvement has a dynamic message associated with it that appears on the Contributions page. This
message is set on the Involvement Setup page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service,
Involvement, Involvement). You can change the Message field and to dynamically update in Campus
Mobile. For more information about involvement setup, see "Setting Up Self-Service Online Giving and
Pledges" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor Relations).
In the Contributions feature, Make a Gift allows for direct integration with payment providers for credit
card gifts. For this integration to work, you must configure the Hosted Payment Framework; see the
ePayment Developer's Guide for instructions. Once the Hosted Payment merchant setup is complete,
select the Hosted Payment to use with Contributions on the Business Unit CR component (Set Up SACR,
Product Related, Contributor Relations, Install Contributor Relations, Business Unit CR). For more
information on CR business unit setup, see "Defining and Securing PeopleSoft Contributor Relations
Business Units and SetIDs" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals).
Further, there is a required servlet that provides the integration between the Campus Mobile app and the
third-party payment provider through the Hosted Payment Framework.
For information on configuring the servlet, see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle
Support (ID 1548793.1).
Setting Up Applications
The service operations that deliver the Applications information are dependent on display settings for
Application Status, Checklist Item Due Dates and Checklist Contacts.
See Setting Up Application Status and Checklist Options
186
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Customizing and Branding Campus Mobile
For more information on customizing the features of Campus Mobile, see Campus Mobile
Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1). The Implementation Guide provides details
about branding the application with your institution's logo and colors, as well as icons and labels. Further,
you can find information on the potential for customizing or extending the Campus Mobile application.
Deploying Campus Mobile
Campus Mobile can be deployed to both Android (.apk) and iOS (.ipa) devices. Campus Mobile is built
on the Oracle Mobile Application Framework. Open the Campus Mobile application archive in Oracle
Jdeveloper, apply your branding, sign the application for your Institution and deploy it to Apple and
Android application files to be distributed to your students.
For information on deploying and distributing the Campus Mobile application, see Campus Mobile
Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (1548793.1).
Defining and Setting Up Event Notifications for Campus Mobile
This section provides overviews of setup for notifications and events as well as batch notifications, and it
discusses how to:
•
Perform general event setup.
•
Perform general notification setup.
•
Set up checklist events with notifications.
•
Set up service indicator (SI) add events with notifications.
•
Set up SI removed events with notifications.
•
Set up enrollment appointment events with notifications.
•
Create a job definition.
•
Schedule jobs.
•
Set up an events archive
•
Set up push notifications.
Understanding Notifications and Events
Campus Solutions provides a notifications framework to trigger various streams of communication,
called channels, based on underlying conditions (such as the posting of a final grade). Within the Campus
Solutions Notification Framework, specific underlying conditions are defined as events. A single event,
such as a final grade posting, can trigger multiple notification actions – for example, it may cause an
email, an SMS message, and also a push notification to be sent to a user.
Campus Mobile delivers configurable artifacts that work with the Campus Solutions Notification
Framework to capture events and publish messages through the email, SMS and push channels. An
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
187
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
activity stream showing recent events appears to the Campus Mobile user on a tab in the Landing Page.
This tab, titled Notifications, has a badge reflecting the number of unread events in the list. Tapping the
Notifications tab displays the events listing where the user can navigate to specific features in the context
of the event. Tapping the back button returns the user to the list of events in the Notifications tab of the
Landing Page.
Defining and Setting Up Events for Campus Mobile
As described above and in the “Using Campus Mobile” set of topics, starting with Campus Mobile
Version 4, events are presented to the student through the Notifications tab in the Campus Mobile Landing
Page. Follow this setup guide to present the student with an event feed in Campus Mobile, and to trigger
subsequent notifications to students (as referenced in “Using Campus Mobile”) using SMS, Email, or
Push.
Understanding Batch Notifications Setup
The Enrollment Appointment notification and notification of new or changed Holds or To Do List items
requires you to set up a new batch notification job. To facilitate regular checking of these business process
events, define new batch notification jobs using the Campus Solutions Notification Framework. In
addition, you must associate each batch notification definition with a job definition and schedule it using
the JobSet Definitions page in PeopleTools Process Scheduler.
The steps in this section outline the required setup needed for the following batch notification definitions:
188
•
CheckListBatchSMS
•
CheckListBatchEmail
•
CheckListBatchPush
•
SI_AddOrChangeBatchSMS
•
SI_AddOrChangeBatchEmail
•
SI_AddOrChangeBatchPush
•
SI_DeleteBatchSMS
•
SI_DeleteBatchEmail
•
SI_DeleteBatchPush
•
EnrollmentApptStatusBatchSMS
•
EnrollmentApptStatusBatchEmail
•
EnrollmentApptStatusBatchPush
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Pages Used to Define and Set Up Event Notifications for Campus Mobile
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Event Setup
SCC_NTFEVT_CFG
Set Up SACR, System
Administration, Utilities,
Notifications, Event Setup
Configure the event and
specify the notification
consumers to track events and
notifications.
Batch Notifications
SCC_BAT_NTF_RC
Set Up SACR, System
Administration, Utilities,
Notifications, Batch
Notifications
Define parameters such
as selection criteria (using
Population Selection) for
recipients to be included in
batch notification.
Push Notification Setup
SCC_NTF_PUSH_SETUP
Set Up SACR, System
Administration, Utilities,
Notifications, Push
Notification Setup
Configure the push
notification setup for APNS
and GCM.
Notification Setup
SCC_NTF_SETUP
Set Up SACR, System
Administration, Utilities,
Notifications, Notification
Setup
Activate notifications for
Campus Mobile.
Notification Consumer Setup
SCC_NTF_CON_CFG
Set Up SACR, System
Administration, Utilities,
Notifications, Notification
Consumer Setup
Activate notification
consumers.
SMS Notification
SCC_NTF_SMS
Set Up SACR, System
Administration, Utilities,
Notifications, SMS
Notification Setup
Define connection details
used for sending SMS
messages.
Performing General Event Setup
The following service operations, handlers, and routings must be activated to enable Campus Mobile’s
use of events. These services populate the Notifications tab in the Landing Page. See the section
“Activating Campus Mobile Service Operations, Handlers and Routing” for details on how to activate
these service operations.
Service Operation
Handler
Routing
SCC_NTF_PUBLISH_STDNT_ENRL
ONNOTIFY
SCC_NTF_PUBLISH_STDNT_ENRL
SCC_NTF_GET_EVENTS_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_NTF_GET_EVENTS_R_POST
SCC_NTF_UPDATE_EVENTS_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_NTF_UPDATE_EVENTS_R_
POST
Activating Campus Mobile Events
Events are delivered as inactive and must be activated. To activate events:
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
189
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
1. Log into the PeopleSoft application in a browser.
2. Select Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Event Setup.
3. Select each of the Event from the following list.
4. Select Active from the Status field drop-down list.
5. Save the page.
Event names:
•
FINAL_GRADE_POSTED
•
ENROLLED_FROM_WAITLIST
•
CHECKLIST_UPDATED_BATCH
•
SI_ASSIGNED_BATCH
•
SI_REMOVED_BATCH
•
ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_BATCH
Note: Over time, the Events table can grow and need to be archived. Campus Mobile only shows events
from the past 7 days so it would be reasonable to run a weekly Event Archive job that would clean up any
events prior to that 7-day mark. See the section “Events Archive Setup” to configure events archiving.
Performing General Notification Setup
Notifications, delivered in parallel with Campus Mobile, are described in the “Using Campus Mobile”
documentation. As noted, notifications can be delivered to a student through three channels: SMS, email,
or push notifications. This section describes the steps you must take to activate notifications for each
channel.
Notification Service Operation Table
The following service operations, handlers, and routings must be activated to enable Campus Mobile’s
use of the Notification Framework features. See the section “Activating Campus Mobile Service
Operations, Handlers and Routing” for details on how to activate these service operations.
190
Service Operation
Handler
Routing
SCC_PUSH_NOTIFICATIONS
NOTIFYHNDLR
SCC_PUSH_NOTIFICATIONS
SCC_DEVICE_REGISTER_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_DEVICE_REGISTER_POST
SCC_NTF_PUBLISH_STDNT_ENRL
ONNOTIFY
SCC_NTF_PUBLISH_STDNT_ENRL
SCC_NTF_GET_EVENTS_R_POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_NTF_GET_EVENTS_R_POST
SCC_NTF_UPDATE_EVENTS_R_
POST
REQUESTHDLR
SCC_NTF_UPDATE_EVENTS_R_
POST
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Service Operation
Handler
Routing
SCC_GCM_SEND_POST
--
SCC_GCM_SEND_POST
SCC_APNS_FEEDBACK
--
SCC_APNS_FEEDBACK
SCC_APNS_SEND
--
SCC_APNS_SEND
SCC_NTF_SMS_SRV
--
SCC_NTF_SMS_SRV
Activating Campus Mobile Notification Templates
Notification templates for email, SMS, and push are delivered with a status of Inactive. To make use
of Notifications functionality at the time of implementation, you need to set each of them to a status
of Active. Note that the template names indicate their usage for SMS, email, or push so you can decide
which ones to activate.
To activate Notification templates:
1. Log into the PeopleSoft application in a browser.
2. Select Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Notification Setup.
3. Select each of the Notification templates from the following list.
4. Select Active from the Status field drop-down list.
5. Save the page.
Notification Template Name:
•
GRADE_ADDED_EMAIL
•
GRADE_ADDED_PUSH
•
GRADE_ADDED_SMS
•
GRADE_CHANGED_EMAIL
•
GRADE_CHANGED_PUSH
•
GRADE_CHANGED_SMS
•
GRADE_REMOVED_EMAIL
•
GRADE_REMOVED_PUSH
•
GRADE_REMOVED_SMS
•
WAITLIST_ENROLLED_EMAIL
•
WAITLIST_ENROLLED_PUSH
•
WAITLIST_ENROLLED_SMS
•
CHECKLIST_UPDATED_EMAIL
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
191
Setting Up Campus Mobile
•
CHECKLIST_UPDATED_PUSH
•
CHECKLIST_UPDATED_SMS
•
SI_ADDED_OR_CHANGED_EMAIL
•
SI_ADDED_OR_CHANGED_PUSH
•
SI_ADDED_OR_CHANGED_SMS
•
SI_REMOVED_EMAIL
•
SI_REMOVED_PUSH
•
SI_REMOVED_SMS
•
ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_EMAIL
•
ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_PUSH
•
ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_SMS
Chapter 10
Activating Campus Mobile Notification Consumers
Notification consumers for email, SMS, and push are delivered with a status of Inactive. In order to
make use of Notifications functionality at the time of implementation, you need to set each of them to
a status of Active. Similar to the templates, if you only intend to activate certain channels you do not
need to activate every consumer. However, note that the single consumer "Campus Mobile" is required
for all three channels (email, SMS, and push) to activate the checklist notifications, service indicator
notifications, and enrollment appointment notifications.
To activate Notification consumers:
•
Log into the PeopleSoft application in a browser.
•
Select Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Notification Consumer Setup.
•
Select each of the Notification consumers from the following list.
•
Select Active from the Status field drop-down list.
•
Save the page.
Notification Consumer Name:
192
•
FINAL_GRADE_POSTED
•
ENROLLED_FROM_WAITLIST
•
CHECKLIST_UPDATED_BATCH
•
SI_ASSIGNED_BATCH
•
SI_REMOVED_BATCH
•
ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_BATCH
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Note: The Waitlist Notification requires a Wait List process: PSJob process SRWAITJB. Please see
Student Records for more information on implementing this process.
Setting Up Checklist Events with Notifications
To set up checklist events with notifications:
1. Navigate to Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Batch Notifications
2. Add new Run Control ID (CHECKLIST_UPDATED_BATCH).
3. Configure the Checklist batch notification as follows:
Population Selection
1. Enable Population Selection.
2. Select PS Query as Selection Tool.
3. Select SCC_CHECKLIST as Query Name.
Event Setup
Configure event setup so that Checklist Events appear on the Notifications tab in the Campus Mobile
Landing Page.
1. Select Enable Event Tracking.
2. Select CHECKLIST_UPDATED as the Event ID.
3. Fill the Event Parameters Grid as follows:
a. Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Checklist Descr.
b. Enter CHECKLIST_UPDATED as the value for EVENT_TYPE.
c. Enter Checklist as the value for GOTO.
Notification Consumers and Templates Setup
Configure notification consumers and templates to enable SMS, email, and Push notifications:
1. Select CHECKLIST_UPDATED as Notification Consumer ID.
2. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
3. Configure the SMS notification template:
a. Select CHECKLIST_UPDATED_SMS as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as CHECKLIST.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
193
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name; ii)
Map the Checklist Name (%2) Bind Variable to CheckList Descr.
4. Configure the email notification template:
a. Select CHECKLIST_UPDATED_EMAIL as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as CHECKLIST.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name; ii)
Map the Checklist Name (%2) Bind Variable to CheckList Descr.
5. Configure the push notification template:
a. Select CHECKLIST_UPDATED_PUSH as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as CHECKLIST.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name; ii)
Map the Checklist Name (%2) Bind Variable to CheckList Descr; iii) Provide GOTO Key value as
Checklist.
Setting Up SI Add Events with Notifications
To set up SI Add events with notifications:
1. Navigate to Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Batch Notifications
2. Add new Run Control ID (SI_ASSIGNED_BATCH).
3. Set up the configuration as follows:
Population Selection
1. Enable Population Selection.
2. Select PS Query as Selection Tool.
3. Select SCC_SI_ADD_OR_CHANGE as Query Name.
Event Setup
Configure Event Setup so that SI add events appear on the Notifications tab in the Campus Mobile
Landing Page.
194
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
1. Select Enable Event Tracking.
2. Select SERVICE_INDICATOR_ASSIGNED as the Event ID.
3. Fill the Event Parameters Grid as follows:
a. Enter SERVICE_INDICATOR_ASSIGNED as the value for EVENT_TYPE.
b. Enter Holds as the value for GOTO.
Notification Consumers and Templates Setup
Configure notification consumers and templates to enable SMS, email, and Push notifications:
1. Select SERVICE_INDICATOR_ASSIGNED as Notification Consumer ID.
2. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
3. Configure the SMS notification template:
a. Select SI_ADDED_OR_CHANGED_SMS as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as SERVICE_INDICATOR.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. In the notification parameters grid, map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name.
4. Configure the email notification template:
a. Select SI_ADDED_OR_CHANGED_EMAIL as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as SERVICE_INDICATOR.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. In the notification parameters grid, map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name.
5. Configure the push notification template:
a. Select SI_ADDED_OR_CHANGED_PUSH as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as SERVICE_INDICATOR.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name;
ii) ; Provide GOTO Key value as Holds.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
195
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
Setting Up SI Removed Events with Notifications
To set up SI Removed events with notifications:
1. Navigate to Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Batch Notifications
2. Add new Run Control ID (SI_REMOVED_BATCH).
3. Set up the configuration as follows:
Population Selection
1. Enable Population Selection.
2. Select PS Query as Selection Tool.
3. Select SCC_SI_ADD_DELETE as Query Name.
Event Setup
Configure Event Setup so that SI removed events appear on the Notifications tab in the Campus Mobile
Landing Page.
1. Select Enable Event Tracking.
2. Select SERVICE_INDICATOR_REMOVED as the Event ID.
3. Fill the Event Parameters Grid as follows:
a. Enter SERVICE_INDICATOR_REMOVED as the value for EVENT_TYPE.
b. Enter Holds as the value for GOTO.
Notification Consumers and Templates Setup
Configure notification consumers and templates to enable SMS, email, and Push notifications:
1. Select SERVICE_INDICATOR_REMOVED as Notification Consumer ID.
2. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
3. Configure the SMS notification template:
a. Select SI_REMOVED_SMS as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as SERVICE_INDICATOR.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. In the notification parameters grid, map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name.
4. Configure the email notification template:
a. Select SI_ REMOVED _EMAIL as Template Name.
196
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as SERVICE_INDICATOR.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. In the notification parameters grid, map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name.
5. Configure the push notification template:
a. Select SI_ REMOVED _PUSH as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as SERVICE_INDICATOR.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name;
ii) ; Provide GOTO value as Holds Delete.
Setting Up Enrollment Appointment Events with Notifications
To set up enrollment appointment events with notifications:
1. Navigate to Set Up SACR, System Administration, Utilities, Notifications, Batch Notifications
2. Add new Run Control ID (ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_BATCH).
3. Set up the configuration as follows:
Population Selection
1. Select an Academic Institution.
2. Enable Population Selection.
3. Select PS Query as Selection Tool.
4. Select SCC_ ENROLLMENT_APPOINTMENT as Query Name.
Event Setup
Configure Event Setup so that enrollment appointment events appear on the Notifications tab in the
Campus Mobile Landing Page.
1. Select Enable Event Tracking.
2. Select ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN as the Event ID.
3. Fill the Event Parameters Grid as follows:
a. Map the Appointment Number (%1) Bind variable to the Appointment Number field.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
197
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
b. Map the Appointment Start Date (%2) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Date field.
c. Map the Appointment Start Time (%3) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Time field.
d. Map the INST Bind variable to the Institution field.
e. Map the Acad Career Bind variable to the Acad Career field.
f. Map the Term Bind variable to the Term field.
g. Enter ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN as the value for EVENT_TYPE.
h. Enter Cart as the value for GOTO.
Notification Consumers and Templates Setup
Configure notification consumers and templates to enable SMS, email, and Push notifications:
1. Select ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN as Notification Consumer ID.
2. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
3. Configure the SMS notification template:
a. Select ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_SMS as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name;
ii) Map the Appointment Number (%2) Bind variable to the Appointment Number field; iii) Map
the Appointment Start Date (%3) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Date field; iv) Map the
Appointment Start Time (%4) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Time field.
4. Configure the email notification template:
a. Select ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN _EMAIL as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name;
ii) Map the Appointment Number (%2) Bind variable to the Appointment Number field; iii) Map
the Appointment Start Date (%3) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Date field; iv) Map the
Appointment Start Time (%4) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Time field.
5. Configure the push notification template:
198
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
a. Select ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN_PUSH as Template Name.
b. Select the Enable for Batch check box.
c. Enter an optional Item Tag such as ENROLLMENT_APPT_OPEN.
d. Select an optional Notification Importance value.
e. Fill in the notification parameters grid as follows: i) Map the User (%1) Bind variable to Name;
ii) Map the Appointment Number (%2) Bind variable to the Appointment Number field; iii) Map
the Appointment Start Date (%3) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Date field; iv) Map the
Appointment Start Time (%4) Bind variable to the Appointment Start Time field; v) Map the
INST Bind variable to the Institutionfield; vi) Map the Term Bind variable to the Term” field;
vii) Map the Acad Career Bind variable to the Acad Career field; viii) Enter Cart as the value for
GOTO.
Creating a Job Definition
After you create the batch notification definitions, you should create a job definition to control when the
batch notification process runs. Depending on your requirements you can create a single job definition for
all batch notifications, or create individual jobs for each batch notification.
Note: Batch processing is expected to occur once per day. In addition, the system sends notifications
to students at the time it executes the batch process. In other words, batch processes that typically run
in the middle of the night might result in students receiving SMS text messages on their phone during
non-waking hours. You can create a single job definition that is common to all batch notifications or, if
needed, separate jobs for each batch process to schedule them in different recurrence definitions.
To create a job definition:
1. Access the Jobs page (PeopleTools, Process Scheduler, Jobs).
a. Add a New Job (CL_SMS).
b. Click the Job Definition Tab.
c. Select a Process Category of Default.
d. Add the SCC_BAT_NTF Application Engine Process in the Process List.
2. Click the Job Definition Options tab.
a. Provide the Recurrence name (Daily).
b. Select a process Group of ALL PAGES.
c. Select a Component of SCC_BAT_NTF_RC.
Scheduling Jobs
To schedule a job:
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
199
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
1. Access the JobSet Definitions page (PeopleTools, Process Scheduler, Schedule JobSet Definitions).
2. Add a new schedule as follows (for example, for checklist batch SMS):
a. Set the Status to Active.
b. Provide a Run Control ID (CheckListBatchSMS).
c. Enter schedule and timing details as required for your installation, keeping in mind the following
implications:
- The system sends checklist notifications for checklists that are added or updated the day prior to
the batch process execution.
- The system sends SI notifications for changes occurring in the 24 hours prior to the batch
process execution.
- The system sends enrollment appointment notifications for appointments that open the day after
the batch process execution.
- Executing the batch process more than once per day may lead to duplicate enrollment
appointment notifications.
- Executing the batch process less than once per day may lead to missed enrollment appointment
notifications.
- The system sends notifications to students at the time of batch process execution.
3. Click Save and run the schedule.
Setting Up an Events Archive
Over time, the Events table can grow and need to be archived. Campus Mobile only shows events from
the past 7 days so it would be reasonable to run a weekly Event Archive job that would clean up any
events prior to that 7-day mark. The Events Archive process uses the Data Archive Manager and a
delivered query.
Test Running the Delivered PS Query
1. Navigate to Reporting Tools, Query, Query Manager.
2. Select Advanced Search.
Change Query Type from User to Archive.
3. Click Search.
4. Select the Edit link for the SCC_NFK_EVENT_ARCHIVE query in the search list.
5. Click the Run tab.
Enter appropriate values for input date, Read Events and Unread Events check boxes in the prompt
table and click OK. The result set shows all the header rows that are eligible for archiving. The related
child data would also be archived.
200
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 10
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Create the Archive Process
1. Navigate to PeopleTools, Data Archive Manager, Archive Data to History.
2. Add a new archive run control ID (SCC_EVENT).
3. Fill in the following information:
a. Select the SCC_ENFK Archive Template.
b. Select Appropriate Process Selection Value:
Selection – to copy rows from online (main) tables to history tables.
Delete – to delete rows from online (main) tables.
Remove from History – to delete rows from history tables.
Rollback – to restore online(main) tables from history tables.
c. Select Selective Query SCC_NFK_EVENT_ARCHIVE if process type is Selection; otherwise
select Batch Number.
d. Select Commit Processing as needed.
4. Select the Define Binds hyperlink to input or change archive query rule.
5. Select the Reset Query Bind Variables button.
A prompt table appears that accepts the Archive Rule input date, Read Events, and Unread Events
check boxes.
6. Click the Run button, and select the PSARCHIVE – Data Archive Manager Application Engine
process.
Run the process to success.
Check the Archive Audit
1. Navigate to PeopleTools, Data Archive Manager, Audit Archiving.
2. Select Archive ID SCC_ENFK.
3. Click Search to view the audit report for the archive process.
Setting Up Push Notifications
Please note that while email and SMS notifications do not require Campus Mobile, push notifications
do require Campus Mobile. Oracle recommends that you set up push notifications to provide proactive
information to the students who use the Campus Mobile app.
In addition to the steps already outlined in this topic for activating push notifications, you must enter the
appropriate values in the Push Notification Setup page. The push notification setup section of Notification
Framework documentation provides details on the setup of push notifications, including integration with
the Apple and Google notification services, which are required to deliver push notifications.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
201
Setting Up Campus Mobile
Chapter 10
See "Understanding the Notifications Framework" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community).
202
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal
Information
Understanding PeopleSoft Campus Self-Service Personal
Information
The personal information functionality of PeopleSoft Campus Self-Service exposes familiar PeopleSoft
Campus Community information to self-service users. It provides an easy way for self-service users to
update basic personal information about themselves at any time without having to visit your offices or
complete and mail a hardcopy form.
All authenticated roles can use self-service functionality. They can use it to maintain their own personal
information. They can also use it to review the holds and to do items on record at your institution for
themselves.
Note: For security reasons, the following data is view-only for self-service users: national identification
number, citizenship, driver's license, visa or permit data, veteran status, gender, birth date, marital status,
extracurricular activities, and internal honors and awards.
The navigation tabs that are used in self-service personal information are defined on the Navigation Tabs
Setup page.
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Displaying and Accessing Self-Service Personal Data
This section discusses how to:
•
Set data to display on the Personal Data Summary page.
•
Access personal data.
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
"Using the Student Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
203
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Pages Used to Display and Access Self-Service Personal Data
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Personal Data Summary
Options
SSS_PRSN_SUM_SETUP
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Personal Data Summary
Options
Optionally, set the types of
addresses, phone number, and
email address and the number
of holds and to do's to display
for an ID on the Personal Data
Summary page.
Personal Data Summary
SSS_PRSNLDATA_SUMM
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Personal Data Summary
View a summary of links to
your personal data, and view a
list of your holds and to do's.
Setting Data to Display on the Personal Data Summary Page
Access the Personal Data Summary Options page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service,
Personal Data Summary Options).
The Personal Data Summary Options page contains links to self-service pages that show the individual's
personal data. You can optionally set the individual's contact information and holds and to do's to display
on the summary page.
Contact Information
You can select the type of contact information to display and enter the label to use as the link for
redirecting the user to the self-service page where the address, phone number, or email address can be
edited or updated.
If you do not use the U.S. Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) functionality, you can
enter the URL to your institution's privacy site in the Privacy settings link field.
Holds and To Do List Sections
You can also specify how many negative service indicators (holds) and pending checklist items and tasks
(to do's) to display for the person.
For more information on To Do List Section, see Setting Up a Self-Service Student Center.
Accessing Personal Data
Access the Personal Data Summary page (Self Service, Campus Personal Information, Personal Data
Summary).
Options set on the Personal Data Summary Options page render the Contact Information, Holds, and To
Dos data on the Personal Data Summary page. If the individual had negative service indicators assigned
or any pending checklists and tasks, the page would (according to the sample options page) also list the
first 10 holds (service indicators) and all of the individual's pending checklist items and tasks.
For more information on To Do List, see Understanding Self-Service Student Center.
204
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Configuring Profile Information for PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface
This section discusses how to set up profiles for PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Pages Used to Configure Profile Information for PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Personal Details
Configuration
SCC_PERSON_DTLS_FL
Set Up SACR, Common
Define which personal details
Definitions, Self Service,
appear on the Personal Details
Campus Community, Personal page.
Details Configuration
National ID Type
NID_TYPE_TABLE
Set Up Common Objects,
Foundation Tables, Personal,
National ID Type
Set up the National ID Type.
Type Control
TYPE_CNTL_SETUP
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service,
Type Control
Define which records appear
and whether users can update
the records.
For more information, see
Setting Up Type Control.
Org Defaults by Permission
Lst
OPR_DEF_TBL_HR
Set Up Common Objects,
Foundation Tables,
Organization, Org Defaults by
Permission Lst
Define defaults according to
the user’s primary permission
list. When a new address is
added, Country is used as a
default and when a new name
is added, the Name format is
used.
Maintain Text Catalog
HR_SSTEXT_TEXT
Set Up Common Objects,
Common Definitions,
Text Catalog and Notepad,
Maintain Text Catalog
Set up associated messages
for various fields in the Text
Catalog.
FERPA Control
FERPA_CONTROL
Set Up SACR , Product
Related, Campus Community
, Establish People Processing,
Setup, FERPA Control
Review or make additional
directory data and other
information available to
FERPA privacy control.
Self Service Ethnicity Setup
SCC_SS_ETHSTUP_USA
Set Up SACR, Common
Definitions, Self Service, Self
Service Ethnicity Setup
Allow and configure entry of
ethnicity data on self service
pages including the Profile
functional area.
Defining Personal Details
Access the Personal Details Configuration page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service,
Campus Community, Personal Details Configuration).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
205
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Use the toggle switch to select the fields to be displayed. The Empl ID always appears on the page.
National ID Display Country and
National ID Type
Select the Country and the National ID Type to be displayed
on the Personal Details page. The National ID fields are not
displayed on the Personal Details page if a National ID Type
is not defined, or if the user does not have an ID of the type
defined.
For more information, see:
•
"Defining National ID Types" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
•
"Administering Country Codes" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
See Also
•
Using Self-Service Addresses, Names, Phones, and Demographic Data
•
PeopleTools: Applications User's Guide, “Working With Fluid Pages and Controls”
Configuring Names, Contact Details, and Addresses
Access the Type Control page (Set Up SACR, Common Definitions, Self Service, Type Control).
Use this page to set up the Name, Address, Phone, and Email types that users can view, modify, or delete.
Note: Address types not defined as Do Not Display appear in a separate grid on the Addresses page.
See Also
•
Setting Up Type Control
•
"Setting Up Additional Name Information" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
•
"Defining Address Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Configuring Ethnicity
Access the Maintain Text Catalog page (Set Up Common Objects, Common Definitions, Text Catalog and
Notepad, Maintain Text Catalog). Use Text ID ETHN to create descriptions for the Ethnicity Information
icons.
See Defining Text Catalogs for Text Catalog setup details.
Text catalogs are delivered blank. If the message text is not defined, the information icon does not appear
on the Profile page. You can define text for the Ethnic Background page based on whether or not the page
can be updated. If the page is display-only (based on Self Service Ethnicity Setup), you can provide a
hyperlink to contact the appropriate person/office.
See "Setting Up Self-Service Ethnicity Reporting" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community) for details.
206
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Configuring Privacy Restrictions
Access the FERPA Control page (Set Up SACR, Product Related, Campus Community, Establish People
Processing, Setup, FERPA Control) to organize the Fluid Privacy Restrictions page. Use Text ID FERPA
to create descriptions for the Privacy Restrictions Information icons.
See "Making Data Available for FERPA Privacy Control" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community) for details.
On the Privacy Restrictions page, you can configure the personal information to be restricted. You can
create exceptions to the configured restrictions for Names, Addresses and Phones.
Defining Text Catalogs
Access the Maintain Text Catalog page (Set Up Common Objects, Common Definitions, Text Catalog and
Notepad, Maintain Text Catalog).
If you set up associated messages for a field in the Text Catalog, an Information icon appears beside the
field. A user can select the icon to read relevant information. You can define Text catalog messages for
the following fields in the Profile:
Page Name
Component Name
Panel Name
Field Name
Personal Details
SCC_PERSON_DTLS_FL
SCC_PERS_DTLS_FL
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG1
Names
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG2
View Name
SCC_PERSON_DTLS
SCC_NAMES_SCF
Contact Details
SCC_CONTCT_DTLS_FL
SCC_CONTACT_DTL_FL
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG1
Email
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG2
Phone
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG3
Addresses
SCC_ADDR_DTLS_F
SCC_ADDRESS_DTL_FL
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG1
Add Address
SCC_ADDR_DTLS_F
SCC_ADDRESS_SCF
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG2
Emergency Contacts
SCC_EMERG_CNTCT_FL
SCC_EMERG_CNTCT_FL
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG1
Ethnicity
SCC_ETHNIC_US_FL
SCC_ETHNIC_US_FL
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG1
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG2
IPEDS Ethnicity
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG3
IPEDS First Question
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG4
IPEDS Second Question
Ethnic Background
Privacy Restrictions
SCC_FERPA_RES_FL
Exceptions
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
SCC_FERPA_RES_FL
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG1
SCC_PRFL_HLPIMG2
207
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
For more information, see "Create Text Message Category Functions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Campus Community).
Using Self-Service User Preferences
User preferences enable self-service users to set default values for themselves to minimize the need for
repetitive data entry. After they have been set, the default values remain associated with the user until
changed or deleted. Self-service users can select their own user preferences or you can do it for them
by using the User Profiles Management process to assign them the latest values corresponding to their
profiles.
The User Preferences page displays the Share My Information link. A self-service user, for delegating the
access of his or her data to another person, can click this link to navigate to the Share My Information Summary self-service page.
See Creating a Proxy and Delegating Access.
Related Links
"Preparing for User Profiles Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
"Setting Up User Profiles Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Page Used for Self-Service User Preferences
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
User Preferences
SS_CC_USER_PREF
•
Select the User
Preferences link on the
Personal Data Summary
page
Enter default values for
academic value and other
elements required often by the
system.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
User Preferences
Using My Preferences in PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Use the delivered My Preferences tile on the Student Homepage to set default values and thereby
minimize repetitive data entry.
Pages Used to Set Up My Preferences
208
Page Name
Definition Name
Usage
Campus Preferences
SCC_CAMP_PREF_FL
Select and save default values for
Institution, Career and Term. Also set
up values for preferred language and
method for communication.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Usage
General Settings
PTGP_USER_PERS_FL
Select and save default settings for
General Options, Regional Settings,
System & Application Messages,
Navigation Personalizations, Pop-Up
Notification and Advanced Settings.
Related Links
"Setting Up Preferences in PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community)
Using Campus Preferences
Define default values on the Campus Preferences page (SCC_CAMPUS_PREF_FL) for campus
information and communication.
Defaults
Define default values for:
•
Institution: Select from a list of all active institutions
associated with the user.
Changing the Institution value clears all the other fields.
Communications
•
Career: Available values depend on the selected Institution
value and the careers associated with the user.
•
Term: Available only if Institution and Career values are
selected. Values are based on the setup for the Institution
and Career combinations. Only current or future terms are
available for selection.
Define default values for communications.
•
Preferred Language
•
Preferred Method: Select a method, edit and save email
addresses or phone numbers as required.
Using Self-Service Addresses, Names, Phones, and Demographic
Data
Self-service users can view and update their own addresses, names, phone numbers, and demographic
data, including gender, date of birth, and marital status.
Addresses, names, phones, and demographic data are set up in the PeopleSoft Campus Solutions system.
When you set up Personal Data Summary Options for PeopleSoft Campus Self Service, you can choose
which address, phone, and email type to display by default on self-service pages. No additional setup is
required.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
209
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Links under Campus Personal Information enable online self-service users to view, modify, or update
their own:
•
Addresses
•
Names
•
Phone numbers
•
Email addresses
•
Internet addresses
•
Emergency contacts with required phone numbers.
•
Demographic information, including gender, date and place of birth, marital status, and so on.
Related Links
"Designing Campus Community" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Setting Up Emergency Contacts Data" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Pages Used for Self-Service Addresses, Names, Phones, and Demographic
Data
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Addresses
SS_ADDRESSES
•
Click the address link
on the Personal Data
Summary page. An
address link is either or
both of the labels entered
for the Address Box 1
and Address Box 2 on the
Personal Data Summary
Options page
View your current address
types as permitted by the
Type Control page, and the
associated address data.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Addresses, Addresses
•
Click the edit button on
the Addresses page.
Edit Address
EO_ADDR_USA_SEC
•
•
210
When you access this page
using the edit button on
the Addresses page or the
Click the ADD A NEW
Edit Address link on the
ADDRESS button on the Emergency Contact Detail
Addresses page.
page, you can edit or update
the address.
Click the Edit Address
link on the Emergency
When you access this page
Contact Detail page .
using the ADD A NEW
ADDRESS button, you can
add an address type and
associated data for yourself
to be effective now or on a
future date.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Delete Address
SS_UPDATE_ADDRESS
Click the Delete (type)
address link on the Addresses
page. (Self-service users
can edit only the home and
mailing addresses, so no
Delete button appears for
these address types.)
Delete an address type and
associated data.
Names
SS_CC_NAME
•
Click the Names link
on the Personal Data
Summary page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Names, Names
View your current name
types as permitted by the
Type Control page, and the
associated name data.
•
Click theedit button on
When accessed from the
the Names page to access edit button, you can view or
the Change Name page.
update the name type.
•
Click the ADD A NEW
NAME button on the
Names page to access the
Add a new name page.
When accessed from the ADD
A NEW NAME button, you
can add a name type and new
name with a current for future
effective date.
•
Click the Contact
Information Description
link on the Personal Data
Summary page.
View and update your current
phone types as permitted by
the Type Control page, and
phone numbers.
•
Click the ADD A
PHONE NUMBER
button on the Emergency
Contact Detail page, and
then select the phone
type to edit or delete.
Buttons on this page also
enable you to add or delete
rows to add or delete phone
numbers.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Phone Numbers
•
Click the Contact
Information Email
Address link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Email Addresses
Change Name
SS_CC_UPDATE_NAME
Add a new name
Phone Numbers
Email Addresses
SS_CC_PERS_PHONE
SS_CC_EMAIL_ADDR
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
View and update your current
email address types as
permitted on the Type Control
page, and email addresses.
Buttons on this page also
enable you to add or delete
rows to add or delete email
addresses.
211
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Internet Addresses
SS_CC_INTERNET_ADR
•
Click the Internet
Addresses link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
View and update internet
addresses, including website
and FTP site addresses.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Internet Addresses
•
Click the Emergency
Contacts link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Emergency Contacts
Emergency Contacts
SS_CC_EMRG_CNTCT_L
Emergency Contact Detail
SS_CC_EMRG_CNTCT_D
Click the ADD AN
EMERGENCY CONTACT
button on the Emergency
Contact page.
Demographic Information
SS_CC_DEMOG_DATA
•
•
Buttons on this page also
enable you to add or delete
rows and to add or delete
internet addresses.
View the name, address,
and phone numbers for your
emergency contact.
Add an emergency contact for
yourself, and enter the contact
information.
Click the Demographic
View a summary of your
Data link on the Personal demographic data such as
Data Summary page.
your date of birth, gender,
marital status, national ID,
Self Service, Campus
and so on.
Personal Information,
Demographic
Note: If a photo is loaded
Information
into the system from
the Photograph page in
PeopleSoft Campus Solutions,
that photo appears in the
upper right on this page.
See "Entering Photographs"
(PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community).
FERPA Restrictions
Edit FERPA/Directory
Restrictions
212
SS_CC_FERPA_INQ
SS_CC_FERPA
•
Click the FERPA
Restrictions link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
FERPA Restrictions
Click the EDIT
FERPA DIRECTORY
RESTRICTIONS button on
the FERPA Restrictions page.
View data that you have
restricted from being released.
Place restrictions to prevent
the release of data about
yourself.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Release To Publication
INST_PUB_CATG_SEC2
Click the Release To
Publication link on the Edit
FERPA/Directory Restrictions
page. (The link appears only
when the Restrict check box is
selected.)
Release restricted
information for inclusion in
specific internal directory
publications.
Using Self-Service Personal Attributes Data
Self-service users can view and update the list of languages that they read, write, and speak.
Languages are set up in PeopleSoft Campus Solutions. No additional setup is required for self-service.
Self-services users can also set their notification preferences.
Note: Religious preference and decedent data personal attributes are not available from Campus Self
Service. These are set up and maintained in PeopleSoft Campus Solutions only.
This section lists the pages used for self-service personal attributes.
Related Links
"Setting Up Personal Attributes" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Pages Used for Self-Service Personal Attributes
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Languages
SS_CC_LANGUAGES_L
•
Click the Languages link
on the Personal Data
Summary page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Languages
View or edit a list of the
languages that you read, write,
or speak and the proficiency
with which you read, write, or
speak them.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
213
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Language Detail
SS_CC_LANGUAGES_D
•
Click the name of
the language on the
Languages page to access
a view-only version of
the Language Detail
page.
When you access this
page from the name of the
language, view details of
that language and your
proficiency.
•
Click the edit button
on the Languages page
to access an updatable
version of the Language
Detail page.
•
Click theADD A
LANGUAGE button
on the Languages page
to access and enterable
version of the Language
Detail page.
•
Click the Notification
Preferences link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Notification Preferences
•
Self Service, Student
Center, Demographic
Data link, Ethnicity
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, View Personal
Data Summary link,
Demographic Data link,
Ethnicity tab
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Personal Data Summary
link, Demographic Data
link, Ethnicity tab
Notification Preferences
Ethnicity
Self Service Help
SS_CC_NTF_PREF
SS_CC_ETHNICITY_US
SS_CC_ETH_HELP_PG
Click the Explain link on the
Ethnicity page.
When you access this
page using the edit button,
view and modify details
of that language and your
proficiency.
When you access this
page using the ADD A
LANGUAGE button, add
a language to your list of
languages.
View and edit notification
preferences.
Students, staff, and faculty
identify their ethnicity and
enter details about their racial
background.
Students, staff, and faculty
review ethnicity definitions
from the National Center for
Education Statistics (NCES)
website.
Entering Ethnicity Data
The appearance of this page changes, based on the settings defined on the Self Service Ethnicity Setup
page. If the page is set up as display only, students and faculty are only able to see their ethnicity data on
file in the system; they cannot add or update it through Campus Self Service.
214
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Ethnicity questions are asked in two parts. First, self-service users may indicate whether they are or
are not of Hispanic or Latino origin. Second, users may indicate their race. Users can click the Explain
link to access the Self Service Help page that describes the way to answer the two questions, based on
information from the NCES website: http://nces.ed.gov/statprog/2002/std1_5.asp
When a self-service user answers Question 1, the system inserts a value matching the Self Service
Ethnicity Setup Answer Mapping for the respective answer into the Ethnicity records. When a self service
user answers Question 2, the system inserts values matching the Self Service Ethnicity Setup Answer
Mapping for the respective answers into the Ethnicity records. For example, if the user selects Asian and
'Asian' is the ethnic group mapped to that answer on the Self Service Ethnicity Setup Answer, a row for
Asian is inserted into the ethnicity tables.
The Background Information grid only appears if you have set it up in the Additional Background
Information section of the Self Service Ethnicity Setup page.
When collecting additional background information, the values that you selected in the Answer Mapping
section of the Self Service Ethnicity Setup do not appear in the Background prompt. The values that do
appear have been selected in the Ethnic Groups to Display on the Self Service Ethnicity Group page
and match the self-service user's answers to the questions. For example, when the user selects 'Yes, I am
Hispanic or Latino' and also selects the American Indian or Alaska Native check box, only those active,
current ethnic groups selected in Ethnic Groups to Display on the Self Service Ethnicity Setup that map to
Hispanic or American Indian EEO Ethnic Groups appear in the Background prompt.
If the user answers 'No, I am not Hispanic' and does not answer the second question, the Background
prompt displays all non-Hispanic ethnic groups selected in Ethnic Groups to Display on the Self Service
Ethnicity Setup page. If the user then selects a Background value that maps to one of the five answers to
Question 2, the related check box is set when the Submit button is selected. Finally, users must click the
The Information is correct as entered check box to confirm their selections and Submit their information.
Even if users choose not to answer the questions, they are prompted to select The Information correct as
entered to indicate that they have reviewed the survey questions.
The IPEDS Ethnicity survey questions are optional. If a self-service user does not wish to divulge the
information, they may simply leave the questions unanswered and select the The Information is correct as
entered check box then select Submit.
For information on IPEDS ethnicity, including data examples, see IPEDS Red Paper in My Oracle
Support (ID 837237.1).
Using Self-Service Identification Data
Self-service users can enter and change their own personal identification numbers from within Campus
Self Service. No specific setup is required.
Note: For security reasons, other identification data is either not available from Campus Self Service
(external system ID and residency data) or is used as display-only (visa and passport data, driver's license
information, or photos) These are set up and maintained in PeopleSoft Campus Solutions only.
This section lists the page used for self-service identification data.
See "Understanding Personal Identification Data" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
215
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Page Used for Self-Service Identification Data
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Personal Identification
Number
SS_CC_PIN
•
Click the Personal
Identification Number
link on the Personal Data
Summary page.
Create a personal
identification number for
yourself.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Personal Identification
Number
Using Self-Service Participation Data
Self-service users can view and update lists of their own licenses and certificates, memberships, and
publications from within Campus Self Service. In addition, individuals can view lists of their own
extracurricular activities and honors and awards.
Participation data is set up in the PeopleSoft Campus Solutions system. No additional setup is required for
self-service.
Note: Athletic participation is not available from Campus Self Service. You set up and maintain athletic
participation data in PeopleSoft Campus Solutions only.
This section lists the pages used for self-service participation data.
Related Links
"Understanding Participation Data" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Pages Used for Self-Service Participation Data
216
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
License and Certificates
SS_CC_LIC_CERT_L
•
Click the Licenses/
Certificates link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
View a list of your licenses
and certificates.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Licenses and Certificates
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
License/Certificate Detail
SS_CC_LIC_CERT_D
•
When you access this
page from the name of the
license or certificate, view
details about that license or
certificate.
•
Memberships
Membership Detail
SS_CC_MEMBER_L
SS_CC_MEMBER_D
Click the edit button
on the License and
Certificates page to
access an updatable
version of the License/
Certificate Detail page.
•
Click the ADD
A LICENSE/
CERTIFICATE button
on the Licenses and
Certificates page to
access an enterable
version of the License/
Certificate Detail page.
•
Click the Memberships
link on the Personal Data
Summary page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Memberships
•
Click the name of the
membership on the
Memberships page
to access a viewonly version of the
Membership Detail page.
•
•
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Click the name of the
license or certificate
on the License and
Certificates page to
access a view-only
version of the License/
Certificate Detail page.
When you access this page
using the edit button, view
or modify details about that
license or certificate.
When you access this page
using the ADD A LICENSE/
CERTIFICATE button, add
another license or certificate
to your list of licenses and
certificates.
View a list of your
memberships.
When you access this from
the name of the membership,
view details about that
membership.
When you access this page
using the edit button, view
or modify details about that
membership.
Click the edit button
on the Memberships
page to access an
updatable version of the When you access this
Membership Detail page. page using the ADD A
MEMBERSHIP button, add
Click the ADD A
another membership to your
MEMBERSHIP button
list of memberships.
on the Memberships
page to access an
enterable version of the
Membership Detail page.
217
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Extracurricular Activities
SS_CC_EXTRACUR_ACT
•
View a list of your
extracurricular activities.
Honors and Awards
SS_CC_HONOR_AWARD
Publication Detail
SS_CC_PUB_L
SS_CC_PUB_D
Note: Self-service users can
view extracurricular activities
information, but they cannot
enter, modify, or update it.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Extracurricular Activities
•
Click the Honors/Awards View a list of your academic
link on the Personal Data honors and awards.
Summary page.
Note: Self service users can
Self Service, Campus
view academic honors and
Personal Information,
awards information, but
Honors and Awards,
they cannot enter, modify, or
Academic Honors and
update it.
Awards
•
Publications
Click the Extracurricular
Activities link on the
Personal Data Summary
page.
•
Click the Publications
link on the Personal Data
Summary page.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Publications
•
Click the name of
the publication on
the Publications page
to access a viewonly version of the
Membership Detail page.
•
•
View a list of your
publications.
When you access this
page from the name of the
publication, view details of
that publication.
When you access this page
using the edit button, view
and modify details of that
publication.
Click the edit button on
the Publications page to
access an editable version
of the Membership Detail When you access this
page using the ADD
page.
PUBLICATION button, add
Click the ADD
a publication to your list of
PUBLICATION button
publications.
on the Publications
page to access an
enterable version of the
Membership Detail page.
Entering Other Self-Service Biographical Data
You can also use Campus Community self service to enable students to manage other biographical data.
This section lists the pages used to enter other self-service biological data.
218
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Pages Used to Enter Other Self-Service Biographical Data
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Work Experience
SS_CC_WORK_EXP_A
•
Click the Work
Experience link on the
Personal Data Summary
page .
View a list of your work
experience.
•
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Work Experience
•
Click the name of the
work experience on
the Work Experience
page to access a viewonly version of the
Employment Details
page.
Employment Details
SS_CC_WORK_EXP
•
•
When you access this page
from the name of the work
experience, view details of
that work experience.
When you access this page
using the edit button, view
and modify details of that
work experience.
Click the edit button
on the Work Experience
When you access this page
page to access an
updatable version of the using the ADD A WORK
Employment Detail page. EXPERIENCE button, add a
work experience to your list
Click the ADD A WORK of work experiences
EXPERIENCE button
on the Work Experience
page to access an
enterable version of the
Employment Details
page.
Using Self-Service Service Indicators Data
Self-service service indicators are presented in Campus Self Service as holds.
The Holds link under Campus Personal Information enables self-service users to assume responsibility for
viewing and resolving their own negative service indicator issues.
Note: Positive service indicators are not presented from Campus Self Service. Positive service indicators
are set up and applied in PeopleSoft Campus Solutions only.
Service indicators are set up in PeopleSoft Campus Solutions. When you define a service indicator in
Campus Solutions, you can choose whether to display the indicator (as a hold) on self service pages for all
IDs to which the indicator is assigned. When you set up Personal Data Summary Options for Campus Self
Service, you can choose how many holds to display and whether to display their monetary value, if any.
No other setup is required.
This section lists the pages used for self-service service indicators data.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
219
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Related Links
"Understanding Service Indicator Setup" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Understanding Service Indicators" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Pages Used for Self-Service Service Indicators Data
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Your Holds
SS_CC_HOLDS
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information, Holds
View holds placed on services
for yourself and determine
how and when to resolve
them.
Hold Item
SS_CC_HOLD_SEC
•
Click the name of the
hold item in the Holds
box on the Personal Data
Summary page
View information about a
specific hold and determine
how to resolve it and whom to
contact
•
Click the name of the
hold item on the Your
Holds page.
Using Self-Service Checklists Data
Checklists data is presented as a to-do item list in Campus Self Service in both the classic and fluid user
interfaces. The To Do List link under Campus Personal Information in the classic interface, enables selfservice users to assume responsibility for viewing and resolving their own pending checklist items.
When you set up Personal Data Summary Options for Campus Self Service, you can choose how many
to-do items to display in the classic interface. No additional setup is required for self service.
In the PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface, you can use the Tasks tile to view your To Do list and Holds, and
complete your checklist items. For more information, see "Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals).
This section lists the pages used for self-service checklists data.
220
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 11
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Pages Used for Self-Service Checklists Data
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
To Do List
SS_CC_TODOS
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information, To Do
List
View your pending checklist
items using a classic interface
and determine what to do to
satisfy the requirements.
Also, view the pending tasks
(activity guide instances) on
this page. Click the name of
the task to access the Student
Task WorkCenter for the task.
For information on Student
Task WorkCenter:
See Understanding Student
Activity Guides.
To Do Item
Tasks
SS_CC_TODOS_SEC
NA
•
Click the name of the To
Do item in the To Do List
box on the Personal Data
Summary page
•
Click the name of the To
Do Item on the To Do
List page.
Select the Tasks tile on the
Homepage.
View information about
a specific checklist item
on a classic interface and
determine what is required
and whom to contact.
On a Fluid interface,
•
View and complete the
total number of To Do
items—tasks (activity
guide instances) and —
checklist items.
•
View the number of
Holds.
Display of these totals is
based on the criteria defined
for the display of To Do
items.
See "Configuring Tasks"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
9.2: Campus Community)
Related Links
"Understanding Checklist Setup" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Understanding Checklists" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
(AUS) Accessing USI Information
This topic discusses how students can verify their Unique Student Identifiers (USI).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
221
Using Self-Service Campus Personal Information
Chapter 11
Page Used to Access USI Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Campus Personal
Information- Unique Student
Identifier
SS_CC_PERS_USI
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information, Unique
Student Identifier
Verify USI information.
Verifying a Unique Student Identifier
Use the Unique Student Identifier page (SS_CC_PERS_USI) to verify Unique Student Identifier (USI)
information.
Access the Unique Student Identifier page (Self Service, Campus Personal Information, Unique Student
Identifier). Click the Enter Your USI button. If the student has a USI National ID value for the National
ID Type field on the USI Setup page, it is displayed without other Personal Details.
Unique Student Identifier
Enter the existing USI created on the USI website or from
previous study at another institution. Your entry is validated by
the USI check digit algorithm contained in the field.
Name
Enter the student’s name: either single name; or the first, middle
and family names.
Process Later
Save the record and process it later in a bulk process.
Submit
Submit the USI and student details for immediate verification
using the USI web service.
The Verify USI web service verifies the USI in association with the student’s name and date of birth. If
the submit process is successful, a new National ID record is created for the USI.
Customizing USI Messages
The system displays customizable descriptions of the USI field and its entry requirements. It also displays
different messages for each USI submission status:
•
USI already exists
•
USI in process
•
USI submission valid
•
USI submission invalid. This can be further clarified as USI deactivated or USI records do not match.
•
USI submission returned an error.
Create and store messages for the USI field and each USI status using the message catalog tool (Main
Menu, PeopleTools, Utilities, Administration, Message Catalog).
222
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 12
Using Self-Service Student Recruiting
Using Self-Service Student Recruiting for Recruiting and
Admissions
Recruiting officers use Student Recruiting to view prospect and applicant information through pages in
Campus Self Service. They can view the prospects and applicants who are assigned to them by category
and region. They can also view prospects and applicants for a specific organization.
This section lists prerequisites and lists the pages used for self-service student recruiting.
Prerequisites
Before recruiting officers can view prospects and applicants through self-service pages, they must have
prospects and applicants who are assigned to them. Assign a recruiter to a prospect on the Prospect
School/Recruiting page or through the Process Recruiters pages. Assign a recruiter to an applicant on the
Application School/Recruiting page.
Pages Used for Self-Service Student Recruiting for Recruiting and
Admissions
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Prospects by Category - Select SS_ADM_PRS_REQ_CAT
Search Criteria
Self Service, Student
Recruiting, View Prospects
by Category
Recruiting officers use this
page to search for prospects
by category.
Prospects by Category Search Results
SS_ADM_PRS_SUM_CAT
Click the Search button on the Recruiting officers use this
Prospects by Category - Select page to view prospect search
Search Criteria page.
results.
Prospect Programs
ADM_PRSPCT_P_SEC
Click the Program Detail link
on any of the prospect search
results pages.
Recruiting officers use this
page to view program details
for a prospect.
Prospects by Organization Select Search Criteria
SS_ADM_PRS_REQ_ORG
Self Service, Student
Recruiting, View Prospects
by Organization
Recruiting officers use this
page to search for prospects
by organization.
Prospects by Organization Search Results
SS_ADM_PRS_SUM_ORG
Click the Search button on the Recruiting officers use this
Prospects by Organization page to view prospect search
Select Search Criteria page.
results.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
223
Using Self-Service Student Recruiting
Chapter 12
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Organization Primary
Location
EXT_ORG_LOC
Click the Org Primary
Location link on the Prospects
by Organization - Search
Results page.
Recruiting officers use
this page to view the
organization's primary
address.
Prospects by Region - Select
Search Criteria
SS_ADM_PRS_REQ_REG
•
Outreach, Recruiting
Officer, Home,
Recruiting, By Region
Recruiting officers use this
page to search for prospects
by region.
•
Self Service, Student
Recruiting, View
Prospects By Region
Prospects by Region - Search
Results
SS_ADM_PRS_SUM_REG
Click the Search button on the Recruiting officers use this
Prospects by Region - Select
page to view prospect search
Search Criteria page.
results.
Applicants by Category Select Search Criteria
SS_ADM_APP_REQ_CAT
•
Outreach, Recruiting
Officer, Home,
Recruiting, By Category
•
Self Service, Student
Recruiting, View
Applicants By Category
Applicants by Category Search Results
SS_ADM_APP_SUM_CAT
Click the Search button on
the Applicants by Category Select Search Criteria page.
Recruiting officers use this
page to view applicant search
results.
Applicants by Category Program Detail
SS_ADM_APPL_PROG_C
Click the Program Detail link
on any of the applicant search
results pages.
Recruiting officers use this
page to view program details
for an applicant.
Applicants by Category Application Status
SS_ADM_APP_ST_CAT
Click the Application Status
link on the Applicants by
Category – Program Detail
page.
Recruiting officers use this
page to view a person's
application status.
Applicants by Organization Select Search Criteria
SS_ADM_APP_REQ_ORG
Self Service, Student
Recruiting, View Prospects
by Category, View
Applicants By Org
Recruiting officers use this
page to search for applicants
by organization.
Applicants by Organization Search Results
SS_ADM_APP_SUM_ORG
Click the Search button on the Recruiting officers use this
Applicants by Organization - page to view applicant search
Select Search Criteria page.
results.
Applicants by Region - Select
Search Criteria
SS_ADM_APP_REQ_REG
Self Service, Student
Recruiting, View Applicants
By Region
Applicants by Region - Search SS_ADM_APP_SUM_REG
Results
224
Recruiting officers use this
page to search for applicants
by category.
Recruiting officers use this
page to search for applicants
by region.
Click the Search button on the Recruiting officers use this
Applicants by Region – Select page to view applicant search
Search Criteria page.
results.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 13
Using Self-Service Student Admissions
Requesting Information
Visitors can request information from your institution through PeopleSoft Campus Self Service.
Understanding Self-Service Request Information
Campus Self Service enables you to capture prospect data over the internet. When visitors to your website
request admissions information, they can enter information about themselves that the system converts to
prospect data. For example, they can enter academic interests, test scores, academic program information,
and more. The system takes this information and creates a prospect record. To request admissions
information, a visitor must have a user ID and password.
After a person obtains a user ID and password, he or she has access to the Request Information feature.
However, before submitting the request for information, the system prompts the visitor for information
based on your setup options. The visitor enters the academic career in which he or she is interested, plus
the academic institution (if your institution is a part of a multi-institution system). You can decide what
other prospect data you want to collect. You can collect academic information, such as admit term, admit
type, campus, academic level, academic load, housing interest, and financial aid interest; and school
information, such as last school attended and graduation date. The information that the prospect enters
depends on your setup. Some pages and fields appear and hide depending on the information that you
want from prospects. For example, the Academic Interests and Test Results self-service pages are only
available if you select those segments on the Web Prospect Setup page.
After the visitor enters the information and submits the request, the system creates a prospect record. You
can view the new prospect record in the Prospect Data component. If you choose to collect academic
interest information, and the visitor chooses to enter this information, you can view the data in the
Academic Interests component. If you choose to collect test score data, and the visitor chooses to enter
this information, you can view the data in the Test Results component. The system also updates the
Communication Management component for the person according to your setup and the prospect's
response. If a prospect record for that person already exists, the system updates the admit term, admit
type, last school attended, graduation date, academic program, and academic plan (assuming that you
chose to collect this data and that the visitor entered it).
You can edit the text messages on the Request Information self-service pages. These messages are in
the message catalog under the message set number 14230. Changing these messages is considered a
modification to your software.
Related Links
Understanding Self-Service Request Information
Setting Up Self-Service Request Information
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
225
Using Self-Service Student Admissions
Chapter 13
Pages Used to Request Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Request Admission Materials
ADM_WEB_PRS_INTRO
•
Self Service, Student
Admission, Request
Information
•
Self Service, Request
Information
Visitors view introductory text
about requesting admission
materials, such as how to
move from page to page and
how to prompt for values.
Request Information
ADM_WEB_PRS_CAR
Click the Next button on the
Request Admission Materials
page.
Visitors add, delete, or edit
the academic careers for
which they want to request
information.
Note: Only academic
programs, plans, and subplans
with a Last Prospect Date
greater than the system date or
blank are available.
Request Information—I am
Interested in Attending
ADM_WEB_PRS_CAR_SP
Click the Add button on the
Request Information page.
Visitors enter academic career,
academic information, school
information, and academic
program information,
depending on your setup in
the Web Prospect Setup page.
Academic Interests
ADM_WEB_PRS_INT
Click the Next button on the
Request Information page.
Visitors can select their
academic interests. This page
appears to visitors if you
enable this segment on the
Web Prospect Setup page.
Test Results
ADM_WEB_PRS_TST
Click the Next button on the
Academic Interests page.
Visitors can enter test results.
This page appears to visitors
if you enable this segment on
the Web Prospect Setup page.
Test Results
ADM_WEB_PRS_TST_SP
Click the Add button on the
Test Results page.
Visitors add test details,
such as test name, scores,
percentiles, and dates.
Submit
ADM_WEB_PRS_SUB
Click the Next button on the
Test Results page.
Visitors submit the request.
Your request for information
has been processed
ADM_WEB_PRS_END
Click the Submit button on
the Submit page.
Visitors view a message
confirming that their request
was successfully submitted.
Accepting or Declining Admission
Applicants can view their application status and accept or decline admission using self-service pages and
the PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
226
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 13
Using Self-Service Student Admissions
You can edit the text messages on both the Accept Admission self-service page and the Decline
Admission self-service page. These messages are in the message catalog under the message set number
14200.
If the applicant accepts admission, the system inserts an effective-dated row on the Application Program
Data page with a program action of Intention to Matriculate. The system sets the effective date to the day
the student accepts admission.
If the student declines admission, the system inserts an effective-dated row on the Application Program
Data page with a program action of Applicant Withdrawal. The system sets the effective date to the day
the student declines admission.
Additionally, any data that is provided about the school that the student is going to attend and why they
choose that institution over this one is inserted on the Application Student Response page. Each of the
pages above is within the Maintain Applications component.
Pages Used to Accept or Decline Admission
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Accept Admission
SS_ADM_ACCEPT
•
Self Service, Student
Admission
•
Self Service, Admissions
This page appears if the
applicant has no application to
accept or decline.
•
Self Service, Student
Admission
Accept Admissions–Select
Application
SS_ADM_ACCEPT2
•
Applicants can select the
application that they want
to accept or decline. If an
Self Service, Admissions applicant was admitted to
multiple academic careers
or academic programs, each
application appears on this
page.
Accept or Decline Admission
SS_ADM_ACC_DEC
Click the Accept/Decline link
for the application that you
want to process.
Applicants select whether
they want to accept or decline
admission.
Confirm Acceptance
SS_ADM_ACCEPT3
Click the I Accept Admission
button on the Accept or
Decline Admission page.
Applicants can confirm their
acceptance.
Admittance Accepted
SS_ADM_ACCEPT4
Click the Confirm Acceptance This page appears to show
button on the Confirm
that the applicant's selection
Acceptance page.
has been processed.
Confirm Decline
SS_ADM_DECLINE1
Click the I Decline Admission Applicants can confirm
button on the Accept or
that they want to decline
Decline Admission page.
admission.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
227
Using Self-Service Student Admissions
Chapter 13
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Admission Declined
SS_ADM_DECLINE2
Click the Confirm Decline
button on the Conform
Decline page.
This page appears to show
that the applicant's selection
has been processed. Also,
applicants can enter a
the reason they declined
admission and the institution
they chose to attend.
Applicants can select the
institution from the prompt, or
they can enter the institution
in the free-from field if you
selected Free Form Institution
on the Installation Defaults
- AD page. The information
the applicant enters on this
page posts to the Application
Student Response page in
the Application Maintenance
component.
Viewing Application Status
This section discusses how applicants view their application status through Campus Self Service.
Page Used View Application Status
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Application Status
SS_ADM_APP_STATUS
•
Self Service, Student
Admission
Applicants can view the status
of their applications.
•
Self Service, Admissions
•
Self Service, Student
Center.
In the Admissions section
(My Applications region)
of Student Center, click
View Status.
Viewing Application Status
Application status is based on the Complete check box of the Application Data page (Student Admissions,
Application Maintenance, Maintain Applications, Application Data). If the Complete check box is
selected, the status shows as Complete. If the check box is not selected, the status shows as Incomplete.
This check box setting can be updated manually or by using the Population Update process for
ADM_APPL_DATA.
Also, if one or all checklists assigned to this application are incomplete, the Show outstanding items
for this application button appears. Applicants can click this button to view their outstanding items that
must be received for the application to be processed and/or finalized. The display of the application
228
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 13
Using Self-Service Student Admissions
status, checklist item due date and checklist contact is based on the Applicant Status Options page for the
institution and career assigned to the application. For more information, see Setting Up Application Status
and Checklist Options.
Accessing Applicant Self Service Using PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface
Applicants can use the Applicant Self Service Fluid interface to:
•
Track their application status (incomplete or complete).
•
Access information regarding the meaning of the application status, and the requirements to support
their application. Access contact details for more information or questions.
•
View the Admissions decision when available and view the decision letter.
•
Accept or Decline the offer of Admission, if admitted.
•
Upload a document in the process of admission.
•
Pay an admission deposit.
Important! The Admissions Fluid Self Service Setup determines what the applicant can view in self
service.
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
Setting Up Application Status and Checklist Options
Pages Used to Access Applicant Self Service Using the PeopleSoft Fluid
User Interface
Page name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Admissions Tile
SAD_APPL_TILE_FL
Select the Admissions
tile from the Applicant
Homepage.
View the Application Status
page.
Select a Value
SAD_APPL_SELECT_FL
Select the Admissions
tile from the Applicant
Homepage. If the applicant
has multiple applications,
the Select a Value page is
rendered.
Select and view a specific
application from this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
229
Using Self-Service Student Admissions
Chapter 13
Page name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Application Status
SAD_APPL_STATUS_FL
Click the Change button on
the page to view each of the
multiple applications.
Select the Application tab
to view an Application’s
status, its related information,
Decision letter and Institution
Contact information.
Select the To Do List tab to
view checklist items for each
application and its status.
Select the chevron for more
information about each item.
If required in the Application
process, upload a document
using the Upload File button.
Note: Set up the upload
functionality at the Checklist
Item level. See "Setting Up
Checklist Items" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2:
Campus Community)
Accept/ Decline Admissions
SAD_MODAL_AD_SCF
Accept and Decline buttons
appear on the page when an
application is in Admitted
status.
Accept or decline the offer of
admission.
Status Information
SAD_STAT_INFO_SCF
Select the Information icon
next to the status.
Provides more detail about
the application and its status.
The page setup determines
the display of the icon and
content on the page.
Contact Information
SAD_CONTACTUS_SCF
Click the Contact Us link on
the application tab page.
Provides contact information
to the applicant. The page
setup determines the display
of the link and content on the
Depending on the setup, the View Decision Letter link appears on the Application tab. Click the link to
view a PDF version of the letter in the device’s native client.
230
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 14
Using Student Center
Understanding Self-Service Student Center
The Student Center is a self-service page that provides students a single entry point from which to begin
navigation to student related transactions. It also presents to students, in one location, the information that
is important to them, such as their class schedule, enrollment dates, and account information.
From the Student Center, students access any student related transaction that is available from Campus
Self Service. You can use the Student Center Options page and security setup to control which sections
and transactions appear on the Student Center.
The sections that the Student Center can display are:
•
Academics
Provides links to enrollment and academic records self-service transactions. Also displays the
student's schedule, which displays the classes, in any career, in which the student is registered for
the current term, as of today's date. If there are no such classes, the system looks at the next term in
which the student is term activated for classes to display. In addition, provides a link to the Enrollment
Shopping Cart, where students can search for and temporarily save classes for a future term, until that
term's enrollment period.
•
Finances
Provides links to PeopleSoft Student Financials self-service transactions and displays account
summary information.
•
Personal Information
Provides links to PeopleSoft Campus Community self-service transactions and displays contact
information.
•
Admissions
Provides links to PeopleSoft Recruiting and Admissions self-service transactions.
•
Holds
Provides a list of hold items. Students can click the Details link to access the Holds self-service
application page for more information.
•
To Do List
Provides a list of to do items. These to do items are pending checklist items or tasks (activity guide
instances). The task link opens up the Student Task WorkCenter for the task. The checklist item link
opens up the To Do Item Detail page for the checklist item. Students can click the More link to access
the To Do List self-service page for more information.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
231
Using Student Center
Chapter 14
For information on Student Task WorkCenter, see Understanding Student Activity Guides.
•
Milestones
Provides a list of student milestones. Students can click the Details link to access the Student
Milestone Details self-service page for more information.
•
Enrollment Dates
Provides a list of enrollment dates. Students can click the Details link to access the Enrollment Dates
self-service application page for more information.
•
Advisor
Provides advisor information. Students can click the Details link to access the View My Advisor selfservice application page for more information.
•
Related Links
Displays the links that you define on the Student Center Options page.
The Student Center displays the Share My Information button. A student, for delegating the access of his
or her data to another person, can click this button to navigate to the Share My Information - Summary
self-service page.
See Accessing Delegated Transactions.
Note: Students who use pop-up blocker software in their browsers are unable to view .PDF transcripts
and many other request results in Student Center.
Related Links
Setting Up a Self-Service Student Center
Using Self-Service Student Center
Students can use the self-service Student Center.
Page Used to Use Self-Service Student Center
232
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Student Center
SSS_STUDENT_CENTER
Self Service, Student Center
Students use this page
to access student related
transactions and to view
important information, such
as class schedule, dates, and
account information.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 15
Using Faculty Center
Understanding the Self-Service Faculty Center
The Faculty Center is a self-service component that provides instructors with the ability to:
•
View their teaching schedule.
•
View their exam schedule.
•
View their textbook summary.
•
View their grade rosters, enter grades, and post grades.
•
View their class rosters.
•
Access your Learning Management System.
•
Access the Gradebook and class assignments, if your institution has licensed PeopleSoft Gradebook.
•
Link to personal data summary.
Depending on security, instructors can also:
•
Search for classes and browse the course catalog.
•
Locate a faculty member.
•
Access your Learning Management System.
•
Access the Advisor Center.
Related Links
"Setting Up the Student Services Center Component" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community)
Searching for Classes Using Classic Self-Service Pages
Prerequisites for Using Academic Advisement Self Service
"Understanding Gradebook" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Gradebook )
Using the Self-Service Faculty Center
Instructors can use the self-service Faculty Center. Access is available through standard menu navigation
as well as through icons and subtabs within the Faculty Center.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
233
Using Faculty Center
Chapter 15
Pages Used for the Self-Service Faculty Center
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Schedule
INSTR_CLASS3
Self Service, Faculty Center,
My Schedule
Instructors use this page
to access instructor-related
transactions and to view their
teaching and exam schedules.
Instructors see only those
terms for which they are
assigned as the instructor.
Class Detail
SSR_CLSRCH_DTL
Click a class link within My
Teaching Schedule on the My
Schedule page.
Instructors can view the
details of the classes in their
schedules.
Textbook Summary
SSR_SSCLSTXB_SUM
Click the View Textbook
Summary link of the Faculty
Center, My Schedule page.
Instructors can view textbook
assignments for each of their
classes.
The link is available if you
select the Display Textbook
Summary link – Instructor
Self Service check box on
the Other page in the Student
Records setup component (
SSR_SS_ENRL_OPT).
View My Weekly Schedule
SSR_SSINSTR_WEEK
Click the View Weekly
Instructors can view their
Teaching Schedule link on the weekly teaching and exam
My Schedule page.
schedules in a grid format.
Click the View Weekly Exam
Schedule link on the My
Schedule page.
Personal Data Summary
SSS_PRSNLDATA_SUMM
Click the View Personal Data
Summary link on the My
Schedule page.
Instructors can view a
summary of links to their
personal data.
Class Roster
SS_FAC_CLASS_ROST
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, Class Roster
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, My Schedule
Instructors view the students
who are enrolled in a class,
have dropped a class, or are
on the waitlist for a class.
Instructors can send email
notifications to selected
students or all students in
the class. Instructors have
the option to display student
photos on the class roster.
Click the Class Roster
icon on the My Schedule
page or click the Class
Roster subtab.
234
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 15
Using Faculty Center
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Grade Roster
SS_GRADE_ROSTER
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, Grade Roster
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, My Schedule
Instructors view or enter
grades, update the roster's
approval status, and post
grades.
Click the Grade Roster
icon on the My Schedule
page or click the Grade
Roster subtab.
Gradebook
LAM_CLASS_GRADES
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, Gradebook
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, My Schedule
Enter or review grades and
comments, export grades to
Microsoft Excel, or update
grades to the grade roster for
posting.
Click the Gradebook icon
on the My Schedule page
or click the Gradebook
subtab.
Class Assignments
LAM_CLASS_ACTIVITY
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, Assignments
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, My Schedule
Create, review or edit
Gradebook class assignments.
Click the Assignments
icon on the My Schedule
page or click the
Assignments subtab.
My Advisees
SSS_ADVISEE_LIST
Self Service, Advisor Center,
My Advisees
Advisors can view their
advisees, display advisee
photos, and link advisee
student details. Details include
a variety of data such as a
view of the advisee's student
center, shopping cart, planner,
academic requirements,
general information, and
academic history.
Advisee Student Center
SSS_STUDENT_CENTER
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, Advisee Student
Center
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Advisors can access an
advisee's related transactions
and view information such
as class schedule, dates, and
account information.
Click View Student
Details on the My
Advisees page for an
advisee or click the
Student Center subtab.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
235
Using Faculty Center
Chapter 15
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Advisee General Info
SCC_SUM_PERSONAL
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, Advisee General
Info
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Advisors can view
information such as an
advisee's service indicators,
initiated checklists, personal
data, and student groups.
Click View Student
Details for an advisee on
the My Advisees page.
Click the General Info
subtab.
Advisee Transfer Credit
SCC_SUM_TRNSFRCRDT
•
Self Service, Advisor
Advisors can view
Center, Advisee Transfer information such an advisees's
Credit
course and test credits.
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Click View Student
Details on the My
Advisees page for an
advisee.
Click the Transfer Credit
subtab.
Advisee Academics
SCC_SUM_ACADEMICS
•
•
Self Service, Advisor
Advisors can view
Center, Advisee Transfer information such as an
Credit
advisee's career, program, and
term summary.
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Click View Student
Details on the My
Advisees page for an
advisee,
Click the Academics
subtab.
236
Search for Classes
SSR_CLSRCH_ENTRY
Self Service, Search, Class
Search
Instructors can search for
classes.
Browse Course Catalog
SSS_BROWSE_CATLG
Self Service, Search, Browse Instructors can browse the
Course Catalog
course catalog to see a list
of courses offered at the
institution.
Faculty Search
SSR_FIND_INSTR
Search, Faculty Search
Instructors can locate the
teaching schedule for another
instructor. If available, after
the instructor's teaching
schedule is displayed, click on
the instructor's name to send
an email.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 15
Using Faculty Center
Page Name
Definition Name
Learning Management System LMS_TARGET_SELECT
Navigation
Usage
Self Service, Learning
Management Systems
Instructors can access
your institution's Learning
Management Systems.
Related Links
Prerequisites for Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Viewing Advisee Information Through Self-Service Pages
Entering Grades Through Self-Service
This section lists prerequisites and discusses how instructors enter grades through self service.
Prerequisites
For instructors to access their midterm and final grade rosters, you must:
•
Generate the rosters.
•
Assign the instructors to classes.
•
Give the assigned instructors appropriate grade roster access of Grade, Approve, or Post.
Pages Used to Enter Grades Through Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Grade Roster
SS_GRADE_ROSTER
Self Service, Faculty Center,
Grade Roster
Instructors view or enter
grades, update the roster's
approval status, and post
grades.
Self Service, Faculty Center,
My Schedule
Click the Grade Roster icon
on the My Schedule page or
the Grade Roster subtab.
Grade Change Request
SS_GRADE_CHANGE
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Click the Grade Change
Request link on the selfservice Grade Roster page.
Instructors submit grade
change requests. This link
appears after grades are
posted.
237
Using Faculty Center
Chapter 15
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Send Notification
SSS_NOTIFY
Click the Notify Selected
Students or Notify All
Students link on the SelfService Grade Roster page.
Instructors send email
notifications to selected
students or all students in a
class.
If a notification failure occurs,
the sender receives a returned
email indicating the type of
failure, for example, host
unknown.
Students Without Email
Address
SSR_NO_EMAIL
This page appears when you
Instructors view the students
click the Notify All Students
on the grade roster who do not
link and students are on the
have email addresses.
grade roster who do not have
email addresses in the system.
Transcript Note
GRADE_ROSTER_NOTE
Click the Note link on the
Transcript Notes tab of the
self-service Grade Roster
page.
Instructors can add a
transcript note to a student's
transcript.
Printer Friendly Version
SS_GRADE_RSTR_PRT
Click the Printer Friendly
Version link from the Self
Service Grade Roster page.
Displays a printer friendly
version of the grade roster.
Entering Grades Through Self Service
Access the Grade Roster page (Self Service, Faculty Center Click the Grade Roster icon on the Faculty
Center page).
The Grade Roster icon appears on the Faculty Center - My Teaching Schedule page after grade rosters
are generated for a class and after the instructor has been assigned grade, approve, or post access within
the schedule of classes. Instructors with grade, approve, or post access for the class can assign grades to
students. Instructors with approve or post access can use the Approval Status field to update the status
of the final grade roster before saving it. Values are Approved, Not Reviewed, and Ready for Review.
A status of Approved is required to post the roster. When the status is set to Approved, the post button
becomes available for instructors with post access. The instructor can then post grades from the selfservice grade roster. When a class is posted, the Request Grade Change button becomes available for
instructors to change a student's grade.
The select check box accommodates both the Notify feature as well as in conjunction with add this grade
to selected students and add this requirement designation to selected students.
Click the Printer Friendly Version button to print a copy of the grade roster.
On the Grade Roster page, the values that are available in the add this grade to all students field and the
Roster Grade field are those for which the Include in Self Service check box on the Grading Scheme
Table page is selected.
The add this requirement designation to all students field appears only for classes that meet all of the
following conditions:
•
238
The class has a requirement designation that has a separate grade.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 15
Using Faculty Center
•
The Grade Roster Type value is Final Grade.
•
The Approval Status value is Not Reviewed.
The Converted Roster Grade field appears on the Grade Roster page when at least one roster grade has a
value defined in the Convert to Grade field on the Grading Scheme Table page.
On the Grade Change Request page, the values that are available in the Official Grade field are those for
which the Include in Self Service check box on the Grading Scheme Table page is selected.
Viewing Self-Service Class Rosters
This section lists the pages that instructors use to view class rosters through self-service.
Pages Used to View Self-Service Class Rosters
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Class Roster
SS_FAC_CLASS_ROST
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, Class Roster
•
Self Service, Faculty
Center, My Schedule
Instructors view the students
who are enrolled in a class,
have dropped a class, or are
on the wait list for a class.
Instructors can display student
photos on the class roster.
Click the Class Roster
icon for a class or the
Class Roster subtab.
Send Notification
SSS_NOTIFY
Click the Notify Selected
Students or Notify All
Students link on the SelfService Class Roster page.
Instructors send email
notifications to selected
students or all students in a
class.
If a notification failure occurs,
the sender receives a returned
email indicating the type of
failure, for example, host
unknown.
Students Without Email
Address
SSR_NO_EMAIL
This page appears when you
click the Notify All Students
link and there are students on
the class roster who do not
have email addresses in the
system.
Displays the students on the
class roster who do not have
email addresses.
Printer Friendly Version
SS_FAC_CLSRSTR_PRT
Click the Printer Friendly
Version link on the Self
Service Class Roster page.
Displays a printer-friendly
version of the class roster.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
239
Using Faculty Center
Chapter 15
Using LMS Authentication
When you use PeopleSoft authentication, instructors can use self-service pages to link to their Learning
Management System (LMS).
An LMS icon appears next to LMS classes on the Faculty Center - My Teaching Schedule page when a
provider for authentication is identified or when an LMS URL is provided on the Schedule of Classes LMS Data page.
Instructors can also access a list of LMS providers and select the appropriate provider link to directly
access their home page in that LMS provider's website.
Related Links
"Understanding Integration with LMS Self-Service User Authentication" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
9.2: Student Records)
"Understanding LMS Setup" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Pages Used for Instructor Self-Service Pages and LMS Authentication
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Schedule
INSTR_CLASS3
Self Service, Faculty Center,
My Schedule
Instructors transfer directly
to the academic content for
the specified class within the
external LMS.
Click the Learning
Management button.
Learning Management
Systems
LMS_TARGET_SELECT
Self Service, Learning
Management Systems
Review a list of Learning
Management System
providers used by the
institution. Click one of the
links to be taken directly to
the external LMS.
Using the LMS Icon to Access the LMS Website
Instructors can access the My Schedule self-service page and click the LMS icon to access the appropriate
external LMS site.
When an LMS provider is identified for authentication and the instructor clicks the LMS icon, the
system authenticates the user and directly accesses the academic content for the specified class within the
external LMS. With authentication, the instructor does not have to log in to the external site.
If instead of a provider an LMS URL is specified, no authentication takes place. The system accesses the
specified URL, such as an instructor's website, where a log may be required.
If neither an LMS provider nor an LMS URL are assigned to the class, the LMS icon does not appear.
240
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 15
Using Faculty Center
Using the Provider Link to Access the LMS Site
Instructors can use the Learning Management System self-service page and click the LMS provider link
to access the appropriate external LMS site. The system performs the authentication and transfers them
directly to their home page in that provider's website. Because instructors are not tied to an institution, all
providers are displayed when the Display as Provider Link is selected on the LMS Provider setup page.
Related Links
"Defining LMS Providers" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
241
Chapter 16
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and
Schedule
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
Students, instructors, and community members use Class Search in the self-service classic interface to
search the schedule of classes for a specific institution and term, and the Browse Course Catalog feature
to view courses offered at the institution. Students can access class search from several places within
PeopleSoft Campus Self Service, and they can select classes directly from class search, even if they do
not access class search through enrollment navigation. Instructors can access class search through the
Faculty Center in Campus Self Service. They can see classes in their search results that do not appear
to students because the Schedule Print check box for those classes has been cleared on the Maintain
Schedule of Classes - Basic Data page.
The navigation tabs that are used in self-service class search are defined on the Navigation Tabs Setup
page.
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Searching for Classes Using Classic Self-Service Pages
This section provides prerequisites and discusses how to:
•
Select search criteria and search for classes.
•
Review class search results.
•
View class search details.
•
Browse the course catalog.
•
Select a course offering.
•
Review course catalog details.
Prerequisites
Set up self-service class search in the Class Search Configuration component and the Display in Class
Search page (Term Values Table).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
243
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
Chapter 16
Related Links
"Setting Up Class Search Profiles" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
"Defining Term Values" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Pages Used to Search for Classes Using Self-Service Pages
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Search for Classes - Search
Criteria
SSR_CLSRCH_ENTRY
•
Self Service, Search,
Search for Classes
•
Self Service, Student
Center
Users specify the academic
institution and term in which
they want search for classes.
Users enter search criteria and
retrieve results.
Click the Search link.
•
Self Service, Academic
Planning, My Planner
Click the Search tab.
•
Self Service, Academic
Planning, Enrollment
Shopping Cart
Click the Search link.
•
Self Service, Class
Search/Browse Catalog
•
Self Service, Enrollment,
Enrollment: Add Classes
Click the Class Search
option.
Click the Search link.
•
Self Service, Enrollment,
Enrollment: Swap
Classes
Click the Class Search
option.
Click the Search link.
244
Search for Classes - Search
Results
SSR_CLSRCH_RSLT
Click the Search button on
the Search for Classes page.
Review all classes that match
the search criteria.
Search for Classes - Class
Detail
SSR_CLSRCH_DTL
Click a class section on the
Search for Classes - Search
Results page.
Review detail for a specific
class.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 16
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Browse Course Catalog
SSS_BROWSE_CATLG
•
Self Service, Search,
Browse Course Catalog
•
Self Service, Class
Search/Browse Catalog,
Browse Course Catalog
Browse the course catalog to
see a list of courses offered at
the institution.
•
Self Service, Student
Center
Click the Search link.
Click the Browse Course
Catalog tab.
•
Self Service, Academic
Planning, My Planner
Click the Browse Course
Catalog button.
Browse Course Catalog Select Course Offering
SSS_BCC_SEL_CRSE
On the Browse Course
Catalog page, click a course
title that includes this
message: *** view multiple
offerings.
Select the appropriate offering
when a course ID has multiple
offerings with the same
subject, course number, and
title, or when multiple course
IDs have the same subject,
course number, and title.
Browse Course Catalog Course Detail
SSS_CRSE_OFFER_DTL
Click a course title on the
Browse Course Catalog page.
View course details and
access class sections.
Selecting Search Criteria and Searching for Classes
Access the Search for Classes page (Self Service, Search, Class Search).
Use the Class Search Configuration component to configure the grouping of criteria and whether groups
appear expanded or collapsed.
See "Setting Up Class Search Profiles" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Note: Students can also search for classes through self-service My Planner, My Requirements, and
Browse Course Catalog pages. From those pages, students can select a course description to access the
course detail; from there they can view class sections that are offered for a specified term.
Institution
When accessed by a student through self-service navigation, the
institution appears as default from the student's row in the STD_
CAR_TERM table.
Term
When accessed by a student from Class Search, the student's
user preference term appears. When accessed from Add Classes
or Swap Classes, the term selected appears here.
When accessed by a student from Class Search, the term drop
down only includes terms that are valid as defined in the
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
245
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
Chapter 16
Display Term in Class Search date range on the Term Values
Table.
Note: The Term field on the Search for Classes page changes
from a drop-down list box to a search prompt if the selected
institution has more than 300 terms.
Course Subject
This field changes from a drop-down list box to a select subject
button if the selected institution has more than 300 course
subjects or if the Class Search Subject Option field on the
Student Records Installation page is set to Prompt Search.
Note: Users at multi-institution organizations can select the
drop-drop list box option on the Student Records Installation
page. However, the Course Subject field on the Search for
Classes page dynamically changes to a select subject button for
institutions with more than 300 course subjects.
Course Career
The student's academic career appears by default.
Meeting Start Time
To narrow search results by meeting start time, select one of the
following:
Meeting End Time
246
•
greater than: Finds classes with a meeting start time later
than the specified time. For example, if you enter greater
than 1:00PM, the system would only retrieve classes that
have a meeting start time later than 1:00 PM.
•
greater than or equal to: Finds classes with a meeting start
time at or after the specified time.
•
less than: Finds classes with a meeting start time earlier than
the specified time.
•
less than or equal to: Finds classes with a meeting start time
at or earlier than the specified time.
•
is exactly: Finds classes with a meeting start time that is
exactly at the specified time.
To narrow search results by meeting end time, select one of the
following:
•
greater than: Finds classes with a meeting end time later
than the specified time. For example, if you enter greater
than 1:00PM, the system would only retrieve classes that
have a meeting end time later than 1:00 PM., such as 2:00
PM.
•
greater than or equal to: Finds classes with a meeting end
time at or after the specified time.
•
less than: Finds classes with a meeting end time earlier than
the specified time.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 16
Day of Week
Minimum Units
Maximum Units
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
•
less than or equal to: Finds classes with a meeting end time
at or earlier than the specified time.
•
is exactly: Finds classed with a meeting end time that is
exactly at the specified time.
To narrow search results by day of week, select one of the
following:
•
Include Only These Days: Finds classes that meet on the
selected days. For example, if you select Monday and
Thursday, the system retrieves all classes that meet on
Mondays and Thursdays only or Mondays, Thursdays, and
other days.
•
Include Any of These Days: Finds classes that meet on at
least one of the selected days. So if you select Monday
and Thursday, the system retrieves all classes that meet On
Monday only, Thursday only, or Mondays or Thursdays and
other days.
•
Exclude Any of These Days: Finds classes that do not meet
on either of the selected days.
•
Exclude Only These Days: Finds classes that do not meet on
both of the selected days.
To narrow search results by minimum units, select one of the
following:
•
greater than: Finds classes with minimum units greater than
the specified units.
•
greater than or equal to: Finds classes with minimum units
equal to or greater than the specified units.
•
less than: Finds classes with minimum units less than the
specified units.
•
less than or equal to: Finds classes with minimum units less
than or equal to the specified units.
•
is exactly: Finds classes with minimum units that are exactly
the specified units.
To narrow search results by maximum units, select one of the
following:
•
greater than: Finds classes with maximum units greater than
the specified units.
•
greater than or equal to: Finds classes with maximum units
equal to or greater than the specified units.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
247
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
Chapter 16
•
less than: Finds classes with maximum units less than the
specified units.
•
less than or equal to: Finds classes with maximum units less
than or equal to the specified units.
•
is exactly: Finds classes with minimum units that are exactly
the specified units.
Reviewing Class Search Results
Access the Search for Classes - Search Results page (click the Search button on the Search for Classes
page).
Wait List
This icon only appears in the legend if you select the Use Wait
Listing check box on the Self Service - Student Records Setup
page. Likewise, if you clear the Use Wait Listing check box, the
search results have a status of open or closed for classes.
If the Show Class Results Instructions check box is selected on the Class Result Options page, then the
message text from that page appears as introductory text on the Search Results page.
See "Defining Class Search Result Options" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records).
Note: The Schedule Print check box on the Maintain Schedule of Classes - Basic Data page indicates
whether a class section appears in the student and visitor class search results or on the printed class
schedule. For instructors and advisors, all class sections are displayed in class search results. The message
"Section not shown to students" is displayed for those class sections for which the Schedule Print check
box is cleared.
Viewing Class Search Details
Access the Search for Classes - Class Detail page (click a class section on the Search for Classes - Search
Results page).
This page displays all information from the course catalog, plus class schedule information. Use the
Class Detail Options page in the Class Search Configuration component to determine which information
appears on this page to students and faculty.
Related Links
"Setting Up Class Search Profiles" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Browsing the Course Catalog
Access the Browse Course Catalog page (Self Service, Class Search/Browse Catalog, Browse Course
Catalog).
Students and instructors can browse the course catalog by academic subject. Students can also select
courses to add to their planner. If they click a Course Nbr (course number) or course title, they can view
the course details and also view section information for the indicated term. Students with a single career
are able to add courses to their planner directly from the Browse Course Catalog page or from the Course
248
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 16
Using Self-Service Course Catalog and Schedule
Detail page. Students with multiple careers are only able to add courses to their planner from the Course
Detail page.
When a course ID has multiple offerings with the same subject, course number, and title, or when
multiple course IDs have the same subject, course number, and title, students and instructors are taken to
the Select Course Offering page when they click the course number or course title—see ART 130 in the
previous page example. Notice that the course title includes this message: *** view multiple offerings.
Selecting a Course Offering
Access the Browse Course Catalog - Select Course Offering page (on the Browse Course Catalog page,
click a course title that includes this message: *** view multiple offerings).
Use this page to select the appropriate offering when a course ID has multiple offerings with the same
subject, course number, and title, or when multiple course IDs have the same subject, course number, and
title.
Reviewing Course Catalog Details
Access the Browse Course Catalog - Course Detail page (click a course title on the Browse Course
Catalog page or a course offering link on the Browse Course Catalog - Select Course Offering page).
Students and instructors can click the view class sections button to view the course schedule details on
this page.
Course Schedule
Students and instructors can select a term and click the show sections button to view class sections for the
course. The Terms Offered drop down list box only includes: terms that are valid as defined in the Display
Term in Class Search date range on the Term Values table, and those with sections scheduled within the
term. For students, the select button only appears if the Enrollment & Shopping Cart date range on the
Term Table under Display in Self-Service is valid.
See "Defining Terms, Sessions, and Session Time Periods" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
249
Chapter 17
Using Self-Service Academic Planning
Prerequisites for Using Self-Service Academic Planning
Before students can use self-service academic planning features, the student must have a user ID in the
system. The student must also be matriculated and have a role that includes security access to My Planner.
Planning Courses
This section discusses how students plan courses using My Planner functionality.
The navigation tabs that are used in self-service academic planning are defined on the Navigation Tabs
Setup page.
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Understanding My Planner
Self-service My Planner functionality provides students with a tool to plan their courses for an individual
term, multiple terms, or for their entire stay at the institution. After students add courses to their planner,
they can proceed directly from planning to enrollment. Students with multiple careers are provided with a
planner for each career.
The Planner differs from the enrollment shopping cart in the following way: the shopping cart requires
students to add scheduled class sections to their cart, whereas the planner enables students to accomplish
long-range planning by adding courses to their planner, whether or not the class schedule has been created
for future terms.
When students access My Planner, past terms are collapsed while current and future terms are expanded.
Current and future terms are determined by the Student Planner date range defined on the Term table
under Display In Self-Service.
Depending on your Installation Student Administration setup, you can implement the planner using one
of the following: Academic Advisement or Program Guide. If the institution does not use either, then the
planner still works exclusively with Browse Course Catalog. To disable the planner, remove My Planner
security; the planner page and references to planner are hidden.
My Planner includes three ways for students to take action. They can:
•
Add courses to their planner using the Browse Course Catalog or Plan by my Requirements buttons.
•
Assign courses to a projected term.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
251
Using Self-Service Academic Planning
Chapter 17
TheMove selected courses to Term drop down list box only includes terms that are valid as defined in
the Student Planner date range on the Term Table under Display In Self-Service.
•
View planned courses by term and proceed to enroll in a course when enrollment becomes available
for the term. Students can enroll in planned courses from My Planner by selecting the course
description to access the course detail and view sections scheduled for a selected term; students can
then select the section for which they want to enroll. Students can also enroll in planned courses from
the shopping cart, add, and swap pages.
Page Used to Plan Courses
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
My Planner
SSS_MY_PLANNER
•
•
252
Usage
Self Service, Academic
Planning, My Planner
Students plan courses
based on their academic
requirements or by browsing
Click the Plan link on the the course catalog.
Student Center page.
Plan by My Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB
Click the Plan by my
Requirements button on the
My Planner page.
Students review a
comprehensive list of their
degree requirements and
access course details linked
to a particular requirement.
Students can add courses
to their planner and view
class sections offered for a
selected term from the Course
Details page. Term activated
students also have the option
of directly adding classes
to their shopping cart and
proceeding to enrollment.
Browse Course Catalog
SSS_BROWSE_CATLG
Click the Browse Course
Catalog button on the My
Planner page.
Students can review all active
courses within the course
catalog and add courses valid
for their institution and career
to their planner. As with Plan
by My Requirements, students
are able to drill down on the
Course Detail page to view
class sections for a selected
term and, if term activated, to
directly add classes to their
shopping cart.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 17
Using Self-Service Academic Planning
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Planner - Requirements
SSS_MY_PLANNER_REQ
Self Service, Academic
Planning, My Planner
The requirement icon appears
on the My Planner page when
a student adds a course to
the planner from the Plan
by My Requirements or My
Academic Requirements
pages. When students select
the icon, the requirement
details indicate the
requirement from which
the course was added. If,
when evaluating the course
work, the course is used for
a different requirement, the
system provides additional
information.
Click the requirement icon:
Browse Course Catalog Course Detail
SSS_CRSE_OFFER_DTL
Click a course title on the
Browse Course Catalog page.
View course details and
access class sections.
Maintaining the Enrollment Shopping Cart
This section discusses how students maintain their course selections using shopping cart functionality.
Understanding the Shopping Cart
Shopping cart functionality enables students to plan enrollment in class sections for a particular term.
Students can validate their class sections to check for common problems such as time conflicts and
prerequisites. Students can add classes to the shopping cart using My Planner or the My Requirements
feature.
The system stores a student's class selections for a particular term and the student can access them as long
as the term is available for enrollment. A class remains in the cart until the student is successfully enrolled
or decides to delete it.
Page Used to Maintain the Course Shopping Cart
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Shopping Cart
SSR_SSENRL_CART
•
Self Service, Academic
Planning, Enrollment
Shopping Cart
•
Click the Plan link on the
Student Center page, then
click the shopping cart
tab.
Student manages stored
course sections selected
using My Planner or My
Requirements.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
253
Using Self-Service Academic Planning
Chapter 17
Viewing Course History
This section discusses how students view their course history, which is a summary of all courses taken
through the current term.
Page Used to View Academic History
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
My Course History
SSS_MY_CRSEHIST
•
•
Usage
Self Service, Academic
Planning, My Course
History
Students can review
information for courses
taken, those they received
transfer credit for, and those
Click the Plan link on the in progress. They can choose
Student Center page, then to show or hide courses from
click the course history
My Planner and the shopping
tab.
cart.
Note: This page is intended
to provide an easy-to-read
view of a student's progress;
it is not intended to serve as
a transcript of the student's
academic record.
254
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 18
Using Self-Service Academic Services
Understanding My Academics
The My Academics self-service page provides students with their current program and plan information
in a tree structure and also provides a set of links to important academic information.
The sections that My Academics displays are:
•
Academic Requirements
•
What-if Report
•
Advisors
•
Transfer Credit
•
Course History
•
Transcript
•
Enrollment Verification
•
Graduation
Related Links
Prerequisites for Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Applying for Graduation Using Self-Service Pages
Viewing Course History
Using Self-Service My Academics Functionality
Students can use the Classic self-service My Academics functionality.
Pages Used to Use Self-Service My Academics Functionality
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Academics
SSS_MY_ACAD
Student Center, My
Academics
Students can access highlevel academic data and link
to various tasks.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
255
Using Self-Service Academic Services
Chapter 18
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Academic Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB
Click the View my
advisement report link on the
My Academics page.
Students can use this page to
access the degree progress
report, evaluate their degree
progress, make decisions
about what to enroll in next,
and then either enroll in
courses or add courses to their
course planners.
What-if Report Selection
SAA_SS_WHATIF_SEL
•
•
View My Advisors
Send Notification
Evaluate My Transfer Credit
View Transfer Credit Report
256
SS_STDNT_ADVISR
SSS_NOTIFY
SS_TRCR_SRCH
SS_TRCR_RPT
Click the Create a what- Students can request an
if scenario link on the My advisement report based
Academics page.
on what-if program and
plan scenarios. Also, if the
Self Service, Degree
institution enables it, students
Progress/Graduation,
can also run a course what-if
View What-If Report
report.
•
Click the View my
advisors link on the My
Academics page.
•
Self Service, Academic
Records, View My
Advisors
Students can view a list of
their assigned advisors by
academic institution, career,
program, and plan.
Click the Notify Selected
Advisors or the Notify All
Advisors links on the View
My Advisors page.
Students send email
notifications to one or more of
their advisors.
•
Click the Evaluate my
transfer credits link on
the My Academics page.
Students can evaluate any
transfer credits.
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Click the View my
transfer credit report link
on the My Academics
page.
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, View Transfer
Credit Report
If a notification failure occurs,
the sender receives a returned
email indicating the type of
failure, for example, host
unknown.
Students can view their
Transfer Credit reports.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 18
Using Self-Service Academic Services
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
My Course History
SSS_MY_CRSEHIST
•
•
View Unofficial Transcript
Request Official Transcript
Request Enrollment
Verification
Apply for Graduation
SSS_TSRQST_UNOFF
SS_TSCRPT_OFF
SS_ENRL_VER_REQ
SS_GRAD_APPLY
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Usage
Click the View my course Students can review
history link on the My
information for courses
Academics page.
taken, those they received
transfer credit for, and those
Self Service, Academic
in progress. They can choose
Records, My Course
to show or hide courses from
History
My Planner.
•
Click the View my
unofficial transcript link
on the My Academics
page.
Students can view their
unofficial transcripts.
•
Self Service, Academic
Records, View Unofficial
Transcript
•
Click the Request official Students can request
transcript link on the My official transcripts from the
Academics page.
institution.
•
Self Service, Academic
Records, Request Official
Transcript
•
Click the Request
enrollment verification
link on the My
Academics page.
•
Self Service, Academic
Records, Request
Enrollment Verification
•
Click the Apply for
graduation link on the
My Academics page.
•
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation,
Apply for Graduation
Students can request
enrollment verification online
or by mail, with multiple
processing options.
Students can select academic
programs and apply for
graduation.
257
Chapter 19
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Understanding Self-Service Enrollment
The self-service enrollment design integrates the various enrollment functions and enables students to
build and make changes to their schedules from the same place in the system. A step-by-step wizard
feature guides students through the enrollment processes of adding, dropping, swapping, and editing
classes. Specifically, it guides students through the steps of selecting classes, defining options—such as
wait list preferences—confirming selections, and reviewing results.
Additionally, a great degree of integration exists between the tasks of viewing appointment data,
finding or browsing for classes, enrolling in classes, presenting error messages, and viewing enrollment
information.
The navigation tabs that are used in self-service enrollment are defined on the Navigation Tabs Setup
page.
See Setting Up Self-Service Navigation.
Self-Service Enrollment Shopping Cart Validation and Enrollment Messages
Oracle delivers a set of error and informational message sets exclusively for the Enrollment Shopping
Cart Validation feature and self-service enrollment processing. These message sets enable the enrollment
process to return more self-service-friendly messages. You can modify these messages to meet the
specific needs of your students. You can view and make changes to these messages using the PeopleTools
Message Catalog component (MESSAGE_CATALOG1) (PeopleTools, Utilities, Administration,
Message Catalog).
These message sets are:
•
Validation (Message Set 14632): These messages are returned when a student selects Validate on
the Enrollment Shopping Cart page. The system returns a validation-specific message rather than a
regular enrollment engine message. For example, if the validation process finds a time conflict, the
message 14632, 17 is returned rather than the enrollment engine message 14640, 17.
•
Enrollment (Message Set 14641): This message set is used for all messages received through selfservice enrollment (excluding Enrollment Shopping Cart Validation). While actual enrollment is
processed in the same way for self-service enrollment as when it is processed using an administrative
user page, such as Quick Enroll, the fact that a request was submitted through self-service enrollment
now causes the system to return a self-service-specific error or informational message. For example,
if an enrollment request submitted through the Quick Enroll component (QUICK_ENROLL) returns
message 14640, 17 (time conflict), the same request submitted through self-service returns the selfservice-specific message 14641,17. This enables more appropriate self-service messaging, without
changing the messages used for non-self-service, administrative users.
See the product documentation for PeopleTools: System and Server Administration, Using
PeopleTools Utilities, Using Administration Utilities, Message Catalog.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
259
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Chapter 19
Fluid self-service uses the following message catalog entries:
•
Fluid Shopping Cart Enrollment (Message Set 14642)
•
Enrollment Engine Fluid - Class Search (Message Set 14643)
Related Links
Searching for Classes Using Classic Self-Service Pages
Viewing a Class Schedule
This section lists the pages that students use to view their class schedule using the classic interface.
Pages Used to View a Class Schedule
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Class Schedule
SSR_SSENRL_LIST
•
Self Service, Enrollment
•
Student Center, Enroll,
My Class Schedule
Students use this page to view
their class schedules for a
term.
Textbook Summary
SSR_SSCLSTXB_SUM
Click the View Textbook
Summary link on the My
Class Schedule page.
Students can view textbook
assignments for each of their
classes.
The link is available if you
select the Display Textbook
Summary link – Student Self
Service check box on the
Other page in the Student
Records setup component (
SSR_SS_ENRL_OPT).
Weekly Schedule
SS_WEEKLY_SCHEDULE
•
Self Service, Enrollment, Students use this page to view
My Class Schedule
their weekly schedules.
Select the Weekly
Calendar View option.
•
260
Note: Before students can
view their weekly schedules,
you must define weekly
Self Service, Enrollment, schedule time periods.
View My Weekly
Schedule
See Setting Up Weekly
Schedule Time Periods.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 19
Page Name
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Definition Name
Academic Calendar Deadlines ACAD_CAL_DATES
Navigation
Usage
Click the Academic Calendar
Deadlines icon on the My
Class Schedule page.
Students use this page to view
drop, cancel, and withdrawal
deadlines for a class on their
class schedules. The page
also enables students to
access Gradebook and the
Learning Management System
if the institution sets up the
connections.
Adding Classes
This section lists the pages that students use to add classes to their schedules from Campus Self Service.
Pages Used to Add Classes
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Add Classes
SSR_ENRL_CART
•
•
Usage
Self Service, Enrollment, Students can use this page to
Enrollment: Add Classes request enrollment in classes
for a term.
Student Center, Enroll,
add
Related Class Sections
SSR_CLS_RELCOMP
Click the Next button on the
Add Classes page.
Students use this page to
select related class sections to
add.
Add Classes - Select
Classes to Add - Enrollment
Preferences
SSR_CLS_DTLOPT
Click the Select a Class button Students use this page to
on the Select Classes to Add - complete the information
Class Detail page.
for their class enrollment
requests.
Add Classes - Confirm
Classes
SSR_SSENRL_ADD_C
Click the Next button on
the Add Classes - Select
Classes to Add - Enrollment
Preferences page.
Students use this page to
confirm their selections and
initiate the enrollment engine.
Add Classes - View Results
SSR_SSENRL_RSLT
Click the Enroll button on the
Confirm Classes page.
Students use this page to view
the result of their enrollment
request.
Dropping Classes
This section lists the pages that students use to drop classes from their schedules through Campus Self
Service.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
261
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Chapter 19
Pages Used to Drop Classes
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Drop Classes
SSR_SSENRL_DROP
•
Self Service, Enrollment, Students use this page to drop
Enrollment: Drop Classes classes from their schedules.
•
Student Center, Enroll,
drop
Drop Classes - Confirm Your
Selection
SSR_SSENRL_DROP_C
Click the Drop Classes button
on the Drop Classes page.
Students use this page to
confirm their selections.
Drop Classes - View Results
SSR_SSENRL_RSLT
Click the Next button on the
Drop Classes – Confirm Your
Selection page.
Students use this page to
view the results of their drop
requests.
Swapping Classes
This section lists the pages that students use to swap classes using self-service pages.
Pages Used to Swap Classes
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Swap
SSR_SSENRL_SWAP
•
•
Usage
Self Service, Enrollment, Students can use this page to
Enrollment: Swap
request to swap an existing
Classes
class enrollment within a
term for a different class
Student Center, Enroll,
enrollment.
swap
Select a class to swap Enrollment Preferences
SSR_CLS_DTLOPT
Click the Select a Class button Students use this page to
on the Select Classes to swap complete the information
- Class Detail page.
for their class enrollment
requests.
Swap Classes - Confirm your
selection
SSR_SSENRL_SWAP_C
Click the Next button on
the Select a class to swap Enrollment Preferences page.
Students use this page to
confirm their selections and
initiate the enrollment engine.
Swap Classes - View Results
SSR_SSENRL_RSLT
Click the Next button on the
Swap Classes - Confirm your
selection page.
Students use this page to
view the results of their swap
requests.
Editing Classes
This section lists the pages that students use to edit their enrollment requests through Campus Self
Service.
262
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 19
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Pages Used to Edit Classes
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Edit
SSR_SSENRL_EDIT
•
Self Service, Enrollment, Students use this page to
Enrollment: Edit a Class select a class to edit.
•
Student Center, Enroll,
edit
Select a class to edit Enrollment Preferences
SSR_CLS_DTLOPT
Usage
Click the Next button on the
Select Classes to edit - Class
Detail page.
Students use this page to
complete the information
for their class enrollment
requests.
Edit Class Enrollment Options SSR_SSENRL_EDIT_C
- Confirm your Selections
Click the Next button on
the Select a class to edit Enrollment Preferences page.
Students use this page to
confirm their changes.
Edit Class Enrollment Options SSR_SSENRL_RSLT
- View Results
Click the Next button on the
Students use this page to view
Edit Class Enrollment Options the results of their changes.
- Confirm your Selections
page.
Viewing Term Information
This section provides an overview of term information and discusses how to:
•
Use LMS Authentication.
•
Use the LMS Button to Access the LMS Website.
Understanding Term Information
The Term Information page provides students with a single access point that links to the following pages:
•
Enrollment Dates.
•
View Assignments and Grades.
•
My Learning Management Systems.
•
My Exam Schedule.
•
View My Grades.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
263
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Chapter 19
Pages Used to View Term Information
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Term Information
SSR_SS_TERM_LINKS
Student Center, Enroll, Term Students use links to access
Information
enrollment dates, assignments,
learning management
systems, exam schedules, and
grades.
Enrollment Dates
SSR_SSENRL_APPT
Click the View my enrollment Students can view detail
dates link on the Term
information about their
Information page.
enrollment appointments,
such as start date, end date,
start time, end time, and unit
limits.
View Assignments and
Grades
SS_LAM_STD_GR_LST
Click the View my class
Students can view assignment
assignments and grades link
and grade information for
on the Term Information page. classes that use the Gradebook
feature.
My Learning Management
Systems
SSR_LMS_TARGET
Click the View learning
management systems link on
the Term Information page.
Students access a list of
LMS providers and click the
appropriate provider links to
directly access their home
pages in those LMS providers'
websites.
Note: For a provider link to
appear on the My Learning
Management Systems page,
the Display as LMS Link
must be selected on the LMS
Provider page.
My Exam Schedule
SSR_SSENRL_EXAM_L
SSR_SS_WEEK
View My Grades
SS_ES_GRADE_LIST
Click the View my exam
schedule link on the Term
Information page.
Students view their exam
schedule for a term.
Click the View my grades link Students can view final and
on the Term Information page. midterm grades for a selected
term.
Using LMS Authentication
When you use PeopleSoft LMS authentication, students and instructors can use self-service pages to view
their class schedules or teaching assignments for a term.
An LMS button appears next to each LMS class on these pages either when a provider for authentication
is identified or when an LMS URL is provided on the Schedule of Classes - LMS Data page. The LMS
button works the same on the Student Center and My Class Schedule self-service pages for students and
on the Faculty Center page for instructors.
Self-service users can also access a list of LMS providers and select the appropriate provider link to
directly access their home page in that LMS provider's website.
264
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 19
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Related Links
"Understanding Integration with LMS Self-Service User Authentication" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
9.2: Student Records)
"Defining LMS Providers" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Using the LMS Button to Access the LMS Website
Self-services users can access the Student Center or My Class Schedule self-service page and click the
LMS button to transfer to the appropriate external LMS site.
When an LMS provider is identified for authentication and the student clicks the LMS button on a
self-service page, the system authenticates the user and directly accesses the academic content for the
specified class within the external LMS. With authentication, the user does not have to log in to the
external site.
If instead of a provider an LMS URL is specified, no authentication takes place. The system transfers the
student to the specified URL, such as an instructor's website, where he or she might have to log in.
For students, the LMS button appears next to an LMS class if they are enrolled in that class and have not
dropped or withdrawn from the class.
If neither an LMS provider nor an LMS URL is assigned, the LMS button does not appear.
Managing Classes Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
"Using the Student Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Displaying Class Schedules in Fluid User Interface
Pages Used to Manage Classes
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Manage Classes Tile
SSR_VW_CLASS_FL
Click to access View My Classes page.
When you click this tile, the behavior
differs depending on the type of device
you are using:
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
•
On smartphones, a landing page
appears where you can make
additional choices.
•
On tablets, laptops, and desktops,
a group box appears that defaults
to View My Classes as one of many
choices.
265
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Chapter 19
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
View My Classes Page
SSR_TERM_STA1_FL
View all the classes that you are enrolled
in or waitlisted, or have dropped.
View Class Schedule Page
SSR_VW_CLASS_FL
Display class schedules.
Class Information Page
SSR_CLASSDTL_SCF
Displays class or meeting details.
Shopping Cart Page
SSR_TERM_STA3_FL
Select, delete, validate, and change
options for classes.
Class Search
SSR_CLSRCH_MAIN_FL
Click to search for classes.
Drop Classes Page
SSR_DROP_TERM_FL
Select classes to drop.
Update Classes Page
SSR_ED_CLASS_FL
Update or edit classes in the class
schedule.
Swap Classes Page
SSR_SWAP_ENRL_FL
Swap classes in the class schedule.
Viewing Classes
Use the View My Classes page to view classes you are enrolled in, waitlisted, or have dropped. If
registered in multiple terms, the Select a Value page is displayed so you can select a term for which to
view classes. For institutions with only one institution in their Academic Institution table, the institution
name is not displayed. If you are registered to multiple institutions, careers, or terms, click Change in the
View My Classes page to view classes for other institutions, careers, or terms.
By default, classes are displayed in the following order: Enrolled, Waitlisted, or Dropped. Use the class
registration status (Enrolled, Waitlisted, Dropped) to control which classes are displayed on the page.
To view classes, select the term, career, and institution combination for which you have registered classes.
The View Class Schedule page appears. Depending on how your institution sets up the display options for
this page, schedules may appear:
By Class
This is the default view in which classes are displayed. To
change the default, see Displaying Class Schedules in Fluid
User Interface.
By Date
On this page, you can select a valid date range from which
classes are displayed. Initially, From is set to the term start date,
or is the term that has commenced on the current date. To is set
to seven days after the current date.
When you click a class, more information about the class appears on the Class Information page. From
the Class Information page, you can view Meeting Details, Class Details, or Instructor information. While
the number of schedules that appear on the View My Classes page is set to a maximum of 10, on the
Meeting Details page all schedules are displayed.
On tablets, laptops, and desktops, you can view enrollment deadlines as well.
266
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 19
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Using the Shopping Cart
Use the Shopping Cart page to validate classes prior to enrollment. If registered in multiple terms, the
Select a Value page is displayed so you can select a term for which to view the Shopping Cart. You
may also delete classes from the shopping cart if they are no longer required and enroll in classes at the
appropriate time. When you click Enroll, a confirmation page is displayed indicating the outcome of the
transaction. For institutions with only one institution in their Academic Institution table, the institution
name is not displayed. If you are registered to multiple institutions, careers, or terms, click Change on the
page to view the Shopping Cart for other institutions, careers, or terms.
You may also use the Shopping Cart to change your enrollment preferences: for example, Add to Waitlist
or change your Grading Basis. You may also select a different group of class options where there are
either ‘required’ multiple components, or ‘optional’ components within the same class association.
Clicking on the class link provides access to the class information page, detailed meeting patterns, class
availability, enrollment information, and instructor details.
Searching for Classes
In Class Search using Fluid, you can use keywords to search for courses and classes. You can filter the
search results by Meeting Days, Meeting Times, Units, and so on. As you view courses, you can select a
course and add it as a favorite. This makes it easy to enroll in the course at a later date. You can also track
recently viewed courses.
In addition to keyword search, you can click Additional ways to search to look for courses and classes.
From the page that appears, you can search for classes by subject and catalog number. Only subjects
that are scheduled for the term appear in the Subject field. From the same page, you can also search for
instructors using their last name.
When you select a course, classes are displayed as a number of class options. A class option is a class or
group of classes that satisfy the filters you used. If a class option contains classes with a time conflict,
you may or may not see them depending on how the system was set up. Once you select a class option,
you are guided through a process where you either add your classes to the shopping cart or go straight
to enrollment. As part of the enrollment process, you can choose to add a class to a Waitlist, Permission
Number, and so on. If for any reason you are unable to enroll in the class because it is full or a permission
number is required, you can re-enter the process to provide required information (without having to go
through search again), and then complete enrollment.
Related Links
Understanding Class Search for Fluid User Interface
Dropping Classes
Use the Drop Classes page to drop classes from your class schedule. If registered in multiple terms, the
Select a Value page is displayed so you can select a term for which to drop classes. When you click Drop
Classes, you are led through a guided activity that takes you through the necessary steps to drop classes.
When you click a class, more information about the class appears on the Class Information page. This
page displays more details about the class; for example, if a drop consent is required before the class can
be dropped.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
267
Using Self-Service Enrollment
Chapter 19
Updating Classes
Use the Update Classes page to update or edit classes within your class schedule. When you select a class,
an activity guide takes you through the necessary steps to complete the update process. Depending on
the permissions, you are able to update the class preferences you previously selected and where optional
components are available for you to select.
Swapping Classes
Use the Swap Classes page to swap classes in the class schedule. Currently, you can swap classes using
Class Search, Shopping Cart, and Class Number. Once you select a class, an activity guide helps you
complete the process.
268
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 20
Using Self-Service Program Enrollment
Configuring Navigation for Self-Service Program Enrollment
You can use the Navigation Tabs Setup component to configure the two-level folder tabs for self-service
Program Enrollment. The Program Enrollment functional area can be used to change the order of each of
the tab levels and to change the names of the delivered tabs or add additional tabs.
See Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Deploying Homepage Pagelets for Self-Service Program
Enrollment
You can deploy the following pagelets on your portal homepage:
•
My Academic Information.
•
My Advisors.
•
My Academic Progress Tracker (Program Enrollment-specific data based on APT).
We recommend that you deploy this particular pagelet because it provides a single entry point to
planning and enrollment.
Using Program Enrollment Self-Service Features
The following self-service Program Enrollment features are delivered:
•
Program Overview
•
My Education Plan
•
My Course Selection
•
My Schedule Builder
•
My Classes
•
My Results
Refer to the following documents in My Oracle Support (ID 1400723.1):
•
Using the Rules Engine for Program Enrollment Student Self-Service: System/Example Data
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
269
Using Self-Service Program Enrollment
Chapter 20
•
Student Enrollment Event
•
Using BI Publisher and the XMLP Results Template to Display Students’ Results and Outcomes in
Program Enrollment Self Service: Sample Template
•
Using the Self-Service Academic Item Registry Details Page
Related Links
"Creating and Managing APT Instances Using the Academic Progress Tracker Component" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
"Managing APT Enrollment" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
"Setting Up Rules for Program Enrollment" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Pages Used for Self-Service Program Enrollment
270
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Program Overview
SSR_PRG_TREE_CRDE
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, Program
Overview
Provides a display-only view
of a student’s entire program/
APT instance.
My Education Plan
SSR_MP
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Education
Plan
Allows students to review
program requirements by term
(equates to term node) and to
select courses.
My Course Selection
SSS_PE_PLNR_CRSE
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Course
Selection
Provides a view of courses
by term, including required
courses and any optional
courses selected by the
student.
My Schedule Builder
SSR_APT_SCHD_BLDR
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Schedule
Builder
Students use the Schedule
Builder to enroll in classes.
The data in the Schedule
Builder is sourced only from
APT.
My Classes
SSR_SS_MY_CLASSES
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Classes
Students view their classes
and can add and drop classes.
My Results
SSR_APT_DAT_RPT_CM
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Results
Students can view results for
courses and other program
elements.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 21
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Managing the Activity Management WorkCenter
This section provides an overview of the Activity Management WorkCenter and discusses how to access
the pages of the WorkCenter for instructional staff.
Understanding the Activity Management WorkCenter
The Activity Management WorkCenter is the instructional staff access to maintain coursework and
student results. The functionality is similar to the Activity Manager, and the Activity and Result Rosters,
but instructional staffs only have access to their classes and/or exams. Instructional staff can update
coursework items; view activity rosters, assign activities and access student attachments; and enter results.
Settings in the administrative component control what actions instructional staff can perform and what
data they can view. These settings are as follows:
•
Institution Table – ability to update coursework and calculate results.
•
Class Table – grade access.
•
Section Manager – exam result access.
•
Result Dates – controls when result entry can be performed.
See:
•
"Setting Up Activity Management Throughout Campus Solutions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Student Records)
•
"Defining Academic Institutions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Pages Used to Manage the Activity Management WorkCenter
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Activity Manager
SSR_ACR_MAIN_SS
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter
After selecting a class or
exam from the left side
navigation, the Manage Roster
WorkCenter appears. When on
the Manage Coursework tab,
select the Manage Roster icon
to access this page.
Instructors
SSR_ACSS_INSTR_SEC
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters
Select the Instructor Name link
to access contact information
for the instructor.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
271
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Chapter 21
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Result Access
SSR_AMWC_RWK_SEC
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters
Select to display the result
access available to the
instructor for the particular
activity.
Activity Roster
SSR_ACR_ROSTER_SS
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters
Select the activity roster icon
to access information on the
students associated with the
activity.
Activity Roster – Student
Detail
SSR_ACR_IAMTREESS
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters, Activity
Roster
Select the student detail link to
access the entire course content
tree for the student.
Activity Dates
SSR_ADC_ACTN_SEC
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters, Activity
Roster
Select the Activity Dates link
to view the activity dates
associated with the student.
Attachments
SSR_ACTIVITY_ATT
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters, Activity
Roster
Select to access any
attachments submitted by the
student.
Result Roster
SSR_ACR_RESULT_SS
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters
Select the result roster icon to
grade the activity.
Result Scale Table
SSR_AC_SCALE_SS_SP
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters, Result
Roster
Select the Result Scale icon to
view details about the result
scale associated with the
student.
Activity Root Roster
SSR_ACR_MASTR
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Rosters
Select the Activity Root Roster
link to view the root roster for
the course.
Maintain Coursework
SSR_ACM_MAIN_SS
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Coursework
After selecting a class or
exam from the left hand
navigation the Manage Roster
WorkCenter displays. Select
the Manage Coursework tab or
select the Manage Coursework
icon to access this page.
Insert Activity
SSR_ACSS_INSSEC
Self Service, Activity
Management WorkCenter,
Manage Coursework
Select to insert a new activity
or edit an existing one.
Managing Student Activities
This section provides an overview of self-service student activities and discusses how to access the
student My Activities and My Exams pages.
272
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 21
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Understanding Self-Service Student Activities
Program Enrollment and non-Program Enrollment students can access class activities in self-service.
Program Enrollment students will access their activity detail via the Program Enrollment folder in SelfService, while non-Program Enrollment students can access their activity detail through the Student
Center. Course activities are available to students in self-service when courses are set up to use Activity
Management. The activity detail displayed to students depends on the student’s relationship to the course
and the level of setup completed in the Activity Management structure. The following chart outlines the
activity detail that appears:
Highest Activity Level
Defined
Student Term Activated
Student Enrolled
Activity Level Displayed
None
Yes or No
Yes or No
None
Activity Registry
Yes or No
Yes or No
Activity Registry
Activity Manager
No
No
Activity Registry
Activity Manager
Yes
No
Activity Manager
Activity Manager
Yes
Yes
Activity Manager
Individual Activity Manager
Yes
Yes
Individual Activity Manager
Students accessing data from the Activity Registry or Activity Manager will be able to view coursework
detail. For students able to access their Individual Activity Manager, they will be able to perform the
following actions:
•
View the coursework and coursework detail.
•
View current or previous attempts, and current or previous attempt results.
•
Select optional activities.
•
Confirm their attendance for exams.
•
Download attachments from their instructor.
•
Upload assignments.
•
View extenuating circumstances associated with their results or activities.
•
View exams and exam details.
•
Select reassessment exams.
Access to select optional activities and confirm attendance are set up on the Activity Dates component.
See "Understanding Activity Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
273
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Chapter 21
Pages Used to Manage Student Activities
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Activity Details
SSR_ACT_DET_SEC
•
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Activity
•
Self Service, Student
Center
Select the Activity Description
link to view details about the
activity.
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
View my course history
In the Activities column,
click any one of the
following icons:
274
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 21
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Attachments
SSR_IAM_CONT_ATT
•
Select the Attachments link to
download attachments from
the instructor or to upload
assignments to the instructor.
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Activity
Click the Attachments
link that corresponds to
the activity.
•
Self Service, Student
Center
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the Attachments
link that corresponds to
the activity.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
View my course history
In the Activities column,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the Attachments
link that corresponds to
the activity.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
275
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Chapter 21
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Extenuating Circumstances
SSR_IAM_EXTN_SEC
•
Select the Extenuating
Circumstances link to
display assigned extenuating
circumstances associated to
the result or the activity. Only
appears when an extenuating
circumstance was assigned.
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Activity
Click the corresponding
Extenuating
Circumstances link.
•
Self Service, Student
Center
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the corresponding
Extenuating
Circumstances link.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
View my course history
In the Activities column,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the corresponding
Extenuating
Circumstances link.
276
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 21
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Activities
SSR_SS_MY_ACTIVITY
•
View all courses and
coursework for a term.
SSR_CRSE_ACTIVITY
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Activity
Self Service, Student
Center, This Week's
Schedule
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
View my course history
In the Activities column,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Self Service, Student
Center, Plan, Course
History
Click any one of the
following icons:
•
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Self Service, Student
Center, Enroll, term
information, View my
grades
Click any one of the
following icons:
•
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Gradebook/Class
Activities
277
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Page Name
Chapter 21
Definition Name
Navigation
•
•
Usage
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Self Service, Student
Center, Enroll, my class
schedule
Click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
My Exams
SSR_SS_MY_EXAMS
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Exams
Lists Activity Management
exams assigned to the student
for a specific academic period.
Exam Details
SSR_ACT_DET_SEC
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My Exams
View exam details.
Click the Activity Description
link.
My Exam Schedule
278
SSR_SSENRL_EXAM_L
Self Service, Student Center,
Enroll, term information,
View my exam schedule
Lists all exams assigned to the
student.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 21
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Previous Attempts
SSR_PR_ATTEMPT_SEC
•
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My
Activities, Previous
Attempts
•
Self Service, Student
Center, This Week's
Schedule
Select the Previous Attempts
link to view previous attempt
information. Available when
multiple attempts have been
made. Displays data for all
attempts.
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the Previous
Attempts link.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
View my course history
In the Activities column,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the Previous
Attempts link.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
279
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Chapter 21
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Results Attempts History
SSR_PR_ATTEMPT_SEC
•
Self Service, Program
Enrollment, My
Activities
•
Select Show Results,
Result History
Select the Attempts History
link to view previous result
information. Available when
multiple results have been
entered. Displays data for all
results.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, This Week's
Schedule
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the Attempts
History link.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
My Course History
In the Activities column,
click any one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities - Action
Required
Click the Attempts
History link.
280
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 21
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Resit Exam Selection
SSR_CRSE_RESITS
•
Self Service, Program
Resit Exam Selection,
My Activities
Link will appear when student
is eligible to select a resit
exam period.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, This Week’s
Schedule
In This Week’s Schedule,
click any of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities – Action
Required
Click the Resit Exam
Selection link.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, My Academics,
View my course history
In the Activities column,
click one of the
following icons:
•
Gradebook/Class
Activities
•
View Class
Activities – Action
Required
Click the Resit Exam
Selection link.
View Class Activities
SSR_VIEW_TREE_SEC
•
Self Service, Student
Center, Search or Search
for Classes
View details about the class.
Click the Class or
Section link to view
details about the class.
•
Self Service, Student
Center, Plan, shopping
cart
Select a class via
Class Search or My
Requirements.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
281
Using Self-Service Activity Management
Chapter 21
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
View Course Activities
SSR_VIEW_TREE_SEC
•
Self Service, Student
Center, Search or Search
for Classes, browse
course catalog
View details about the course
•
Self Service, Student
Center, Plan, My Planner
Select a course.
282
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 22
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Note: Before candidates and administrators can use this self-service feature, they must have a user ID, an
EmplID, and a role that includes security access to the self-service pages.
Campus Solutions provides a useful set of self-service functions for a school's research candidate
population as well as for their administrators. Research candidates can use the Candidate Center as a onestop self-service page to view the status of their research projects as well as initiate service actions such
as service requests or research service items. The Service Request page is used by the candidates to track
and update their service requests.
Administrators can use the Service Request Dashboard to view and update the service requests in their
queue. Administrators who serve as research or academic project supervisors can also manage their
assigned candidates from the dashboard. The dashboard also displays graphically, in the form of pie chart
and bar chart, the types and statuses of service requests assigned to an administrator. Administrators can
initiate online notifications from their service request pages and also view their notifications generated by
the Notification Framework.
Candidates, prospective applicants, and administrators can search for research topics that are offered in
their institution through self service.
Understanding the Candidate Center
The Candidate Center consists of a dozen self-service pages depending on your setup. One of the goals
of the candidate center is to expose to the candidate information that is maintained in the Candidate
Management and Thesis Management administrator components. Candidates would be able to monitor
the status of their research project and thesis evaluation on their own. Because the information contained
in these components was not originally intended for candidates to view, administrators have the ability to
configure the Candidate Center to limit the information that can be displayed to candidates. In addition
to allowing candidates to monitor their status, another goal of the center is to allow candidates to initiate
service actions. Candidates are able to initiate existing service requests, as well as a new service action
called research service items. Research service items are similar to service requests except that they
are designed to automatically update the candidate’s research and thesis records without administrator
intervention.
The Candidate Center is comprised of two regions: My Research Projects and My Service Items.
My Research Projects
When a candidate first opens the Candidate Center, if the candidate is assigned to any research projects
the projects appear in the My Research Projects region. The links listed below the project allows
the candidate to drill down into the project to determine the current status of their research topics,
supervisors, thesis, consumption and submission information, and other assignments.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
283
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Chapter 22
If the candidate does not have an active project (that is, not a research candidate or admissions applicant),
the system prompts the user to provide the academic institution. The system uses the academic institution
to display any service items that can be initiated by the user, such as a request for admissions information.
My Service Items
In the My Service Items region, candidates see service items that they can initiate. Service items are
organized in separate tabs. A selected service item may initiate a service request and be assigned to an
administrator for processing, or initiate a research service item that updates the candidate's research
information directly.
Candidate Center Status Detail Pages
When you access the following status detail pages, some fields may or may not appear. The pages also
show only current information about the candidate. You cannot view historical information from these
pages. Comments and attachments that can be viewed are those that are current and are marked for public
view.
Status Detail Pages
How to Access
Research Topic Details
Go to Candidate Center, My Research Projects region, then
click a research topic link.
Supervisor Details
Go to Candidate Center, My Research Projects region, then
click a supervisor name.
Consumption/Submission Details
Go to Candidate Center, My Research Projects region, then
click a link in the Completion Dates section.
Thesis Detail
Go to Candidate Center, My Research Projects region, then
click a link in the Thesis Evaluation section.
Assignment Details
Go to Candidate Center, My Research Projects region, then
click a link in the Additional Assignments section.
Candidate Center Service Item Entry Pages
The following service item entry pages correspond to the various research service items that candidates
could initiate, and the page titles correspond to the service item link label. The content or fields on these
pages vary and are based on the configuration of the service item. Candidates can use the comment
field to provide ad hoc notes to administrators. The other fields display current information about the
candidate’s record. When candidates click the Submit button, their records are automatically updated.
Candidates can view their updated records in the My Research Projects region.
284
•
Research Topic Details — Submit a new research proposal page
•
Supervisor Details — Request a supervisor page
•
Assignment Details — Create a new assignment page
•
Consumption/Submission Details — Update project submission info page
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 22
•
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Thesis Details — Update thesis information page
Understanding Service Requests and Research Service Items
When candidates select a service item that is configured to initiate a:
•
Service request, the My Request Detail page opens, which the candidate then fills out. This is
different from initiating a service request from the My Service Requests page because candidates
do not need to select the category, request type, and subtype. Except for this difference, the service
request behavior is the same. The new request is assigned to an administrator, a notification is sent
to the assigned ID (optional), and the candidate can monitor the status of the request from the My
Service Requests page.
•
Research service item, based on the information the item updates, for example, the candidate would
like to create a new assignment, the corresponding Assignment Details page opens, and the candidate
fills out the page. When the page is submitted, the information is used to update the candidate's
records, and a notification is sent to an administrator to notify them of the event (optional). This
results in a new data row in the candidate's records that shows the change. Administrators are able to
view this in the Candidate Management or Thesis Management components. Candidates can view this
in the My Research Projects region of the Candidate Center.
Initiating a Research Service Item
A service item is an action that enables candidates to automatically update specific records. For example,
candidates may want to submit a research proposal, request a new supervisor, modify a research topic,
and so on.
To update a record, select the appropriate service item from the My Service Items region. A dialog box
appears and prompts candidates to enter information. For example, candidates are able to update records
pertaining to their research topic, supervisors, consumption, assignments, and thesis.
Creating and Updating Service Requests (Candidates)
Note: Now that research candidates can create service requests from the Candidate Center, you may want
to consider disabling the Create button from the My Service Requests page.
Research candidates can create, view and update service requests in self service. To create a service
request from the My Service Requests page, a research candidate performs the following steps:
1. Select the request category.
2. Select the request type for the request category.
3. Select the request subtype for the request type (if a subtype is set up for the request type).
4. Enter request details. Add one or more attachments if necessary after entering the request details.
5. Submit the request.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
285
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Chapter 22
Pages Used to Create and Update Service Requests (Candidates)
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Service Requests
SSS_RS_VIEW_SR
Self Service, Research
Activities, Service Requests
A candidate can use this page
to:
•
View the list of service
requests that he or she
has submitted.
•
Select a submitted
service request to update
it.
•
Begin creating a new
service request.
The page displays the status
of each submitted service
request.
286
Select a Request Category
SSS_RS_REQCAT
Click the Create New
Request button on the My
Service Requests page
Candidate selects the request
category for creating a new
service request. Examples
of request category could be
Change related or Library
related.
Select a Request Type
SSS_RS_REQTYP
Click the Next button on the
Select a Request Category
page.
Candidate selects the request
type for creating a new
service request. For example,
if candidate had selected
Library related on the Select a
Request Category page, then
this page displays the request
types set up for Library
related request category, such
as Library Card and Library
Membership.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 22
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Select a Request Subtype
SSS_RS_REQSBT
Click the Next button on the
Select a Request Type page.
Candidate selects the request
subtype for creating a new
service request. For example,
if candidate had selected
Library Card on the Select
a Request Type page, then
this page displays the request
subtypes set up for Library
Card request type, such as
Report Lost Library Card and
Issue of New Library Card.
This page appears only if
the institution has set up
a subtype for the request
type (setting up subtype is
optional for an institution).
If the institution has not
set up a request subtype,
and the candidate clicks the
Next button on the Select a
Request Type page, the My
Request Detail page appears
for request submission.
My Request Detail
SSS_RS_CRTE_SR
Click the Next button on the
Select a Request Subtype
page.
Candidate can enter
comments, attach files and
submit the service request.
My Request Detail (View or
Update)
SSS_RS_UPDATE_SR
Click the service request link
on the My Service Requests
page
Candidate can view comments
added by the administrator
or add and update his or her
comments. Candidate can add
or view attachments related to
the service request.
Administering Service Requests (Administrators)
The Service Request Dashboard can be configured to display pagelets that provide: a quick synopsis of
information about service requests assigned to an administrator, a complete list of research and academic
project candidates where the administrator is a supervisor, and a history of notifications the administrator
receives. The administrator can also access the dashboard to update the service requests.
Dashboards are created and maintained in the Portal Registry. They are accessible in the Portal Registry
Structure by navigating to the PeopleTools, Portal, Structure and Content page and traversing the menu
hierarchy to Portal Objects, Homepage, Tabs. The dashboard is a Content Reference that is added and
maintained under the Tabs folder.
For more information, see PeopleTools: PeopleTools Portal Technology,Administering Homepages,
Dashboard Pages and Pagelet, Understanding Homepages and Dashboard Pages.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
287
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Chapter 22
Using Service Request Dashboard
Access the Service Request Dashboard (Records and Enrollment, Graduate Research Management,
Service Request Dashboard).
The Service Request Dashboard can be configured to display the following pagelets:
•
Service Request By Status
•
Service Request By Type
•
Service Requests
•
Assigned Candidates
•
Administrator Notifications
Service Request By Status
This pagelet provides a bar chart representation of service requests assigned to the administrator by status.
When you click a bar (that represents a status), the My Service Requests page appears listing the service
requests assigned to the administrator for the particular status. For example, if you click the Received bar,
the My Service Requests page appears listing the service requests with Received status.
The Service Request By Status pagelet also has an Academic Institution drop-down list box. This list
box enables the administrators to select an institution for which they want to view the service requests by
status. When an administrator selects a different institution in the list box, the pagelet re-renders the bar
chart for the selected institution.
Service Request By Type
This pagelet provides a pie chart representation of service requests assigned to the administrator by
service request type. When you click a pie slice (that represents a service request type), the My Service
Requests page appears listing the service requests assigned to the administrator for the particular type. For
example, if you click the LOA slice, the My Service Requests page appears listing the service requests
that have Leave of Absence type.
The Service Request By Type pagelet also has an Academic Institution drop-down list box. This list box
enables the administrators to select an institution for which they want to view the service requests by
Type. When an administrator selects a different institution in the list box, the pagelet re-renders the pie
chart for the selected institution.
Service Requests
This pagelet provides a list of all service requests assigned to the administrator. When you click a student,
the Service Request Detail page appears where you can update the service request.
288
add comment
Click this button to open a window for the administrator to
enter a comment or private notes. Selecting the Display to
Student check box allows the student to view the administrator's
comment on their self-service page.
update last comment
The user who entered the original comment can use this button
to edit the most recent comment.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 22
Using Research Tracking Self Service
reassign
The administrator can use this button to reassign the service
request to another person. Once reassigned, the service request
disappears from the service request pagelet.
send notification
Click this button to launch the Create Notification page and
send notifications.
See "Creating Online Notifications" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
The View All Requests link at the bottom of the Service Requests pagelet enables the administrator
to navigate to a page that displays all the service requests assigned to him or her. On this page, the
administrator can filter requests by institution or status. In addition, the standard Find feature on the grid
header can be used to filter by attributes such as Student Name.
Assigned Candidates
This pagelet displays all the research and academic projects where the administrator is the designated
supervisor. When you click an ID, you can access either the Candidate Management or Project
Management component.
Notifications
Administrators can use the Notifications pagelet to view all their notifications generated by the
notification framework. By default, the pagelet displays alert notifications because users are likely to have
seen their email and SMS notifications on their devices, while alerts currently can only be viewed on the
Campus Solutions application pages. Use the Period field to filter notifications for review.
Note: When the system assigns a service request to an administrator, the system can be configured to use
the Notification Framework to generate a notification to the administrator. The administrator can then
act on the service request using this Service Request pagelet on the dashboard or the Service Request
Management page. On the Service Request Management page, administrators view or update service
requests assigned either to themselves or other administrators. Conversely, administrators can use the
dashboard pagelets to view or update service requests only assigned to themselves. The dashboard
pagelets do not display service requests assigned to other administrators. Therefore, the Service Request
Management page is meant for a higher level of administration.
Searching for Research Topics
Both research candidates and administrators can use self-service to search for research topics.
Page Used to Search for Research Topics
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Research Topic Search
SSS_RS_TPCSRCH1
Self Service, Research
Activities, Research Topic
Search
A candidate or administrator
can use this page to search for
research topics.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
289
Using Research Tracking Self Service
Chapter 22
Searching for Research Topics
Access the Research Topic Search page (Self Service, Research Activities, Research Topic Search).
On this page, the simple search provides a keyword search function. Any text you enter in the Search field
is used to search against the research topic code, short description, and long description. The Advanced
Search link enables you to search by research topic code, request category, supervisor, and organization.
290
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 23
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Creating a Proxy and Delegating Access
Delegated access occurs when a person gives another person access to his data. The person who delegates
access is known as the delegator. The other person, to whom access is delegated, is known as the proxy.
When a proxy is given access, the proxy can then view data or perform some actions on behalf of the
delegator.
This section discusses how a delegator gives a proxy access to data or transactions.
Pages Used to Create a Proxy and Delegate Access
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Share My Information Summary
SS_CC_DA_HDR
•
Self Service, Share My
Information
A delegator uses this page to:
•
Self Service, Student
Center
•
Create a proxy, then
delegate access to the
proxy.
Click the Share My
•
Information button on the
Student Center page.
View the list of proxies to
whom the delegator has
given access.
Self-Service, Campus
Personal Information,
User Preferences
Delete proxies, or modify
proxy details such as
changing email address
or revoke access to a
delegated transaction.
Click the Share My
Information link on the
User Preferences page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
•
•
In the Student Center and
User Preferences pages,
the Share My Information
button or link appears only
if the delegator has access
to the Share My Information
component and has access
to at least one delegation
transaction defined in the
Delegation Transaction Setup
page.
291
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Page Name
Chapter 23
Definition Name
Share My Information - Terms SS_CC_DA_DELEG_AGR
and Conditions
Share My Information Details
SS_CC_DA_DTL
Navigation
Usage
On the Share My Information
- Summary page, click the
Delegate Access to a New
Contact button.
Delegator accepts the
academic institution’s terms
and conditions.
•
The delegator uses this page
to:
•
292
On the Share My
Information - Terms and
Conditions page, click
the I Accept button.
On the Share My
Information - Summary
page, click the Edit
button.
Every time a delegator creates
a proxy, the delegator must
first accept the terms and
conditions outlined by the
academic institution.
•
Provide information
about the proxy.
•
Select the transactions to
be delegated to the proxy.
•
Revoke access to a
transaction.
•
Modify the name,
relationship, or email
address of the proxy.
•
Resend the latest email
notification.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 23
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Using the Share My Information - Summary Page
Access the Share My Information - Summary page (Self Service, Share My Information).
Image: Share My Information - Summary Page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Share My Information - Summary Page. You can
find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
To create a new proxy, click the Delegate Access to a New Contact button.
To edit the proxy details (for example, to revoke access, or to change the email address of the proxy),
click the corresponding Edit button. The Share My Information - Details page appears.
To delete the proxy, click the corresponding Delete button. This revokes all transactions delegated to
the proxy and the proxy no longer appears on the Share My Information - Summary page. However, the
information remains in the records for history purposes.
Related Links
"Contact and Transaction Statuses" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
293
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Chapter 23
Accepting the Terms and Conditions
Access the Share My Information - Terms and Conditions page (click the Delegate Access to a New
Contact button on the Share My Information - Summary page).
Image: Share My Information - Terms and Conditions Page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Share My Information - Terms and Conditions
Page. You can find definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
To modify the terms and conditions, edit the 14025, 60 message catalog.
294
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 23
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Providing Proxy Details and Delegating Transactions
Access the Share My Information - Details page (click the I Accept button on the Share My Information –
Terms and Conditions page.)
Image: Share My Information - Details Page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Share My Information - Details Page. You can find
definitions for the fields and controls later on this page.
Use this page to provide the proxy’s name, the proxy’s relationship with the delegator, and the proxy’s
email address. It is important that the delegator ensures that the email address is correct. The system uses
the email address to send an email notification to the proxy. The email notification contains information
on how to sign into Campus Solutions, which transactions the proxy has been granted access to, and how
to be identified as the right person that has been granted access to the delegator’s data.
The list of transactions show only transactions that the delegator is allowed to delegate. When the
delegator selects a transaction name, the system automatically enters the current date as the start date in
the transaction grid. The delegator cannot edit this date. To end or revoke a transaction, the delegator must
deselect the transactions from the list.
Related Links
"Configuring Delegation Transactions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Notifications Framework and Delegated Access" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community)
"Defining Installation Options for New User Registration" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
295
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Chapter 23
Accessing Delegated Transactions
This section discusses how a proxy accesses a transaction that has been delegated.
Pages Used to Access Delegated Transactions
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Terms and Conditions for
Accessing Somebody Else's
Data
SS_CC_DA_TERMS_CON
Self Service, Proxy Terms and The proxy uses this page
Conditions
to accept the academic
institution’s terms and
conditions.
<one or more pages for which N. A.
access has been delegated to
the proxy>
Self Service, Shared
Information Center
Usage
The proxy uses these pages
to access the delegated
transaction.
Accepting or Declining Terms and Conditions
Access the Terms and Conditions for Accessing Somebody Else's Data page (Self Service, Proxy Terms
and Conditions).
Note: The proxy is directly transferred to this page if your institution has implemented the New User
Registration framework, and a New User Registration context is embedded in the URL that is used to
transfer the proxy to the New User Registration login page.
When the proxy receives the email notification and clicks the enclosed URL, the proxy is transferred to
a login page. After registration and authentication, the Terms and Conditions for Accessing Somebody
Else's Data page appears. The proxy must provide the security key that is enclosed in the email
notification as well as the same email address that was used to send the email notification. These items
is used to validate whether the proxy is the correct person to whom access was given. Even if the proxy
declines the terms and conditions, the proxy must still provide the security key and the email address.
Optionally, the proxy might be required to enter some personal information. This personal information is
stored in the Constituent Transaction Management (CTM) constituent staging tables, and could be used
as search data to trigger Search/Match—if a delegated transaction is set up to assign an EMPLID to the
proxy. You can define the fields you want to show on this page.
If proxy accepted the terms and conditions and was successfully validated by the system, the role tied to
each of the delegated transactions is provisioned to the proxy’s user profile. The proxy is then transferred
to the home page and can start viewing or updating the information the proxy has been given access to.
The proxy views and updates this information under Self-Service, Shared Information Center. If the proxy
declined the terms and conditions, the proxy cannot proceed. Security provisioning does not occur, and all
the delegated transactions are set with a transaction status of Revoked.
It is recommended that you do not deploy this page in a menu navigation because the proxy should not
revisit the page once the terms and conditions have been accepted or declined.
To modify terms and conditions text, edit the 14025, 1 message catalog
296
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 23
Using Delegated Access Self Service
Related Links
"Step 8: Modifying the Proxy Terms and Conditions Page to Include Proper Constituent Fields "
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Delegated Access Validation" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
"Notifications Framework and Delegated Access" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus
Community)
"New User Registration Context" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Accessing Delegated Transactions
After accepting the terms and conditions, all the components for which access has been delegated to the
proxy appear in Self Service, Shared Information Center.
If multiple delegators have delegated a proxy access to the same component, the component displays a
search record that only returns the delegators’ names that granted access to the proxy. For example, Mary
has three children who have delegated her access to several transactions. Two of them gave her access to
the View My Class Schedule transaction. When Mary accesses the View My Class Schedule component,
the search record returns the names of the two children who gave her access to that component.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
297
Chapter 24
Using Self-Service Degree Progress/
Graduation
Viewing the Advisement Transcripts Using Self-Service Pages
Your institution can enable users to view advisement transcripts (based on a transcript types) or
advisement reports. Advisement reports are based on advisement report types and are also known as
the interactive advisement report or My Academic Requirements. We recommend using the advisement
reports. Refer to the Using Academic Advisement Self Service documentation for information about how
advisors, students, and prospective students can access the advisement reports in self-service.
These topics discuss the advisement transcripts accessible to users, including students and advisors.
The advisement transcripts (often called Degree Progress Reports) are transcripts, specifically an
academic advisement transcript. If you want to enable users to generate advisement transcripts, your
institution must define advising transcript types for use in self-service using the Define Transcript Type
component (SSR_TSCRPT_TYPE).
See "Defining Transcript Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
You must also remove access to the component, SAA_SS_DPR_ADB, which is the interactive
advisement report (My Academic Requirements).
This section lists the pages used to view the Degree Progress Reports (advisement transcripts) using selfservice pages.
Pages Used to View the Advisement Transcripts Using Self-Service Pages
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Degree Progress Report
SS_ES_AARPT_TYPE
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation, View
Degree Progress Report
Students can request a Degree
Progress report by selecting
their institution and a report
type, and then clicking the Go
button.
Quick What-If Analysis
Report
SA_REQST_DTL_SEC3
Click the Quick What-If
Students can generate a
button on the Degree Progress degree progress report based
Report page.
on a what-if program of study.
Course List What-If Analysis
SA_REQ_CRSE_WHIF2
Click the Course List What-If Students can set up a course
button on the Degree Progress list what-if scenario and then
Report page.
generate a degree progress
report based on that what-if
coursework.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
299
Using Self-Service Degree Progress/Graduation
Chapter 24
Applying for Graduation Using Self-Service Pages
This section provides an overview of the self-service application process, lists a prerequisite, and lists the
pages used to apply for graduation using self-service pages.
Understanding the Self-Service Application Process
Campus Self Service enables students to submit requests for graduation over the internet using a single
self-service transaction. A successful self-service application updates a student's Program/Plan record
with a new effective-dated row and program action of Data Change. The self-service application also
updates the student's degree checkout status to Applied. You can use the Graduation Processing and
Reporting feature to select this population of students and to track and update their degree checkout
progress through graduation.
Later, degree checkout counselors and academic advisors who are evaluating and approving student
applications for graduation can use the Graduation Processing (SSR_RUNCTL_GRADRPT) and
Graduation Tracking (SSR_RUNCTL_GRADTRK) component to query and identify a student as part of
a larger student population in the system (students with a degree checkout status equal to Applied).
Self-service graduation is set up on the Academic Institution 8, Self Service Options, and Graduation
setup pages.
Prerequisite
Before students can use the self-service Apply for Graduation feature, you must define valid graduation
terms on the Term Calendar 4 page. For each graduation term, you must specify a range of days during
which a student must apply for the graduation term. For example, you can set up a term of fall 2005 with
a valid date range of September 1, 2004, through August 15, 2005. Students who use the self-service
Apply for Graduation feature between the dates of September 1, 2004, and August 15, 2005, see Fall
2005 as one of the graduation term choices.
Pages Used to Apply for Graduation Using Self-Service Pages
300
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Apply for Graduation Submit an Application for
Graduation
SSS_GRAD_APPLY
•
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation,
Apply for Graduation
•
Student Center, My
Academics
Students view the academic
programs for which they
are eligible to apply for
graduation. Students can
view all active careers and
programs.
•
Click the Apply for
Graduation link on the
My Academics page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 24
Using Self-Service Degree Progress/Graduation
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Apply for Graduation - Select
Graduation Term
SS_GRAD_APPLY2
•
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation,
Apply for Graduation
Students specify the
graduation term for which
they are applying.
•
Student selects one
program to apply for
graduation and an
expected graduation
term.
•
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation,
Apply for Graduation
•
Click the Continue
button after selecting
a graduation term.
Alternatively, if
applicable, select the
Select Different Program
button.
•
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation,
Apply for Graduation
•
Click the Submit
Application button on the
Apply for Graduation Verify Graduation Data
page.
Apply for Graduation - Verify
Graduation Data
SS_GRAD_APPLY3
Apply for Graduation SS_GRAD_APPLY4
Graduation Application Status
Students verify the accuracy
of a request and then proceed
to submit the request.
Students also have the option
to select a different program
(if applicable) or a different
term. The graduation review
status appears on this page. In
addition, students can update
their name as it is to appear on
the diploma and an address to
mail the diploma.
Students receive confirmation
from the system that their
application for graduation was
submitted successfully.
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Student Records
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
301
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Understanding Student Financials Self Service
What students see when they access Student Financials self service depends on what your institution has
defined on the setup pages. For example, you can use Institution Sets to specify not only that students
view their account activity by business unit, term, or charge, but you can also decide whether to display
payment history, pending payments, charges due, and financial aid totals. If PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface is enabled, students first see Fluid Home, and from this page access other home pages based
on their permissions. In Student Financials classic user interface, the navigation tabs are defined on the
Navigation Tabs Setup page.
The following table outlines what students can do using classic or Fluid user interface, or both.
Students can
Using these interfaces
View account activity
Classic. See Viewing Account Activity.
View outstanding charges and deposits, pending payments and •
financial aid, and total due
•
Classic. See Viewing an Account Summary
View details on due invoices
•
Classic. See Viewing Charges Due Details
•
In Fluid, click the Navigation Bar to navigate to the
classic interface.
•
Classic. See Viewing Payment History
•
Fluid. See Viewing Payment History.
Viewing payment history
Fluid. See Viewing Account Summary.
Charges paid by payment is available through the classic
interface; for Fluid, you can view this only on a laptop.
Make self-service (hosted) payments
•
Classic. See Specifying Payment Details (Hosted
Payment).
•
Fluid. See Making Electronic Payments.
Make self-service (non-hosted) payments
Classic. See Specifying Payment Details (Non-Hosted
Payment).
Enroll in direct deposit
•
Classic. See Enrolling in Direct Deposit.
•
Fluid. See Managing Direct Deposits.
Manage bank accounts
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Classic. See Setting Up and Managing Bank Accounts.
303
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Students can
Using these interfaces
Enroll in a payment plan
•
Classic. See Enrolling in a Payment Plan.
•
In Fluid, click the Navigation Bar to navigate to the
classic interface.
•
Classic. See Viewing the 1098-T Form.
•
In Fluid, click the Navigation Bar to navigate to the
classic interface.
Enroll or view 1098-T
Access payment profiles
Classic. See Creating Payment Profiles.
Purchase miscellaneous items
•
Classic. See Purchasing Miscellaneous Items.
•
In Fluid, click the Navigation Bar to navigate to the
classic interface.
•
Classic. See Viewing Student Permissions.
•
In Fluid, click the Navigation Bar to navigate to the
classic interface.
View or confirm student permissions
See:
•
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
•
Setting Up Institution Sets
•
Setting Up Self-Service Navigation
Viewing Outstanding Charges, Payments, Financial Aid, and
Refunds
This section discusses how to do the following using Campus Solutions classic interface:
304
•
View an account summary.
•
View account activity.
•
View charges due details.
•
View details by due date.
•
View details by charge.
•
View charges due details by due date.
•
View invoices due detail.
•
View invoice detail.
•
View payment history.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
•
View the charges paid by a payment.
•
View pending financial aid.
Pages Used to View Outstanding Charges, Payments, Financial Aid, and
Refunds
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Account Inquiry - Account
Summary
SSF_SS_ACCT_SUMM
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Account
Summary
Review a summary of
outstanding charges and
deposits, pending payments,
pending financial aid, and
total due.
Account Inquiry - Account
Activity
SSF_SS_ACCT_ACTVTY
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Account
Activity
Account Inquiry - Charges
Due
SSF_SS_CHRGS_DUE
•
Review all of the account
activity that has transpired
over a fixed period of
time. Account activity can
include any transactions
Click the Activity link or a tab that have been posted to the
on any page.
student's account, including
charges, cash, checks, credit
card payments, financial
aid, refunds, and so on.
Administrators can suppress
this page from appearing
using the SF Institution Set
setup.
•
Account Inquiry - Payment
History
SSF_SS_PMT_HIST
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account
Inquiry, Account Inquiry
- Charges Due
Review all outstanding
charges and deposits incurred
to date, including charge
details. Administrators can
suppress this page from
Click the Charges Due
appearing to the student using
link or a tab on any page. the SF Institution Set setup.
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Payments
Click the Payments link or a
tab on any page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Review all payments posted
to the account. Administrators
can suppress this page from
appearing to the student
using the SF Institution
Set setup. Administrators
can select whether pending
payments appear on this
page and whether students
are permitted to drill down
through posted payments
to see which charges were
reduced by those payments.
305
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Account Inquiry - Pending
Financial Aid
SSF_SS_PEND_FINAID
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Pending
Financial Aid
Review pending or anticipated
aid that has yet been posted to
the account. Pending financial
aid amounts can be viewed by
all terms or by specific terms.
Administrators can suppress
this page from appearing
to the student using the SF
Institution Set setup.
Click the Pending Aid link or
a tab on any page.
Viewing an Account Summary
Access the Account Inquiry - Account Summary page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Account Summary).
Charges Due
Click to access the Charges Due page.
Due Now and Future Due
The amounts that appear are based on the parameters that are
set up in the Days in future for 'due now' field on the Institution
Set page. The formula used to calculate the value in the Due
Now field is any charges incurred through today's date plus
the number of days specified. The formula used to calculate
the value in the Future Due field is any charges incurred after
today's date plus the number of days specified.
Past Due Balance
This amount represents charges that were incurred through
yesterday (current date minus 1).
See Defining Basic Institution Set Parameters.
What I Owe Table
The columns that appear in the What I Owe table are based on the allocation level that you specified on
the Institution Set page. An administrator can suppress the Pending Payments and Pending Financial Aid
columns.
Remittance Addresses
The address that appears is based on the location that you selected on the SF Business Unit page.
Viewing Account Activity
Access the Account Inquiry - Account Activity page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Account Activity).
Students can filter account activity by campus and term for specific dates or a range of dates.
Additionally, students can use Find to search for specific transactions.
306
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Viewing Charges Due Details
Access the Account Inquiry - Charges Due page (Self Service, Campus Financials, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Charges Due).
This page shows three different views of the student's outstanding charges due: a summary of charges by
due date, details by due date, and details by type of charge. Click the Details by Due Date region or the
Details by Charge region to see the details.
Details by Due Date
Expand this region to view charge details by due date.
Note: The system displays charges by date within a term.
Details by Charge
Expand this region to view charge details. Students can filter
these by term.
The system displays charges based on the selection in the View
By field.
Invoices Due
•
View By: Filter the charges due by campus and by term.
•
multiple: If a charge has multiple due dates, click this link to
check those dates.
Expand the Invoice Due region to view invoice details.
Viewing Payment History
Access the Account Inquiry - Payment History page ((Self Service, Campus Finances, Account Inquiry,
Account Inquiry - Payments).
Students can filter all posted and pending payment activity by date.
Paid Amount
Click to view the specific charges paid by this payment.
Viewing the Charges Paid by a Payment
Access the Payment History - Charges Paid by this Payment page.
Click the Return to Payment History link to return to the previous page.
Viewing Pending Financial Aid
Access the Account Inquiry - Pending Financial Aid page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Account
Inquiry, Account Inquiry - Pending Financial Aid).
View pending financial aid amounts by all terms or by specific terms.
Financial Aid
Click to access financial aid information.
See Understanding Financial Aid Self-Service .
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
307
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Creating Payment Profiles
Important! PeopleSoft Business Interlinks is a deprecated product. The Business Interlinks class
currently exists for backward compatibility only. For new integrations, use Integration Broker instead.
This section provides an overview of self-service payment profiles and discusses how to do the following
using the classic user interface:
•
Add and delete payment profiles.
•
View and edit payment profile details.
Understanding Self-Service Payment Profiles
Important! PeopleSoft Business Interlinks is a deprecated product. The Business Interlinks class
currently exists for backward compatibility only. For new integrations, use Integration Broker instead.
Student Financials enables students to create payment profiles for their various eCheck (checking,
savings, or both) or credit card (Visa, MasterCard, American Express, and so on) accounts. By
establishing payment profiles, students enter their eCheck and credit card information only once in the
Payment Profile component (SS_SF_ACCT_PROFILE). Then, when they make self-service payments,
students select the desired payment profile instead of entering their account information. In addition, if a
student designates a payment profile as preferred, the system selects that payment profile by default when
the student makes a self-service payment.
Note: Payment Profile functionality is not available if you use a hosted payment solution to process your
ePayment transactions. Student Financials supports Payment Profiles for customers using non-hosted
payment including both Integration Broker and Business Interlink solutions.
Understanding Payment Profile Setup
Use the Self Service Payment Profile check box on the SF Installation 2 page to determine whether to
allow students to create, save, and use payment profiles. When the check box is selected, existing selfservice payment profiles are retained and students can create and save new profiles.
Note: Clearing the check box does not automatically prevent students from creating and maintaining
profiles—you must also run the SSF_PPROFDEL process and remove the Payment Profile component
from all permission lists–as documented in the setup topics.
See "Setting Up Installation Parameters and Keywords" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials).
If you clear the Self Service Payment Profile check box on the SF Installation 2 page, run the
SSF_PPROFDEL process, and remove the Payment Profile component from all permission lists:
308
•
The Payment Profile component is not available in Self Service.
•
The payment profile tab and payment profile details are not available on any pages in the Make a
Payment component or the Purchase Miscellaneous Items component.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Payment profile buttons do not appear on the Make a Payment - Specify Payment Details page or the
Purchase Items - Specify Payment Details page. Students cannot save a payment profile or use an
existing profile during the payment transaction.
Payment profile details do not appear in the Confirmation Details section on the Make a Payment –
Payment Result page.
Pages Used to Create Self-Service Payment Profiles
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Payment Profile Payment Profile Summary
SS_SF_ACCT_PROFILE
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Electronic
Payments/Purchases Payment Profile - Payment
Profile Summary
View payment profiles. If
students have established
profiles, they appear here.
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Payment Profile Profile Detail
SS_SF_ACCT_PRFL_D
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Payment Profile,
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Payment Profile Profile Detail. Click the link
of the appropriate profile.
View payment profiles.
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Payment Profile Edit Payment Profile
SS_SF_ACCT_PRFL_D
Click the Edit or Delete
Edit or delete details for
button next to the appropriate payment profiles.
profile to edit or delete the
details of the payment profile. On this page, the credit card
type and credit card number
are read-only, and the card
number is masked.
Adding and Deleting Payment Profiles
Access the Electronic Payments/Purchases - Payment Profile - Payment Profile Summary page ((Self
Service, Campus Finances, Payment Profile, Electronic Payments/Purchases - Payment Profile Payment Profile Summary).
If a student has not yet created a payment profile, the Payment Profile table is empty. Click the Add A
Profile button to create a payment profile.
Payment Profile
Click a link under this heading to access a view-only version of
the Payment Profile - Payment Profile Summary page.
Profile Type
Indicates whether the profile is for an Electronic Check or
Credit Card account.
Edit Profile
Click to access an editable version of the Payment Profile Payment Profile Summary page.
Delete Profile
Click next to the payment profile that you want to delete.
Add a Profile
Click to add a new payment profile.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
309
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Viewing and Editing Payment Profile Details
Access the Electronic Payments/Purchases - Payment Profile - Profile Detail page (Self Service, Campus
Finances, Payment Profile, Payment Profile - Profile Detail and click the link of the appropriate profile).
Preferred Account
Select to designate this payment profile (Edit mode only) as
the one that the system selects by default whenever the student
makes a self-service payment. A student can have only one
preferred payment profile per profile (or payment) type.
Profile Type
Specify whether the profile is for an Electronic Check or Credit
Card account. If you select Electronic Check, the eCheck group
box becomes available. If you select Credit Card, the Credit
Card group box becomes available.
eCheck
Specify whether the account that you are defining is a checking or savings account and enter the
appropriate routing and account numbers.
Credit Card
Select the credit card type and enter the credit card number and expiration date.
Making Self-Service Payments
This section provides an overview of self-service payments using Campus Solutions, lists prerequisites,
and discusses how to do the following using the classic user interface:
•
Specify payment amounts.
•
Select payment methods.
•
Redirect to hosted payment site.
•
Specify payment details (hosted payment).
•
Specify payment details (non-hosted payment).
•
Confirm payments (hosted and non-hosted payments).
•
View successful payment results (hosted and non-hosted payments).
•
View declined payment results (hosted and non-hosted payments).
Understanding Self-Service Payments
The self-service feature of PeopleSoft Student Financials enables students to access their account
information and make payments over the internet. The self-service pages can be accessed from the
Student Center, the Account Inquiry page, or the menu navigation.
310
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Self-Service Account Review
Students often want to view their account information more than once a month when they receive their
statements from the institution. Using self service, students can view up-to-date information about their
accounts at any time.
Total Due Charges Review
When students want to know how much money they owe to the institution, they may not want to review
all of their account activity for each term. The Campus Finances self-service component provides a direct
way for students to see their due charges.
Self-Service Payments
The Make a Payment self-service component (SSF_SS_PAYMENT) on classic and Fluid user interfaces
enables students to make electronic payments toward their account, using credit card or eCheck
depending on the form of payment that your institution accepts. Additionally, if you set up your institution
to allow it, students can allocate their self-service payments to specific charges.
The Make a Payment pages appear and function differently depending on whether you use the hosted
payment feature.
The Make a Payment pages on Fluid user interface is designed to work with only hosted payment, and
uses the activity guide framework. Students are able to make payments using any device.
If you use the hosted payment feature for self-service ePayment transactions on the classic user interface,
the step numbers that represent the number of pages or steps required to complete the transaction do not
appear on the Make a Payment pages because part of the transaction is performed on the external hosted
payment provider site. The numbers appear on the pages if you do not use hosted payment.
Note: If your setup allows for the charges that are payable by credit card to be different from the charges
that are payable by electronic check, the Select Payment Method page appears before the Specify
Payment Amount page. If the charge priority is the same for credit card and electronic check, the Specify
Payment Amount page appears first because it does not change regardless of the payment method that the
student selects. The order of appearance of the pages is the same whether you use hosted or non-hosted
payment.
See:
•
"Setting Up Installation Parameters and Keywords" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
•
Understanding Self-Service Payment Profiles
•
Electronic Payment Integration Developer's Reference Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1982664.1).
Note: Whether payment profile functionality is available in the Make a Payment component depends on
your self-service setup and also on whether you use hosted payment.
Messaging
Campus Solutions delivers a set of messages that accompany many of the self-service pages intended
to help students through the self-service experience. These messages are user-defined in the Message
Catalog, and they can be modified by an administrator. The self service user defined messages are for
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
311
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
both Classic and Fluid user interfaces. They appear at the top of most pages. For instance, if a student
is paying with an eCheck, then the student receives the following message about his or her Personal
Identification Number (PIN) as a potential requirement for user authentication: You will need your PIN in
order to submit an eCheck Transaction. Messages can be changed only by an administrator.
Prerequisites
Before students can access their accounts over the internet, you must set up your PeopleSoft Student
Financials system to allow them to do so by setting up a Payment Merchant, SF Merchant, and Institution
Set. The choices that you make when setting up an institution set determine what your students can see
and do when accessing their accounts. Different fields and pages are available to your students depending
on how you set up the institution set.
See:
•
"Setting Up Payment Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
•
Setting Up Institution Sets
•
"Setting Up SF Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials)
Pages Used to Make Self-Service Payments
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Electronic Payments/
SSF_SS_PMT_ALLOC
Purchases - Make a Payment Specify Payment Amount
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Make a Payment,
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Make a Payment
Specify the amount to pay
toward outstanding charges.
Electronic Payments/
SSF_SS_PMT_METHOD
Purchases - Make a Payment Select Payment Method
Click the Next button on the
Make a Payment - Specify
Payment Amount page.
Depending on whether the
institution supports both
the eCheck and credit card
payment methods, select the
method by which to make a
payment.
Electronic Payments/
SSF_SS_PMT_MSG
Purchases - Make a Payment Confirm Payment
For hosted payment only:
Click the Next button on the
Make a Payment - Select
Payment Method page.
Advise students that their
payments are collected
through a third party provider.
Electronic Payments/
SSF_SS_PMT_CR_CARD
Purchases - Make a Payment Specify Payment Details
312
When a student clicks the
Continue to Make Payment
button, the student is
transferred to the third party
site to input credit card or
eCheck details.
For non-hosted payment only: Specify either the credit card
Click the Next button on the
or eCheck payment details for
Make a Payment - Select
the current transaction.
Payment Method page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
What is a Security Code
SSF_CVV_ABOUT
Click the What is a Security
Code? link on the Make a
Payment - Specify Payment
Details page.
Access information about the
Security Code that is located
on credit cards.
Electronic Payments/
SSF_SS_PMT_SUBMIT
Purchases - Make a Payment Confirm Payment
For non-hosted payment, click Confirm payment details.
the Next button on the Make
a Payment - Specify Payment This page appears differently
for hosted and non-hosted
Details page.
payments.
For hosted payment, click
Continue from the third party
site.
Electronic Payments/
SSF_SS_PMT_RESULT
Purchases - Make a Payment Payment Result
Click the Submit button
on the Make a Payment Confirm Payment page.
View successful and declined
payment results.
Specifying Payment Amounts
Access the Make a Payment - Specify Payment Amount page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Make a
Payment, Electronic Payments/Purchases - Make a Payment).
The transaction flow that is discussed here assumes that charge priorities for credit card and echeck are
the same—therefore, the Make a Payment - Specify Payment Amount page appears first.
The Make a Payment - Specify Payment Amount page is the same for hosted and non-hosted payment
modes. However, for non-hosted payments, a message about a PIN being required for echeck transactions
appears.
What I Owe Table
The columns that appear in the What I Owe table are based on the allocation level that you specified on
the Institution Set page.
Payment Amount
Enter different amounts for each of the charges that appear.
pay all charges
Click to pay all charges listed.
zero out amounts
Click to zero out amounts in the Payment Amount fields.
calculate total
Click to calculate the amounts in the Payment Amount fields.
Charges Due Table
The Charges Due table appears only if the Display Charges Due check box is selected on the SF
Institution Set setup. The Charges Due table is based on what your institution defined in the setup. If the
allocation level that you specified on the Institution Set page is By Business Unit, the charge details are
grouped by business unit. If the allocation level that you specified on the Institution Set page is By Term,
the charge details are grouped by term within the business unit.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
313
Using Student Financials Self Service
Multiple
Chapter 25
If a charge has multiple due dates, click this link to check those
dates.
Selecting Payment Methods
Access the Make a Payment - Select Payment Method page (click the Next button on the Make a Payment
- Specify Payment Amount page).
The Select Payment Method page is the same for hosted and non-hosted payment modes.
This page enables students to choose whether to pay by credit card or by eCheck. This page appears for
students only if you enter a value in both the SF Credit Card Merchant ID and SF eCheck Merchant ID
fields for the associated institution set. If you allow only one type of payment, this page does not appear
and the only payment method available appears by default.
Note: The selection that a student makes determines which charges are eligible for payment according to
the charge priority list that the institution defined for the item type associated with the selected payment
method. For example, if a student selects Electronic Check, the Payment Details page and the Payment
Amount page display only the charges on the student's account that are eligible for payment by the
eCheck item type defined.
Related Links
Defining Basic Institution Set Parameters
"Defining Miscellaneous Parameters for Item Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
Redirecting to Hosted Payment Site
Access the Make a Payment - Confirm Payment page (for hosted payment only: click the Next button on
the Make a Payment - Select Payment Method page).
This section applies only if you use hosted payment mode.
If you use hosted payment, after a student selects a payment method and clicks NEXT on the Make a
Payment - Select Payment Method page, the Make a Payment - Confirm Payment page appears.
The browser message, Browser Requirements link, and Privacy Policy link appear based on the setup on
the Electronic Payments and Payment Merchant pages.
See "Defining Electronic Payment Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
See Defining Self-Service ePayments for Institution Sets.
Specifying Payment Details (Hosted Payment)
This section applies to hosted payment only.
When the student clicks the Continue to Make Payment button, information about the payment is sent to
the third party Payment provider, and the student is transferred to the third party site to input the credit
card or eCheck details.
314
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
The student enters payment details on the third party hosted site. The student clicks Continue to return
to Campus Solutions. Authorization does not occur here. Buttons and images on the page might be
configurable at the third party site.
If the student clicks Cancel from the third-party hosted site, the student is taken to a page in self-service
Make a Payment which displays a message advising that the payment is canceled.
The payment status is updated to Canceled. Similarly, if an error occurs, the student is taken to the
Payment Result page and the payment status is updated to Error.
Specifying Payment Details (Non-Hosted Payment)
Access the Make a Payment - Specify Payment Details page (for non-hosted payment only: click the Next
button on the Make a Payment - Select Payment Method page).
This section applies only to non-hosted payment.
If a student has not created a payment profile before accessing this page, the student must create one from
this page to be able to enter or confirm ePayment information.
Payment Profile options are only available if the Self Service Payment Profile check box is selected on
the SF Installation 2 page (Set Up SACR, Install, Student Fin Installation, SF Installation 2).
See "Defining Keyword Edit Tables and a Null Due Date" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials).
Create New Profile, Use Existing
Select one of these options, depending on whether a payment
Profile, Do not use Profile, and Save profile was already created.
Payment Profile
If the Use Existing Profile option is selected, the student cannot
update the credit card type, credit card number, account type or
account number. Account specific date can only be entered if the
student selects one of the following options, Create New Profile
or Do not use Profile.
You can also use this attribute to update an existing Payment
Profile as part of successfully transmitting an ePayment
transaction.
Payment Profile
If a student has created a payment profile, select it from the
Payment Profile drop-down list box.
Depending on whether the student chose credit card or electronic check, the following fields differ.
Credit Card Details
First Name and Last Name
Enter the first and last name on the bank account.
Credit Card Type
Select the type of credit card to use. The type of credit card is
masked.
Note: The type of credit card is masked.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
315
Using Student Financials Self Service
Credit Card Number
Chapter 25
Enter the credit card number.
Note: The credit card number is masked.
Expiration Year and Date
Enter the expiration year and date for the credit card.
Security Code
Enter the Security Code that is located on the credit card.
It is a security feature for "card not present" transactions such as
Internet transactions.
The Security Code field is available if the Security Code
Required check box is selected on the SF Merchants page.
See "Setting Up SF Merchants" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
9.2: Student Financials).
What is a Security Code?
Click this link to access the What is a Security Code page.
Telephone
Enter the telephone number.
Country and Address
Based on the Address Usage option and the student's address
table, the system retrieves the appropriate address.
Edit Address
Click to change the address for the current ePayment
transaction.
eCheck Account Details
First Name and Last Name
Enter the first and last name on the bank account.
Bank Account Type
Select the type of bank account to use.
Routing Number
Enter the routing number for the bank account.
Account Number
Enter the account number for the bank account. The eCheck
account number is masked.
Telephone
Enter the telephone number.
Country and Address
Based on the Address Usage option and the student's address
table, the system retrieves the appropriate address.
Edit Address
Click to change the address for the current ePayment
transaction.
Privacy Policy
Privacy Policy
316
This link is available if the Display Privacy Policy check box
is selected on the Electronic Payments page (Set Up SACR,
Common Definitions, Self Service, Student Financials, SF
Institution Set, Electronic Payments).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Confirming Payments (Hosted and Non-Hosted Payments)
The Make a Payment - Confirm Payment page confirms the payments that students want to submit. The
information that appears in the Payment Summary region reflects whether students made payments by
credit card or eCheck.
Information that is not collected, such as address and email, does not appear on this page.
The page appears differently for hosted and non-hosted payment modes.
Hosted Payment Mode
Access the Make a Payment - Confirm Payment page (for non-hosted payment, click the Next button on
the Make a Payment - Specify Payment Details page. For hosted payment, click Continue from the third
party site).
In hosted payment mode, the change payment amount and change payment details buttons are not
available. Only the CANCEL and SUBMIT buttons are available to the student. The student cannot
make changes to the amount or payment details (credit card or bank account information) because of the
external third party provider relationship.
Depending on the third party provider, only the last 4 digits of the credit card number or bank number
might be retrieved from the third party payment provider and displayed to the student prior to the
authorization. Whether this information appears on the Confirm Payment page depends on whether the
third party provider sends the information to Student Financials.
Where possible, after the payment is authorized, the credit card type and bank account type are stored by
Student Financials in the database, as it is a valuable reconciliation tool.
If a student clicks the CANCEL button, the payment is already saved as Initiated even if the student clicks
YES to confirm the cancellation action.
Non-Hosted Payment Mode
In non-hosted payment mode, more information, such as student details, appear on the page, and a student
can change payment amount or details using the change payment amount and change payment details
buttons.
If a student clicks the CANCEL button, and then clicks Yes to confirm the cancellation action, the
payment is not saved.
Viewing Successful Payment Results (Hosted and Non-Hosted Payments)
Access the Make a Payment - Payment Result page (click the Submit button on the Make a Payment Confirm Payment page).
The page appears the same in hosted payment and non-hosted payment modes, except that in hosted
mode, a payment profile is not created and displayed on the page.
View Confirmed Payment
Click to go to the Payments tab to verify the recently
submitted transaction. This button is available only following a
successfully submitted transaction.
Make Another Payment
Click to start the Make a Payment process from the beginning.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
317
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Viewing Declined Payment Results (Hosted and Non-Hosted Payments)
Access the Make a Payment - Payment Result page (click the Submit button on the Make a Payment Confirm Payment page).
In hosted payment mode, the RESUBMIT PAYMENT button is not available. The student can only make
a new payment.
Resubmit Payment
This button is available only in non-hosted payment mode.
Click to review and edit the retained payment data. To start over,
click Make Another Payment.
Make Another Payment
Click to begin the Make a Payment process from the beginning.
Purchasing Miscellaneous Items
Your institution may provide access to students and others to select and purchase miscellaneous items
or services outside of the regular tuition and fees calculated by Tuition Calculation. After selecting and
purchasing these items or services, you are routed to Make a Payment pages, where the transaction is
completed.
This section discusses how to do the following using the classic user interface:
•
Purchase miscellaneous items.
•
Select items.
•
Confirm an order.
•
Make a payment.
Note: Whether payment profile functionality is available in the Purchase Miscellaneous Items component
depends on your self-service setup and on whether you use hosted payment.
See Understanding Self-Service Payment Profiles.
See "Setting Up Installation Parameters and Keywords" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials).
Note: Using hosted payment does not impact how you select items for purchase. However, the payment
process for purchasing miscellaneous items is different depending on whether you use hosted or nonhosted payment. Refer to the Making Self-Service Payments section.
See Making Self-Service Payments.
318
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Pages Used to Purchase Miscellaneous Items
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase Items Select Campus
SSF_SS_BU_SELECT
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Purchase
Miscellaneous Items Select Campus
Select the campus from which
to make a purchase.
•
Access step 1 of the
Purchase Items Wizard.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Electronic
Payments/Purchases Purchase Miscellaneous
Items - Select Campus
Click the Next button.
•
Access step 2 of the
Purchase Items Wizard.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Electronic
Payments/Purchases Purchase Miscellaneous
Items - Select Items
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase Items Select Items
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase Items Confirm Order
SSF_SS_MISC_PUR
SSF_SS_PMT_ITMCONF
Enter the quantity of the
purchased items.
Verify the amount and total of
the items to be purchased.
Click the Next button.
•
Access step 3 of the
Purchase Items Wizard.
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase ItemsSelect Payment Method
SSF_SS_PMT_METHOD
Click the Next button on the
Purchase Items - Confirm
Order page
Depending on whether the
institution supports both
the eCheck and credit card
payment methods, select the
method by which to make a
payment.
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase Items Confirm Payment
SSF_SS_PMT_MSG
For hosted payment only:
Click the Next button on
the Purchase Items - Select
Payment Method page.
Advise students that their
payments are collected
through a third party provider.
When a student clicks the
Continue to Make Payment
button, the student is
transferred to the third party
site to input credit card or
eCheck details.
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase Items Specify Payment Details
SSF_SS_PMT_CR_CARD
For non-hosted payment only: Specify either the credit card
Click the Next button on
or eCheck payment details for
the Purchase Items - Select
the current transaction.
Payment Method page.
What is a Security Code
SSF_CVV_ABOUT
Click the What is a Security
Code? link on the Purchase
Items - Specify Payment
Details page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Access information about the
Security Code that is located
on credit cards.
319
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase ItemsConfirm Payment
SSF_SS_PMT_SUBMIT
For non-hosted payment,
click the Next button on the
Purchase Items - Specify
Payment Details page.
Confirm payment details.
For hosted payment, click
Continue from the third party
site.
Electronic Payments/
Purchases - Purchase Items Payment Result
SSF_SS_PMT_RESULT
Click the Submit button on
the Purchase Items - Confirm
Payment page.
This page appears differently
for hosted and non-hosted
payments.
View successful and declined
payment results.
Selecting Items
Access the Electronic Payments/Purchases - Purchase Items - Select Items page (Self Service, Campus
Finances, Electronic Payments/Purchases - Purchase Miscellaneous Items - Select Campus and click the
Next button).
Students can make multiple transactions at one time. For term-based selections, current and future terms
appear in the grid. Expired terms (based on the term end date) or items that are not within the effective
date and expiration date are not available for selection.
If taxes (sales or GST) are included, a separate line item appears after the Total line. A subtotal line
appears after each grid for multiple entries in each category.
After selections are made, click the Calculate Total button.
If you click Cancel, the system exits the Miscellaneous Purchases page and accesses the Account
Summary page.
Click Next to have the system display a purchase confirmation page.
Click Next again to begin the Make a Payment process.
Confirming an Order
Access the Electronic Payments/Purchases - Purchase Items - Confirm Order page (Self Service, Campus
Finances, Electronic Payments/Purchases - Purchase Miscellaneous Items - Select Items and click the
Next button).
This page provides a consolidated list of selections and a total of all items before beginning the Make a
Payment process.
Click Next to proceed through the Make a Payment process.
Making a Payment
For information about making a payment for miscellaneous items, see Making Self-Service Payments.
320
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Using Account Services
This section discusses how to do the following tasks using the classic user interface:
•
Set up and manage bank accounts.
•
Enroll in direct deposit.
•
Enroll in a payment plan.
•
View the 1098-T form.
•
Receive the 1098-T form online.
•
Complete the 1098-T consent agreement.
•
Receive the 1098-T consent confirmation.
•
View student permissions.
•
Select the permission form.
•
Grant permission using the form agreement.
•
Confirm student permission.
•
View student permission agreement.
Pages Used for Account Services
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Bank Accounts
SSF_SS_BANK_VW
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Manage My
Bank Accounts, My Bank
Accounts
View existing bank account
details and access pages for
adding and editing bank
account details.
Manage My Bank Accounts Bank Location and Currency
SSF_SS_BANK_CNTRY
Click the Add Account button Specify the country and
on the My Bank Accounts
currency of the bank account.
page.
Manage My Bank Accounts Add Bank Account Details
SSF_SS_BANK_DET
Click the Add Account button Set up and edit bank accounts
on the My Bank Accounts
for direct deposit refunds.
page.
Click the Add Another Bank
Account button on the My
Direct Deposits - Bank
Account Summary page.
Manage My Bank Accounts Agreement
SSF_SS_BANK_SUB
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Click the Next button on the
Manage My Bank Accounts
- Add Bank Account Details
page.
Review the bank agreement.
321
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Manage My Bank Accounts Result
SSF_SS_BANK_RES
Click the Submit button
on the Manage My Bank
Accounts - Agreement page.
Confirm bank account details.
Manage My Bank Accounts Delete
SSF_SS_DELETE_BANK
Click the Delete icon on the
My Bank Accounts - Bank
Account Summary page.
Delete bank accounts and
direct deposits.
Enroll in Direct Deposit Delete
Manage My Bank Accounts Cancel
Click the Delete icon on the
Enroll in Direct Deposit Modify Direct Deposit page.
SSF_SS_CONFIRM
Click the Cancel button
during the Manage my Bank
Accounts or Enroll in Direct
Deposit process.
Cancel an action during the
Manage my Bank Accounts
or Enroll in Direct Deposit
process.
SSF_SS_DIRDEP_VW
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Enroll in Direct
Deposit, My Direct Deposits
Access the first step in the
enroll in direct deposit process
or access the pages to edit
existing distributions.
Enroll in Direct Deposit Cancel
My Direct Deposits
Select Enroll in Direct
Deposit from Student Center.
Click the Enroll in Direct
Deposit link on the Manage
My Bank Accounts - Result
page.
My Direct Deposits - Bank
Account Summary
322
SSF_SS_DIRDEP_CONF
Click the Enroll in Direct
Deposit button on the My
Direct Deposits page.
Review the bank accounts that
are set up for direct deposit
refund distributions and
continue to the next step of
the enroll in direct deposit
process.
Enroll in Direct Deposit - Add SSF_SS_DIRDEP_BNK
Direct Deposit
Click the Proceed to Enroll in
Direct Deposit button on the
My Direct Deposits - Bank
Account Summary page.
Set up direct deposit
distribution details.
Enroll in Direct Deposit Agreement
SSF_SS_DIRDEP_SUB
Click the Next button on the
Review the direct deposit
Enroll in Direct Deposit - Add agreement.
Direct Deposit page.
Enroll in Direct Deposit Result
SSF_SS_DIRDEP_RES
Click the Submit button on
the Enroll in Direct Deposit Agreement page.
Confirm direct deposit details.
Account Services - Enroll
in Payment Plan - Select
Payment Plan
SSF_SS_PPL_SEL
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Enroll in
Payment Plan - Select
Payment Plan
Select a payment plan.
•
Access step 1 of the
Payment Plan Wizard.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Account Services - Enroll
in Payment Plan - Review
Installments
SSF_SS_PPL_CALC
•
Change the installment
amount, number of
installments, or both.
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Enroll in
Payment Plan - Select
Payment Plan
Click the Next button.
Account Services - Enroll in
Payment Plan - Agreement
SSF_SS_PPL_SUBMIT
•
Access step 2 of the
Payment Plan Wizard.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Enroll in
Payment Plan - Review
Installments
Review the terms of the
payment plan before enrolling
in the plan.
Click the Next button.
Account Services - Enroll in
Payment Plan - Agreement
SSF_SS_PPL_RESULT
•
Access step 3 of the
Payment Plan Wizard.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Enroll
in Payment Plan Agreement
Review the terms of the
payment plan before enrolling
in the plan.
Click the Next button.
Account Services - 1098T Tax SSF_SS_1098_SEL
Form
1098-T Consent Agreement
SSF_SS_1098_RESULT
•
Access step 4 of the
Payment Plan Wizard.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account
Services - View 1098-T
•
Access step 1 of the View
1098-T Wizard.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Account
Services - View 1098T, 1098-T Consent
Agreement
Indicate which tax year to
view.
Capture 1098-T consent
confirmation.
Click the Submit button.
•
Account Services - Student
Permissions
SSF_SS_PERM_VIEW
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Access step 2 of the View
1098-T Wizard.
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Student
Permissions
View student permissions.
323
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Student Permissions - Select
Permission Form
SSF_SS_PERM_SEL
•
Select the desired permissions
form.
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Student
Permissions
Click the Grant
Permissions button.
Student Permissions Permission Form Agreement
SSF_SS_PERM_SUBMIT
•
Access step 1 of Student
Permissions selection.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Student
Permissions, Student
Permissions - Select
Permission Form
Read and agree to the selected
permissions form.
Click the Next button.
Student Permissions - Student SSF_SS_PERM_RESULT
Permission Confirmation
•
Access step 2 of Student
Permissions selection.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Student
Permissions, Student
Permissions - Permission
Form Agreement
Receive student permission
confirmation.
Click the Submit button.
Student Permission
Agreement
SSF_SS_PERM_VW_SEC
•
Access step 3 of Student
Permissions selection.
•
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Student
Permissions
Review the student
permission agreement.
Click the Display Student
Agreement link.
•
Access step 4 of Student
Permissions selection.
Setting Up and Managing Bank Accounts
Students use the My Bank Accounts pages to set up and manage bank accounts.
See:
324
•
"Setting Up Installation Parameters and Keywords" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
•
Setting Up Institution Sets
•
"Setting Up Your Business Unit to Refund Customers" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Understanding the My Bank Accounts Page
Whether a student is setting up a bank account for the first time or has previously set up an account and
wants to edit that account or add another account, the My Bank Accounts page is always the first page
that a student sees. This page is known as the landing page for student bank accounts.
After a student adds at least one account, the page is called the My Bank Accounts - Bank Account
Summary page. Only active bank accounts are displayed on this page. Students can view, edit, and delete
bank account details from this landing page.
Adding a Bank Account
Access the Manage My Bank Accounts - Add Bank Account Details page (click the Add Account button
on the My Bank Accounts page).
Students access the Bank Location and Currency page from the My Bank Accounts (landing) page. This
page appears only if the Allow Change in Country check box is selected on the SF Institution – General
Options page.
Country
If a country is not selected, the default value from the HRMS
installation setup is retrieved.
Currency
If a currency is not selected, the default value from the HRMS
installation setup is retrieved.
Next
Click to access the Add Bank Account Details page.
If the Bank Location and Currency page is not enabled, students access the Manage My Bank Accounts
- Add Bank Account Details page from the My Bank Accounts (landing) page. Students also access this
page if they set up direct deposit distributions (using Enroll in Direct Deposit) but have not yet set up a
bank account.
When students set up or modify a bank account, data is inserted in the 3C trigger table with the Bank
Event ID and institution to facilitate communication using 3C and the Comm Gen process. The Bank
Event ID and institution are derived from the SF Installation setup only if the Bank Event ID is populated.
Also, when students modify a bank account, only the Nickname field can be edited. The other fields are
view-only.
The bank details on this page are validated according to the validation procedures in HRMS. To prevent
duplicate bank accounts, the system checks that the combination of EmplID, Routing Number, Branch,
and Account Number is unique.
If students are able to set the country and currency for their bank, the fields that appear here are based on
the country they select.
Nickname
Enter an alias for the bank account.
The nickname appears instead of the bank account name when
the student enrolls in direct deposit.
Account Type
By default, Checking is selected.
Routing Number
Select a routing number. The available values are based on the
bank details record in HRMS.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
325
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Branch
The values for this field depend on the routing number, and are
based on the bank details record in HRMS.
Account Number
Enter an account number.
For security reasons, only the last four digits of the account
number appears after the student saves the page. The account
number is also encrypted and stored in the database.
Confirm Account Number
The value in this field must match the value in the Account
Number field. Also, if the account number is modified, this field
is enabled and the same account number must be provided.
This field does not appear when a value is entered in the IBAN
field.
Account Holder
Enter the account holder name as it appears on the bank
account.
Check Digit
Enter the two-digit number after the first two-letter country code
of the IBAN.
This field appears based on the country code.
IBAN and BIC Code
If the IBAN is provided, then the BIC Code must also be
provided.
Student Financials uses the information in the HRMS IBAN
Country Setup page to perform the required validation and
prompt for values in the lookups.
•
If IBAN is not enabled and not required, or the country is
not defined on the IBAN Country Setup page, the IBAN and
BIC Code fields do not appear.
•
If IBAN is enabled but not required, provide values in the
other bank information fields. The information is saved, and
the IBAN and BIC Code are stored as blank.
When bank details are derived from the IBAN and BIC
setup, the details appear as view-only.
For example, if the student enters an IBAN value of
NL51ABNA0401396312, the BIC Code becomes required.
The BIC Code values that are available are all those for
the country NLD, which are based on the IBAN value (the
first 2 digits are always the country and the next 2 digits are
always the IBAN check digit). The student selects a BIC
Code of ABNANL2A—this is an available value because it
is set up on the Branch Table in Common Objects (Set Up
Common Objects, Common Definitions, Banking, Banks,
Branch Table). The Routing Number and Branch fields are
populated and are view only—with the values 0150681
(BankID already set up for ABN Amro) and ABNANL2
326
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
(Branch ID) respectively. The Bank Name and Branch
Name also appear.
•
If IBAN is enabled and required, a value for IBAN and BIC
Code must be provided.
The Account Number field is populated based on the IBAN
value and appears as view-only. The other standard bank
fields are view-only.
For security reasons, only the last four digits of the IBAN
appear after the page is saved.
See "Setting Up Banks and Bank Branches" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
View Sample Check
Click to view a sample image of a check in a new window. This
link appears only for the United States (USA) and Canada (
CAN).
Help
Click to open a Help page in a new window. The URL that is
selected in the Help URL field in the Manage Bank Options
group box on the SF Institution Set - General Options page is
used here. If that setup is not done, the link does not appear
here.
Next
Click to go to the Agreement or Confirmation page.
The Agreement page appears if the first bank account is being
created, otherwise the Confirmation page appears if there are no
validation errors.
Note: For further information about this page, refer to the documentation about the related administrative
component.
Reviewing the Bank Agreement
Access the Manage My Bank Accounts - Agreement page (click the Next button on the Manage My Bank
Accounts - Add Bank Account Details page).
This page appears only:
•
if the Display Agreement check box is selected in the Manage Bank Options group box on the SF
Institution - General Options page.
•
once, when the first bank account is created.
Yes, I agree to the terms and
conditions of this agreement.
Select to be able to save bank details.
Submit
Click to save bank details and go to the Manage My Bank
Accounts – Result page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
327
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
An agreement type of Bank Account is inserted into the
Agreement table.
Additional Details
Opens a page in another window. The page that appears is
derived from the URL that is specified in the Additional details
URL field in the Manage Bank Options group box on the SF
Institution Set - General Options page is used here. If the setup
is not done, the link does not appear here.
Note: The bank agreement cannot be revoked either by administrative staff or by students. The agreement
remains in the table even if all bank account details are deleted or made inactive.
Confirming Bank Account Details
Access the Manage My Bank Accounts - Result page (click the Submit button on the Manage My Bank
Accounts - Agreement page).
Enroll in Direct Deposit
Click to access the My Direct Deposit pages and set up
distributions for direct deposit refunds.
This button appears only if AP Refunding Option is set to Use
Single Payment Voucher on the SF Installation page.
Manage My Bank Accounts
Click to access the landing page (My Bank Accounts - Bank
Account Summary page) from which additional bank accounts
can be added, or existing bank accounts can be edited or deleted.
When students create a bank account or edit bank account details, they receive an email notification based
on the Event ID set up on the SF Installation page.
Modifying a Bank Account
Click the Edit icon on the My Bank Accounts – Bank Account Summary page.
The Nickname field is the only field that can be edited. The other fields are view-only.
When students modify a bank account, data is inserted in the 3C trigger table with the Bank Event ID
and institution to facilitate communication using 3C and the Comm Gen process. The Bank Event ID and
institution are derived from the SF Installation setup only if the Bank Event ID is populated.
Next
Click to go to the Manage My Bank Accounts - Result page.
Deleting a Bank Account
Click the Delete icon on the My Bank Accounts – Bank Account Summary page.
When a student deletes a bank account, the bank account status is set to Inactive. To delete a bank
account for which a direct deposit distribution is set up, students must first deactivate the direct deposit
distribution
When students delete a bank account, data is inserted in the 3C trigger table with the Bank Event ID and
institution to facilitate communication using 3C and the Comm Gen process. The Bank Event ID and
institution are derived from the SF Installation setup only if the Bank Event ID is populated.
328
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Enrolling in Direct Deposit
Students use the My Direct Deposit pages to specify how direct deposit refunds are distributed across
their bank accounts.
Students can access the Direct Deposit feature in Self Service only if:
•
Use Single Payment Voucher is selected as the AP Refunding Option on the SF Installation page.
•
The Direct Deposit Enrollment check box is selected on the SF institution Set - General Options page.
•
A/P is selected in the Refund Method field on the Refund Setup component of the SF Business Unit.
•
The student does not have a negative service impact for Disable Manage My Banks on the SF
Institution Set - Business Units page.
See:
•
"Setting Up Installation Parameters and Keywords" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
•
Setting Up Institution Sets
•
"Setting Up Your Business Unit to Refund Customers" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
•
Addendum: Direct Deposit Through AP Refunding in My Oracle Support (ID 1982664.1).
Understanding the My Direct Deposits Page
Whether a student is enrolling in direct deposit for the first time or has previously set up direct deposit
distributions and wants to edit them, the My Direct Deposits page is always the first page that a student
sees. This page is known as the landing page for direct deposits.
After a student enrolls in direct deposit, the page is called the My Direct Deposits - Direct Deposit
Summary page.
From this summary page, students can add more distributions and edit or delete their existing distributions
by clicking the Modify Direct Deposit button.
Using the My Direct Deposits Page
Access the My Direct Deposits page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Enroll in Direct Deposit, My
Direct Deposits).
Enroll in Direct Deposit
To enroll in direct deposit, the student must have already set up
at least one bank account.
If the student has set up at least one bank account, then when the
student clicks the Enroll in Direct Deposit button, the student is
taken to the next step of the process.
If the student clicks the Enroll in Direct Deposit button and has
not set up a bank account, the Manage My Bank Accounts Add Bank Account Details page appears. The student continues
through the process of setting up one or more bank accounts.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
329
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
When the Manage My Bank Accounts - Result page appears, the
student clicks the Enroll in Direct Deposit link on that page and
then completes the direct deposit distribution set up.
For information about the Manage My Bank Accounts pages,
refer to the previous documentation section: Setting Up Bank
Accounts.
Reviewing Bank Accounts for Enrolling in Direct Deposit
Access the My Direct Deposits - Bank Account Summary page (click the Enroll in Direct Deposit button
on the My Direct Deposits - Direct Deposit Summary page).
Students can view the bank accounts that can be used for refund distributions. Students can also add
additional bank accounts.
Students then proceed to the next step in the enroll in direct deposit process from this page.
If students have set up bank accounts and enrolled in direct deposit, the Proceed to Enroll in Direct
Deposit button is replaced with a Proceed to Modify Direct Deposit button.
Adding Direct Deposits
Access the Enroll in Direct Deposit - Add Direct Deposit page (click the Proceed to Enroll in Direct
Deposit button on the My Direct Deposits - Bank Account Summary page).
On this page, students specify how they want refunds distributed between bank accounts.
Bank Account Nickname
Students must enter a value in the Nickname field when they set
up their bank accounts. That nickname, followed by the last 4
digits of the account number, appears here.
Note: Only one distribution per bank account (nickname) is
allowed.
Distribution Type
Values are Amount, Balance, and Percentage.
One bank account must be assigned a distribution type of
Balance.
If the maximum distribution allowed is 1 (based on the
Maximum Distributions field on the SF Institution Set-General
Options page) the only Distribution Type value available is
Balance. The whole refund amount is disbursed to one account.
If multiple distributions are allowed and the student does not
assign one account as Balance, an error appears on save.
Amt./Pct. (amount/percentage)
This field is available only if the maximum distributions
allowed is greater than 1.
The value that the student enters can include up to 2 decimal
points—for example, 100.50 or 50.25.
330
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
This field is not available for entry if the Distribution Type is
Balance.
Priority
The student enters a value to indicate the order in which bank
accounts are selected when a refund is posted. The value must
be a whole number.
The lower the number, the higher the priority—for example, an
account with value 1 is used first, then an account with value 2
is used next.
When the Distribution Type is Balance, the default value of the
Priority field is 999 (the value is hidden) and the field is not
available for entry.
add account distributions
This button is available only if the maximum distributions
allowed is greater than 1.
Help
The student clicks this link to access the URL that you set up in
the Direct Deposit Options group box on the SF Institution SetGeneral Options page. If the setup is not done, the link does not
appear.
Delete
When a record is deleted, the row is removed and all other rows
are stamped with the current effective date and a new effective
sequence number.
The Delete icon does not appear for the row with a Distribution
Type of Balance.
Note: For further information about this page, refer to the documentation about the related administrative
component.
See "Setting Up and Managing Direct Deposit Distributions for AP Refunding" (PeopleSoft Campus
Solutions 9.2: Student Financials).
Reviewing the Direct Deposit Agreement
Access the Enroll in Direct Deposit - Agreement page (click the Next button on the Enroll in Direct
Deposit - Add Direct Deposit page).
This page appears automatically the first time that a student sets up direct deposit distributions.
When the student selects the check box and clicks the Submit button, an agreement type of DD Enroll is
inserted into the Agreement table.
If the Display Subsequent Agreement check box is selected in the Direct Deposit Options group box on
the SF Institution - General Options page, compliance text appears when the student edits direct deposit
distributions.
When the student selects the check box and clicks the Submit button, an agreement type of DD Change is
inserted into the Agreement table.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
331
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
The student clicks the Additional Details link to access the URL that you set up in the Direct Deposit
Options group box on the SF Institution Set-General Options page. If the setup is not done, the link does
not appear.
Confirming Direct Deposit Details
Access the Enroll in Direct Deposit - Result page (click the Submit button on the Enroll in Direct Deposit
- Agreement page).
Go To Direct Deposit Summary
The student click this button to access the My Direct Deposits Direct Deposit Summary (landing) page.
You can view an example of the landing page earlier in this
section.
From the landing page, students can access the My Direct
Deposits - Modify Direct Deposit page where they can edit
existing distributions, add more distributions, and delete
distributions.
When a student enrolls in direct deposit or edits direct deposit distributions, an email notification is sent
to the student based on Event ID setup on the SF Installation page.
Enrolling in a Payment Plan
Students can link their charges to a specified payment plan.
Select Payment Plan
Access the Account Services - Enroll in Payment Plan - Select Payment Plan page (Self Service, Campus
Finances, Enroll in Payment Plan - Select Payment Plan).
This page enables students to select a payment plan from among all eligible payment plans.
Click a plan. The first line of the Plan Description is derived from the Payment Plan description. The text
after the first line is derived from the Payment Plan setup - Self Service description.
Viewing the 1098-T Form
Access the Account Services - View 1098-T page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Account Services View 1098-T).
The 1098-T is an Internal Revenue Service (IRS) form that reports tuition and related expenses that a
student can use to claim an educational tax credit.
Student Financials enables a student to view and reprint a substitute copy of the 1098-T after having
received a paper copy through postal mail.
It also enables the student to consent to accessing an electronic version of the 1098-T form through the
student self-service feature.
On the View 1098–T page, the Box Amount tab enables the student to access the details for individual
box amounts.
332
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Use the View 1098–T page to:
•
Select the tax year you want to view.
•
Access the 1098-T page.
Until you generate a 1098-T form for the current tax year, only previous years are available.
View 1098-T Amount Detail
Access the Account Services - View 1098-T, Box Amount tab.
Use this tab to:
•
View the total amounts displayed on the 1098-T statement.
•
Access the View 1098- T - Amount Billed page.
Use the View 1098-T- Amount Billed page to:
•
View the details of the eligible items billed for the calendar year. This includes the term for which the
charged occurred.
•
Access the View 1098-T - Prior Year Adjustments page.
Use the View 1098-T - Prior Year Adjustments page to:
•
View prior year adjustments to the amount billed for an aid year.
•
Access the View 1098-T - Scholarships or Grants page.
Use the View 1098-T - Scholarships or Grants page to:
•
View a detailed summary of the scholarship or grant for an aid year. This includes the type of account,
offered amount and payment date.
•
Access the View 1098-T-Payments Received page.
Use the View 1098-T - Payments Received page to view the payment received for an item. This includes
the type of account and payment date.
Receiving the 1098-T Form Online
Your institution can provide the 1098-T form to students electronically. Students can consent to accessing
an electronic version of the 1098-T form through student self service.
The student only sees the Consent Agreement for the 1098-T if they have not consented. After consent to
receive the 1098-T electronically is granted, the agreement is no longer needed.
After consent is granted, it is effective for all years for which a 1098-T form was processed.
A student cannot revoke their consent online. Instead, the student must contact the institution to request
that consent be revoked. Consent is revoked from an administrator page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
333
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
Completing the 1098-T Consent Agreement
Access the 1098-T Consent Agreement page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Account Services - View
1098-T, 1098-T Consent Agreement and click the Submit button).
Yes, I have read the agreement
Select to agree to receive 1098-T statements online.
Cancel
Click to cancel submission of the 1098-T Consent Agreement.
Submit
Click to submit the accepted 1098-T Consent Agreement.
Receiving the 1098-T Consent Confirmation
Access the 1098-T Consent Confirmation page.
This page confirms the 1098-T Consent Agreement.
View 1098-T Selection
Click to select and view a 1098-T.
Administrators can use the Review Self Service Agreement page
to view Enrollment agreement data.
Viewing Student Permissions
Access the Account Services - Student Permissions page ((Self Service, Campus Finances, View Student
Permissions, Account Services - Student Permissions.).
U.S. Department of Education regulations require that Title IV financial aid awards be used to pay only
allowable charges, for example, tuition, mandatory fees, and contracted housing and board, for the period
of enrollment covered by the aid year in which those funds are awarded. Regulations require schools to
collect individual authorization from a student in order to pay non-allowable charges such as parking fees
or library fines, or for the prior year immediately preceding the current year.
The Account Services - Student Permissions page enables the student to begin the grant permission selfservice process.
Grant Permissions
Click to grant permissions.
Selecting the Permission Form
Access the Select Permission Form page (Self Service, Campus Finances, View Student Permissions,
Account Services - Student Permissions and click the Grant Permissions button).
This page enables the student to read the Disclosure Statement. If multiple permissions exist, the student
can select only one and then select Next to complete the process. Then the student can select another
permission for review and submission.
Granting Permission Using the Form Agreement
Access the Permission Form Agreement page (Self Service, Campus Finances, View Student
Permissions, Student Permissions - Select Permission Form and click the Next button).
334
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
This page enables the student to select the Yes, I have read the agreement check box to verify reading of
the agreement and permission.
The student clicks Submit to submit the permission form agreement.
Confirming Student Permission
Access the Student Permission Confirmation page (Self Service, Campus Finances, View Student
Permissions, Student Permissions - Permission Form Agreement and click the Submit button).
Click View Student Permission to return to the authorization page.
The student cannot revoke permission using self service; this can be done only by the administrator.
Viewing Student Permission Agreement
Access the Student Permission Agreement page (Self Service, Campus Finances, View Student
Permissions, Student Permissions - Student Permission Confirmation and click the Display Student
Agreement link).
On this page, the student can read the student permission agreement.
Managing Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface
This topic discusses how to do the following using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface:
•
Viewing Account Summary
•
Making Electronic Payments
•
Viewing Charges
•
Managing Direct Deposits
•
Viewing Payment History
Related Links
"Setting Up Installation Parameters and Keywords" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Financials)
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
Common Elements Used to Manage Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft
Fluid User Interface
Depending on the page you access, click this icon to sort
the rows in ascending or descending order according to the
available sort options.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
335
Using Student Financials Self Service
Chapter 25
On smartphones, click this icon to open up the hidden group
box that contains links to other menus or pages or displays steps
pertaining to an activity guide.
This indicates that the results on display have been filtered.
Click to navigate to a page that provides more information.
Pages Used to Manage Financial Accounts Using PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Financial Accounts Tile
SSF_FIN_ACCT_FL
Access the Financial Accounts landing
page.
This tile is accessible only if the
student is assigned to an institution set.
Otherwise, the tile is disabled.
See "Using the Student Homepage"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals).
Account Balance Page
SSF_ACCT_BAL_FL
View account summary.
Make a Payment Page
SSF_SS_PMT_METH_FL
Make electronic payments.
Charges Due Page
SSF_CHRGS_DUE_FL
Review all outstanding charges and
deposits incurred to date, including
charge details.
Direct Deposit Page
SSF_DIRDEP_LAND_FL
Enroll in direct deposit or manage bank
accounts enrolled in direct deposit.
Payment History Page
SSF_PMT_HIST_FL
View a history of credits posted to your
account: payments, deposits, financial
aid disbursements, or waivers.
Viewing Account Summary
Navigation
Student Homepage, Financial Accounts, Account Balance
Use the Account Balance page to view a summary of outstanding charges and deposits, pending
payments, pending financial aid, and total due.
Due Now
336
The amount that appears consists of outstanding deposits,
current due charges, pasts due charges, and charges with a due
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
date in the future but are limited to the (Days in Future) value
defined on the Institution Set page.
The information that appears on this page is controlled by the parameters you set up for the institution set.
If the student belongs to multiple business units, the business unit appears in the grid.
On smartphones, the Account Balance page shows only the Charges & Deposits column. Tap on a row to
view other details like pending financial aid.
See Defining Basic Institution Set Parameters.
Making Electronic Payments
Navigation
Student Homepage, Financial Accounts, Make a Payment
Use the Make a Payment activity guide to make electronic payments towards your account using credit
card or eCheck. The form of payment depends on what your institution accepts.
Depending on your institution’s setup, your payments may be allocated to specific charges.
Follow the instructions on the screen to complete your payment.
Note: Newly admitted students can access Make a Payment via a link in the Applicant Fluid Self Service
to pay their deposit. See Accessing Applicant Self Service Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface.
Viewing Charges
Navigation
Student Homepage, Financial Accounts, Charges Due
Note: Charges without due dates are labeled “Future.”
On smartphones
Outstanding charges and their due dates as well as pending financial aid are displayed on a single page.
Click a charge or pending financial aid row to view the Detail for Due Date page.
Make a Payment
Click to pay outstanding charges. This invokes the Make a
Payment page.
On desktops or tablets
Use the Charges Due page to view:
•
a summary of your charges by due date (Summary By Due Date)
•
details of your charges due (Detail of Charges Due)
•
details of deposits due (Detail of Deposits Due)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
337
Using Student Financials Self Service
•
Chapter 25
pending financial aid
If only deposits are due, then Summary By Due Date, Detail of Charges Due, Detail of Deposits Due
appear.
If only charges are due, then Detail of Deposits Due does not appear.
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Options
Managing Direct Deposits
Navigation
Student Homepage, Financial Accounts, Direct Deposit
Note: Students that set up multiple or single distributions in the classic user interface only see the Balance
distribution row. Students are allowed to edit the Balance row. The original agreement continues to be
valid; a new agreement is not required.
Use the Direct Deposit page to enroll in direct deposit for the first time or, if you have already enrolled in
direct deposit, edit the bank account you enrolled in direct deposit. Only one bank account is allowed to
be active in direct deposit for Fluid user interface.
To edit a bank account, click the account row.
Some fields on the Direct Deposit Details page appear only for non-U.S. banks.
Enroll in Direct Deposit
Click to enroll a bank account for direct deposit. The Direct
Deposit Details page appears.
Use the Direct Deposit Details page to set up a bank account.
The Bank Location fields appear only if Allow Change in
Country is selected on the SF Institution – General Options
page.
Revoke Direct Deposit
338
Click to deactivate the bank account you enrolled in direct
deposit.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 25
Using Student Financials Self Service
Viewing Payment History
Navigation
Student Homepage, Financial Accounts, Payment History
Image: Payment Details page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Payment Details page. You can find definitions for
the fields and controls later on this page.
Use the Payment History page to review a history of payments, deposits, financial aid disbursements,
or waivers. Pending payments and maximum payments in service are not displayed in the fluid user
interface.
On desktops, laptops, or tablets, clicking some payment rows may bring up the Charges Paid page, which
lists the payment breakdown for that particular payment.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
339
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Understanding Financial Aid Self-Service
Financial Aid Self Service is accessible using classic or PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface. Students can
view their financial aid data by aid year or award period, and accept, decline, and reduce awards. If your
institution enters Aid Year in the View Summary By field on the Self Service Options page, the system
displays data based on the aid year; if your institution enters Award Period, the system displays the data
by award period.
To accept and decline awards using the:
•
Classic interface, students can navigate to Self Service, Campus Finances, Accept/Decline Awards or
Self Service, Student Center and click the Accept/Decline Awards link in the Finances group box on
the Student Center page.
•
Fluid interface, from the Student Homepage click Financial Aid. See "Using the Student Homepage"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals).
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Inquiry Options
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
Accepting, Declining, and Reducing Awards
This section discusses how students:
•
Select an aid year.
•
Accept, decline, and reduce awards using self-service.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
341
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Pages Used to Accept, Decline, and Reduce Awards
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View
SS_FA_AWD_AY_SEL
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Financial
Aid, Select Aid Year to View
Access award
acknowledgment for a
particular aid year.
Click the View Financial Aid
link in the Finances group
box on the Student Center
page (Self Service, Student
Center).
Financial Aid - Award
Package
SS_FA_AWD_ACK
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Accept/Decline
Awards, Financial Aid –
Award Package
Accept, decline, and reduce
awards.
Click the Accept/Decline
Awards link in the Finances
group box on the Student
Center page (Self Service,
Student Center).
Financial Aid - Award Detail
SS_FA_AWD_DTL
Click the Award link on
the Financial Aid - Award
Package page.
View scheduled
disbursements by term and
for each, the type of award,
date, term, and award amount.
If set up for lender selection,
the student can also select a
lender.
Selecting an Aid Year
Access the Financial Aid - Select Aid Year to View page (Self Service, Campus Finances, View
Financial Aid, Select Aid Year to View).
The student selects the aid year for which he wants to accept, reduce, or decline awards on the Financial
Aid - Select Aid Year to View page. The system displays all aid year and institution combinations for
which the student is in attendance. If the student is in attendance at more than one institution, you cannot
restrict the view to a single institution or aid year.
If you selected the Print Letter Option to Print in setup, the system displays all noncanceled awards for
the student for the selected aid year. If total aid is greater than zero and the Print option does not equal
Print, the link for that year is disabled, and the system displays Award access not available. instead of
the aid year description. If the Allow Access check box is cleared on the Self Service Options page, the
system displays No self service access for this aid year. If the Award Access check box is cleared on the
Packaging Status Summary page for this student, the system displays Award not available.
If a student declines all awards and subsequently attempts to access self service award acknowledgment,
the system does not activate the aid year for which the student declined all awards.
342
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Accepting, Declining, and Reducing Awards Using Self-Service
Access the Financial Aid - Award Package page (Self Service, Campus Finances, Accept/Decline
Awards, Financial Aid – Award Package).
The first time the student accesses the Financial Aid - Award Package page, the system displays the
package status as New Package. For students who have submitted an award acknowledgment prior to this
entry, the system displays an active Previous Transactions link.
The system displays the most current award package and a corresponding status. The date/time field
displays the last time the award package was updated. When action is taken against the award data or the
award data is accessed, the system initiates a date and time stamp.
The system applies the following rules:
•
An award with a disbursed balance greater than zero cannot be adjusted during self-service activity.
However, a student can modify awards with an authorized balance greater than zero.
•
If the FA Item Type self-service action setup is specified as a reduction, the student can reduce
awards in self-service and reduce awards with the following attributes: Professional Judgment, Need
Override, Override, or Lock Flag based on FA Item Type self-service action setup.
•
If the loan award allows for reductions based on the FA Item Type self-service action setup, the
system ensures that the Offered amount and the Accepted amount are the same after the award is
processed.
Note: Oracle recommends that you use the user-defined text delivered with this product to define
awarding rules and instructions for your students. For example, if a student cannot reduce an award in
self-service, a clarification as to why the student cannot modify the award is useful. Examples of userdefined text are Award is disbursed and Loan is in transit.
Status
The processing option that you selected on the Awarding
Options setup page affects the status. If you selected Batch, the
outcome is Pending Update until you run the batch process.
After you run the batch process, the outcome can be Successful,
Successful with Adjustments, Revised Package, Rejected,
or Needs Review. If you select Real Time, the outcome is
Successful, Successful with Adjustments, Rejected, or Needs
Review.
The Status values are:
New Package: No previous self-service activity exists and the
student is eligible to receive awards. The student can accept,
decline, or reduce any or all of the currently available awards.
Needs Review: The system cannot process one of the student's
awards and post the changes because it found errors while
processing an award. The system displays the awards as viewonly and the Accept and Decline check boxes are not available
to the student. The student should submit an administrative
request to see a financial aid counselor.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
343
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Here are some examples of situations resulting in Needs Review
status:
•
The fiscal balance is below the submitted accepted or
reduced amount.
•
The disbursement ID of the self-service disbursement record
does not match the system's disbursement IDs associated
with the disbursement plan found in the corresponding
award.
•
The student reduces an award for which the term limit
contains cents, but the award remainder rule specifies first or
last dollars.
Pending Update: The student submitted the award
acknowledgement and can revisit this page to determine
whether the acknowledgement, changes, or both are accepted
and make changes in the existing package. The student does
not see the revised, reduced, or updated award amounts on the
Financial Aid - Disbursement Schedule page until the batch
process has been run.
Rejected: The system cannot process the student's
acknowledgment, adjustments, or both and post the changes
because the system detects errors during initialization and
setup. All awards are rejected. The system displays the awards
as view-only and the Accept and Decline check boxes are
not available to the student. The student should submit an
administrative request to see a financial aid counselor.
Revised Package:The student submitted an award
acknowledgment and the financial aid staff revised the student's
financial aid package since the student last submitted a
transaction. The student can accept, reduce, or decline any or all
of the awards that are currently available.
Successful: The system successfully processed the
acknowledgement, changes, or both that were submitted by the
student.
Successful with Adjustment: The system successfully processed
the student's award acknowledgment, but made adjustments to
one or more awards. If the student reduced one or more awards
below the minimum amount allowed, the system adjusts the
awards to the minimum limit amount and returns this status.
344
Award
This link is available only for nonzero awards.
Category
The award category is based on the Financial Aid Type field on
the FA Item Type 1 setup page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Career
If the student has multiple careers, the system displays all
awards from all careers.
Accepted
The amount accepted by the student for this award or autoaccepted by the packaging process. If reductions are permitted
on the award—FA Item Type Self Service Actions option—
this field is available for reduction after the student selects the
Accept check box.
Accept
In administrative packaging, you can award a student an item
type and set it automatically as Offer/Accept. For these awards,
the system checks this Accept check box. For example, an
administrator sets a work-study program award to Offer, and the
Accept check box is cleared, giving the student the option to
accept the award.
Decline
After this check box is selected, the system reduces the accepted
amount to zero. If declines are not permitted on this award
—FA Item Type Self Service Actions option—this field is not
available to the student.
Example of No Link on a Declined Award
When a student declines one or more awards while other awards are either in Offered or Accepted status,
the system does not display a link for the declined award because no scheduled disbursements exist for
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
345
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
that award. In the following example, the student declined the FASS: Work and FASS: Loan awards.
These awards do not have a link to the Financial Aid - Award Detail page.
Image: Award Package example
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Award Package example. You can find definitions
for the fields and controls later on this page.
The system does not require a student to make changes to the page. If the student clicks Submit without
making changes to the package, the system displays the status as Successful in real-time processing and
Pending Update in batch processing.
Unlike administrative packaging, in which the packaging routine performs extensive edits to ensure the
validity of an award, in self-service, the system processes awards in passive mode and does not perform
any federal edits or evaluate the student for eligibility or need criteria. The system performs a subset of
edits on any award that is being reduced. Also, the system adjusts an award that has been reduced below
minimum amounts established for the system.
Managing Awards Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
This topic discusses how students view, accept, decline, and reduce financial aid awards using PeopleSoft
Fluid User Interface.
346
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
"Using the Student Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Understanding Financial Aid Self-Service
Setting Up Disbursement Options
Creating User-Defined Text
Common Elements Used to Manage Awards in Fluid Interface
This icon indicates that the award is in “Offered” status and
requires your decision to accept or decline.
This icon indicates the number of awards in “Offered” status
that requires your decision to accept or decline.
Status
See Accepting, Declining, and Reducing Awards Using SelfService.
(Filter)
(Sort)
Display
Depending on the page you access, click this icon to filter the
results according to the available filter options.
Depending on the page you access, click this icon to sort
the rows in ascending or descending order according to the
available sort options.
Depending on the page you access, select an option to filter the
results according to the terms available.
Click to view more information.
Select to enable various fields on the Accept/Decline page. This
icon is available only when using a tablet or desktop.
Submit
Click to commit your decision.
Before you click Submit, make sure you review your decision,
especially the Accept Amount value. Once you click Submit, the
action cannot be reversed.
Reset or Reset All
Select to clear all decisions or changes you have made to a page.
Pages Used to Manage Awards using the PeopleSoft Fluid Interface
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Financial Aid Tile
Not Applicable
Access financial aid information.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
347
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Select a Value Page
SFA_SS_MD_AYSEL_FL
Select the Aid Year and Institution
combination, for which you want to
access financial aid information.
Outstanding Offers Page (smartphone
only)
SFA_SS_OFFERS_FL
Select to view offered awards. This page
is available only when offered awards
exist. Once you have decided to decline
or accept an offered award, this page
disappears from the list.
The numerical badge indicates the
number of outstanding offers.
Manage Accepted Awards Page (
smartphone only)
SFA_SS_AWARDS_FL
Award Summary Page (smartphone only) SFA_SS_AWDSUM_FL
Select to view awards you have
accepted.
Select to view a summary of all financial
aid awards (Accepted and Offered) for
the selected Aid Year and institution
combination using a smartphone.
Depending on setup, Canceled and
Declined awards may also appear.
Disbursements (smartphone only)
SFA_SS_DISB_SFF_FL
Select to view a summary of
disbursement information by term for the
selected Aid Year and Institution using a
smartphone.
Summary Page (tablet or desktop only)
SFA_SS_AWDSUM_FL
Select to view a summary of all financial
aid awards (Accepted and Offered) for
the selected Aid Year and institution
combination using a tablet or desktop.
Depending on setup, Canceled and
Declined awards may also appear.
Accept/Decline Page (tablet or desktop
only)
SFA_SS_ACPTDECL_FL
Use this page make award decisions.
Disbursements (table or desktop only)
SFA_SS_DISB_LFF_FL
Select to view a summary of
disbursement information by term for the
selected Aid Year and Institution using a
table or desktop.
Selecting an Aid Year
If you have financial aid for more than one institution and Aid Year combination, the Select a Value page
appears.
Use the Select a Value page to select the aid year and institution combination for which you want to view
financial aid information.
When you select an Aid Year:
348
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
•
From a smartphone, the landing page may display any of these options depending on the status of
available awards or whether you have been granted access: Outstanding Offers, Manage Accepted
Awards, Awards Summary.
•
From a tablet or desktop, the landing page automatically displays the Award Summary page. You may
also be able to access the Accept/Decline page if you have been granted access, or have been offered
or have accepted awards.
To select a different Aid Year and institution combination:
•
From a smartphone, click the Change button on the landing page.
•
From a tablet or desktop, click the Change button.
Managing Offers and Accepted Awards Using a Smartphone
Outstanding Offers Page
The Outstanding Offers page appears on the landing page only when you are offered an award.
Click an award row to access the Award Decision page. From the Award Decision page, you can decide to
accept or decline an award.
Award Decision
Select to accept or decline the award.
If you accept the award, the Reduce field is enabled only for
awards that are eligible for reduction. Some awards may have
“Accept” conditions that specify you cannot reduce the amount.
Offer Amount
Displays the offered amount.
Reduce
This is enabled only when you accept an award that is eligible
for reduction. Use this field to specify a lesser Accept Amount
than the offered amount.
Select the check box to enable the Accept Amount field.
Accept Amount
Displays the amount of the award you have accepted. If you
accept the award and select the Reduce check box, you can edit
this amount.
Once you have made decisions on all offered awards, the Outstanding Offers page disappears from the list
of options.
Manage Accepted Awards Page
Use this page to view financial aid awards you have accepted as well as change your decision on any
accepted award.
Click an award row to access the Award Decision page. From the Award Decision page, you can choose
to decline the award or reduce the amount you want to accept. The fields on the Manage Accepted
Awards, Award Decision page are the same as the fields on the Outstanding Offers, Award Decision page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
349
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Award Summary Page (smartphone only)
Use this page to view all financial aid awards that you have been offered or have accepted.
Depending on your institution’s setup:
•
Your awards may be separated by award period, for example: Academic Year or Summer Term. Click
an award period to view the awards for the particular period.
•
You may be able to access the Declined Awards and Canceled Awards pages.
Click an award row to access the Award Details page.
General
This is the default page that appears if the award status is
“Offered.”
Amounts
This is the default page that appears if the award status is
“Accepted”. Select to view information about how the award is
disbursed across associated terms.
If there are multiple terms, the information on this page is
displayed based on self-service options.
For Loan awards, this page displays the applicable fee deducted
from the award.
Loan
This page appears only when loan awards are available.
Select to view loan-specific information. Depending on the
available loan, the following statuses may appear for:
•
Perkins Loans: Promissory Note Status
•
Non-Perkins Loans: Loan Status
•
Loan Counseling: Entrance Interview, Exit Interview
Note: The Award Details are displayed based on the Display option you choose on the Award Summary
page.
Disbursements (smartphone only)
Use this page to view disbursement details for all Offered and Accepted awards by term for the selected
Aid Year and Institution.
Depending on your institution's setup, your awards may be separated by award period; for example,
Academic Year or Summer Term. Select an award period to view the awards for that particular period.
Managing Offers and Accepted Awards Using a Tablet or Desktop
Award Summary Page
This is the default page that appears when you click the Financial Aid tile. Use this page to view a
summary of available financial aid awards.
350
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Depending on your institution’s setup:
•
Your awards may be separated by award period, for example: Academic Year or Summer Term. Click
an award period to view the awards for the particular period.
•
You may be able to access the Declined Awards and Canceled Awards pages.
Click an award row to access the Award Details page. The fields are the same as the Award Details page
as accessed from a smartphone.
Accept/Decline Page
Use this page to accept or decline any or all offered awards, or change your decision on accepted awards.
If you click an award row, the Award Details page appears. The Award Details page shows general
information about the award.
To make or change your decision on an award, click the Edit icon. Various fields and buttons on the
Accept/Decline page are enabled. The fields on the Accept/Decline page works similarly to the Award
Decision page from the Outstanding Offers and Manage Accepted Awards pages on the smartphone,
except for:
Actions
Click to process (accept or decline) all awards. You can also
reset all award decisions.
As long as you do not click the Submit button while in Edit mode, you can still change any decision or
value on this page.
While you are in Edit mode, if you make a decision on each award and you change your mind, to reverse
your decision you can either:
•
Click the Actions button, then select Reset All. However, this resets all changes you may have made
to other award rows.
•
Click the Edit button to turn off Edit mode. This resets all award decisions to the state prior to Edit
mode.
Disbursements Page
Use this page to view disbursement details for all Offered and Accepted awards by term for the selected
Aid Year and Institution.
Depending on your institution's setup, your awards may be separated by award period; for example,
Academic Year or Summer Term. Select an award period to view the awards for that particular period.
Reporting External Awards
This section provides an overview of reporting external awards and lists the pages used to report external
awards.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
351
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Understanding Reporting External Awards
The Reporting External Award component enables students to provide information regarding any external
awards not already reflected on their award package. Self-service options control whether the component
is accessible from the Accept/Decline and View Financial Aid pages and the Packaging Status Summary
page. External awards reported by students are considered a data source to External Award staging tables.
All student-reported awards are posted directly to External Award staging tables and automatically set
with a processing status of Reported and data source of Self Serve. The system-set process status of
Reported on external award transactions reported by the student require administrator review before any
potential posting to the student award package.
Administrators use a Comment field to enter the status of self-service reported external awards. They also
indicate whether comments should be viewable to a student. These comments are displayed on the Award
Detail page, from awards listed on the Aid from Other Aid-Report History page.
Pages Used to Report External Awards
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Financial Aid - Aid from
Other Sources
SFA_SS_EA_VIEW
•
•
352
Usage
Self Service, Student
Center, Report Other
Financial Aid
Report aid from other sources.
When the student clicks the
SAVE button, the information
is saved to the external award
Self Service, Campus
staging table with a status of
Finances, Aid from Other Reported.
Sources, (aid year)
Financial Aid - Other
Financial Aid Received
SFA_SS_EA_ENTRY
Click the REPORT
ADDITIONAL AID button
on the Financial Aid - Aid
from Other Sources page.
Report aid from other sources.
When the student clicks the
SAVE button, the information
is saved to the external award
staging table with a status of
Reported.
Financial Aid - Aid from
Other Sources - Report
History
SFA_SS_EA_HISTORY
Click the View My Reporting
History link on the Financial
Aid - Aid from Other Sources
page.
View all student-reported
transactions. Use the Award
link to access student award
details and any administrative
comments made visible to
self-service.
Financial Aid - Aid from
Other Sources - Award Detail
SFA_SS_EA_DETAIL
Click the award description to View award details, such
view award details.
as processing status, for an
external award. Also view a
list of other external awards
that might make up the
total award amount. When
accessed from the Report
History page, award details
can include comments from
the administrator. The Award
Details page is available
when the award name is
highlighted.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Printing the FE FAN Letter
Important! Financial Aid Notification (FAN) letter is a deprecated product. Support will be maintained
for this product, but no new development will be produced for FAN. It is strongly recommended that you
use Communication Generation (Comm Gen) instead. For more information on Comm Gen, see "Using
the Communication Generation Process" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
When students click the View Award Notification link from the Financial Aid - Award Summary page or
the Financial Aid - Award Package page, a pop-up window displays the Award Notification letter in PDF
format.
Selecting a Lender
This section provides an overview of lender selection and discusses how to view lenders selected by the
students.
Understanding Lender Selection
Lender Selection enables students to select an FFELP lender or to change a previously assigned lender:
•
If the student has not been awarded, the system provides a Student Finances link to indicate a lender
to be picked up by Loan Origination.
•
If a student has been awarded an FFELP loan, the system displays the lender and provides a link that
enables the student to change the lender if the loan is not originated or transmitted to the guarantor.
•
If a student changes the lender after borrowing from another lender, a message is optionally displayed
to warn them against doing so for repayment reasons.
•
If the loan has been originated or transmitted, the lender is displayed but the student cannot change it.
A message tells the student to contact the financial aid office if they need to change the lender.
Pages Used to Select and View a Lender
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Lender Select
SS_LNDR_SELECT
Click the Select Your Lender
link on the Financial Aid Award Detail page .
Select or change a lender.
Financial Aid, Loans, View
Lender Selection
View the lenders that students
selected through Campus Self
Service.
Selected Lenders
SS_LNDR_SELECT
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
The student can select one
lender for all loans. After the
student clicks the SUBMIT
button, the student cannot
change lenders without
contacting the financial aid
office.
353
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Viewing a Student's Lender Selection Record
Access the Selected Lenders page (Financial Aid, Loans, View Lender Selection).
The Lender Information tab displays the lender that was selected by the student through Campus Self
Service.
The Guarantor Information tab displays the guarantor that was associated to the lender selected by the
student. The guarantor is associated to the lender based on values defined on the Identify Self Service
Lenders page.
Note: The Lender and Guarantor values on this page are used to determine the correct loan destination
during loan origination. If the Guarantor values are missing, it is possible that the loan could be originated
with no loan destination found.
Processed Date
Displays the date that the student selected the lender in Campus
Self Service.
Completing a Loan Counseling Requirement
This section provides an overview of a loan counseling requirement and lists the page used to complete a
loan counseling requirement.
Understanding a Loan Counseling Requirement
After the student accepts an award and the loan is originated, the system displays a link to entrance
interview information for each award. This URL is specified on the Loan Counseling page and associated
display parameters are set on the Loan Options page.
The student clicks the link to access the loan information. After the student demonstrates familiarity
with the information, the administrator can change the Loan Entrance Interview Status field value on the
Packaging Status Summary page from Inst Req to Completed.
Similarly, if an exit interview is required, the link is displayed in the program completion timeframe set
on the Loan Counseling page. The student accesses the information and after demonstrating familiarity
with the information, the administrator changes the Exit Interview field value on the Packaging Status
Summary page from Inst Req to Completed.
Page Used to Complete a Loan Counseling Requirement
354
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Entrance/Exit Loan
Counseling
SS_LN_COUNSEL
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Financial
Aid, Award Summary, Loan
Counseling link
Click the Award Description
link to access the URL that
has been selected on the Loan
Counseling page to display
loan requirement details for
this award.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Using Entry Points into the Perkins eMPN Process
This section provides an overview of Perkins eMPN functionality and discusses how to:
•
View Perkins loan award details.
•
View Perkins loan award summary.
Understanding Perkins eMPN Functionality
The Perkins eMPN process supports the requirement that schools use the Perkins Master Promissory Note
(MPN) and provide the option for students to complete and sign their Perkins MPN electronically. To
comply with regulatory disclosure and notification requirements for the federal Perkins loan, the system
includes specific disclosure items. In addition, most self-service pages allow for site-defined text so that
institutions can include specific wording that satisfies their requirement as a holder of the Perkins loan.
Students can access the eMPN process to view their promissory note information using the Accept/
Decline Awards, View Financial Aid, Sign Perkins Promissory Note, or View Perkins Promissory
Note menu paths. Contained within the process are pages that acknowledge borrower rights and
responsibilities, disclosures, terms and conditions, and important notices to complete the eMPN process.
The system presents information to the student using both static data and user-defined text.
The Perkins eMPN pages have cancel buttons so that students can exit the Perkins eMPN process at any
point. If a student cancels, the system discards any data that the student entered. When students access the
electronic signature process, they are instructed to enter an identity authentication element: NID, DOB,
or user-defined PIN. The institution determines the identity authentication prompt during setup. Students
must select a check box to indicate consent to proceed with the Perkins eMPN process. The system
authenticates the information and captures the date and time of the consent. To continue and complete the
process, students must verify that their personal information is correct, provide loan references, review
loan indebtedness and repayment schedule, review and accept their rights and responsibilities, and review
and electronically sign their federal Perkins Master Promissory Note. The system provides pages for
students to review current and history information regarding their Perkins MPN.
Oracle recommends that you use the user-defined text to define instructions and information for your
student population. The text on Perkins eMPN pages can be easily modified to best meet your institutional
requirements. These user-defined text messages are contained within Message Set Number 14409.
Message Set Number 14409, 500 number series, are user-definable messages for Financial Aid Self
Service pages.
The system is designed to dynamically provide various entry points within the Campus Finances menu for
the student to begin the eMPN process: Sign Perkins Promissory Note, Accept/Decline Awards, and View
Financial Aid. The system evaluates whether a valid Perkins MPN is present. At a minimum, the student
must accept a Perkins loan before being allowed to access the Perkins eMPN process.
Note: If a valid Perkins MPN is present, the system dynamically provides links at entry points for the
student to view Perkins Promissory Note history pages.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
355
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Pages Used as Entry Points into the Perkins eMPN Process
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Award
Package
SS_FA_AWD_ACK
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Accept/Decline
Awards, Financial Aid Award Package
Accept, decline, and reduce
awards. This page also
facilitates entry into the
Perkins eMPN process.
Financial Aid - Award Detail
SS_FA_AWD_DTL
Click the Federal Perkins
Loan – MPN link on the
Financial Aid - Award
Package page.
View scheduled
disbursements by term. This
page displays the type of
award, date, term, and award
amount. It also facilitates
entry into the Perkins eMPN
process.
Financial Aid - Award
Summary
SS_FA_AWD_SUMM_PER
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Financial
Aid, Financial Aid – Award
Summary
View a detailed summary of
financial aid by aid year. This
includes the type of award
and the offered and accepted
amounts for the aid year and
terms within the aid year. This
page also facilitates entry into
the Perkins eMPN process.
Accept/Decline Financial Aid
- Submit Confirmation
SFA_SUBMIT_CONFIRM
Click the Yes button on the
Accept/Decline Financial Aid
page.
View submittal confirmation.
If the system determines that
a Perkins MPN is required,
then additional instructions
and buttons enable students
to access the Perkins eMPN
process.
Viewing Perkins Loan Award Details
If the award has the MPN Required option, the system provides a link to the Perkins Loan Promissory
note on the Financial Aid - Award Detail page.
If the award has a completed and valid MPN record, the Perkins Loan Promissory Note link takes the
student to the Perkins Promissory note history page. If the award does not have a valid MPN record and
the award is accepted, the link takes the student to the introductory page for the Perkins eMPN process.
Viewing Perkins Loan Award Summary
If the item type has the MPN Required option, the award is accepted, and the system determines that
a valid MPN has not yet been completed, then the system displays a Sign Perkins MPN link on the
Financial Aid - Award Summary page. The student can click the link to access the introductory page for
the eMPN process.
The system displays the View Promissory Note link if a valid MPN has been completed for the award.
The link directs the student to the View Promissory Note page.
356
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Signing an Electronic Perkins eMPN
This section discusses how to:
•
Review Perkins eMPN introductory information.
•
Enter an ID authentication and provide consent.
•
Verify personal information.
•
Provide loan references.
•
Review loan indebtedness.
•
Accept borrower rights and responsibilities.
Pages Used to Sign an Electronic Perkins MPN
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View
SFA_SS_EMPN_AY_SEL
Self Service, Campus
Finances, Sign Perkins
Promissory Note, Financial
Aid - Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note
Select the aid year that you
want to view.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Introductory
Information)
SFA_SS_EMPN_START
Click the Aid Year link on
the Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View page.
Review introductory
information and instructions
to proceed with the electronic
MPN. User-defined text
messages for this page are
contained within Message
Set Number 14409, 560–570
series.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (ID and Consent)
SFA_SS_EMPN_AUTH
Click the Continue button
on the Financial Aid –
Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Preliminary
Information) page.
Review steps for completing
the electronic signature and
provide identity authentication
and acknowledge consent
to proceed with the eMPN
process. User-defined text
messages for this page are
contained within Message Set
Number 14409, 571.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Verify Personal
Information)
SFA_SS_PERK_EMPN1
Click the Continue button on
the Financial Aid – Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (ID and Consent) page.
Verify name, address,
telephone, and demographic
information.
Addresses
SS_ADDRESSES
Click the Click to update
Address link on the Financial
Aid - Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Verify
Personal Information) page.
Update address information.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
357
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Phone Numbers
SS_CC_PERS_PHONE
Click the Click to update
Phone link on the Financial
Aid - Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Verify
Personal Information) page.
Update telephone numbers.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Provide Loan
References)
SFA_SS_PERK_EMPN2
Click the Confirm button on
the Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Verify Personal
Information) page.
Enter loan references
information. User-defined text
messages for this page are
contained within Message Set
Number 14409, 572.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Review Loan
Indebtedness)
SFA_SS_PERK_EMPN3
Click the Next button
on the Financial Aid Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Provide
Loan References) page.
Review the total federal
Perkins loan amount that
the student has incurred at
your institution. Amounts
are determined by the valid
school code for institution
setup.
Students can use this page
to view a statement of the
total cumulative balance they
owe and an estimate of the
monthly payment amount.
User-defined text messages
for this page are contained
within Message Set Number
14409, 573.
358
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Accept Borrower's
Rights and Responsibilities)
SFA_SS_PERK_EMPN4
Click the Next button
on the Financial Aid Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Review
Loan Indebtedness) page.
Accept borrower's rights and
responsibilities. User-defined
text messages for this page
are contained within Message
Set Number 14409, 574–576
series
Federal Perkins Loan Master
Promissory Note
SFA_SS_PERK_EMPN5
Click the I Accept button on
the Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Accept Borrower's
Rights and Responsibilities)
page.
Review terms and conditions,
disclosure of information, and
important notices. Sign the
note electronically.
Electronic Signature
Confirmation
SFA_SS_ESIGN_YESNO
Click the Sign Perkins Note
Captures the borrower's
button on the Federal Perkins consent to electronically sign
Loan Master Promissory Note the Perkins MPN.
page.
Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Completed
Signature Confirmation)
SFA_SS_EMPN_CONFRM
Click the Yes button on
the Electronic Signature
Confirmation page.
View confirmation for
completion of the electronic
signature process.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note
SFA_SS_EMPN_EXISTS
Select the Aid Year on the
Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View page.
View a message indicating
that a valid Perkins
Promissory Note is on file.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Reviewing Perkins eMPN Introductory Information
Access the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Introductory Information) page
(click theAid Year link on the Financial Aid - Select Aid Year to View page).
The Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Introductory Information) page represents
the first page in the Perkins eMPN process. This page introduces a student to the Perkins eMPN process
and provides a listing of items that should be readily available before continuing. The page provides the
means to define key elements within the eMPN process. To assist the student, a listing of information
is available prior to continuing the eMPN process. Item 1 is a controlled item and automatically adjusts
based on the authentication method option selected on the self-service awarding option for the Perkins
MPN.
The student selects the REQUEST PAPER MPN (request paper master promissory note) button to request
a paper MPN. The system displays a PDF version of the Perkins MPN in a new window.
Entering an ID Authentication and Providing Consent
Access the Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (ID and Consent) page (click
the Continue button on the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Preliminary
Information) page.
If your institution set the Authentication Method option on the Awarding Options page to No
authentication, the system does not display text that requests students to enter an identity authentication
on the Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (ID and Consent) page.
Oracle recommends that you use the user-defined text message delivered with this product to define
instructions for your students. For example, your institution might require additional consent items to
satisfy disclosure requirements. The Perkins eMPN user-defined text messages are contained within the
Message Set Number 14409.
Verifying Personal Information
Access the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Verify Personal Information) page
(click the Continue button on the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (ID and
Consent) page).
Regulations require a permanent address to be captured on the Perkins MPN. The Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory Note (Verify Personal Information) page displays the most current permanent
address and home telephone number for the student. Students can use the available links on the page to
access the Self Service Campus Personal Information address and home components. If students click
either the address or phone update link, they are removed from the eMPN process and must begin the
eMPN process from the start.
Note: The system does not allow a student to proceed without a current permanent address.
Providing Loan References
Access the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Provide Loan References) page
(click the Confirm button on the Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Verify Personal
Information) page).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
359
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
The Perkins eMPN process requires that the student provide at least two loan references. Institutions can
require up to three additional loan references. If additional references are required, the system adds an
extra step on the Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Provide Loan References)
page. The third step requests that the student provide additional references beyond the two.
Reviewing Loan Indebtedness
Access the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Review Loan Indebtedness) page
(click the Next button on the Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Provide Loan
References) page).
On the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Review Loan Indebtedness) page, the
Federal Perkins Loan Amount to Date field indicates the amount based on awards associated with the
Perkins aggregate.
The award amount represents any financial aid item type for which the aggregate area is tied to Perkins,
even if the item type is not flagged as MPN-required. The system keys loan history amounts by school
code. Therefore, the system consolidates and displays only loan amounts that are associated with valid
school codes for the institution.
Accepting Borrower Rights and Responsibilities
Access the Financial Aid – Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Accept Rights and Responsibilities)
page (click the Next button on the Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Review Loan
Indebtedness) page).
The Financial Aid - Federal Perkins Master Promissory Note (Accept Borrower's Rights and
Responsibilities) page provides the student (borrower) the necessary disclosures regarding rights and
responsibilities. The entire text displayed is user-defined text. Oracle recommends that schools adjust the
text to satisfy necessary disclosure requirements.
Requesting and Signing a Paper Perkins MPN
This section provides an overview of paper MPN requests and lists the pages used to request and sign a
paper Perkins MPN.
Understanding Paper Perkins MPN Requests
Regulations require that a student (borrower) be given the opportunity to exit the Perkins eMPN process,
and instead, request a paper Perkins MPN. When the student requests a paper Perkins MPN, the system
generates a PDF version of the Perkins MPN with both Sections A and B completed. The system instructs
the student to print, complete, and return the Perkins MPN to the financial aid office.
When the system generates a paper Perkins MPN, it creates a Perkins MPN record with the MPN format
equal to paper. The system considers this Perkins MPN invalid until a signature date is entered.
360
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Note: If the paper Perkins MPN remains invalid, the student can return and attempt the Perkins eMPN
process again. If the student completes and electronically signs the Perkins MPN, the system cancels the
previous paper Perkins MPN and creates a subsequent Perkins MPN indicating a completed electronic
Perkins MPN.
Pages Used to Request and Sign a Paper Perkins MPN
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note
SFA_SS_EMPN_PAPER
Click the Request Paper MPN
link on the Financial Aid
- Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (Preliminary
Information) page.
Confirm a request for a
paper MPN. The student is
requested to print, complete,
and return the signed paper
promissory note.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note
SFA_SS_EMPN_EXISTS
Click the Continue button on
the Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note page.
View a reminder to turn in
the signed paper MPN to the
financial aid office.
Viewing a Perkins MPN
This section lists the pages used to view Perkins promissory notes.
Pages Used to View a Perkins Promissory Note
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (View MPN
Information)
SFA_SS_EMPN_VIEW
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Perkins
Promissory Note, Federal
Aid - Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note
View Perkins MPN
information. User-defined text
messages for this page are
contained within Message Set
Number 14409, 578.
Financial Aid - Federal
Perkins Master Promissory
Note (Promissory Note
History)
SFA_SS_EMPN_HISTVW
Click the View History
link on the Financial Aid
- Federal Perkins Master
Promissory Note (View MPN
Information) page.
View Perkins MPN history.
Using Administrative Requests
This section provides an overview of administrative requests, known to the student as Request Counselor
Action, and lists the page used to initiate and update administrative requests.
Understanding Administrative Requests
Administrative requests refer to any comment or request for action by students regarding their financial
aid package. A request can be to increase the total aid package, replace loan awards with scholarships and
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
361
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
grants, or cancel the financial aid application. A student can file a request for counselor action without
taking any action toward accepting, reducing, or declining all or part of the financial aid package.
The Request Counselor Action link on the Financial Aid – Award Package page takes the student to the
data entry page for the administrative request. The system displays the highest sequenced record. If there
are no existing requests, or if the highest sequenced request exists with a status of Closed, the system
creates a new request for the student. The Request Type defaults to Change Request with a status of Open.
The student cannot change the status but can cancel or close the current request. The status remains open
until either a counselor or the student closes the request. If a counselor closes the request, the counselor
can enter the action taken. If a student closes the request, the system sets the action to None.
If there is an outstanding request with a status of Open or Pending, the system displays the current request
to the student. The student can add comments or close the current request. The student can also view prior
requests if there is more than one existing request.
Page Used for Administrative Requests
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Request
Counselor Action
SS_FA_AWD_REQ
Click the Request Counselor
Action link on the Financial
Aid - Award Package page.
Request a change or meeting,
or withdraw aid application.
If a request is open, additional
requests are appended to that
existing request. If it is closed,
additional requests are treated
as new requests.
Viewing Student Self-Service Pages by Aid Year
This section provides an overview and lists the pages used to view student self service pages by aid year:
Understanding Viewing Self-Service Inquiry Pages by Aid Year
In the financial aid self-service inquiry pages, students can view their financial aid data by aid year or
award period. If your institution enters Aid Year in the View Data By field on the Inquiry Options page,
the system displays data based on the aid year.
The system displays all aid years for which the student has been aid-year activated on the Financial Aid
- Select Aid Year to View page. If the estimated financial aid budget, expected family contribution, and
total aid amounts for an aid year are all zero, the link for that year is disabled, and the system displays No
financial aid data available instead of the aid year description. If the self service options for an aid year
have not been set up, the link for that year is disabled, and the system displays Aid Year not set up for self
service.
If the Allow Access check box is clear on the Self Service Options page, the system displays No self
service access for this aid year. If the Inquiry Access check box is clear on the Packaging Status Summary
page for this student, the system displays Inquiry access denied.
Students select the aid year to view. If a student has aid for more than one career in the aid year or award
period, this link accesses the Financial Aid - Select Career to View page. If not, it accesses the Financial
Aid - Award Summary page.
362
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Note: If a student does not have awards or if the Award Detail check box on the Self Service Options
page is clear, the system displays the Financial Aid - Self Service Links page.
Related Links
Understanding Campus Self Service for Financial Aid
Defining Self-Service Options
Pages Used to View Student Self-Service Pages by Aid Year
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View
SS_FA_AWD_AY_SEL
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Financial
Aid, Financial Aid – Select
Aid Year to View
Select an aid year to view.
Financial Aid - Award
Summary
SS_FA_AWD_SUMM_ALL
Click the Aid Year link on
the Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View page.
View a detailed summary of
financial aid by aid year. This
includes the type of award
and the offered and accepted
amounts for the aid year and
terms within the aid year.
Financial Aid - Financial Aid
Eligibility
SS_FA_AY_SUMMARY
Click the Financial Aid
Eligibility link on the
Financial Aid - Award
Summary page.
View financial aid eligibility
by aid year. This includes
estimated financial aid budget,
expected family contribution,
estimated need, total aid, and
remaining need.
The title of this page and the
name of the link leading to it
are set in the Summary Link
Label field on the Inquiry
Options page (Set UP SACR,
Common Definitions, Self
Service, Financial Aid, Self
Service Options, Inquiry
Options).
Financial Aid - Estimated
Financial Aid Budget
SS_FA_COA
Click the Estimated Financial
Aid Budget amount link on
the Financial Aid - Financial
Aid Eligibility page.
View estimated financial aid
budget by aid year.
Financial Aid - Expected
Family Contribution
SS_FA_EFC_SUMMARY
Click the Expected Family
Contribution amount link on
the Financial Aid - Financial
Aid Eligibility page.
View expected family
contribution by aid year for
both parent and student.
Financial Aid - Select Career
to View
SS_FA_AY_CAR_SEL
Click the Total Aid amount
Select a career to view by aid
link on the Financial Aid year.
Financial Aid Eligibility page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
363
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Chapter 26
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Loan
Application Information
SS_FA_LOAN_DETAIL
Click the Loan Application
Information link on the
Financial Aid - Award
Summary page.
View loan application
information. This includes
loan status, loan amount, loan
fee, net amount, and activity
date. A student must have an
originated loan in the system
for this information to be
available.
Financial Aid - Declined
Awards
SS_FA_AWD_ALL_CD
Click the View Declined
Awards link on the Financial
Aid - Award Summary page.
View declined awards by aid
year. This view is available if
your institution entered Aid
Year in the View Summary
By field on the Self Service
Options page.
Financial Aid - Canceled
Awards
SS_FA_AWD_ALL_CD
Click the View Canceled
Awards link on the Financial
Aid - Award Summary page.
View canceled awards by aid
year. This view is available if
your institution entered Aid
Year in the View Summary
By field on the Self Service
Options page.
Financial Aid - Scheduled
Disbursements
SS_FA_AWD_TERM_DTL
Click the View Scheduled
Disbursement Dates link for
the term in the scroll area on
the Financial Aid - Award
Summary page.
View scheduled
disbursements by term. This
includes the type of award,
the accepted amount, the
fee, the net amount, and the
scheduled disbursement dates
for a particular term. The
system displays awards that
have been offered but not
accepted by the student with a
blank disbursement date.
Viewing Student Self-Service Pages by Award Period
This section lists the pages used to view student self-service pages by award period. Most pages are the
same for both aid year and award period options.
If your institution enters Award Period in the View Data By field on the Inquiry Options page, the system
displays the data by award period.
Pages Used to View Student Self-Service Pages by Award Period
364
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Select Aid
Year to View
SS_FA_AWD_AY_SEL
Self Service, Campus
Finances, View Financial
Aid, Financial Aid - Select
Aid Year to View
Select an award period to
view.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 26
Using Financial Aid Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Financial Aid - Award
Summary
SS_FA_AWD_SUMM_PER
Click the link on the Financial View a detailed summary of
Aid - Select Aid Year to View financial aid by award period.
page designating the aid year
This includes the type of
that you want to view.
award and the offered and
accepted amounts for the
academic year and terms
within the award period.
Financial Aid - Financial Aid
Eligibility
SS_FA_AP_SUMMARY
Click the Financial Aid
Eligibility link on the
Financial Aid - Award
Summary page.
View financial aid eligibility
by award period. This
includes estimated financial
aid budget, expected family
contribution, estimated need,
total aid, and remaining need.
Financial Aid - Estimated
Financial Aid Budget
SS_FA_COA
Click the Estimated Financial
Aid Budget amount link on
the Financial Aid - Financial
Aid Eligibility page.
View estimated financial aid
budget by award period.
Financial Aid - Expected
Family Contribution
SS_FA_EFC_BY_AP
Click the Expected Family
Contribution amount link on
the Financial Aid - Financial
Aid Eligibility page.
View expected family
contribution by award period.
This includes both parent and
student.
Financial Aid - Select Career
to View
SS_FA_AP_CAR_SEL
Click the Total Aid amount
link on the Financial Aid Award Summary page.
Select a career to view by
award period.
Financial Aid - Loan
Application Information
SS_FA_LOAN_DETAIL
Click the Loan Application
Information link on the
Financial Aid - Award
Summary page.
View loan application
information. This includes
loan status, loan amount, loan
fee, net amount, and activity
date. A student must have an
originated loan in the system
for this information to be
available.
Financial Aid - Declined
Awards
SS_FA_AWD_PER_CD
Click the View Declined
Awards link on the Financial
Aid - Award Summary page.
View declined awards.
This view is available to
the student if the institution
entered Award Period in the
View Summary By field on
the Self Service Options page.
Financial Aid - Canceled
Awards
SS_FA_AWD_PER_CD
Click the View Canceled
Awards link on the Financial
Aid - Award Summary page.
View canceled awards.
This view is available to
the student if the institution
entered Award Period in the
View Summary By field on
the Self Service Options page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Usage
365
Using Financial Aid Self Service
366
Chapter 26
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Financial Aid - Scheduled
Disbursements
SS_FA_AWD_TERM_DTL
Click the link for the term
in the scroll area on the
Financial Aid - Award
Summary page.
View scheduled
disbursements by term. This
includes the type of award,
the accepted amount, the
fee, the net amount, and the
scheduled disbursement dates
for a particular term.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 27
Using Self-Service Transfer Credit
Viewing Transfer Credit Reports Through Self-Service Pages
Students can view transfer credit reports through pages in Campus Self Service.
Page Used to View Transfer Credit Reports Through Self-Service Pages
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
View Transfer Credit Report
SS_TRCR_RPT
Self Service, Transfer Credit
Students can view all of their
course, test, and other transfer
credit that your academic
institution has submitted
for posting to their student
enrollment records.
Evaluating Transfer Credit Through Self-Service Pages
This section provides an overview of the Self-Service Modeling Transfer Credit feature and discusses
how students, applicants, prospects, and visitors can use this feature.
Understanding the Self-Service Modeling Transfer Credit Feature
The Self-Service Modeling Transfer Credit feature enables users to enter and process "what-if" course
transfer credit evaluations over the internet. Students, applicants, prospects, and visitors can use the
Evaluate My Transfer Credit self-service pages to create course transfer credit models based on transfer
courses from external organizations or from internal academic careers and programs. These individuals
can then process their transfer credit models, view their transfer credit evaluation summaries, and use the
evaluation results to run a what-if academic advisement report (degree audit).
Within the what-if model, users can run a degree progress analysis that also includes all courses on the
individual's record that are in a "completed" or "posted" transfer model. This way, for prospects and
applicants with completed (but not posted) transfer models on file, the system automatically articulates
and evaluates these courses in the what-if degree audit.
Users have access to the self-service Modeling Transfer Credit feature based on their role and the
underlying component permissions. Visitors—individuals who have not formally applied to your
institution—can access the Evaluate My Transfer Credit self-service pages if your institution creates for
them user IDs (with roles that grant them access to the pages). You can also provide prospects, applicants,
and students access to the Evaluate My Transfer Credit self-service pages.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
367
Using Self-Service Transfer Credit
Chapter 27
The Self-Service Modeling Transfer Credit feature stores the data it creates in its own tables separate
from the tables the Student Records feature uses. This separation ensures the data integrity of official
transfer credit records. However, the page elements of the self-service feature prompt against the setup
tables of the Student Records Transfer Credit feature, making the setup for the Transfer Credit feature
a prerequisite for the self-service feature. Before a user can evaluate transfer credit scenarios, you must
define academic institutions, careers, programs, terms, courses, course transfer equivalency rules, and
academic program and source equivalencies.
Because the course transfer rules associated with an external organization or internal academic institution
are based on effective dates and grade points, the articulation term, external term, external year, unit,
and grading information that individuals enter into their models is critical. The self-service pages have
onscreen instructions that guide individuals through these data entry requirements so that they can receive
accurate information.
Note: The advisement report generated from the Evaluate My Transfer Credit component always
evaluates posted, completed, and self-reported transfer credit.
Related Links
"Understanding the Transfer Credit Business Process" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student
Records)
Prerequisites
Before individuals can process self-service transfer credit modelling, you must:
•
Set up your system for academic advisement.
See Academic Advisement.
•
Define an advisement report type to be used with the Evaluate My Transfer Credit component.
See "Setting Up Advisement Report Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Academic
Advisement).
•
Define academic institutions.
See "Defining Academic Institutions" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals).
Pages Used to Evaluate Transfer Credit Through Self-Service Pages
368
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Evaluate My Transfer Credit
SS_TRCR_SRCH
Self Service, Transfer Credit,
Evaluate My Transfer Credit
Individuals can use this page
to select (for editing) or delete
an existing course transfer
credit model that they have
previously created, or begin
creating a new model.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 27
Using Self-Service Transfer Credit
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Evaluate My Transfer Credit
- Transfer Credit Model
Information
SS_TRCR_TARGET
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Click the Create New
Model button on the
Evaluate My Transfer
Credit page.
Individuals can use this
page to select the required
target information for their
course transfer credit model.
Target information includes
the academic institution,
career, program, and plan
to which they want to apply
the course transfer credit,
and the articulation term. To
assist individuals in entering
this information, the page
elements prompt against
the academic institution,
academic career, academic
program, academic plan and
term tables.
The program of study and
major (plan) field prompt
values are based on those
for which you have defined
course transfer equivalency
rules.
Evaluate My Transfer Credit
- Transfer Credit Source
Information
SS_TRCR_SOURCE
Evaluate My Transfer Credit - SS_TRCR_INTCR
Current Coursework
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Click the Next button
on the Transfer Credit
Model Information page.
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Select a source career
and institution and click
the Next button on the
Transfer Credit Source
Information page.
Individuals can use this
page to enter the external
organization or internal
academic institution from
which the individual is
transferring. To assist
individuals in entering
this information, the page
elements prompt against the
course transfer rules tables
to ensure that you institution
has established a course
transfer rule for the external
organization or internal
academic institution.
Individuals who are creating
internal course transfer credit
models can use this page
to view their coursework
for at the specified internal
academic institution. The
system automatically loads
their enrollment information
into the page.
369
Using Self-Service Transfer Credit
Page Name
Chapter 27
Definition Name
Evaluate My Transfer Credit - SS_TRCR_EDUC
Education Data
Evaluate My Transfer Credit - SS_TRCR_RSLT
Transfer Credit Results
Evaluate My Transfer Credit - SS_TRCR_RSLT_DTL
Transfer Credit Results Detail
370
Navigation
Usage
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Select an external
institution and click
the Next button on the
Transfer Credit Source
Information page.
Individuals who are creating
external course transfer credit
models can use this page to
enter their external education
information. This information
includes the external year
and term, term type, external
subject area, course number,
units taken, and grade
received. The system does
not uses the education data
table to retrieve and store
this information. The system
instead requires the individual
to enter the information,
which it then stores on a set
of tables unique to the SelfService Modeling Transfer
Credit feature.
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Click the Submit button
on the Education Data
page or on the Current
Coursework page.
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Click the View Transfer
Equivalency Details
button on the Transfer
Credit Results page.
Individuals can use this page
to view the results of the
Self-Service Transfer Credit
Evaluation process for the
model. The system displays
the transfer credit summary
report in a grid at the bottom
of the page. Individuals
can use the browser print
function to print the page.
Individuals can click the
View Details button to see
additional information about
the incoming courses and
their internal equivalents. The
evaluation is tentative pending
final review by your academic
institution.
Individuals can use this page
to view incoming course
and internal equivalent
information. The system
displays each incoming course
beside its internal equivalent
course. The system captures
but hides the valid attempts,
earn credit, and include in
GPA fields.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 27
Using Self-Service Transfer Credit
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Evaluate My Transfer
Credit – Generate a What-If
Advisement Report
SS_TRCR_AA_RQST
•
Self Service, Transfer
Credit, Evaluate My
Transfer Credit
•
Click the Next button
on the Transfer Credit
Results page.
Individuals can use this page
to review the institution,
career, program and term
selected and to re-select
a major. Then, they can
generate an advisement
report based on that what-if
information. The degree audit
takes into consideration their
completed and self-report
transfer credit. Ultimately,
individuals can see how the
internal equivalents of their
transfer credit model apply
towards their what-if degree
requirements.
The advisement report that is
generated shows them their
possible degree progress
based on the transfer credit
model. For prospective
students, the process uses the
target academic program and
internal equivalent courses,
which become the what-if
courses, during the creation
of the degree progress report.
For applicants and students,
the process uses the target
academic program and
internal equivalent courses
of the model, completed and
posted transfer credit models,
and enrollment records during
the creation of the advisement
report.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
371
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Prerequisites for Using Academic Advisement Self Service
To take full advantage of the self-service features, including the course planning feature (known as My
Planner), class planning feature (known as the Shopping Cart) and enrollment capabilities, your institution
must, for example:
•
Set up courses in the course catalog.
•
Schedule classes.
•
Define advisement report types.
•
Identify those report types for use in self-service on the Academic Institution 7 page.
•
Run those report types in batch (one for My Academic Requirements and one for My Planner and
Search by My Requirements).
•
Decide how the reports are refreshed (real-time, for example).
•
Establish a plan for periodically refreshing those reports in batch.
A number of users – prematriculated students, students, and advisors – can take advantage of some of the
Academic Advisement self-service features. To do so requires an EMPLID and a user profile that enables
them to access and use the self-service pages.
The What-If Report – What-if Report Selection page and the What-If Report – Create What-if Scenario
page are designed for use by advisors, students, and prematriculated students (for example, prospective
students). But you must provide your users with access to the respective pages: SAA_SS_WHATIF_SEL
and SAA_SS_WHATIF.
Other self-service pages are designed for students only and are accessible to active students only (students
whose program status is active.) Examples are My Planner, Plan by My Requirements and Search by My
Requirements.
If your institution is processing degree progress reports using transcript types (versus advisement report
types), you must turn off security to the component, SAA_SS_DPR_ADB.
Important! Before users can view the interactive advisement report in self-service, your institution
must first generate the relevant report types for the students, either in batch or individually, using the
administrative components.
Related Links
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement
"Setting Up Advisement Report Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Academic Advisement)
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
373
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
"Identifying Self-Service Report Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Viewing an Advisement Report
This section provides an overview of My Academic Requirements and lists the pages used to view an
advisement report.
Understanding My Academic Requirements
The self-service functionality provides students with an interactive advisement report that they can use to
evaluate their academic progress, access course and class detail, add courses to their planner, place classes
in their shopping carts, and enroll in classes. The system can generate the report in real time and the report
displays a date and time stamp so that the user knows when the report was last generated.
Depending on your Installation Student Administration setup, you can implement the advisement report
using either the Academic Advisement or the Program Guide installation option.
If your institution uses Academic Advisement, the My Academic Requirements page reflects the results
of a degree audit. When students access the My Academic Requirements page, satisfied academic
requirement groups are collapsed, and unsatisfied ones are expanded. Data about the degree requirements
appears in hierarchical structure that corresponds with your institution's advisement setup. For example,
a requirement and its contents appear below a heading for a requirement group. In general, lists of
courses that may be used or are used to satisfy a given requirement appear below the requirement line,
which in turn appears below the requirement. Requirement group report descriptions appear in group
boxes, and details about requirements, which are attached to the requirement groups, appear below the
requirement groups. Examples of these details include report long descriptions, course statistics, and
course lists. Whether specific details, such as requirement line data, appear depends on the setup of your
institution. When details are available for a student to view, a caret appears next to the requirement group,
requirement, or requirement line, as needed. The icons in the legend and the statuses of Satisfied and
Not Satisfied communicate the completion status of the courses and degree requirements. If there are
exceptions that your institution has made to a student’s degree requirements, those also appear on the
interactive report. For example, if a change was made so that a student needs to take three credits instead
of six for a given requirement, the explanation about the change is accessible in the relevant area of the
report (next to the units required). Similarly, if a course directive (substitution) was made, a Notes column
appears on the report, in the course grid next to the replacement course. A hyperlink directs the user to the
explanation about the exception.
The setup of your institution determines whether the report is generated in real time, and it affects which
details appear on the report. For example, your institution controls whether a requirement line long
description appears on the report or whether the course list should appear. The icons that appear in the
legend of the report are dictated by the setup of the advisement report type. The advisement report type
setup also dictates whether the report reflects the evaluation of in-progress, what-if, shopping cart, and
planned courses. Additionally, you define (on the Define Advisement Report Types page) the other
attributes of the report, such as whether topics should display on the report, or whether the audit should
evaluate completed or self-reported transfer credit models.
If your institution selects the Program Guide installation option, then the report that appears on the My
Academic Requirements page has a different look because the data comes from the Program Guide
requirements. Because no degree audit is performed against Program Guide rules, the report does not
indicate whether a rule is satisfied or not. Instead, My Academic Requirements displays descriptive
374
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
information from the Program Guide course lists, requirements, and requirement groups. Courses taken,
planned, and in progress appear on the report, but a student, along with his advisor, must evaluate his
degree progress. Students can still use the Program Guide report to plan or enroll in courses.
See Setting Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement.
Using the Search by My Requirements feature, students can access additional information and perform
these actions:
•
Access course details.
•
View wildcard course list information.
•
View information about exceptions and overrides.
•
Add classes to their shopping cart.
Pages Used to View an Advisement Report
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
My Academic Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB
Self Service, Degree Progress/ Students assess academic
Graduation, My Academic
progress toward graduation,
Requirements
review course detail, add
courses to My Planner, view
class sections for a specific
term, and, if term activated,
add a class to their shopping
cart.
My Academic Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_AAL
Self Service, Degree Progress/ Students review their program
Graduation, My Academic
guide, courses taken, review
Requirements
course detail, add courses
to My Planner, view class
sections for a specific term,
and, if term activated, add a
class to their shopping cart.
My Academic Requirements – SSS_CRSE_OFFER_DTL
Course Detail
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation, My
Academic Requirements
Click a course description
link.
My Academic Requirements - SAA_SS_DPR_AAL_WC
Course List Detail
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation, My
Academic Requirements
Usage
Students review course
details, add a course to My
Planner, view class sections
for a specific term, and, if
term activated, add a class to
their shopping cart.
View details about a course
list.
Click a course link.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
375
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Academic Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB_DTL
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation, My
Academic Requirements
View a description of
any exception or override
that affects the course or
the requirement group,
requirement or requirement
line.
Click the numeric link in the
Notes column (if applicable).
Or, if the exception is a
change, click the Note link to
view the details of the change.
What-If Report – What-if
Report Selection
SAA_SS_WHATIF_SEL
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation, View
What-if Report
Student or prematriculated
student can view an existing
report or initiate the steps
to create a new what-if
advisement report.
What If Report
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB
Click the report date link on
the What-If Report – What-if
Report Selection page.
Student or prematriculated
student can view a saved
what-if report.
What-If Report – Create
What-if Scenario
SAA_SS_WHATIF
Click the Create New Report
button on the What-If Report
–What-if Report Selection
page.
Student or prematriculated
student can define a whatif scenario and generate a
what-if advisement report.
Depending on the setup,
the student may also be able
to define a course what-if
scenario.
What If Report – Select
Course for What-if Scenario
SSS_BROWSE_CATLG
Click the Browse Course
Catalog button on the Create
What-if Scenario page.
Student or prematriculated
student can select courses for
the what-if scenario.
Searching for Classes by Academic Requirements
This section provides an overview of the Search by My Requirements feature and lists the pages used to
access this feature.
Understanding Search by My Requirements
The Search by My Requirements feature enables students to search for classes based on their degree
requirements. The information that appears on the page is based on the student's most recently run
advisement report, but the presentation of the information varies from that shown on the My Academic
Requirements page because the student using the information intends to enroll in a class.
The main difference between the Search by My Requirements and My Academic Requirements pages
is that the course lists include courses offered for the selected term only. Also, whereas the institution
may or may not include planned courses on the My Academic Requirements report type, the data
included on the Search by My Academic Requirements includes planned courses. As with My Academic
Requirements, the data reflects the report type and other advisement setup. Finally, students must be
eligible to enroll in order to search for classes by academic requirements.
376
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
If your institution selects the Program Guide installation option, then the report that appears in Search
by My Academic Requirements looks and operates differently because the data comes from the Program
Guide requirements. Also, because no degree audit is performed against Program Guide rules, the report
does not indicate whether a degree requirement is satisfied or not.
Using the Search by My Academic Requirements feature, students can access these additional details and
perform these actions:
•
Access course detail.
•
Add courses to their planner.
•
View class sections.
•
View wildcard course list information.
•
View information about exceptions and overrides.
Pages Used to Search by My Requirements
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Add Classes - Search by My
Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB_SR
Self Service, Enrollment,
Enrollment: Add Classes
For a selected term, a student
can search for classes
based on his or her degree
requirements.
Select the term (as needed).
Click the Change button (as
needed).
Click the My Requirements
option.
Click Search.
Add Classes - Course Detail
SSS_CRSE_OFFER_DTL
From the Add Classes –
Search by My Requirements
page, click a link for a course
description.
Students review course
details, view class sections
for the selected term, and, if
term activated, add a class to
their shopping cart. Students
can also view their course
schedule and shopping cart
contents for the selected term.
Viewing Advisee Information Through Self-Service Pages
This section lists the pages used to view advisee information using self-service pages.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
377
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
Pages Used to View Advisee Information Through Self-Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Advisees
SSS_ADVISEE_LIST
Self Service, Advisor Center,
My Advisees
An advisor can view a list of
his or her advisees and access
other academic and personal
information about them, for
example, class schedules,
term progress, transfer
credit reports, transcripts and
advising notes.
Advising Notes
SAA_SS_ADVNOTE_STU
Self Service, Advisor Center,
My Advisees. Click the
Advising Notes icon for the
respective advisee.
View all advising notes for the
selected student, irrespective
of who created them.
Advising Notes
SAA_SS_ADVNOTE_ADD
Self Service, Advisor Center,
My Advisees. Click the
Advising Notes icon for the
respective advisee. Click the
create a note button.
Create an advising note for
the selected advisee.
Advising Notes
SAA_SS_ADVNOTE
Self Service, Advisor Center,
My Advisees. Click the
Advising Notes icon for the
respective advisee, and again,
click the specific Advising
Note icon to view details.
View and update an advising
note for the selected advisee.
Add or remove attachments to
the note. Advisors can create
or delete related action items.
Update note details including
advisee access to the note.
Send notifications to the
advisee with an editable
message.
Advising Notes
378
SAA_SS_ADVNOTE_SUM
Self Service, Advisor Center,
My Advisees. Select the my
advising notes button
View notes that have been
created by or assigned to an
advisor. Use filters to search
for specific notes.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Advisee's Student Center (
search)
SSS_ADVISEE_LIST
Click the View Data for other
Students button on the My
Advisees page.
An advisor can search for
an advisee or prospective
student and then go to the
Advisee Student Center
for the selected advisee or
prospective student. From
the Advisee Student Center,
the advisor can access
other academic and personal
information about the selected
advisee or prospective
student, for example, class
schedules, term progress,
transfer credit reports,
transcripts and advising
notes. If the person is a
prospective student, the
advisor can generate a whatif advisement report based
on the prospective student’s
intended program of study.
My Advisees - Committee
Members
SSS_ADVISEE_COMEMB
Click a committee name on
the My Advisees page.
Review committee members,
their roles, and their contact
numbers.
Advisee Requirements
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB
Click the View Student
Advisors can view a student's
Details link on the My
advisement report.
Advisees page for a student
in the list of advisees and on
the Advisee Student Center
page, under Academics, select
Academic Requirement from
the drop-down list. Click the
Go button.
Advisee Requirements Course Detail
SSS_CRSE_OFFER_DTL
Click the course description
link on the Advisee
Requirements page.
Advisors can review course
details and, if the student is
term activated, view class
sections for a specific term.
Advisee Student Center
SSS_STUDENT_CENTER
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, Advisee Student
Center
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Advisors can access an
advisee's related transactions
and view information such
as class schedule, dates, and
account information.
Click the View Student
Details link for an
advisee on the My
Advisees page or click
the Student Center
subtab.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Advisees can select Advising
Notes from the Academic
drop down list to view their
notes. Based on advisee
access settings, they can
update advising notes, add
Note items and attachments;
and automatically generate
notifications to the advisor
when they submit an update.
379
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
What-If Report – What-if
Report Selection
SAA_SS_WHATIF_SEL
On Advisee Student Center,
under Academics, select
What-if Report from the dropdown list box. Click the Go
button.
Advisors can view an existing
report or initiate the steps
to create a new advisement
report for a student or
prospective student.
What If Report
SAA_SS_DPR_ADB
Click the report date link on
the What-If Report – What-if
Report Selection page.
Advisor can view a saved
what-if report.
What-If Report – Create
What-if Scenario
SAA_SS_WHATIF
Click the Create New Report
button on the What-If Report
– What-if Report Selection
page.
Advisors can define a whatif scenario for the student
or prospective student and
generate a what-if advisement
report for that individual.
Depending on the setup, the
advisor may also be able
to define a course what-if
scenario.
380
What If Report – Select
Course for What-if Scenario
SSS_BROWSE_CATLG
Click the Browse Course
Catalog button on the Create
What-if Scenario page.
Advisors can select courses
for the what-if scenario.
Advisee Assignments
SS_LAM_STD_GR_LST
On Advisee Student Center,
under Academics, select
Assignments from the dropdown list box. Click the Go
button.
Advisors can view advisee's
assignments and grades.
Advisee Course History
SSS_MY_CRSEHIST
On Advisee Student Center,
Advisors can view advisee's
under Academics, select
course history.
Course History from the dropdown list box. Click the Go
button.
Advisee Exam Schedule
SSR_SSENRL_NODATA
On Advisee Student Center,
under Academics, select
Exam Schedule from the
drop-down list box. Click the
Go button.
Advisors can view advisee's
exam history.
Advisee Grades
SSR_SSENRL_GRADE
On Advisee Student Center,
under Academics, select
Grades from the drop-down
list box. Click the Go button.
Advisors can view an
advisee's grades.
Advisee Unofficial Transcript
SSS_TSRQST_UNOFF
On Advisee Student Center,
under Academics, select
Transcript: View Unofficial
from the drop-down list box.
Click the Go button.
Advisors can view an
advisee's unofficial transcript.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Advisee Transfer Credit
SCC_SUM_TRNSFRCRT
•
Self Service, Advisor
Advisors can view
Center, Advisee Transfer information such as advisees's
Credit
course and test credits.
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Click the View Student
Details link for an
advisee.
Click the Transfer Credit
subtab.
Advisee General Info (general SCC_SUM_PERSONAL
information)
•
On Advisee Student
Center, under Academics,
select Transfer Credit:
Report from the dropdown list box. Click the
Go button.
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, Advisee General
Info
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Advisors can view
information such as an
advisee's service indicators,
initiated checklists, personal
data, and student groups.
Click the View Student
Details link for an
advisee.
Click the General Info
subtab.
Advisee Academics
SCC_SUM_ACADEMICS
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, Advisee
Academics
•
Self Service, Advisor
Center, My Advisees
Advisors can view
information such as an
advisee's career, program, and
term summary.
Click the View Student
Details link for an
advisee.
Click the Academics
subtab.
Degree Progress Report
SS_ES_AARPT_TYPE
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
On Advisee Student Center,
select Degree Progress Report
from the drop-down list box.
Click the Go button.
Advisors can view or generate
an advisee's degree progress
report (that is, advisement
transcript). Note: This is not
the default option. Institutions
must change component
permissions to enable users
to view or generate the
advisement transcripts.
381
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Quick What-If Analysis
Report
SA_REQST_DTL_SEC3
Click the Quick What-If
Advisors can run a quick
button on the Degree Progress what-if scenario for their
Report page.
advisees (on an advisement
transcript).
Note: This is not the
default option. Institutions
must change component
permissions to enable users
to view or generate the
advisement transcripts.
Course List What-If Analysis
SA_REQ_CRSE_WHIF2
Click the Course List What-If Advisors can run a course
button on the Degree Progress list what-if scenario for their
Report page.
advisees (on an advisement
transcript).
Note: This is not the
default option. Institutions
must change component
permissions to enable users
to view or generate the
advisement transcripts.
Emergency Contacts List
SS_CC_EMRG_CNTCT_L
On Advisee Student Center,
under Personal Information,
select Emergency Contact.
Advisors can view an
advisee's emergency contact
information.
Enrollment Dates
SSR_SSENRL_APPT
On Advisee Student Center,
under Enrollment Dates,
select details.
Advisors can view an
advisee's enrollment
appointments.
Send Notification
SSS_NOTIFY
Advisor Center, My Advisees
Advisors can send
notifications to their advisees.
Select the Notify Selected
Advisees or Notify All
Advisees button.
Advisee To Dos
SS_CC_TODOS
On Advisee Student Center,
under To Do List, select
details.
Advisee Class Schedule,
Weekly Calendar View
SSR_SS_WEEK
•
On Advisee Student
Advisors can view an
Center, under Academics, advisee's weekly schedule.
select My Class
Schedule.
•
On Advisee Class
Schedule, select the
Weekly Calendar View.
FERPA Message for
Instructor/Advisor
382
SSR_FERPA_STMNT
Advisors can view an
advisee's to do list summary.
Click View FERPA Statement Advisors can view the FERPA
link from any of the Advisor
restrictions and link to the U.
Center subtabs.
S. Department of Education
Family Educational Rights
and Privacy Act.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Viewing Self-Service Advisement Transcripts
The self-service Degree Progress Report feature enables students and advisors to process and then
view advisement reports (that is, advisement transcripts) that your institution defines for self-service
processing. Users of this feature can conduct what-if scenarios and can explore the course requirement
consequences of completing additional coursework or of changing the student's program of study.
This section lists prerequisites and lists the pages used to perform self-service advising.
See Applying for Graduation Using Self-Service Pages.
Prerequisites
Before individuals at your institution can use the self-service Degree Progress Report (advisement
transcript) feature, you must:
•
Assign student users an active program, a user ID, and a password.
•
Assign advisors a valid user ID and password.
•
Set up a self-service advising transcript type.
•
Turn off security to the component, SAA_SS_DRP_ADB.
Related Links
"Defining Transcript Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Pages Used to View Self-Service Advisement Transcripts
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Degree Progress Report
SS_ES_AARPT_TYPE
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation, View
Degree Progress Report
Students and advisors can
assess academic progress
toward graduation. Students
and advisors can run what-if
reports to simulate additional
coursework completion or to
simulate a different academic
career, program, plan, or
subplan.
Report Results
SS_REPORT_RESULT_A
•
Self Service, Degree
Progress/Graduation,
View Degree Progress
Report, Report Results
Students and advisors
can view the advisement
transcript.
•
Self Service, Academic
Records, View
Unofficial Transcript,
Report Results
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
383
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
View Previously Requested
Reports
SS_STUREQ_RSLT
Click the View a Report that
you had previously requested
link on the Degree Progress
Report page or the Unofficial
Transcript page.
Students and advisors can
review reports that they
requested in the past. To view
a specific report, students
click the corresponding Go
button.
Degree Progress Report Quick What-If Analysis
Report
SA_REQST_DTL_SEC3
Click the Quick What-If
Students and advisors can
button on the Degree Progress enter hypothetical career,
Report page.
program, subplan, and
requirement term information.
Students or advisors must
enter a required term for every
career, program, plan, or
subplan override option that
they specify.
Degree Progress Report Course List What-If Analysis
SA_REQ_CRSE_WHIF2
Click the Course List What-If Students and advisors can
button on the Degree Progress enter hypothetical coursework
Report page.
data.
Course List What-If Analysis
Report - Course Search
STDNT_CRSE_SECPNL
Click the Search button on
the Degree Progress Report Course List What-If Analysis
page.
Students and advisors can
select courses for the Course
List Analysis report.
Monitoring Academic Progress Using the PeopleSoft Fluid
Interface
The Fluid Academic Progress interface provides students with information about:
•
Academic Progress
•
Course Requirement Alerts
•
Expected Graduation Term
•
Advisors
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
"Using the Student Homepage" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
Setting Up Self-Service Features for Academic Advisement
"Identifying Self-Service Report Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Application Fundamentals)
384
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 28
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Pages Used to Monitor Academic Progress Using the PeopleSoft Fluid
Interface
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Academic Progress
SAA_ACAD_PROG (tile)
Select the Academic Progress tile
from the Student Homepage to access
Academic Progress Start Page. From
the Start Page, you can access the
Academic Progress Summary, Academic
Progress (detail), Course Requirement
Alerts, Expected Graduation Term, and
Advisors.
SAA_START_PAGE_F (start page)
If a student is enrolled in multiple
academic careers, Academic Progress for
different careers can be selected by using
the Change button.
Academic Progress Summary
SAA_ACD_PRG_SM_FL
This page displays a graphic
representation of percentages of
Complete, In Progress, and Incomplete
units in a student’s academic program.
This is based on the advisement
report type specified in the Academic
Institution Table as described in
"Identifying Self-Service Report Types"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals). The report
type specified in the setup will need to
be run for each student for the data to
appear on this page.
Academic Progress
SAA_ACAD_PROG_FL
This page displays a student’s degree
progress report for evaluation. It includes
graphic representation of percentages
complete and grade point average
progress.
This is based on the advisement
report type specified in the Academic
Institution Table as described in
"Identifying Self-Service Report Types"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals). The report
type specified in the setup will need to
be run for each student for the data to
appear on this page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
385
Using Academic Advisement Self Service
Chapter 28
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Course Requirements Alert
SAA_CRS_REQ_ALT_FL
This page displays courses in which
a student is currently enrolled that
do not count towards completing any
academic requirements. These courses
will only be displayed up until the Drop (
Delete Record) Deadline for the Session
Calendar.
This is based on the advisement
report type specified in the Academic
Institution Table as described in
"Identifying Self-Service Report Types"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals). The report
type specified in the setup will need to
be run for each student for the data to
appear on this page.
386
Expected Graduation Term
SAA_EXP_GRD_TRM_FL
This page displays a student’s Expected
Graduation Term from the student’s
program.
Advisors
SAA_ADVISORS_FL
This displays a student’s advisors. Email
addresses and telephone numbers can be
selected to contact an advisor.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Understanding PeopleSoft Outreach for Fundraising
PeopleSoft Outreach is a self-service application that provides tools and features for two roles within your
organization: the development outreach officer and the student recruiting officer. The fundraising portion
of the application is designed to help the outreach officer focus on the prospect, not the process.
The target users of PeopleSoft Outreach include organization employees designated as prospect managers,
outreach officers, or other advancement officers who may travel frequently.
Because of the extensive clearance process that exists at many philanthropic organizations, PeopleSoft
Outreach strategy and action pages provide records only for those IDs who are actual prospects.
The IDs of these prospects are contained in the user's My Prospects workset, which is created on the
AV_WORKSET and AV_WORKSET_MBR records.
Various resource assignment processes within PeopleSoft Contributor Relations manage additions to the
My Prospects workset. When a new assignment is made, the system adds the EMPLID or EXT_ORG_ID
of the newly assigned prospect to the user's My Prospects workset. Likewise, when an assignment
is no longer active, the system removes the EMPLID or EXT_ORG_ID of the prospect from the My
Prospects workset. PeopleSoft Outreach contains a workset initialization and maintenance process, the
My Prospects Application Engine process (AV_WS_MYPROS) that controls additions and removals by
regenerating the My Prospects workset each time that users run it.
This section discusses PeopleSoft Outreach business processes.
Related Links
"Understanding Prospect Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor Relations)
PeopleSoft Outreach Business Processes
For the outreach officer who travels a lot, PeopleSoft Outreach provides a way to easily manage
constituent and prospect data while away from the office. The self-service application gives users quick
access to the information that they need to cultivate and communicate with constituents and donor
prospects. The application also filters and organizes the information and efficiently presents it on selfservice pages.
Typically, outreach officers are assigned a number of constituents to manage through the development
life cycle. This life cycle includes identifying constituents, informing them of relevant news about the
organization's fundraising efforts, gaining their interest in the organization's mission, involving them
in activities, and helping them invest in the organization's future. PeopleSoft Outreach presents tools to
analyze prospects and to develop strategies to move these constituents through the development life cycle.
The prospects that outreach officers manage are generally in the interested, involved, or ready to invest
steps of the life cycle.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
387
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
PeopleSoft Outreach comprises four major processes:
•
My Action Plan
•
Prospect Strategy.
•
Prospect Actions.
•
Prospect information views for analysis.
PeopleSoft Outreach uses PeopleSoft Contributor Relations workset functionality to build the My
Prospects workset through which a user can easily progress. Building a prospect workset creates a smaller
subset of the database that contains only those IDs that are relevant to the outreach officer.
Creating and Maintaining the My Prospects Workset
To use the action and strategy management pages in PeopleSoft Outreach, users need a current My
Prospects workset. Your organization can initialize and maintain this workset by running the My
Prospects process as well as by assigning resources within PeopleSoft Contributor Relations.
This section discusses how to:
•
Run the My Prospects process.
•
Assign resources to the My Prospects workset.
Page Used to Create and Maintain the My Prospects Workset
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Outreach Workset
Initialization/Maintenance
AV_RUNCTL_OUTR
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Contributor
Relations, Install Contributor
Relations, Initialize CR,
Outreach WS Initialization
Run the My Prospects process
to generate or regenerate
My Prospects worksets for
outreach officers.
Running the My Prospects Process
Access the Outreach Workset Initialization/Maintenance page (Set Up SACR, Product Related,
Contributor Relations, Install Contributor Relations, Initialize CR, Outreach WS Initialization).
When you run this process, the system:
1. Empties the workset tables AV_WORKSET and AV_WORKSET_MBR for the My Prospects
workset.
2. Selects records from resource assignment tables based on the following conditions:
388
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Table
Conditions
AV_ASGN_STF_PRP
Include on START_DT < current date and end date >
current date
AV_PG_STAFF
Include on START_DT < current date and end date >
current date
AV_CNST_ACTN
Include as SLCTR_ID or RSPL_ID and action expiration or
complete date + 30 days < current date
AV_CNST_AC_ASGN
Include as STAFF_ID and action expiration or complete
date + 30 days < current date
3. Inserts the selected records into the My Prospects workset on the workset tables AV_WORKSET and
AV_WORKSET_MBR for any user who has both a STAFF_ID on the AV_STAFF table and a user ID
for access to the system.
The process ignores assignments that are made to someone who is not also a system user. Because
staff and volunteers exist in the same AV_STAFF record, volunteers who also have system user IDs
have My Prospects worksets built for their user IDs.
Use the Process Monitor to review the status of the process. You can configure Process Scheduler to
generate the workset at user-defined intervals.
Note: Oracle recommends that you schedule the My Prospects process to run nightly to keep the My
Prospects worksets current for all users.
The functionality of Contributor Relations Outreach is fully realized when each prospect has a constituent
type assigned.
Related Links
"Assigning Constituent Types" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor Relations)
"Maintaining an Organization's Financial Information" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor
Relations)
Assigning Resources to the My Prospects Workset
Several resource assignment pages are available within PeopleSoft Contributor Relations that enable
you to assign a prospect to an outreach officer. These additions immediately update their My Prospects
worksets (or create new ones, if none already exist), regardless of whether the My Prospects process has
been run.
The following table lists all PeopleSoft Contributor Relations pages where you can assign a prospect to an
outreach officer, thus updating the My Prospects workset:
Contributor Relations Page or Component
Assignment Condition
Resource Assignment component
Any staff or volunteer assignment for a user who also has a
system user ID.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
389
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Contributor Relations Page or Component
Assignment Condition
Mass Assign Staff page
Any staff or volunteer assignment for a user who also has a
system user ID.
Workset Mass Assignments component
Any staff or volunteer assignment for a user who also has a
system user ID.
Prospect Action page
Any user assigned as the responsible person, solicitor, or
assigned resource.
Action Info page
Any user assigned as the responsible person, solicitor, or
assigned resource.
Mass Actions 1 page
Any user assigned as the responsible person, solicitor, or
assigned resource.
Mass Actions 2 page
Any user assigned as the responsible person, solicitor, or
assigned resource.
Workset Mass Actions component
Any user assigned as the responsible person, solicitor, or
assigned resource.
Bequest Detail page
Assigned bequest internal resources on the AV_PG_STAFF
record.
Trust Detail page
Assigned trust internal resources.
Gift Annuity Detail page
Assigned gift annuity internal resources.
Pooled Income Information page
Assigned pooled income internal resources.
Note: A deletion from any one of these pages or components affects the My Prospects workset only when
the My Prospects process runs.
Related Links
"Understanding Prospect Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor Relations)
Managing an Action Plan
The links under My Action Plan on the Outreach Home page enable outreach officers to review reminders
and manage action plans. This section discusses how to:
390
•
Review reminders.
•
View assigned actions.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Pages Used to Manage an Action Plan
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
My Reminders
AV_MYREMINDERS
Self Service, Outreach, My
Prospects, My Reminders
View actions that need
immediate or current
attention.
My Action Plan
AV_OUTR_TODO_LIST
Self Service, Outreach, My
Prospects, My Action Plan
View all actions.
Reviewing Reminders
The My Reminders page appears even if no reminders exist. For reminders to appear, the user's ID must
have at least one prospect action assigned to it.
This page displays actions in three categories (Past Due, Due Today, and Upcoming) based on the planned
date. The system sorts the reminders to appear in alphabetical order. Prospects are constituents who
are affected by the action. Users click an action description to display details on the Prospect Action
Summary page, where users can then edit the action. The Action Type field describes the type of action
required. Action type values are defined on the Action Types page. The Planned Date and Complete
Date fields appear when the action is intended to occur and when it actually occurred. The Action Status
field indicates whether the action is Scheduled, Pending, On Hold, Completed, or Cancelled. The
organization can add additional status values on the Setup Action Status page. The Result field displays
the outcome of the action.
Users enter the number of upcoming days for which to display reminders (based on the planned date).
The default display is the current date plus seven. To expand or shorten the displayed list, users enter a
new value in the Number of Upcoming Days field and click the Refresh button. Users click the Save as
Default button to save the value in this field as the new default display period for that user.
Users click the Outreach link on the portal navigation to return to the Outreach navigation page. If they
have modified the number of upcoming days, the system prompts them to save their changes.
Viewing Assigned Actions
The My Action Plan page appears even if no action plan items exist. For items to appear, the user's ID
must have at least one prospect action assigned to it.
This page is populated with all current (incomplete) actions that are before or equal to today's date and
the value of the Reminder Days field defined on the CR Installation page. To choose a different range of
actions, users first must select an institution, then enter a date range. When they click the Refresh button,
the page displays actions that are assigned to the user that meets the institution and date criteria, sorted in
alphabetical order by prospect name. Prospects are constituents who are affected by the action.
Users click an action description to display details on the Prospect Action Summary page, where users
can then edit the action. The Action Type field describes the type of action required. Action type values
are defined by your organization on the Action Types page. The Planned Date and Complete Date fields
show when the action is intended to occur and when it actually occurred. The Action Status field lists
whether the action is Scheduled, Pending, On Hold, Completed, or Cancelled. The organization can
add additional status values on the Setup Action Status page. The Result field displays the outcome of the
action.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
391
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Managing Prospect Strategies
This section discusses how to:
•
Select a prospect name.
•
Edit or add a prospect strategy.
•
Edit or add prospect strategy details.
•
Link a prospect strategy to initiatives.
•
Link a prospect strategy to actions.
•
View a prospect strategy summary.
Pages Used to Manage Prospect Strategies
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Prospect Strategy - Select a
Prospect
AV_OUTR_SRCH
Self Service, Outreach, My
Search for and select a
Prospects, My Stewardship
prospect strategy record from
Plans, Add/Update a Strategy the My Prospects workset.
Prospect Strategy - Edit
Strategy
AV_OUTR_STRT_LIST
Click a prospect name in the
Search Results area of the
Prospect Strategy - Select a
Prospect page.
Prospect Strategy - Strategy
Detail
AV_OUTR_STRT_DTL
Click a link under the Strategy Enter or update a specific
Name heading or click the
strategy plan for cultivating
Add a Strategy button on
the prospect.
the Prospect Strategy - Edit
Strategy page.
Prospect Strategy - Linked
Initiatives
AV_OUTR_STRT_INIT
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Strategy - Strategy
Detail page.
Link a prospect strategy to
one or more initiatives, if
appropriate.
Prospect Strategy - Linked
Actions
AV_OUTR_STRT_ACTN
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Strategy - Linked
Initiatives page.
Link a prospect strategy to
one or more actions. Users
can also use this page to view
linked spouse actions.
Prospect Strategy - Summary
AV_OUTR_STRT_SMRY
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Strategy - Linked
Actions page.
View and print a prospect
strategy summary.
Select a prospect strategy to
edit, add, or delete.
Selecting a Prospect Name
Access the Prospect Strategy - Select a Prospect page (Self Service, Outreach, My Prospects, My
Stewardship Plans, Add/Update a Strategy).
392
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
To add or update prospect strategies, outreach officers must first access the Prospect Strategy page, search
their prospect worksets, and select prospect names. After a user selects a name, that user can then add new
strategies or edit existing ones on that prospect record.
To search for a prospect, select an institution and any additional combination of search values.
When you click the Search button, the results appear at the bottom of the page in alphabetical order. At
any point, you can clear search values.
Note: Search pages for strategies and actions in PeopleSoft Outreach are populated only with members of
the My Prospects workset.
The following format restrictions apply to the fields on this page: The value in the Class Year field must
be in CCYY format (century/year), the value in the City field must use initial capitals and include spaces
between words, and the value in the Org Name field must be uppercase and exclude spaces between
words. In addition, note that the values in the ID fields (Last Name, First Name, and Org Name) convert
to uppercase when you click the Search button.
Person Criteria
The fields in this group box apply only to person records. When you enter search criteria in this group box
and click the Search button, the system also uses criteria entered in the Common Criteria group box, but
ignores any criteria entered in the Organization Criteria group box.
To search for a person, enter an employee ID, first name, last name, or class year.
Organization Criteria
The fields in this group box apply only to organization records. When you enter search criteria in this
group box and click the Search button, the system also uses criteria entered in the Common Criteria group
box, but ignores any criteria entered in the Person Criteria group box.
To search for an organization, enter values in the Org ID, Org Name, or Industry Code (SIC) fields.
Common Criteria
Use the fields in this group box to search for people, organizations, or both.
The system populates the Institution and Country fields by default. The default country value depends
on your installation setup, but you can change the value here. The values in the State field depend on the
country selected.
Constituent Type field values relate specifically to either people or organizations. The value that you
select affects your search results. For example, if you search for organizations but choose a person
constituent type of Alumni, the search displays no prospect records.
Note: Valid constituent types are shipped with your system and should not be altered.
Examples
Here are three examples of search results:
•
If you enter a city and a constituent type, the search results display all prospects with the selected
constituent type who live in that city.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
393
Using Self-Service Outreach
•
Chapter 29
If you enter a person ID, but select the Organizations Only search option, the system ignores the
values in the Person Criteria group box.
The search results display no people, but instead display all organizations that meet the common
criteria.
•
If you enter a person's partial last name and a partial organization name and then select the Both
search option, the system searches for person and organization prospects that meet the criteria in
either group box.
The search results display all people and all organizations that meet the partial name criteria.
Editing or Adding a Prospect Strategy
Access the Prospect Strategy - Edit Strategy page (click a prospect name in the Search Results area of the
Prospect Strategy - Select a Prospect page).
To edit an existing strategy, click a link under the Strategy Name heading. If no strategies exist for the
prospect and you want to add a new strategy, then click the Add a Strategy button. Both the link and
the button access the Prospect Strategy - Strategy Detail page. If you are adding a new strategy, then
you must enter the strategy detail information on the Prospect Strategy - Strategy Detail page. If you are
editing an existing strategy, the system populates the Prospect Strategy - Strategy Detail page with the
existing data.
To remove an entire strategy from a prospect's record, select the appropriate check box and click the
Delete button. A warning message appears, asking you to click the OK button to confirm the deletion or
click the Cancel button to return to the Prospect Strategy - Edit Strategy page. You can delete multiple
strategies at the same time.
Editing or Adding Prospect Strategy Details
Access the Prospect Strategy - Strategy Detail page (click a link under the Strategy Name heading or click
the Add a Strategy button on the Prospect Strategy - Edit Strategy page).
Page Layout
All of the Prospect Strategy pages display the same information at the top of the page: the step of the
process; the prospect's name, email address, and highest-ranking constituent type; and the name of the
assigned prospect manager. You can click the email address link to launch your email program and send
a message to the prospect, then return to this page in the process. For a prospect who is a person, you can
access the Constituent Type Summary page, which lists all assigned constituent types for the prospect.
Several buttons can appear in the upper-right corner of the page:
View information for the prospect's spouse record in the system.
Assign or view communication records for the prospect.
Assign or view checklists for the prospect.
394
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Add a comment or view a list of all comments about the
prospect.
View Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA)
biographic information for the prospect.
View details about the service restrictions that are associated
with negative service indicators for the prospect.
View details about the positive service indicators for the
prospect.
In addition, the navigation buttons on this page apply to all of the Prospect Strategy pages.
Strategy Detail
In this section, you enter or change a strategy name, select its status, and select whether to link the
strategy to the prospect's spouse and manage the prospects as a couple.
Note: The Apply Strategy to Spouse option is available only if a spouse exists for the prospect in the
system.
You can also enter or edit a detailed strategy description using the long free-text description field and
mark the date and time of each descriptive entry.
Linking a Prospect Strategy to Initiatives
Access the Prospect Strategy - Link Strategy to Initiatives page (click the Next button on the Prospect
Strategy - Strategy Detail page).
The instructions on the page lead you through this optional process of linking an initiative to the strategy.
Adding a campaign initiative to a prospect's strategy results in the prospect being identified as a prospect
for that campaign. You select an initiative type from the available options. In addition to these delivered
types, the organization can define more types on the Setup Initiative Types page. After selecting the type,
you enter an initiative of that type or selects one from the prompt.
Linking a Prospect Strategy to Actions
Access the Prospect Strategy - Linked Actions page (click the Next button on the Prospect Strategy Linked Initiatives page).
Outreach officers can use the Prospect Strategy - Linked Actions page to manage specific actions to
achieve the strategy. The page instructions lead you through the process of editing any existing actions;
you can also click the Add an Action button to link new ones. Any actions previously added and linked to
the strategy appear on this page. You can click a link under the Action heading to display the populated
Prospect Action - Action Detail page; you can click the Add an Action button to display a blank Prospect
Action - Action Detail page.
This page also displays any actions that have been added to a spouse's record that are linked to this
strategy. You can click the Action link to display the Prospect Action - Action Detail page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
395
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Related Links
Editing or Adding Prospect Action Details
Viewing a Prospect Strategy Summary
Access the Prospect Strategy - Summary page (click the Next button on the Prospect Strategy - Linked
Actions page).
You can print the page using your web browser's print functionality (File, Print, or Ctrl+P). You can edit
any section or click the appropriate number in the upper-left portion of the page to return to the step that
enables you to edit that part of the process.
To return directly to the summary from the edited step, you can click the last of the numbered circles in
the upper-left corner of the page.
After viewing the summary information, you must save the transaction if you did not save the strategy in
a prior step.
Managing Prospect Actions
This section discusses how to:
396
•
Select a prospect name prior to managing prospect actions.
•
Edit or add a prospect action.
•
Edit or add prospect action details.
•
(Optional) Edit or add ask information.
•
(Optional) Edit or add prospect action descriptions.
•
Assign resources to prospect actions.
•
Link prospect actions to initiatives.
•
View a prospect action summary.
•
Select a prospect name prior to completing an action.
•
Select an action to complete.
•
Complete a prospect action.
•
Select a prospect name prior to completing a contact report.
•
Enter contact report details.
•
View a contact report summary.
•
Send a contact report.
•
Send updated biographical information.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Pages Used to Manage Prospect Actions
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Prospect Action - Select a
Prospect
AV_OUTR_SRCH
Self Service, Outreach, My
Prospects, My Stewardship
Plans, Add/Update an Action
Search for and select a
prospect action record from
the My Prospects workset.
Prospect Action - Edit Action
AV_OUTR_ACTN_LIST
Click a name in the Search
Results area of the Prospect
Action - Select a Prospect
page.
Select a prospect action to
edit.
Prospect Action - Action
Detail
AV_OUTR_ACTN_DTL
Click a link under the Action
Description heading or click
the Add an Action button on
the Prospect Action - Edit
Action page.
Enter or update an action step
for a prospect. The action
step is carried out by the staff
member or volunteer.
Prospect Action - Ask
Information
AV_OUTR_ACTN_ASK
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Action - Action
Detail page.
Enter details about an action
that includes a donation
request (ask). If the action
type on the Prospect Action Action Detail page is not Ask,
you should skip this page.
Prospect Action - Action
Description
AV_OUTR_ACTN_DSCR
Click the Next button on
the Prospect Action - Ask
Information page.
Enter detailed information
related to the action. If the
action does not require further
description, you can skip this
page.
Prospect Action - Assigned
Resources
AV_OUTR_ACTN_ASGN
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Action - Action
Description page.
Assign other resources to the
action. If appropriate, you can
skip this page.
Prospect Action - Linked
Initiatives
AV_OUTR_ACTN_INIT
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Action - Assigned
Resources page.
Link campaign, event,
membership, volunteer, or
other initiatives to the action.
If appropriate, you can skip
this page.
Prospect Action - Summary
AV_OUTR_ACTN_SMRY
Click the Next button on the
Prospect Action - Linked
Initiatives page.
View and print a prospect
action summary.
Prospect Action Results Select a Prospect
AV_OUTR_SRCH
Self Service, Outreach, My
Prospects, My Stewardship
Plans, Complete an Action
Search for and select a
prospect record from the My
Prospects workset that has an
action to complete.
Prospect Action - Results Edit Action
AV_OUTR_RSLT_LIST
Click a name in the Search
Results area of the Prospect
Action Results - Select a
Prospect page.
Select a specific action to
complete.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
397
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Prospect Action - Results
AV_OUTR_ACTN_RSLT
Click a link under the Action
Description heading on the
Prospect Action - Results Edit Action page.
Enter the specific results of a
completed action.
Prospect Contact Report Select a Prospect
AV_OUTR_SRCH
Self Service, Outreach, My
Prospects, My Stewardship
Plans, Complete Contact
Report
Search for and select a
prospect record from the My
Prospects workset to complete
and send a contact report.
Prospect Contact Report Detail
AV_OUTR_ACTN_CNCT
Click a name in the Search
Results area of the Prospect
Contact Report - Select a
Prospect page.
Enter constituent contact
report details.
Prospect Contact Report Summary
AV_OUTR_ACTN_CSMRY
Click the Printer Friendly
Version link on the Prospect
Contact Report - Detail page.
View a printable summary of
all information on the contact
report.
Send Contact Report
AV_OUTR_CNCT_SEND
Click the Send Report button
on the Prospect Contact
Report - Detail page.
Send a completed contact
report to a list of users.
Send BioDemo Update
AV_OUTR_BIO_SEND
Click the Send BioDemo
Send updated biographical
Update button on the Prospect and demographic data, learned
Contact Report - Detail page. during a prospect contact, to
the department responsible for
updates to biodemo data.
Selecting a Prospect Name Prior to Managing Prospect Actions
Outreach officers can manage prospect actions by using the three links on the Outreach Home page. Their
options are to add or update an action, complete an action, or complete a prospect contact report.
To add or update prospect actions, outreach officers must first access the Prospect Action page, search
their prospect worksets, and select prospect names. When a user selects a name, that user can then add
new actions or edit existing ones on that prospect record.
Related Links
Selecting a Prospect Name
Editing or Adding a Prospect Action
Access the Prospect Action - Edit Action page (click a name in the Search Results area of the Prospect
Action - Select a Prospect page).
This page lists each action associated with the prospect, its status, and its planned completion date.
1. Select an action description, to edit an existing action.
2. Click the Add an Action button, if no existing actions are available, for the prospect and you want to
add a new action.
398
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Note: Both the link and the button access the Prospect Action - Action Detail page.
3. Enter the action detail information, If you are adding a new action.
The system populates the Prospect Action - Action Detail page with the existing data.
Editing or Adding Prospect Action Details
Access the Prospect Action - Action Detail page (click a link under the Action Description heading or
click the Add an Action button on the Prospect Action - Edit Action page).
Users enter or change an action description and select its status from the available options. Next, users
enter an expected completion date for the action as well as a date when the action expires if it is not
completed. The action no longer appears in the current actions lists on the My Reminders page when
the action is expired. It does appear on the My Action Plan page if the date range entered includes the
action date of the expired action. The expected completion date appears in grids as the planned date.
Users also have options to select an action type and method of contact. Available values for the Action
Type and Method fields on this page are defined by the organization. To complete the action, users select
a responsible person. When users enter the responsible person's ID, the responsible person's name appears
to the right of the ID field. Finally, users may select the strategy that this action supports.
Note: The values for the Responsible Person Type field are delivered with the system as translate values.
Do not modify these translate values in any way. Any modifications to these values require a substantial
programming effort.
Related Links
Editing or Adding Prospect Strategy Details
(Optional) Editing or Adding Ask Information
Access the Prospect Action - Ask Information page (click the Next button on the Prospect Action - Action
Detail page).
If the action type is Ask, outreach officers must enter specific ask information on this page. Users enter
the monetary range (From and To amounts) to be requested as a donation. The type of solicitor for the
donation and the solicitor name are required if the action is an ask. Only resources defined with a role of
Solicitor (SOL) appear in the Solicitor field.
If the action type is not Ask, the system skips this page in the component. Users can return to view the
page, but the fields are unavailable for entry.
Note: The values for solicitor type are delivered with the system as translate values. Do not modify these
translate values in any way. Any modifications to these values require a substantial programming effort.
(Optional) Editing or Adding Prospect Action Descriptions
Access the Prospect Action page .
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
399
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
This page contains a 254-character free-form text field in which outreach officers can enter brief details
of the action. Users can mark the date and time of each descriptive entry by clicking the Date/Time Stamp
button.
Assigning Resources to Prospect Actions
Access the Prospect Action - Assign Others to Action page.
If users want to assign additional resources to the action, they can add them on the Prospect Action
- Assigned Resources page. Assigned resources assist the outreach officer in completing the action
either by providing information or by actual involvement in the action itself. Roles indicate the assigned
resource's relation to the action; the institution defines these values.
To add a resource, users select the resource type, and then enter the role and the ID of the resource
assigned.
Note: The values for the Resource Assigned field are delivered with the system as translate values. Do
not modify these translate values in any way. Any modifications to these values require a substantial
programming effort.
Linking Prospect Actions to Initiatives
Access the Prospect Action - Linked Initiatives to Action page.
If outreach officers want to link initiatives to an action, they can add them on the Prospect Action Linked Initiatives page. Linking a campaign initiative to an action means that the prospect appears on
the prospect list for that campaign. To begin, a user clicks the Add an Initiative button. Next, the user
enters an initiative type and initiative code. The name of the initiative appears to the right of the code. The
organization defines the initiative type code values on the Initiative Types page.
Viewing a Prospect Action Summary
Access the Prospect Action - Summary page (click the Next button on the Prospect Action - Linked
Initiatives page).
When the outreach officer finishes entering or editing all of the desired action information, the Prospect
Action - Summary page appears. Users can print the page using their web browser's print functionality
(File, Print or Ctrl+P). If a user wants to edit a section, the user can return to the step that enables editing
of that part of the process by clicking the Edit button.
If outreach officers click the Send Report button, the Send Contact Report page appears where they can
enter action report information. When users complete a prospect contact report using the Send Contact
Report page, the system creates an enhanced contact report.
400
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
The following example shows the information contained in the contact report:
Image: Send contact report example
An example of a contact report.
These reports provide detailed information and enable outreach officers to send copies of incomplete
actions as well as completed contact reports to other resources. Your organization can use these reports as
an effective communication tool.
To return directly to the summary from the edited step, users can click the last of the numbered circles in
the upper-left corner of the page.
When finished viewing the summary information, if they have not already done so, users must save the
transaction if they want to keep it.
Selecting a Prospect Name Prior to Completing an Action
To complete prospect actions, outreach officers must first access the Prospect Action - Results page,
search their prospect worksets, and select prospect names. When a user selects a name, that user can then
complete actions on a prospect record.
Related Links
Selecting a Prospect Name
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
401
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Selecting an Action to Complete
Access the Prospect Action - Results - Edit Action page (click a name in the Search Results area of the
Prospect Action Results - Select a Prospect page).
This page lists each action associated with the prospect, its status, and its planned date for completion.
Outreach officers click a link under the Action Description heading to select the action that they want to
complete; the system displays the Prospect Action - Results page.
Completing a Prospect Action
Access the Prospect Action - Results page (click a link under the Action Description heading on the
Prospect Action - Results - Edit Action page).
In addition to the usual prospect information at the top of the page, this page also displays the name of the
action.
Action Results
Outreach officers select an action status. The status has a default value of Complete. Users also must
select a result code. The organization can define other values as well.
Next, users complete the Complete Date field. The current date appears by default the first time that
the page is accessed for an action, but the default value can be overwritten. If the ask resulted in a
commitment, enter the expected commitment amount, or the monetary amount that you expect to receive
from the donor because of this action. The Actual Commitment field displays the monetary amount that
the organization received because of this action.
Action Results - Pledge
Users can enter the pledge number for a pledge that resulted from the action. Users click the Details link
to view the Pledge Detail page.
Action Gifts
Users can enter the gift number for a gift that was received as a result of the action. Users click the Details
link to view the Gift Detail page. To add another gift to the action results, users click the Add a gift
button. Users click the Add another Action button to start the process for creating a new action for that
prospect.
When saving the page, if the user entered a gift number, the date and gift amount appear to the right of
the gift number. The process works similarly if a user enters a pledge number. The date and time that the
action was last updated appear at the bottom of the page.
Users can click the Contact Report button to go directly to the Prospect Contact Report page.
Related Links
Entering Contact Report Details
Selecting a Prospect Name Prior to Completing a Contact Report
Users can complete a contact report in two ways:
402
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
•
Using Self-Service Outreach
If they are at the end of the process for completing an action, they can click the Contact Report button
on the Prospect Action - Results detail page.
The system displays the Prospect Contact Report - Detail page.
•
If they are at the beginning of the process for completing a contact report, they must first access the
Prospect Contact Report page, search their prospect worksets, and select prospect names.
When users select a name, they can complete a contact report for that prospect.
Related Links
Selecting a Prospect Name
Entering Contact Report Details
Access the Prospect Contact Report page (Self Service, Outreach, My Prospects, My Stewardship Plans,
Complete Contact Report).
In addition to the usual prospect information at the top of the page, this page also displays the name of the
action.
Contact Report Detail
Outreach officers first enter their author IDs (the author ID is the user ID by default) and the report dates
(the report date is the current date by default). Users can view a printer-friendly version of the Prospect
Contact Report summary page.
The Report field is a long free-form text area where outreach officers can enter any details of the prospect
contact, such as what happened as a result of the action or notes about possible further contacts. Users
click the Date/Time Stamp button to mark the date and time of each descriptive entry. If users learn new
information about a new prospect, they can link other prospects to this contact report by using the Link
Report to Other Prospects section.
Link Report to Other Prospects
To link the report to a prospect's spouse, click the Link to Spouse button. The spouse ID appears in the ID
field. Users can then access the same contact report through either the prospect ID or the spouse ID.
Note: The Link to Spouse button appears only if a spouse exists for the prospect in the system.
To link the report to other prospects, users select a value in the ID Type field and enter an ID. The linked
prospect's name appears to the right of the ID. ID type values are delivered by the system. To link to more
than one prospect, users click the Link another Prospect button. Users can also click the Delete button to
unlink any currently linked prospects from the action.
Users click the Save button to save the contact report. The date and time that the action was last updated
appear above the Report field. Users click the Send Report button to access the Send Contact Report page.
Users click the Send BioDemo Update button to access the Send BioDemo Update page.
Related Links
Sending a Contact Report
Sending Updated Biographical Information
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
403
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Viewing a Contact Report Summary
Access the Prospect Contact Report - Contact Report Summary page (click the Printer Friendly Version
link on the Prospect Contact Report - Detail page).
Users can review all contact report information online or print the complete contact report page as well
using their web browser's Print functionality (File, Print or Ctrl+P).
After printing or viewing, users can return to the Prospect Contact Report - Detail page.
Sending a Contact Report
Access the Send Contact Report page (click the Send Report button on the Prospect Contact Report Detail page).
When outreach officers complete a contact report and are ready to distribute it, they can use this page to
send it to anyone in the organization. They can define their distribution lists by selecting the ID type of
the recipients and entering the distribution ID. A user can also select a Role ID type to send the report
to all users with the selected security role. A user can also enter any other email address list members
to include in the distribution, separating multiple email addresses with a semicolon. A user is required
to either define an ID type and distribution ID or enter an email address to send the contact report. The
system sends emails to the email addresses for users as defined on the Maintain Security - User Profiles
page.
The system populates the Email portion of the page with a default subject description that includes the
prospect name and action description. The Email Text field contains the outreach officer's name and the
entire contents of the contact report from the Prospect Contact Report Detail page. Users can edit any
field and add any discussion text necessary.
When finished, a user clicks the Send button to trigger the workflow that sends the contact report to the
defined distribution list. That user receives a confirmation message that the email was sent, then clicks
OK or Cancel to return to the Send Contact Report page. If a user clicks Return instead of Send prior to
sending, the system cancels the workflow and returns to the Prospect Contact Report Detail page.
Sending Updated Biographical Information
Access the Send BioDemo Update page (click the Send BioDemo Update button on the Prospect Contact
Report - Detail page).
During the course of managing a prospect, outreach officers occasionally learn new biodemo information.
This page enables users to distribute this new information to anyone in the organization. Users can define
their distribution lists by selecting the ID types of the recipients and entering their distribution IDs. A
user can also select a Role ID type to send the report to all users with the selected security role. They can
also enter any other email address list members that they want to include in the distribution, separating
multiple email addresses with semicolons. Users are required to either define an ID type and distribution
ID or enter an email address to send the contact report. The system sends emails to the email addresses for
users as defined on the Maintain Security - User Profiles page.
The system populates the Email portion of the page with a default subject description that includes the
prospect name and ID. The Email Text field begins with the outreach officer's name; users can then enter
any updated information that is associated with the prospect.
404
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
When finished, users click Send to trigger the workflow that sends the contact report to the distribution
list. They receive a confirmation message that the email was sent, then click OK or Cancel to return to the
Send Contact Report page. If users click Return instead of Send prior to sending, the system cancels the
workflow and returns to the Prospect Contact Report - Detail page.
Analyzing Prospect Information
PeopleSoft Contributor Relations provides a number of pages that outreach officers can use to analyze
prospect information. PeopleSoft Outreach offers a menu structure that gathers and delivers an assortment
of pages that facilitate an outreach officer's responsibilities. The links within these pages lead to either a
run control page for a report or an inquiry page of summarized prospect information. These pages are not
limited to the My Prospects workset and can be accessed for any constituent in the system.
This menu contains submenu links to personal information, organizational information, prospect lists
and worksets, stewardship details, and PeopleSoft Contributor Relations reports. The following table
summarizes these menu paths and lists all prospect analysis information pages that PeopleSoft Outreach
delivers:
Menu Navigation
Prospect Information Page
Self Service, Outreach, View Person Information, Constituent
Information
Person Profile
Involvement Summary
Person Profile
Membership History
Person Profile
Audience History
Person Profile
Event History
Person Profile
Volunteer History
Person Profile
Relationship Summary
Person Profile
Communication Summary
Person Profile
Comment Summary
Person Profile
Checklist Summary
Person Profile
Self Service, Outreach, View Person Information, Prospect
Information
Strategy Summary
Clearance Summary
Strategy Summary
Personal Assets
Strategy Summary
Ratings Summary
Strategy Summary
Philanthropic Interests
Strategy Summary
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
405
Using Self-Service Outreach
406
Chapter 29
Menu Navigation
Prospect Information Page
Donor Appreciation Summary
Strategy Summary
Planned Giving Profile
Strategy Summary
Action Summary
Strategy Summary
Contact Report Summary
Strategy Summary
Prospect Assignments
Strategy Summary
Self Service, Outreach, View Person Information, Giving
Information
Giving Profile
Commitment Summary
Giving Profile
Commitment Register
Giving Profile
Transaction Register
Giving Profile
Giving Club Progress
Giving Profile
Open Pledge Register
Giving Profile
Self Service, Outreach, View Organization Information,
Constituent Information - Org
Organization Profile
Relationship Summary
Organization Profile
Involvement Summary
Organization Profile
Membership History
Organization Profile
Employee List
Organization Profile
Audience History
Organization Profile
Communication Summary
Organization Profile
Comment Summary
Organization Profile
Checklist Summary
Organization Profile
Self Service, Outreach, View Organization Information,
Prospect Information - Org
Strategy Summary
Action Summary
Strategy Summary
Contact Report Summary
Strategy Summary
Clearance Summary
Strategy Summary
Ratings Summary
Strategy Summary
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Menu Navigation
Prospect Information Page
Philanthropic Interests
Strategy Summary
Donor Appreciation Summary
Strategy Summary
Prospect Assignments
Strategy Summary
Self Service, Outreach, View Organization Information,
Giving Information - Org
Giving Profile
Commitment Summary
Giving Profile
Commitment Register
Giving Profile
Transaction Register
Giving Profile
Open Pledge Register
Giving Profile
Matching Gifts
Giving Profile
Giving Club Progress
Giving Profile
Self Service, Outreach, View Lists
Person Profile
Campaign Prospects
Person Profile
Top Donors
Person Profile
Giving Club Membership
Person Profile
Involvement Roster
Person Profile
Profile Compare
Person Profile
Self Service, Outreach, View Reference Information
Campaigns
Giving Clubs
Campaigns
Designations
Campaigns
Self Service, Outreach, CR Reports
Bio-Bit Report - Person
Bio-Bit Report - Organization
Bio-Bit Report - Person
Bio-Bit Report - Workset
Bio-Bit Report - Person
Designation Donors
Bio-Bit Report - Person
Campaign Progress
Bio-Bit Report - Person
Role Assignments
Bio-Bit Report - Person
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
407
Using Self-Service Outreach
Chapter 29
Managing Prospects Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
This topic discusses how to manage constituent and prospect information through PeopleSoft Fluid User
Interface.
The search pages used in these Fluid interfaces are populated only with members of the My Prospects
workset. For information about the search criteria, see Selecting a Prospect Name.
Related Links
"Understanding PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface Homepages" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Application Fundamentals)
"Setting Up Contributor Relations Installation Defaults" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor
Relations)
Pages Used to Manage Prospects Using PeopleSoft Fluid User Interface
Page/Tile Name
Definition Name
Usage
Donor Prospects Tile
AV_OUTR_SRCH_S_FL
Access the Profile, Prospect Actions, and
Prospect Strategies pages.
See "Using the Contributor
Relations Homepage" (PeopleSoft
Campus Solutions 9.2: Application
Fundamentals).
Profile Page
AV_PRSN_PROFILE_FL
View basic information about the
prospect.
Prospect Actions Page
AV_OUTR_ACTN_LI_FL
View all current (incomplete) actions, as
well as add or delete an action.
Prospect Strategies Page
AV_OUTR_STRT_LI_FL
View, add, delete strategies.
Person Profile Page
AV_PRSN_PROFILE
Click to access the classic Person Profile
page.
See "Viewing a Person Profile"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Contributor Relations).
Common Elements Used in Donor Prospects
Element
Definition
Click to access a list of related actions.
Click to access a list of pages on the left panel.
408
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 29
Using Self-Service Outreach
Viewing Prospect Information
Use the Profile page to view information about constituents and prospects.
To access the Profile page:
1. Click the Donor Prospects tile.
2. In Prospect Search, select a prospect by initiating a search.
3. In the search results, do one of the following:
•
Select a prospect’s name.
•
Click the Related Actions icon, then select Profiles.
The prospect’s Profile page appears. From the Profile page you can view the prospect’s constituent,
donor, or prospect profile.
Managing Actions
Use the Prospect Actions page to:
•
View all current scheduled actions.
•
Edit all current scheduled actions.
•
Add an action for the prospect.
To access the Action page, search for a prospect then do one of the following:
•
Select a prospect’s name.
1. From a smartphone, click the left panel icon then select Prospect Actions.
From a desktop or laptop, select Prospect Actions from the left panel.
2. Select an action.
•
Click the Related Actions icon next to the prospect’s name, then select Prospect Actions.
The Action page appears. From the Action page, you can view more information about the action, update
action details, or delete an action.
Note: You cannot delete actions with related attributes. To delete an action, you must remove the related
attributes.
Managing Strategies
Use the Prospect Strategies page to:
•
View all strategies that exist for the prospect.
•
Edit existing strategies.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
409
Using Self-Service Outreach
•
Chapter 29
Add a strategy for the prospect.
To access the Strategy page, search for a prospect then do one of the following:
•
Select a prospect’s name.
1. From a smartphone, click the left panel icon then select Prospect Actions.
From a desktop or laptop, select Prospect Strategies from the left panel.
2. Select a strategy.
•
Click the Related Actions icon next to the prospect’s name, then select Prospect Strategies.
The Strategy page appears. From the Strategy page, you can view more information about the strategy,
update its status, add or delete initiatives, and link actions to the strategy.
Related Links
"Understanding Initiative Management" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Contributor Relations)
410
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 30
Using Community Directory Search
Understanding Self-Service Community Directory Search
Important! Mass Change is a deprecated product. Support will be maintained for this product, but
no new development will be produced for Mass Change. It is strongly recommended that you use
Application Engine instead. For more information on PeopleSoft Application Engine, see PeopleTools:
Application Engine.
The Community Directory Search self-service functionality enables you to provide searchable directories
of members of your campus community online over the internet. Instead of exposing an entire list of
people at your institution and having users load and search through it, you can make student, employee, or
alumni directories available so users can search from smaller online lists and quickly locate individuals at
your institution.
To set up PeopleSoft Community Directory Search, run the Community Directory Load process to
generate a student, employee, or alumni directory. Specify the appropriate mass change definition for the
directory to generate, and specify the type of data to include in that directory.
If a student places FERPA privacy restriction on a specific type of data for him or herself, the system does
not expose that data in the online directory. Or, if the individual placed the restriction but chose to release
it for inclusion in a specific publication, for example, the Student Directory, then even though the data can
not be released elsewhere, the system displays it in the specified directory as indicated.
Generating Community Directories
This section discusses how to generate online directories.
Page Used to Generate Community Directories
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Community Directory Load
CAMPDIR_RUNCNTL
Set Up SACR, Product
Related, Community Access/
Directory, Community
Directory Load
Generate online directories.
Generating Online Directories
Access the Community Directory Load page ((Set Up SACR, Product Related, Community Access/
Directory, Community Directory Load).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
411
Using Community Directory Search
Chapter 30
Community Directories
Mass Change Definition
Specify the mass change definition for the directory to generate.
The following mass changes are delivered with your system:
CampDir_Alumni: Generates the Alumni Directory.
CampDir_Staff: Generates the Employee Directory
CampDir_Student: Generates the Student Directory
Process FERPA
Select to apply the FERPA restrictions and release to
publications options selected on the FERPA page, FERPA
Quick Entry page, or the self-service Privacy Settings page in
PeopleSoft Campus Self Service.
Edit Mass Change Definition
Click to access the Mass Change Definition search page
where you can select the mass change definition to edit or to
regenerate.
Data Type
Select one or any combination of data types to include in the directory.
Name Type
Select the type of name to include for individuals in this
directory.
Address Type
Select the type of address to include for individuals in this
directory.
Phone Type
Select the type of phone data to include for individuals in this
directory.
Email Type
Select the type of email address to include for individuals in this
directory.
To keep your community directories up to date, run the process at least once a day. Always regenerate the
mass changes prior to running the process.
Searching Community Directories
This section discusses how to:
412
•
Specify the directory to search.
•
Search the community directory.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 30
Using Community Directory Search
Pages Used to Search the Directories
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Community Directory Search
SRCH_CD_TYPE
Self Service, Community
Directory Search
Specify the community
directory and criteria to
search.
Community Directory for
Students
SRCH_STDNT_CRIT
On the Community Directory
page, select Student Directory
and enter criteria for which to
search.
View the search results
obtained from the Student
Directory and enter fields to
perform a new search.
Community Directory for
Employees
SRCH_STAFF_CRIT
On the Community Directory
page, select Employee
Directory and enter criteria for
which to search.
View the search results
obtained from the Employee
Directory and enter fields to
perform a new search.
Community Directory for
Alumni
SRCH_ALUMN_CRIT
On the Community Directory
page, select Alumni Directory
and enter criteria for which to
search.
View the search results
obtained from the Alumni
Directory and enter fields to
perform a new search.
Student Profile
STDNT_PROF_SEC
Click the student's name on
the Community Directory for
Students page.
View data in the directory
profile for that person.
Employee Profile
STAFF_PROF_SEC
Click the employee's name on
the Community Directory for
Employees page.
View data in the directory
profile for that person.
Alumni Profile
ALUMN_PROF_SEC
Click the alumnus name on
the Community Directory for
Alumni page.
View data in the directory
profile for that person.
Specifying the Directory to Search
Access the Community Directory Search page (Self Service, Community Directory Search).
Directory Type
Select the directory type (Alumni Directory, Staff Directory, or
Student Directory) to search.
Search By
Specify the criteria (First Name, Full Name (Last,First), or Last
Name) by which to search.
Specify one or more characters to use. For example, if you
select First Name and enter only S, the system searches through
the specified directory for all first names that begin with "S."
Search
Click to access the specified directory.
Searching a Community Directory
Access the Community Directory for Students (on the Community Directory page, select Student
Directory and enter criteria for which to search, Community Directory for Employees (on the Community
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
413
Using Community Directory Search
Chapter 30
Directory page, select Employee Directory and enter criteria for which to search), or Community
Directory for Alumni page (on the Community Directory page, select Alumni Directory and enter criteria
for which to search).
Search Results
414
Names
Click the individual's name to access the directory profile page
for that person where you can view or edit profile data.
Email Address
Click the individual's email address to send an email to that
address.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
Using Campus Mobile
Accessing Campus Mobile Functionality
This section lists the pages within the Campus Mobile smartphone application.
Note: The pages listed here can be accessed in the Campus Mobile application archive file via Jdeveloper.
These are not objects that can be accessed through PeopleTools Application Designer.
Within the Campus Mobile system, the full object names of the pages listed in the following table (except
for the Login page) exist as oracle.cs.cm.view.[DEFINITION NAME].amx.
The screenshots throughout this document are from the iOS deployment of Campus Self Service Mobile.
Screens in the Android deployment will vary slightly to better match the Android user experience.
Pages Used to Access Campus Mobile Functionality
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Login
login.html
Launch the Campus Mobile
app.
Students navigate to various
Campus Mobile features.
Springboard
springboard.springboard
Log into the Campus Mobile
app.
Students begin their Campus
Mobile experience.
Class Schedule
schedule.schedule
Tap Schedule on the
springboard.
Students view their class
schedule for present and
future terms.
Class Details
search.section-details
Tap a class in the Landing
Page, Schedule, Cart, or
Search results.
Students view the details of a
selected class.
Map
map.show-location
Tap the Room field on the
Class Details page.
If the room has location
details entered into Campus
Solutions, students can view
the location of the room on a
map.
Contact Info
search.instructor-info
Tap the Primary Instructor
field on the Class Details
page.
If the instructor has contact
information entered into
Campus Solutions, students
can view the instructor’s
contact information.
Drop Class
schedule.drop-class
Tap the Drop Class button on
the Class Details page.
Students drop a class in which
they are enrolled, depending
on business rules within
Campus Solutions.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
415
Using Campus Mobile
416
Chapter 31
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Grades
grades.grades
•
Tap Grades on the
springboard.
Students view their grades.
•
Tap a grade event on the
Notifications tab of the
Landing page.
Class Search
search.class-search
Tap Classes on the
springboard.
Students search the class
schedule for terms in which
they are able to enroll.
Class Search Filter
search.display-filter
Tap the Filter button on the
Class Search page.
Students filter the returned
class search results.
Enroll
enrollOptions.enrollmentSecs
Tap the Enroll button on the
Class Details page.
Students enroll directly
to their class schedule,
depending on business rules
within Campus Solutions.
Enrollment Cart
cart.show-cart
Tap Cart on the springboard.
Students view their enrollment
cart for present and future
terms.
To Do
todoList.todoList
Tap To Do on the springboard. Students view their “to do”
list.
To Do Details
todoList.todoItemDetails
•
Tap an item on the To Do Students view the details of an
page.
item on their “to do” list.
•
Tap a To Do event on the
Notifications tab of the
Landing page.
Finances
finances.display-financial-info Tap Finances on the
springboard.
Students view their finances.
Financial Aid
financialAid.financial-aid
Tap Financial Aid Awards on
the springboard.
Students view their financial
aid awards information.
Profile
profile.display-settings
Tap Profile on the
springboard.
Students view and set
certain notification and user
preferences.
Holds
holds.holdsList
•
Tap Holds on the
springboard.
Students view their holds.
•
Tap a Hold event on the
Notifications tab of the
Landing page.
Applications
application.displayapplication-status
Tap Applications on the
springboard.
Students view their
admissions applications.
Contributions
involvement.Contributions
Tap Contributions on the
springboard.
Students make a gift to their
institution.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
Using Campus Mobile
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Landing Page
landingPage.landingPage
Open the Campus Mobile
app or tap What's Happening
Today on the springboard.
Students view their classes
for the day, to do items and
charges due that day or
overdue, as well as holds.
Notifications
landingPage.landingPage
Tap the Notifications tab on
Landing Page.
Students view a list of
configured events that have
occurred on their student
record or account within the
past 7 days.
About
springboard.about
Tap About on the springboard. View information about the
app.
Logging In
The delivered Campus Mobile login screen appears to the student when the Campus Mobile application
opens.
To access the Campus Mobile app, you must first authenticate. The authentication utilizes the standard
Campus Solutions PeopleTools sign-on. Therefore, the authentication (login and password) for a student
in Campus Mobile is the same as their authentication (login and password) used throughout Campus
Solutions Self Service.
The authentication passes from Campus Solutions to Campus Mobile via a REST web service.
For more information on the authentication web service, see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My
Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1).
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
417
Using Campus Mobile
Chapter 31
Using Springboard
The springboard is a menu delivered with a default set of icons that represent each function provided by
Campus Mobile.
Image: Example of springboard screen
This is an example of the Springboard screen.
Your institution can choose to customize the springboard to include its own icons and colors. The
springboard menu also includes the Logout functionality, which logs out of the application and shuts it
down.
418
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
Using Campus Mobile
About
This page presents information about the app. Any institution implementing Campus Mobile is expected
to update the information page with their copyright information, release number, and logo. The number at
the bottom left of the page is an Oracle internal version number to be used for troubleshooting.
Image: About page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the About page.
The Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1) provides information
on customizing and branding the application springboard and the About page.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
419
Using Campus Mobile
Chapter 31
Holds
The Holds feature provides a list of the student's holds (negative service indicators). The student can tap
on one of the holds to view more details about the hold, such as start and end dates, reason, and contact
details.
Image: Holds page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Holds page.
Landing Page
This is the first page seen when opening the app. It is a dynamic, timeboxed view of the student's day and
includes an up-to-the-minute view of the student's daily class schedule, charges due today, to do items
due today, holds, and any overdue charges or to do items. On the landing page is a Notifications tab. In
420
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
Using Campus Mobile
Notifications, the student sees a feed of events that have happened on their academic record and have
subsequently triggered Notifications (such as a posted final grade, or an added checklist item).
Image: Landing page
This example illustrates the fields and controls on the Landing page.
Using Class Schedule
This section discusses how to:
•
View class attributes.
•
Map to building locations of classes.
•
View instructor contact information.
•
Drop classes.
Class schedule presents a student’s schedule in three ways: a detailed list, a map, and a calendar view.
If the student is not enrolled in any classes for the current term, the class schedule view displays by
default the next term in which the student is term activated and has classes. The student can browse
through current and future terms by either tapping the term selector button or the left/right arrows. If
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
421
Using Campus Mobile
Chapter 31
the student is enrolled in multiple institutions or careers with multiple schedules, they can pick from the
multiple institutions and careers by tapping the term selector button. Campus Mobile stores the student's
view choices so that when they return to the Class Schedule feature it presents the most recent view (such
as the current term in calendar view.) All of the information provided in the schedule is delivered to the
Campus Mobile application using Enrollment Web Services).
The class schedule detailed view lists the courses by subject + catalog number + class description and
includes the following information for all enrolled, waitlisted, and dropped class sections:
•
Component type (such as lecture or lab)
•
Section number
•
Class number
•
Meeting pattern
•
Instructor
•
Room location
The class schedule map view shows all classes simultaneously on the map. Each class location is
represented by a pin. When the user taps the pin, the app presents the classes by subject + catalog number
and component type and shows the meeting pattern, meeting pattern date range, and room location. The
user can tap the popup view to open the Class Details page.
Note: The map display functionality requires a separate license to Oracle Maps Service for PeopleSoft.
For details, see Licensing Information User Manual for Campus Solutions (LIUM) on the Campus
Solutions Documentation Home Page in My Oracle Support.
The class schedule calendar view shows all classes in both a portrait and landscape calendar style view.
The class schedule calendar view lists the classes by subject + catalog number and component type along
with the location of the class. The user can tap the class to open the Class Details page. In landscape
mode, the classes appear in a calendar grid. Building locations that have more than one class section (or
meeting pattern) associated with them are marked with a pin that has multiple pinheads.
When the device is rotated to a horizontal or Landscape position, the Calendar View changes to a
traditional calendar format.
For information on customization and branding, see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle
Support (ID 1548793.1).
Viewing Class Attributes
When the student selects a class section in their schedule, the student is presented with information about
the class section including:
422
•
Description
•
Program
•
Campus
•
Location
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
Using Campus Mobile
•
Topic
•
Notes
•
Units
•
Grading Basis (such as Graded or Pass/No Pass)
•
Status
•
Textbook information.
Collapse or expand the class details by tapping the arrow in the description box. Below the class details,
the page displays the meeting pattern with the dates that it is active. If there are multiple meeting patterns
associated with the class, they all appear in this screen, ordered by date. From this page, a student can tap
the Room field to view a map of the building location if that data is available.
In addition, a student can tap the Instructor field on this page to see the instructor's email, phone, and
building office location if your institution has mapped these fields, and photo if your institution has
chosen to display it.
See Setting Up Campus Mobile Within Campus Solutions
Mapping to Building Locations of Classes
If the campus has provided latitude and longitude for their buildings on the Building Table component
within Campus Solutions, the Room field in the class section details actively links to a map of that
building location so the student can navigate to the class location.
The latitude and longitude fields are delivered to the Campus Mobile application through Enrollment Web
Services (EWS). For information about EWS, see the EWS guides in My Oracle Support (ID 1371391.1).
Campus Mobile delivers mapping with the maps API disabled. The maps API enables Campus Mobile to
show the building location and the location of the device (taking advantage of the GPS available on the
phone). Your institution can choose to enable Oracle Maps API or Google Maps API. For information
on how to enable mapping, see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID
1548793.1).
Note: The map display functionality requires a separate license to Oracle Maps Service for PeopleSoft.
For details, see Licensing Information User Manual for Campus Solutions (LIUM) on the Campus
Solutions Documentation Home Page in My Oracle Support.
Viewing Instructor Contact Information
If the campus has mapped instructor contact information in the Campus Mobile setup screen (Set Up
SACR, Product Related, Campus Mobile, Instructor Contact Setup) within Campus Solutions, the
Instructor field in the class section details actively links to the Info page that displays the instructor's
email, phone, address, and photo (where applicable). From this instructor contact page, the student can tap
the email address to send an email with their phone’s mail client or tap the phone number to start a phone
call.
Note: If the instructor is also a student, and they have elected FERPA restrictions, their contact
information does not appear.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
423
Using Campus Mobile
Chapter 31
Dropping Classes
On the Class Section Details page, a student has the ability to drop the class. When tapped, the Drop Class
button displays a confirmation screen prior to completing the drop.
Drop Class follows the same rules as those followed by Campus Self Service (as delivered by Enrollment
Web Services). Whether the drop is successful or fails, the message returned by the enrollment engine
appears at the top of the page in Campus Mobile.
Viewing Grades and GPA
The Grades function enables a student to view official final grades for any term for which grades have
been assigned to their classes.
Current Term GPA and Cumulative GPA also appear for each term available to the student. Students can
use arrows on screen to navigate between terms. Campus Mobile stores the student's view choices so
that when they return to the Grades feature it presents the most recent view. All grade and GPA data is
delivered to the Campus Mobile app through Enrollment Web Services.
Searching for Classes in Campus Mobile
This section discusses how to:
•
Filter the class search.
•
Enroll in a class.
•
Add a class to cart.
The Class Search function provides two methods for finding a class: a course title keyword search and a
subject browse.
Using the term selector, a student can pick from any available institution, career, or term that is set to
display in Class Search (the Display in Class Search attribute is set in the Term Values table in Campus
Solutions). When a student finds a class section that they are interested in, they can save the class to their
enrollment cart or add the class to their schedule. Campus Mobile stores the student's view choices so that
when they return to the Class Search feature it presents the most recent view. All data for Class Search
functionality is delivered through Enrollment Web Services.
Filtering the Class Search
The Class Filter page allows a student to filter their search results based on:
424
•
Time of day
•
Day of week
•
Campus
•
Mode of Delivery
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
•
Using Campus Mobile
Open Sections Only
When the filter is applied, subsequent searches use the filter settings until it is reset or the application is
shut down.
For information on class search filter settings and mappings, see Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in
My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1).
Enrolling in a Class
Enroll allows students to enroll in a class section after conducting a class search, provided the student has
met the requirements for enrollment.
Upon completion of an enroll transaction, Campus Mobile presents the student with the appropriate
success or error message at the top of the screen. The app presents delivered Campus Solutions
enrollment options (such as permission number, related components, and variable units) to the student as
required.
Adding a Class to Cart
Add to Cart allows students to add a class section to their enrollment cart after conducting a class search.
The add to cart function presents all enrollment options to the student as required. On completion of
an Add to Cart transaction, Campus Mobile presents the student with the appropriate success or error
message at the top of the screen.
Viewing and Managing the Enrollment Cart
The Enrollment Cart function allows students to view their cart for any terms for which they have an
active enrollment cart, remove classes from their cart, and add all classes from their cart. All data required
for the enrollment cart is provided through Enrollment Web Services.
The buttons across the top allow the student to view the class sections in their cart based on the status of
the class (Open, Wait List, or Closed). This is a quick way for a student to view the current status of the
class (which could change frequently) in anticipation of enrollment.
Removing a Class From Enrollment Cart
To remove a class from the cart, the student swipes across the class from left to right in order to make the
Delete button appear. Students then tap the Delete button to remove the class from their cart.
Editing Classes in Enrollment Cart
Edit Class allows a student to modify their enrollment cart entries. The enrollment options the student
previously selected appear and the student can either select new options or keep their prior selections and
resave the class to their cart.
Viewing All Classes on a Map
Tapping the Action button at the top right of the Enrollment Cart brings up an action menu that includes
the option to View on Map. View on Map presents all class sections in the student's schedule on the
campus map at the same time. All meeting patterns are represented simultaneously. Building locations
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
425
Using Campus Mobile
Chapter 31
that have more than one class section (or meeting pattern) associated with them are marked with a pin that
has multiple pinheads.
When you tap a pin, a popup window displays the class section information for that building. The student
can tap on the popup to open the Class Details page for the indicated class section.
Viewing To Do Items
The To Do function allows students to see their To Do list (Checklist items). The To Do items are listed in
chronological order by due date and can be filtered to show All, Overdue, Today, Soon, or Later. Each To
Do item includes the status, due date, description, and administrative function. When a student taps a To
Do item, they can view more details on the item including: comments, institution, contact, and contact’s
email.
Viewing Finances
The Finances function allows students to view a summary of their Student Financials account and, where
applicable, Financial Aid information including:
•
Account Balance – the total amount a student owes.
•
Next Payment Due – the amount a student owes on the next date they have a payment due.
•
Last Payment Received – the last payment received and applied to a student’s account.
•
If a student has pending Financial Aid, that pending aid is shown along with a link to view Financial
Aid Awards.
Viewing Financial Aid Awards
When a student taps Financial Aid Awards, they are presented with a view of their financial aid organized
by awards under an aid year. (Note that the display is by aid year or by award period depending on the
Self Service setting for display of Financial Aid.) If the student has more than one aid year on their
account, they can tap the Aid Year selector button at the top of the screen to select a different aid year.
For each award the student can see the amount offered and amount accepted, and where applicable
amount disbursed. Tapping on an award summary opens a breakdown of the award by term and from
there a view of disbursements for an award in a given term.
Managing a Student Profile
This section provides overviews of the Profile page and notifications.
426
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 31
Using Campus Mobile
Understanding Student Profile
In the profile, students can choose to enable SMS and email notifications and pick the cell number and
email address where they want to receive notifications. The profile function synchronizes with data stored
in Notification Preferences on the User Preferences page so that the values can be updated from either
Self Service or Campus Mobile. In the profile, students can also select a default institution, financial aid
year, and career. These defaults are synchronized with the user preferences in Campus Solutions Self
Service. Campus Mobile uses the defaults to determine which Institution and Career load first when
more than one exists for the student. The information needed for the Profile is delivered using the User
Preferences web service.
Viewing Applications
In Applications, students can view their admissions applications for future terms. The applications are
sorted by Institution and listed with details including program, career, term, and status. When the student
taps on a particular application they see more details including any remaining checklist items associated
with the application.
Making Contributions
In Contributions, the user can make a gift to their institution using a credit card. The Make a Gift function
allows the student to choose to which fund they would like to donate and any associated campaign or
appeal. The credit card payment uses your institution’s third-party hosted payment vendor. No PCI data is
stored in the Campus Mobile app.
Understanding Notifications
Notifications, which enhance the Campus Mobile application experience, are delivered in parallel with the
Campus Mobile product. Notifications are triggered by a particular event in relation to a student's record
in Campus Solutions and can be delivered to the student using SMS, email, or directly to the student's
smartphone. While SMS and email notifications can be delivered to a student's smartphone without
Campus Mobile being installed, this experience is enhanced in the following ways when the student uses
Campus Mobile:
•
Students can manage how they receive SMS and email notifications by using the Profile function of
Campus Mobile.
•
Students can receive and manage push notifications using their smartphone operating system. This
enables functionality such as tapping an alert or banner to launch Campus Mobile directly to the
relevant information.
Students can receive and manage push notifications using their smartphone when they have the Campus
Mobile application installed. When students first run Campus Mobile, they are prompted to allow or
deny push notifications from Campus Mobile. Users devices are associated with their account in Campus
Solutions using a unique identifier. Users can receive push notifications on multiple devices if they
have installed the Campus Mobile application on multiple devices and allowed for push notifications
on each device. A single device cannot have more than one user registered at a time; if a new user logs
into Campus Mobile on a device that has previously been registered for push notifications, the device is
disassociated with the original user and only associated with the new user.
For information on the setup required in Campus Solutions to enable push notifications, see Defining and
Setting Up Event Notifications for Campus Mobile.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
427
Using Campus Mobile
Chapter 31
The notifications associated with Campus Mobile are:
•
Final grade posted notification: This notification is triggered when a final grade is posted to a
student record. The notification template reads: “Dear [user], your final grade for {class} has been
posted.” As with all notifications, your institution can edit this message template. The trigger for
the notification is designed to capture any grade posting to a student’s record – whether through
enrollment, grade roster, or another process. Each grade posting triggers a new notification – they are
not batched into single messages when multiple grades are posted.
•
Move from waitlist to enrolled notification: This notification is triggered when a student is on a
waitlist and they are autoenrolled in a class when a seat becomes available. The notification reads:
“Dear [user], you have been enrolled in {class} from the waitlist.”
•
Enrollment Appointment is Open: This notification is triggered by a batch process that determines
which students have enrollment appointments opening the next calendar day. If a student has an
enrollment appointment opening on the next calendar day, the student receives a notification that
reads: “Dear {user}, your enrollment appointment [{appt}] will be open on {date} {time}.”
•
Checklist Has Been Updated: This notification is triggered by a batch process that determines whether
a student has any new or updated checklists or checklist items. The delivered notification template
reads: “Dear {user}, one or more items in your To Do list [{checklist}] has been created or updated.”
•
Negative Service Indicator (Hold) Has Been Added or Changed: This notification is triggered by a
batch process that determines whether a student has any new or updated negative service indicators.
The notification template reads: “Dear {user}, a hold has been assigned or changed regarding your
record.”
•
Negative Service Indicator (Hold) Has Been Removed: This notification is triggered by a batch
process that determines whether a student has had any negative service indicators removed. The
notification template reads: “Dear {user}, a hold has been removed from your record.”
See Campus Mobile Implementation Guide in My Oracle Support (ID 1548793.1).
These notifications are delivered as part of the Campus Solutions Notification Framework.
For information about the:
•
Campus Solutions Notification Framework, see Campus Solutions Application Fundamentals.
•
Triggers and templates for these notifications, see Defining and Setting Up Event Notifications for
Campus Mobile.
Related Links
Student Records
Understanding PeopleSoft Campus Self-Service Personal Information
428
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 32
Using Self-Service Student Activity Guides
Understanding Student Activity Guides
Refer to the following topic in the Campus Community documentation:
"Understanding Student Activity Guides" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Using Student Task WorkCenter
Students can use the Student Task WorkCenter page to complete a task (that is, activity guide instance)
assigned to them. The WorkCenter uses the delivered activity guide layout template (PTAILAYOUT)
to present a task. When the student accesses the task for the first time, the WorkCenter displays the first
action item page. If a student returns to a task that has already started, then the WorkCenter displays the
first non-completed action item page.
Note that students can also access this Workcenter from the To Do List section in the Student Center and
the Personal Data Summary page.
See Understanding Self-Service Student Center
See Displaying and Accessing Self-Service Personal Data
For information on the WorkCenter and activity guide icons and controls:
See PeopleTools: Applications User's Guide, Using PeopleSoft Application Pages, Using WorkCenter
Pages
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
429
Chapter 33
Using Self-Service Notifications
Managing Notification Preferences in Self Service
Self-service users can set and update their preferences for how they receive notifications.
Note: These preferences are ignored if the Override Notification Preferences check box has been selected
on the Notification Setup page. This capability is offered for situations where a recipient must be sent
a notification even if the recipient has not set their preferences, and particularly relates to Delegated
Access/New User Registration.
See "Configuring the Generic Templates for Notifications Framework" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions
9.2: Campus Community)
Related Links
"Managing Notification Preferences" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Page Used to Manage Notification Preferences in Self Service
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Notification Preferences
SS_CC_NTF_PREF
Self Service, Campus
Personal Information,
Notification Preferences
Set and update notification
preferences.
Setting and Updating Self-Service Notification Preferences
Access the Notification Preferences page (Self Service, Campus Personal Information, Notification
Preferences.
Self-service users can set their notification preferences, including which phone or email type should
receive notifications. For example, users can set their phone type to one which can receive an SMS
message.
Users must have at least one email or SMS type to be able to set a preference on these pages. If a phone or
email address does not exist, a Define Emails link or Define Phone Numbers link appears.
Using the Self-Service Notifications Center
Generally, self-service users should access their notifications via their preferred email client, their phone
for SMS messages and so on, but there may be situations where they need to check for notifications
independently of their preferred methods, such as if they lose their phone. The Notifications Center is
intended to meet that need and is located in the top level of the Self Service menu.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
431
Using Self-Service Notifications
Chapter 33
Note: Many Notifications Framework (NFK) consumer applications have extended the framework with
extra fields and functionality that are not presented in the Notifications Center. The consumer application
should be the first point of call in normal circumstances.
The Notifications Center presents all notifications sent to a user so that they can:
•
Review notifications by status (unread/unactioned or otherwise).
•
Review by time periods.
•
Search by specific dates.
No setup is required.
Related Links
"Using Admin Notifications" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Campus Community)
Page Used to View Notifications
Page Name
Definition Name
Navigation
Usage
Notification Center
SS_CC_NTF_CENTER
Self Service, Notification
Center
Self-service users view
notifications.
Viewing Notifications in the Notifications Center
Access the Notifications Center page (Self Service, Notification Center).
In the Notifications Center:
432
•
Each notification type has its own tab on which notifications of that type are shown.
•
The notifications are shown in descending date and time order, so that the newest one is at the top of
the list unless the user resorts the list by another column heading.
•
The interface is the same for the Email and Alerts tabs except that the Email tab includes a From
column and does not have a Status column.
•
The SMS tab displays the SMS message text directly on the grid along with the date when the
notification was received and importance of the notification.
•
The Worklist tab has an extra field called Life Left (Days) which shows the user how many days
remain until the deadline on the work list item expires. Similar to the SMS and Alerts tabs, the
Worklist tab does not include a From column.
•
The Push tab displays the name of the application which sent the notification, the importance, and the
message text.
•
The Announcements tab displays all announcements that are still active as of the current date. They
are displayed to all students. Unlike the other tabs, the Announcements tab cannot be filtered, and has
additional From Date and To Date columns showing the duration of the announcement. Similar to the
SMS tab, the announcement message is also directly displayed on the grid, so it has no Details link.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 33
•
Using Self-Service Notifications
The Notification Center page includes a a Status field for the Worklist tab and a Period field for
Email, SMS, Alert, Worklist and Push tabs which operate as follows:
Status: Select Unread or Read to filter the notifications. For worklist items these options equate to
Unactioned and Actioned. The Notifications Framework has several statuses, and they are currently
mapped to the options as follows:
•
A (Acknowledge) and W (Worked) equal Read/Actioned.
•
R (Ready), S (Selected), T (Timeout), and U (Unknown) equal Unread/Unactioned.
Period: Options are: 30 Days, (anything in the last 30 days), 7 Days, Today, and Search, which reveals
a search subpage to allow the user to set specific date ranges.
When the search results appear, the Period selector is highlighted in red to alert the user that the date
range is filtered.
•
The Details link takes the user to a detailed view of each notification.
The Notification Details page enables the user to view more detail about a particular notification. If
the notification is a worklist, this page includes the Importance and Life Left (Days) fields.
The Show Audit Info link accesses the Audit Information page which is used for diagnostic purposes
and would not be of use to a standard user.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
433
Chapter 34
(GBR) Using DLHE Self-Service Survey
Understanding DLHE Self-Service Survey
Students use the self-service DLHE Survey feature to enter and submit the survey to an academic
institution. Administrative users of an institution can use the feature to complete a survey on behalf of
a student. After the academic institution collects the survey responses, they use the Campus Solutions
HESA functionality to generate the DLHE return from the survey responses and then submit the return to
HESA.
Survey Statuses
Each student DLHE record has a status field (SSR_HE_SURV_STATUS) that indicates the stage an
individual student is in the survey process. The following table describes the statuses.
Status
Description
New
This status indicates that a student DLHE record has been
created, but no survey data has been stored. This status allows
an administrator or student to access the survey to input
responses.
Saved
A record with a status of New moves to Saved once survey
responses have been entered and the user clicks the Save
button. This status indicates that the survey is incomplete and
the user expects more information to be input. This status
allows access to the user to previously saved surveys.
Submitted
The user indicates that they have completed the survey and
wishes to submit their answers by clicking the Submit button.
Once a survey is in a status of Submitted, it is closed to the
student and only the administrator can add further responses.
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
435
(GBR) Using DLHE Self-Service Survey
Chapter 34
Status
Description
Coded
For administrative use only. This status is used to indicate
survey records that are complete. This indicates that the
record has been reviewed by an administrator and is ready for
extraction.
For surveys entered by administrators, the status would change
from either New or Saved to Coded once the manual survey
process has been undertaken and the survey was deemed
complete.
For surveys entered via student self-service, an administrator
would change Saved or Submitted surveys to Coded once
additional coding had been done and the survey was deemed
complete.
Excluded
For administrative users only. This status is used to indicate
records that should be excluded from the survey population.
The survey responses are retained.
Duplicate
For administrative users only. This status indicates records
should be excluded from the survey population. Survey
responses already recorded are retained and not deleted.
Full details of the DLHE survey and return are available on the HESA website.
Prerequisites
Before individuals can use the DLHE Self-Service Survey feature, you must:
•
Use the HESA Return Setup page to set up the DLHE survey.
•
Create the survey records for the students. To identify the eligible students for inclusion in the DLHE
survey and have the system automatically create survey records for the eligible students, run the
Identify DLHE Target Population process. You can run the Import POPDLHE Survey Target List
process to create the records for a survey. To manually create a student survey record, use the Survey
Management – Add a Survey page.
Related Links
"Setting Up a HESA Return" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
"Preparing for Generating DLHE Return" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records)
Entering and Submitting the DLHE Survey
Students can access the Enter Survey page by clicking the Enter DLHE Survey link on the Student Center
page (Self Service, Student Center).
436
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Chapter 34
(GBR) Using DLHE Self-Service Survey
The Enter DLHE Survey link appears on the Student Center page if all of the following conditions are
met:
•
A survey exists in the student DLHE record table.
•
The DLHE survey status is either New or Saved.
•
The current date falls between the Survey Start Data and Survey End Date defined for the qualifying
period associated with the survey record.
The Enter DLHE Survey link does not appear if either:
•
The DLHE survey status is Submitted, Coded, Excluded or Duplicate, or
•
The current date is outside the survey period defined by the Survey Start Date or Survey End Date.
Alternatively, students can access the Enter DLHE Survey link from the Survey Link Pagelet, if your
institution has deployed that pagelet. For more information, see "Using the Survey Link Pagelet"
(PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records).
After clicking the Enter DLHE Survey link, the user selects a survey if more than one survey exists for a
student on the Select Survey page and then proceeds to complete the sections A, B, C, D, E, and F.
Save
Click to save the record updates.
Previous
Click to navigate to the previous page in the survey.
Next
Click to navigate to the next page in the survey.
Administrative users can navigate to these self-service sections using the Survey Management page
(Navigate to Records and Enrollment, HESA Reporting, Destination of Leavers, Survey Management.
Then, on the Survey Management page, search for the survey and click the Enter Survey button for the
survey).
The system disables or enables sections dynamically based on the user responses to the questions. The
following list describes the validations:
•
For Question 1 on Section A, if the user selects response 1 (working full-time) or 2 (working parttime), then the system displays Section B for the user to provide additional details regarding the
student's paid and unpaid employment.
•
For Question 1 on Section A, if the user selects response 5 (full-time study) or 6 (part-time study),
then the system displays Section D for the user to provide additional details on further study, training
and research.
•
For Your Education Summary on the Section A page, if the student completed a qualification giving
newly qualified teacher status, then the system displays Section C for the user to provide additional
details regarding their teaching experience.
•
Section E concerning the student's overall Higher Education experience is enabled for all surveys.
After completing the sections, the user submits the survey. At any time, the user can save the survey, and
return later for completing and submitting the survey.
The following table describes the sections:
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
437
(GBR) Using DLHE Self-Service Survey
Chapter 34
Section
Used for
Section A
Specifying whether the student is employed or undertaking
further study, training or research on the census date.
Section B
Entering employment details.
Section C
Entering information concerning teaching experience.
Section D
Entering information concerning further study, training or
research.
Section E
Entering information concerning the student's overall higher
education experience.
Section F
Reviewing the status of each survey section and submitting the
survey.
This section displays the Incomplete Questions list where the
asterisk (*) indicates the required questions.
See "Configuring HESA" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2:
Student Records) for information about the Allow incomplete
submission and Require mandatory questions check boxes.
For more information on how administrative users use the DLHE self-service pages, see "Adding,
Viewing, and Updating Surveys" (PeopleSoft Campus Solutions 9.2: Student Records).
438
Copyright © 1988, 2017, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising